Você está na página 1de 288

YASNAC LX3

CNC SYSTEM FOR TURNING

APPLICATIONS

Before initial operation read these instructionsthoroughly, and retain for future reference.

YASKAVW

This character

manual

is display for

primarily (basic) YASNAC

intended to LX3 give

with operators

CRT in and

structions operation. This features are of marked your

programming,

manual of YASNAC with YASNAC manual.

applies LX3. a dagger. LX3,

to

the The For

basic optional the the

and

optional features

specifications machine tool

refer

to

builders

586-175

YASNAC

LX3

OPERATORS

STATION

PREFACE
When reading this manual keep in mind that the information contained herein does not cover every possible contingency which might be met during the operation. Any operation not described in this manual control, should not be attempted with the TJnless otherwise specified, of apply to the description sfiown in this manual. Feed Function Selection: the following programming rules examples

G99

(mm/rev)

The functions and performance as NC machine are determined by a combination of machine and the NC control. For operation of your NC machine, the machine tool builders manual shall take prl ority over this manual. The illustration of machine control station be used for your reference in understanding function. For detailed array of operators and names, refer to machine tool builders manual. should the devices

Reference Zero Point (Return to reference matic return) : + Absolute Work Zero Point: Zero in MM

zero

by

manual

and

auto-

+ Point +?

Coordinate

Dimensions:

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. INTRODUCTION
2. 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 2,8 3. 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 4. PROGRAMMING Tape Format 1 and 7 Rate Function (T-Function) Functions Functions PUNCHING 148 148 150 Handling 150 STATION 151 Lamps 155 156 NC Data into APPENDIX 4 151 WITH 6.10 6.11 10 (S-Function) 14 (M-Function) (G-Function) 148 6.7 Manual Operation Operation 216 Automatic Operation Interrupting Automatic 19 23 6.5 6.6 NC TAPE 13 sequence Number 6 1 1 5. 5.1 5,2 6. 6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4 MACHINE Switching Operation OPERATION Inspection Turning Manual CONTROL Units STATION on the Control 198 213 on Power 213 187 Station 187

procedure PROCEDURE before on Power Operation

Program Coordinate Rapid

Number Words

Turning 213 213

Traverse

spindle-Speed TOO I Function Miscellaneous Preparatory

Preparation Compensation Preparations Operation

for Stored Lead Screw Error and Stored Stroke Limit 214 for in Tape Automatic and Operation Mode 214 215

Memory

Tape

code

Programming NC NC Tape Tape

6.8 6.9

in MD I Mode

216

MD I Operation Operation 216 Preparation Turning 1 2 3 off for

Interrupting

. Automatic
off Power 217

STANDARD NC CRT CHARACTER Pushbuttons, Power Display Loading Memory Tape Edit ON/OFF and Part (in)

OPERATORS DISPLAY Key S, and Operation

Turning 217

Power

4.1 4.2 u. 3 4.4

APPENDIX APPENDIX APPENDIX

LIST LIST

OF SETTING OF PARAMETER

NUMBERS NUMBERS ERROR

A1 A? COM-

Writing

Operation and

Programs 174 178

STORED LEADSCREW PENSATION A25 LIST OF STANDARD PUT SIGNALS A26 LIST LIST OF OF ALARM DATA

lNPUT/OUT-

4.5 4.6 4.7

Verifying 180

APPENDIX NC Data Output APPENDIX

5 6

CODES A54

A35

Part Program and Operations 183 Summary Operations of Storing 186

4.8

and

Editing

INDEX
Subject A Chapter Par.

Page

ABSOLUTE AND INCREMENTAL INPUT S............................ 2 ABSOLUTE/INCREMENTAL PROGRAMl,41NG (G90, G91) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Acceleration and Deceleration of Rapid Traverse and Manual Feed .......................................$......2 ......................................... 4 ADDING PART PROGRAMS ADDRESS KEYS ................................................... 4 Address Search ....................................................4 ALARM CODE (ALM) DISPLAY ..................................... 4 Alarm Code Display ................................................ 4 Alarm Number of Microprograms ..................................2 Argument Designation.............................................. 2 AUTO MODE HANDLE OFFSET ..................................... 5 AU TO MOD E HANDLE OFFSET SWITCHt ...................44......5 AUTOMATIC ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION ........0..0.....2 AUTOMATIC COORDINATE SYSTEM SETTING+ ..................... 5 AutomaticNose RFunction .........................................2 AU TOMATIC OPERATION INMDI h40DE ...........................6 AUTOMATIC RETURN TO REFERENCE POINT (G28) ................ 2 Automatic Threading Cycle (G76) ...................................2 AutomaticWritingintothe Tool CoordinateMemory ................. 5 Automatic Writingintothe Work CoordinateSystem ShiftLIemory..................................................5

........ 2.3.5 . . . .
. . . . . . . . 2.8.31 ..

8
146

........ 2.4.3. . . . 12 ... 4.6.4 .,. . 181 . 4.1.4 . . . . 153 ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ 4.3.3.4 4.3.9 -.O.. 4.3.9.1 -.. 2.8.23.102.8.23.2 . 161 172 172 88 68

5.2.7 ---- 212 5.1<28 ---- 195 2.4.3 ..... 12 5.2.2 ..... 199 2.8.19.1 .. 56 6.8 ....... 216 2.8.11 .... 35 2.8.25.8 . 109 5.2.3.3 . 203

........ 5.2.3.4 . 204

BUFFER REGISTER ................................................ 2 ........ 2.1.5 .. 6 BUFFERING FUN CTION(M93, M92)t ..............................-2 ........ 2.7.3 . 19 CANNED CYCLES (G90, G92, G94) ................................ 2 CHECKING REGISTERED PART PROGRAM NUMBER ................. 4 CircularArc Multiple Cornering (G112).............................2 CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION (G02, G03) ........................... 2 CIRCULAR PATH hfODE ON/OFF ON TOOL RADIUS COMPENSATION (G97, L496)+ ................................................. 2 COMMAND DATA DISPLAY ..........................................4 Command Data Display .............................................4 Command Pulse AccumulationRegisterDisplay (COMMAND PULSE) ........................................... 4 Conditionsfor the Automatic Nose R Compensation Function to be Enabled ................................................ 2 Conditionsof the Specifications to Perform FS Editing.............. 5 Considerations and Remarks for Macro Programs ................... 2 CONSTANT DISPLAY .............................................. CONSTANT SURFACE SPEED CONTROL (G96, G97)t ............... Control Comma~ ds ................................................. CoordinateSystem Setting (G50 X_. Z_. ) ........................ COORDINATE WORD S.............................................. COORDINATE WORDS .............................................. CORNERING (Gil, G12)+ ........................................... CRT CHARACTER DISPLAY ........................................ CURRENT POSITION DISPLAY ..................................... CURSOR KEYS .................................................... CUTTING DEPTH OVERRIDE CYCLE START PUSHBUTTON 4 2 2 5 2 2 2 4 4 4 ........ ........ ........ ........ 2.8.26 4.6.1 ..... 2,8.30.2 .. 2.8.4 ..... 116 180 143 28

........ 2.7.4 ..... 20 ........ 4.3.2 ..... 157 ........ 4.3.2.1 ... 158 ........ 4.3.4.9.. 165

........ 2,8.19.2.. 56 ........ 5.1.31.7.. 198 ........ 2.8.23.9 . 84 ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ....... ........ ........ 4.3.1 ..... 2.8.27 ..-. 2.8.23,6-. 5.2.3,5... 2.3 ....... 2.3.1 ..... 2.8.7 ..... 4,1.2 ....4,3.4 ..... 4.1.8 ..... 156 123 81 205 7 7 31 152 162 154

SWITCHt FOR G71 AND G72 .......... 5 ........ 5.1.29 .... 195 AND LAMP .......................... 5 ........ 5.1.2 .... 188 ........ 4.1.5.... 153 ........ 2.1.3 ...,. 6 ........ 4.6.5 ..... 182 .,.,.... 4.3.9.3 ... 173 ........ 2,8.23.8 ,. 83 ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ 4.3 ....... 4.3.2.2 ... 4.3.2.3 ... 4.3,3.3 ... 4.6.2 ..... 156 158 159 161 180

DATA KEYS .......................................................4 ................................... 2 DECIMAL POINT PROGRAMMING DELETING PART PROGRAM BLOCKS ............................... 4 Display and Deletingof RegisteredProgram Number (PROGRAM NO. TABLEDR )t ................................. 4 Display and Write of Local and Common Variables .................. 2 ............................... 4 DISPLAY AND WRITING OPERATION Displayof Subprogram Run Status (SUB PROG . NESTING) ......... 4 Displayof Tool Life Control Use Status (TOOL LIFE CONTROL) .... 4 Display in EDIT Mode .............................................. 4 DISPLAYING AND CHECKING STORED PART PROGRAMS ........... 4

INDEX
Subject

(Conttd)
Chapter

Par.

Page 17o 171 168 166 172

DISPLAYING AND WRITING PARAMETERS .......................... Displayingand WritingParameters ................................. DISPLAYING AND WRITING SETTING DATA (SETTING) ............ DISPLAYING AND WRITING TOOL OFFSET DATAt ................. DISPLAYING STATUS INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNALS ................... Displayin Memory Run Mode (PROGRAM DISPLAY LOCK/MACHINE LOCK SWITCH DRY RUN SWITCH ...................... DWELL (G04).o.....................o.. .. MEM]) ................... .......................... .......................... ..........................

4 4 4 4 4 4 5 5 2 4 4 5 3 5 2 5 2 2 2 2 5 2 2 2 5 2 5 4

........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........

4.3.7 ..... 4,3.7.3 ... 4,3.6 ..... 4.3.5 ..... 4.3.8 .....

4.3.3.2 ... 160 5.1.19 .... 193 5.1.18 .... 193 2.8.5 ..... 29 4.6 ........ 4.1.10 .... 5.1,22 .... 3.1,2 ..... 5.1.4 ..... 180 154 194 148 189

EDIT ................................... .......................... EDIT KEYS ............................. .......................... EDIT LOCK SWITCH ............................................... EIA/ISO AUTO RECOGNITION ...................................... .................................. EMERGENCY STOP PUSHBUTTON ERROR DETECT OFF POSITIONING (G06) .............4............ Example of FS Editing ............................................. Example of High-speed M Function Processing ...................... Exercisesof Macro Programs ......................................

2.8.2.2 ... 27 5.1.31.6 .. 197 2.7.8.4 ... 23 2.8.23.11.. 89 2.8.26,3 .. 121 2.4.2 ..... 10 5.1.3 ..... 188 2,8.28 .... 124 2.4.2.2 ... 12 2.4.2.1 ... 5.1.12 ... 2.8.25 .5... 5.1.31 ..... 4.1.3 ..... 11 192 106 196 152

Facing Cycle B (G94) .............................................. .......................... FEED FUNCTION (F- AND E-FUNCTION) FEED HOLD PUSHBUTTON AND LAMP ............................. FEED/MINUTE AND FEED/REVOLUTION SWITCHOVER .............. Feed Per Minute (G98 Mode) ....................................... Feed Per Revolution(G99 Mode) ................................... ........................... FEEDRATE OVERRIDE CANCEL SWITCH FinishingCycle (G70) ............................................. FS AUTOMATIC EDITING FUNCTION ............................... FUNCTION KEYS ..................................................

Functions ......................................................... 2 ........ 2.6.5.2 ... 17 Functions ......................................................... 5 ........ 5.1.31 .3... 196 G General General General General GENERAL ........................................................... ........................................................... ........................................................... ........................................................... PROGRAM FORM ......................................... 2 5 5 5 3 5 5 2 2 ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ 2,8.25 .1... 5.1.8.2 ... 5,1.31 .1... 5.2.3 .10... 3.2.2 ...... 94 190 196 206 148 195 208 147 108

G50 POINT RETURN SWITCHt ..................................... .............................................. G50 POINT RETURNt GROOVE WIDTH COMPENSATION (G150, G151)*..................... Grooving in X-Axis (G75) .......................................... H

........ 5.1.24 .... -------5.2.4 ..... ........ 2.8,32 .... ........ 2.8.25 .7...

HANDLE AXIS SELECT SWITCH+ ................................s.. 5 ....<... ............ 5 HANDLE DIAL+ (MANUAL PULSE GENERATOR) HANDLE DIALS FOR SIMULTANEOUS CONTROL OF .......................................... 5 UP TO TWO AXESt Handle Interpolation Function ...................................... 5 ........................................ 2 HIGH-SPEED M FUNCTION Improved Multiple Repetitive Cycle Function........................ INCH/METRIC DESIGNATION BY G CODE (G20, G21)t ............. Input/Output ...................................................... I/ OChannel ...................................................... .............. INPUTTING SETTING DATA AND PARAMETER DATA ............... INPUTTING TOOL OF OFFSET DATA INTO MEMORY Input Unit andl O Times Input Unit ............................... INSPECTION BEFORE TURNING ON POWER ........................ ................................. INTERLOCK INPUT (INTERLOCK) InternalToggle Switches f ......................................... INTRODUCTION 2 2 5 2 4 4 2 6 5 4

........ 5.1.6...... 189 -------5.1.5 ----- 189 ..-.-... 5.1.8 ..4-. 189 .....+.. 5,1,8 .1---- 190 ........ 2.7.8 ..... 22 ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ 2.8.25.10.. 115 2.8.8 ...... 33 5.1.31 .2... 196 2.7.8.1 ... 22 4.4.5 ..... 178 4.4.4 ..... 2.3. 3.1.... 6,1 ....... 5.1.23 .... 4.3.6.2 ... 177 7 213 195 169 1

................................................... 1 .....................

J K

JOG FEEDRATE SWITCH AND FEEDRATE OVERRIDE SWITCH ....... 5 ........ 5,1.10 ..... 191 .................... 5 ........ 5.1.9 ..... 191 JOG PUSHBUTTONS AND RAPID PUSHBUTTON KEEPING OF NC TAPE ............................................ 3 ........ 3.4.2 ..... 150

INDEX
Subject

(Centcl)
Chapter

Par. ........ ........ ........ ........ ........

Page 6 7 2; 4

........................................... LABEL SKIP FUNCTION LEAST INPUT INCREMENT AND LEAST OUTPUT INCREMENT ...... Least Output Increment ........................................... LINEAR INTERPOLATION (GOl)t ................................... LIST OF ADDRESS CHARACTERS AND FUNCTION CHARACTERS .. LIST LIST LIST LIST LIST OF OF OF OF OF

2 2 2 2 2

2.1.4 ..... 2.3.3 ..... 2.3.3.2 ... 2.8.3 ..... 2.1.2 .....

ALARM CODE .......................................AppENDIX 5................A-35 DATA ...............................................APPENDIx 6 ................A-54 ................................................ 2 ........ 2.8.1 ..... 23 G CODES ..............................APPEND IX . ............... A-7 PARAMETER NUMBERS SETTING NUMBERS ..................................APPENDIX 1 ................ A-1 4 ................ A-?.&

LIST OF STANDARD INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNALS .........-......APPENDIX LIST OF TAPE CODE ...................................... LOADING PART PROGRAM TAPE INTO MEMORY ............ LOADING PART PROGRAMS AND NC DATA INTO MEMORY ( LOADING PART PROGRAM SBYMDI ....................... M MACHINE CONTROL STATION ............................. Macro Program Call Commands ..................................... 2 MAC REPROGRAMS (G65ANDG67) ................................ 2 MaintenanceHistory Display (MAINTENANCE) .......................4 MAKING ADDITION TO A PART PROGRALf ......................... 4 MANUAL MANUAL MAN UAL MANUAL MANUAL ABSOLUTE SWITCH ...................................... INTERRUPTION POINT RETURN ShITCH ................. INTERRUPTION POINT RETURN* ......................... OPERATION *...... ....................................... OPERATION INTERRUPTING AU TOhfATIC OPERATION .... 5 5 5 6 6 5 5 5 2 2 2 2 6 5 4 4 5 2 5 4 2 4 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 2 4 5 4 2

........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........

2.8.23.1 .. 66 2.8.23 .... 66 4.3.9.5 .... 174 4.4.2 ..... 176 5.1.21 ..... 5.1.25 ..... 5.2.5 ..... 6.3 ....... 6.7 ....... 5.1.7 ..... 5.1.14 .... 5.2.1 ..... 2.3.4 ...-. 2.8.21 .-.. 194 195 209 213 216 189 192 198 6!

MANUAL PULSE hlULTIPLY SELECT SWITCH+ ...................... hfANUAL REFERENCE POINT RETURN SWITCH . .................... MANUAL RETURN TO REFERENCE POINT .......................... L4AXIMUM PROGRAMhfABLE DIMENSIONS ........................... MAXIMUM SPINDLE-SPEED SETTING (G50)+ ...........4............ M CODES FOR INTERNAL PROCESSING (G99 TO M109) ............. MCODES FOR STOP (MOO, MO1, M02, M30) ........................ k4DIOPERATION INTERRUPTING AU TOhiATIC OPERATION ......... MEASURED WORKPIECE VALUE DIRECT INPUT + .................... MEMDATA (MEMORY DATA) KEYS ................................ Message Display (ALARM)t ........................................ M-FIJNCTION LOCK SWITCH (AUXILIARY FUNCTION LOCK) ....... MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTIONS (M-FUNCTION) ...................... MODE SELECT SWITCH ............................................ MODIFYING PART PROGRAM BLOCKS ............................. M3-DIGIT BCD OUTPCTt Multi-block Writingand MULTIPLE CORNERING MULTIPLE REPETITI\E MULTI-START THREAD N NC NC NC NC NC TAPE TAPE TAPE TAPE TAPE .......................................... Operationin MDI Mode ..................... (Gill, G112)+ ............................. CYCLES (G70 TO G76)t ................... CUTTING (G32)t ..........................

2.7.2 ----- 19 2.7.1 ..... 19 6.9 ....... 216 5.2.3 ..... 199 4.1.11 ....- 154 172 194 19 187 180

........ 4.3.9.2 ... .......,5.1.20..... ........ 2.7 ....... ........ 5.1.1 ..... ........ 4.6.3 ..... ........ ........ ........ ........ ........

2.7.7 ..... 21 4,3.3.1 ... 159 2.8.30 ..... 134 2.8.25 ..... 94 2.8.16 ..... 41 150 150 150 150 148

.......................................................... CHECK .................................................. .............................................. HANDLING ................................................. PUNCH PUNCHING ..............................................

........ 3.3........ ........ 3.3.3 ..... ........ 3.4 ....... ........ 3.3.2 ..... ..................... ........ ........ ........ ........ ........

NEW COORDINATE SYSTEM SETTING FUNCTION ................... NEXT KEY ........................................................ New Tool SetterFunction .......................................... No. of Servo Lag Pulses Display (ERROR PULSE) ................. Notes ............................................................. NOTES WHEN USING THE CONVENTIONAL G50T****FUNCTION

2.6.5 ..... 17 4.1.6 ..... 153 5.2.3.9 ... 206 4.3.4.8 ... 165 2.7.8.3 ... 23 19

.... 2 ........ 2.6.6 .....

OffsetCalculation of Automatic Nose R Compensation Approach and Relief.................................................... Offset Screen Display ............................................. Operation.......................................................... Operation Commands ............................................... Operation Expression for CoordinateSystem Setting................

2 5 5 2 2

........ ........ ........ ........ ........

2.8.19.3 .. 57 5.2.3 .8.... 205 5.1,8.3 ... 190 2.8.23.5 .. 79 2.6.5.3 ... 18

Iv

INDEX
Subject

(Centd)
Chapter

Par.

Page 215 196 198 213 174

OPERATION IN TAPE AND MEMORY MODE ......................... OperationProcedure ............................................... .......................................... OPERATION PROCEDURE .......................................... OPERATION PROCEDURE Operation Time Display ............................................ OPTIONAL BLOCK SKIP (/1-/9)+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OPTIONAL BLOCK SKIP SWITCH .................................. ORG (ORIGIN) KEYS .............................................. OTHER M CODES .................................................. OUTPUTTING PART PROGRAM TO PAPER TAPE ................... OUTPUTTING SETTING IPARAMETER DATA TO PAPER TAPE ...... OUTPUTTING TOOL OFFSETS TO PAPER TAPE .................... Overview ......................................................... Overview of L4acroProgram Body ..................................

6 5 5 6 4 2 5 4 2 4 4 4 2 2

........ 6.6 ....... ........ 5.1.31.4 .. ........ 5.2 ....... ..................... ........ 4.3.9.4 ... ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ............... ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........

2.2.3 ..... 7 5.1.17 .... 193 4.1.9 ..... 154 2.7.6 ..... 21 4.7.1 ..... 183 4.7.3 ..... 184 4.7.2 ..... 184 2.6.5.1 ... 17 2.8.23.3 .. 69 4.1.7 ...... 3,3.1 ..... 4.3.7.1 ... 4.3.7.2 ... 2.7.8.2 ... 5.2. 3.2 o4.7 ....... 2.8.25.4 .. 2.8.25.6 .. 4.3.4,4 ..4.3.4.2 ... 4.3.4.1 ... 5,2.3.6 ... 4.3.4,3 ... 2.8.2 ..... 2.8.2.1 ... 5.1.30 ..... 4.2 ....... 4.1.1 ..... 2.8.25 .9... 153 150 171 171 22 203 183 104 107 163 163 162 205 163 24 24 196 155 152 112

PAGE KEYS ....................................................... 4 ..................................................~.. 3 PAPER TAPE Parameter of Bit Display Format ................................... 4 Parameter of Decimal DisplayFormat ............................... 4 Parameters ........................................................ 2 Parameters ........................................................ ........... PART PROGRAM AND NC DATA OUTPUT OPERATIONS Pattern Repeating (G73) .......................................... Peck Drilling in Z-axis (G74) ...................................... Position........................................................... Position [ABSOLUTE] .............................................. Position[EXTERNAL I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Position(EXTERNAL) O Setting.................................. Position [INCREMENT] ............................................. POSITION (GOO, G06) ............................................. Positioning (GOO) .................................................. ................................ POSITION STORED PUSHBUTTON+ ....................................... POWER ON/OFF OPERATION POWER ON IOFF PUSHBUTTONS ................................... Precautionsin Programming G70 through G76 ...................... 5 4 2 2 4 4 4 5 4 2 2 5 4 4 2

PREPARATION FOR STORED LEADSCREW ERROR COMPENSATION AND STORED STROKE LIMITt ............................... 6 PREPARATION FOR TURNING OFF POWER ....................... 6 PREPARATIONS FOR AUTOMATIC OPERATION ..................... 6 PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS (G-FUNCTION) ........................ 2 PROCESS SHEET ............................. ..,.......-.--3 .................................................... PRoGRAMh41NG .................................................... PROGRAMMING PROGRAhIMING OF ABSOLUTE ZERO POINT (G50) ................. PROGRAM MIRROR IhiAGE (G68, G69)t ............................ ................................................ PROGRAM NUMBER ...................... PROGRAM NUMBER AND SEQUENCE NUMBER PROGRAM RESTART SWITCHt ..................................... PROGRAM RESTARTt .......-..........~.......................... Program Return ................................................... PUSHBUTTONS, KEYS, AND LAMPS ...............................
R

........ 6.4 ....... 214 ........ 6.10 ....- 217 ........ 6.5 ......-. 214 ....... 2.8 -------- 23 --- 3.2.1-- 148 ..................... 1 ........ 3.2 .....- 148 ........ 2.8.20 .--4 61 ........ 2.8.24 .... 92 ........ 2.2,1 ..... 6 ........ 2.2 ....... ........ 5.1.26 .... ....---- 5.2.6 -........ 4.3.4.5 ... ....... ...$.... 4,1 6 195 209 164 151

2 3 2 2 2 2 5 5 4 4

RADIUS PROGRAMMING FOR CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION (G22, G23)t .................................""-" """---"""-""2 RAPID TRAVERSE RATE ........................................... 2 RAPID TRAVERSE RATE.... ....................................... 2 RAPID TRAVERSE RATE OVERRIDE SWITCH ....................... 5 REFERENCE POINT CHECK (G27) .................................. 2 ........................................ 5 REFERENCE POINT LAMPS Registration of Macro Programs .................................... 2 RESET KEY ..........................................-.....O------4 RETURN FROM REFERENCE pOINT (G29) .......................... 2

2.8.9 --- 33 .....s.. 2.4 ....... 10 ...~....2.4.1 ..... 10 ........ 5.1.11 .... 192 ........ 2.8.10 -... 34 ........ 5,1.15 .... 193 ........ 2.8.23.7... 83 .-o-----4.1.12 ..-.. 155 ........ 2.8.12 ..... 36

INDEX
Subject

(Centd)
Chapter

Par.

Page

2ND REFERENCE POINT RETURN (G30)t .....0....4................ ............................................... SEQUENCE NUMBER SettingData of Bit Display Format ................................. SettingData of Decimal Display Format ............................ S4-DIGIT PROGRAMMING At ....................................... S4-DIGIT PROGRAMMING B+ ....................................... SIMULTANEOUS CONTROLLABLE AXES ............................ SINGLE BLOCK SWITCH ........................................... SKIP FUNCTION (G31)t ........................................... SUBROUTINE PROGRAM (M98, M99) ...............o..... ........... Spindle Counter ................................................... SPINDLE SPEED OVERRIDE SWITCHt .............................. SPINDLE-SPEED FUNCTION (S-FUNCTION) ........................ ................ SPLICING NC TAPES ............................... S2-DIGIT PROGRAMMING (SPECIAL SPECIFICATIONS) .............

2 2 4 4 2 2 2 5 2 2 4 5 2 3 2

........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........

2.8.13 ...... 37 2.2.2 ..... 7 4.3.6.1 ... 168 4.3.6.3 ... 169 2.5,2 ..... 13 2.5,3 ..... 14 2.3.2 ..... 7 5,1,16 .... 193 2.8.14 .... 37 2.7.5 ..... 20 4.3.4.7 .... 165 5.1,13 .... 192 2.5 ........ 13 3.4.1 ..... 150 2.5.1 ..... 13

STANDARD NC OPERATORS STATION WITH CRT CHARACTER DISPLAY .................................. 4 ..................... 151 Stock Removal in Facing (G72) .................................... 2 ........ 2.8.25 .3... 101 Stock Removal in Turning (G71) ................................... 2 ........ 2.8.25 .2... 95 .................APPENDIX 3 ................A-25 STORED LEAD SCREIi ERROR COMPENSATION STORED STROKE LIMIT (G36-G39) ................................ 2 ........ 2.8.18 ..... 44 SWITCHING
T

UNITS ON THE CONTROL

STATION

................... 5 ........ 5,1 ....... 187 2 ........ 2.1 ....... 2 ........ 2.1.1 ..... 2 ........ 2.8.19.4... 2 ........ 2.6 ........ 2 ........ 2.6.1 ...... 1 1 61 14 14 14 15 17 10

TAPE FORMAT .................................... . ......... ....... TAPE FORMAT ..................................................... The G40 GO1 X_ ZI K; Command Cancel Function is Also Available in the AutomaticNose R Function .............. TOOL FUNCTION (T-FUNCTION) .................................. ......................................... T 4-DIGIT PROGRAMMING TOOL TOOL

OFFSET MEMORY t........................................... 2 ........ 2.6.2 ..... POSITION OFFSETS ......................................... 2 ........ 2.6,3 ..... COORDINATE SYSTEM SHIFTt .............................. 2 ........ 2,6.4 ..... ............................ 2 ........ 2.3.6 .....

W x

WORK

X-AXIS DIAMETER /RADIUS SWITCHING

1. INTRODUCTION
YASNAC LX3, is a combination microprocessors ing our modern to provide the IIultraspeed dual processor CNC . Part program memory can be extended to a

of two high-performance 16-bit Incorporatrunning in parallel. system technique, it is designed highest lathe performance.

maximum of 320 meters . Its data input loutput interface is available with FACIT, RS232C and, in addition, RS422 serial interface capable of high-speed long distance transmission. . Programming tool radius is further compensation facilitated function, by improved G 50work

The dual processor CNC system drastically reduces the data processing time to meet highBlock-to-block stop time despeed cutting. creased by the use of high-speed buffer function and buffering function. . Enhanced cutting capability includes a maximum E

coordinate system setting, anglespecified line ar interpolation, and combined beveling/rounding function. . The servo function uses a drastically miniaturized and low-noise, newly transistorized PWM control unit and a high-performance DC servo motor. The position feedback is available standard pulse generator (PG) system the inductosyn-applied complete closed system. with the and, loop

of 24 meters /rein feed command, precise feed command, 500-milimeter lead thread cutting, continuous thread cutting, multiple thread cutting, and variable pitch thread cutting. To meet FMS trends, program interrupt function, tool life control, user macro, tool set error correction, stored stroke limit per tool, and other functions can be installed.

2. PROGRAMMING
2.1

TAPE FORMAT

2. 1.1 TAPE FORMAT A variable block format conforming to JIS# B 6313 is used for YASNAC LX3. Numerals Table 2.1 shows the tape format. following the address characters in Table 2.1 indicate the programmable number of digits. Note: The decimal point may be omitted in For making a program actual programming. including decimal points, refer to 2. 1.3 Decimal Point Programming. The leading zeros can be suppressed for all address codes. Plus signs need not be programmed, but all minus signs must be programmed. In the manual, EOB code in a program example is represented by a semicolon (;) . In actual programming, CR (EIA code) or LF /NL (1S0 code ) should (;). be used instead of the semicolon

L 1EXAMPLE

Down to thtro

dec]mal

places

,n mm or inches

Four d[glts of

Integer

Sign

.Oodnaeadd=s
(X, ZI, K )

# Japanese

Industrial

Standard

2, 1.1 TAPE FORMAT (Centd)


Table 2.1 Tape Format

Metric No. Address Metric Input

output . ~Inch Input Metric

Inch Output Input ~ Inch Input i B: O: Basic Option

1 .2

Prcgram No

04
I -_ N4

04
N4

~
-7

B --B

I Sequence G-Function

No.

G3 .=-

G3 . . ~ a_53 a-44

Coordinate Wmd a: X, Z, 1, K, U, W, R

(a-

53)

(a-44)

Feed/rein

F 50

I +

~~

-;42 .+-

---.___B_

F32

F24

*-

Feed/rev .

and

Thread Lead

-~ E34 ! E26

\ -~- ~

F 42

F 24

B ~ B

E44

E!26

S2

I -.

S2 . +

S-Function

54

S4 T(2+I) -. T(2 +2)


.

0 B 0
..

T(2+I) 8
T-Function

T(2 +2) 9
M-Function M3 --~r

M3

10
11

Dwel I -. Program No. Designation

U (P)
.P4

53

_+_

(P)53

.
12 Sequence No. Designation Q (P) 4

L....

__

4--13 No. of Repetitions Angle Designation ~ Line Angle Designation ~ Thread for Straight L8 ...+ 14 A (B) 33 I .

Q ) 4 L8

---~ B .

A (B) 33

for Multiple B3

..
B3

0 , o

15

Notes: 1. Inch/Metric 2. Inch/Metric output is set by setting parameter *6007 input is set by setting (#?6001Do). or feed/rev can be switched by G 98, G 99 D3,

3. F codes for feed/rein

Table

2.2

List of Program

Commands

Metric Address Metric Input

Output --

Inch Output

I
1-9999
1-9999

Inch Input

Metric Input

Inch Input

Program No. O

1-9999

Sequence

No. N

1 9999

G function G Coordinate Addressl X, Z, 1, K, U, W, R

0-199

0-199 I

* 99999.999

mm 1

? 3937.0078

in

Feedfmin

1 24000

mmlmi n

~ 0.01 944.88

in/rein ~:=

F Feed/rev and Thread Lead E

0.01-500.00

mmlrev

0.0001-19.6850

in/rev

0.01 1270.00

mm/rev

0.0001 50.00CQ inlrev

0.0001500,0CK)0 mmlrev

o,CKD30419,685030 in/rev

ooo~ 1270.0000 mmlrev

o,oooolo_ 50 .00Ci)OO inhev

S2
S-f unction

o-99

o-99

I
T-function

S4
T3

0-9999

0-9999

o-999
o-9999

L
M-function Dwell U, P Program No. Designation

T4

I I
I sec

o-999

o-9999

o-999

0-999

0.001 99999.999

0.001 99999.999

sac

1-9999

19999

Sequence

No. Designation

19999

1 9999

No. of Repetitions

1-99999999

1 99999999

Angle Designation Angle Designation

for Straight Lin# for Multiple Thread

O ? 360.~0

0- t360.000

0-360

0360

Note : For angle designation

of included angle for G 76, see 2.8.26.8

Automatic Threading

Cycle (G 76).

2.1.2

LIST

OF ADDRESS

CHARACTERS

AND

FUNCTION Table 2.3

CHARACTERS Address Characters B: O: Basic Optional

Address

Meaning

Angle designation for GOl and Gill,

includfxf angle for G76

o .
o .

-.
B Spindle shift angle Ol multiple thread, angle designation for multiple cornering

User macro character

D Depth of cut and number of cutting cycles for G 71 to G 76 .. E Specifications for precise feed and precise lead for cutting for normal feed and normal lead for cutting +G Preparatmy function (G-function) I._ H User macro chaacter

o
0

~.

B B . o

Specifications

. I X-component of arc center, canned cycle parameter, beveling value (radius value) I canned cycle p~ameter, .beveling value + ~ B, O .

User macro character

o
B, O

Z-component K Incremental

of arc center,

value of variable lead thread

. B, O . B

Number of subprogram repetition,

G 13 to G 16 angle and coordinate ..

Miscellaneous

function

(M-function)

N o

Sequence

number . t

I \ ~ I

B B

Program number

Dwell,

canned cycle starting sequence -

number, program number, user macro number - number

B, O

Q F?

Subprogram starting sequence

number, canned cycle ending sequence

B, O - . . B, O . B

Radius of arc, rounding value, tool radius value

s
T

Spindle function

(S-function),

maximum spindle revolution

Tool function

(T-function),

tool coordinate memory number .

B, O . B, O .

X-axis

incremental

command value, dwell, canned cycle parameter

User macro character

o .
canned cycle parameter B,

Z-axis

incremental

command value,

x X-axis coordinate value B

User macro character

o
B

Z-axis

coordinate value

Table

2.4

Function

Characters

EIA Code I

ISO Code

Function

Remarks

Blank

NuL

Error in significant data area in EIA Disregarded

in ISO

~ BS e-Tab LFINL End of Block (EOB) HT 0S . Disregarded -~Disregarded -~ -

c!+ > SP SP

Disregarded

Space

1------._ +
-

--+>5::::----2Z2::F . . . . .
2-4-5bits
~ 2-4-7 bits
..~

----/

Special code

.1.
User macro operator

- ._:-=..
I -! ] EIA:
1

~ Control out (comment start)

~ Control in (comment end)

-;~~
oto9

*
O to 9

Disregarded,

Minus sign, User macro operator

Numerals

---------------. ---

Ad=== ~tx----~ :+*


:-ti~-1 Disregarded .~ Parameter starting ~ ~ I -s I i

(Including All Mark)

------!---

---4

Sharp (Variable designation)

! [ Asterisk

(Multiplication

operatcx)

-H17

-Ld=:k-I

------4
I
data.

-1 A: iacde

?
Notes : 1. Characters

User macro operator

other than the above cause error in significant data area.

2. Information between Control Out and Control In is ignored as insignificant 3. Tape code (EIA or ISO) is automatically recognized.

2.1.3

DECIMAL POINT PROGRAMMING


are

The blocks including not read in advance M02, M30

the .

following

M codes

Numerals containing a decimal point may be used as the dimensional data of addresses related to coordinates (distance) , angle, time and speed. They can be input from punched tape or MDI. Decimal points dress words. Coodinate Angle Feedrate Time can be used in the following ad-

. MOO, MO1, . M codes manding

( 6 maximum) set by parameter to stop advancereading.

com-

Notes X, B F, U, P E 2. Z, U, W, I, K, R

: This function is effective for G22 and G 23 where the control is provided with Radius Programming for Circular Interpolation option. Block-to-block stop time due to required to compute tool radius tion is not eliminated or remains. this stopping time, use 2.7.3 Function (M93, M92) (optional). tion of consecutive blocks up to mode, inter-block stoppage time to zero. the time compensaTo reduce Buffering When opera5 in M93 is reduced

words; A,

1.

words: word:

words:

EXAMPLE [mm] X15. z20.5 (G99)F.2t X15.000 220.500 FO.20 (for F25 (for Dwell without mm mm or or or [inch ] in. in.

X15.0000
220.5000

mm/rev F32) mm/min F50) 1.000

FO. 2000 infrev (for F24) F25. 60 mm/min (for F32)

2.2 PROGRAM NUMBER


2.2.1

NUMBER AND SEQUENCE

(G98)F25.6

or

PROGRAM NUMBER
numbers may be prefixed to programs purpose of program identification.

G04Pl. When control data

sec point is input, mm (or 0.0001 the inch).

Program for the

regards

a decimal 11111 as o.001

Up to 4 digits may be written after an address O as program numbers. Up to 99 character program numbers can be registered in the control, and up to 199 or 999 can be registered employing an option. One program begins ends with M02, M30 with a program number, and M02 and M30 are and M99 is

or M99.

2.1.4 In the

LABEL SKIP FUNCTION


following effective, cases and the LSK label skip function on the

placed placed

at the at the

end end

of of

main programs, subprograms.

becomes CRT . . When . When

is displayed

the the

power RESET

supply

is turned

on.

PROGRAM PROGRAM

WITH NO. 10

PROGRAM PROGRAM

WITH No. 1224

operation

is executed.

While the label skip function is effective, all data on the punched tape up to the first EOB code are neglected. When LSK is displayed on the CRT in the MEM (memory) or EDIT (editing) mode, it indicates the presence of a pointer at the leading end of the part program.

ER (or % at 1S0 code) parts of the tape. Notes : The blocks for

is punched

on both

end

1.

optional are

block not

skip

such

as as end

/M02; , /M30; , /M99; of programs. 2.


It &

regarded

2. 1.5 BUFFER REGISTER possible with a parameter change During normal operation, one block of data is read in advance and compensation is computed for the follow-on operation. In the tool radius compensationmode, two blocks of data or up to 4 blocks of data are read in advance and compensation computing required for the next operation is executed. One block can contain up to 128 characters including EOB . (#6201Do) , to make the reading of M02, M30, and M99 ineffective as a program end, and to make the succeeding ER (EIA) or % (ISO) as a sign of program end.

2. 2.2

SEQUENCE NUMBER

2.3

COORDINATE

WORDS

Integers consisting of up to 4 digits may be written following an address character N as sequence numbers. Sequence numbers are reference numbers for blocks, and do not have any influence on the meaning and sequence of machining processes. Therefore, they may be sequential, non-sequential, and duplicated numbers, also any sequence number is possible. sequential numbers are convenient numbers. When searching for to search or specify hand. Notes : more digits number. must not be written as a sequence program not using Generally, as sequence

commands for movements in axis direcGenerally, tions and commands for setting coordinate systems are called coordinate words, and coordinate words consist of address characters for desired axes and numerals representing dimensions of directions.

2.3.1

COORDINATE WORDS

Address of Coor-

numbers, numbers

be sure before-

dinate Words

I 1 I
x,

Meaning Absolute coordinate position of t~get position Incremental (U: W: distance

Main Axis

1.
2.

Five or sequence

I
I

U, W

Direction in X-axis, Direction in Z-axis) distance between start point

+ Radius Value for Circular 1, K

Incremental

When two or more blocks have the same sequence number, only one is retrieved and read, and no more searching is performed. Blocks without sequence numbers can also be searched for with respect to the address data contained in the blocks.

and center of circular arc. (1: K: X-axis Z-axis component, component)

3.

Interpolation R I Note: When G 90 and G 91 are used, addresses X and Z are Radius value of circular arc

not fixed as absolute value and follow accofdi ng to G 90/G 91

2.2.3.

OPTIONAL BLOCK SKIP

(h - /91+]

designation. Incremental

For details, Inputs.

refer to 2. 3.5

Absolute and

Those blocks in which /n (n = ( 1 - 9) is inIn and the end of cluded are neglected between optional block skip that block, when the external switch for that number n is on. EXAMPLE /2 N1234 GO1 x1OO /3 Z200;

2.3.2

SIMULTANEOUS CONTROLLABLE AXES

When the neglected, this block N With Notes 1.

switch for and when is read GO1

/2 is on, the. entire block is the switch for /3 is on,

The control provides two-axis control for X- and Zaxis. Number of simultaneously controllable axes, when commanded in the same block, is two axes , Xand Z. For the axis without commands, movement will not occur.

as if xlOO; be .

1234

1, :

1! l!! may

omitted.

LEAST INPUT INCREMENT AND LEAST 2.3.3 OUTPUT INCREMENT 2,3,3.1

Input Unit and 10 Times Input Unit


input tape or
Least

The optional block skipping process is executed while the blocks are being read into the buffer resister. Once the blocks have been read, subsequent switching on is ineffective to skip the blocks . While reading this function The and block /1 is or punching is ineffective. /2 one. /9 is out programs,

The by

minimum punched

units MDI

that are

can shown

be

commanded

below.

Input Increment

2.

3.

skip a basic

an

option

function,

X-axis

is specified for diameter,

2.3.3.1
(Centd)

Input

Unit

and

10

Times

Input

Unit

2.3.4

MAXIMUM PROGRAMMABLE
values

DIMENSIONS
of move command

Inch/MM input is selected by setting #6001D0. Inch/MM input selection by G20/G21 is optional. Selection of multiplication factor xl /x10 is made by parameter #6006D 5.

Maximum programmable are shown below .


Maximum

Programmable input input input input I

Values

Metric Metric Output - Inch Metric Inch Output Inch

-9999.999 -3937.0078 Y 99999.999 99999

mm. in mm.

Tool offset value must always be written in O. 001 mm (or O. 0001 inch) , and offset is possible in these units. In O. 01 mm increment eration must be made . Programming o Write operation for for system, the following opin the unit of O. 01 mm. in TAPE mode.

.999 in.

operation in MDI

mode. in MEMORY in EDT mode.

o Programming . Program Notes :

operation operation

editing

mode .

1.

If NC tape programmed by O. 001 mm is fed into or stored in an equipment set by O. 01 mm increment, the machine will move ten times the intended dimensions. If the increment system is switched when the contents of NC tape are stored in memory, the machine will move by ten times or one tenth of the commanded dimensions. When the stored program is punched out on the tape+, the stored f?gures are punched out as stored regardless of switching of the increment system. Multiplication factor 10X (10 times the input

In incremental programming, specified values must not exceed the maximum programmable values. In absolute programming, move amount of each axis must not exceed the maximum programmable value. THE MACHINE MAY NOT FUNCTION PROPERLY IF MOVE COMMAND OVER THE MAXIMUM PROGRAMMABLE VALUES IS GIVEN. The above maximum programmable values also apply to distance command addresses 1, K, R in addition to move command addresses X , U , W .

2.

2.3.5 ABSOLUTE AND INCREMENTAL INPUTS


Both absolute be used for the Absolute input Xand Z. EXAMPLE: Incremental es U and EXAMPLE: Absolute W. U.. input . and W., . ; input can be X.. input control. is specified by the addresses and incremental input can

3.

4.

Z.. is

; specified by the address-

unit) is effective for distance command only. It does not function on the designation of When multiplication factor time, angle, etc. 10X is set as effective ( #6006D5 = 1) , the same address word is multiplied by 10 or not depending on type of G command. EXAMPLE G04 U... GOO U... ;Not ; multiplied Multiplied by by 10 (Time)

input

incremental mixedly.

used 10 (Distance)

in one

block X.. u.. . .

EXAMPLE:

W.. z.

; ;

2, 3. 3.2

Least Output Increment

Least output increment is the minimum unit of tool motion. Selection of metric system or inch system is made by parameter (#6007D3) .
Least Output Increment

-J
Metric output Inch output --1--

X-axis (Radius value) 0.0005 mm

Z-axis

0.001 mm

0.00005 in. ---

0.0001 in. ----

When addresses X and U or addresses Note : and W are used in one block, the latter is effec tive.

Z -

The addresses 1 and K for designation of arccenter must be specified by the incremental dimension.

Table

2.5

Address

Increment

System

Designation

Meaning

x
Absolute Input

Diameter

Position in X-axis

direction *

Diameter Incremental Input

Position in Z-axis

direction *

u
w
I incremental K Input

Move amount in X-axis

direction

Radius

Move amount in Z-axis Distance canter Distance center in X-axis

direction

direction from starting point of arc to

Incremental Input

in Z-axis

direction from starting point of arc to

Direct programming of circular arc

+x

G code
G9CI I

Meaning

I
Absolute command Incremental command G 91

As shown below, G90 and effective only to addresses


+Z

G 91 commands X and Z.

are

Addresses

G 90 Command

~ G 91 Command

b+-Xand U and * Z: W: Absolute Incremental Input Input by the movement Since X and U are designated values in diameter, the actual the half of the values. is

TAPE, tvfEtvf, MDI modes ~+ ,::::al*

EXAMPLE Incremental

G91 move

GOO

X40.

Z50. ;

o. . .

command

Fig. 2.1

Absolute Coordinate Values and


Coordinate Values

Incremental

. Auxiliary data, 1, K, R, etc. , of circulai interpolation are always incremental commands. Note : G90 and G91 cannot be programmed together in the same block. If they are written in the same block, the one written later only is effective. EXAMPLE: GO1 G90 and x80. in this G91 block, the z60. ;

Cases

where

G 90

mental

commands)

and G91 (absolute are used. or can

and

incre-

. When special G code I (basic) selected, G90 and G91 codes

II (option) be used.

is

G 91 is effective, become incremental

commands Z axes.

in both

X and

2.3.6

X-AXIS DIAMETER/RADIUS

SWITCHING

2.4

RAPID TRAVERSE RATE

Addresses X and U for Xaxis coordinate words This is called are specified by diameter value. The addresses X can be diameter designation. used for designation of both diameter and is made by the setting radius . The switching of parameter #6006D s.

2. 4.1 RAPID TRAVERSE RATE The rapid traverse motion is used for the motion for the Positioning (GOO) and for the motion for the Manual Rapid Traverse (RAPID) . The traverse rates differ among the axes since they are dependent on the machine specification and are determined by the machine tool builders. The rapid traverse rates determined by the machine are set by parameters in advance for individual axes. When the tool is moved in rapid traverse in each axial direction simultaneously, motions in these axial directions are independent of each other, and the end points are reached at differTherefore, ent times among these motions. motion paths are normally not straight. rates, traverse feedrate Fo, 25% rates, set by

o: 1:

Diameter Radius

designation designation

(a)

w-zPP+z
I
I
In the ameter case of DiDesignation (b) In the case of radius Designation

For override rapid traverse 50% and 100% of the basic rapid Fo is a constant are available. parameter (#6231) .

Fig. 2.2

Range of Rapid Traverse Rate


(1) For each axis, rapid traverse rates can set by parameters #6280, #6281 at some suitable multiple of 125 p /sec. Least output increment) (p: The uPPer rapid limit traverse shown
I

be

Table

2.6 Radius Programming

Diameter Programming

(2)

rate below.

can

be

set

to the

Address X command

Diameter value ~

Radius value

Metric Input

24,000

mmlmin

i
Inch Input

2,400 inlmin

Address U command

I
t

Diameter incremental value 1 ~dius Incremental ~ valuevalue

The

upper

limit

for

X-axis

speed

is half

the

X-axis

position display

Diameter value

listed values. The optimum value of upper limit is set according to the machine. Refer to the machine tool builders manual, for the definite value.

Tool position offset value

I
1

Diameter value

2.4.2

FEED FUNCTION (F- AND E-FUNCTION)


below must be is commanded. designated before F ,

G code listed and E function


Nose radius R Radius value G code

I
Designation Designation

Function of feedrate of feedrate in mm/min. in mm/rev.

t
Feedrate F, E in X-axis direction

Radius val uehev Radius value/rein

G 98
G99

Radius data 1, R for circular interpolation G90-G G70-G76, 94,

Parameters

cornering, and

-*-Radius value for Radius value

Note : For the details, refer to 2.8.28, Feed Function Design ation.

multlple cornering, D, 1, K, P, Q, R

Since F, E codes are modal, these codes are effective until next F , E codes are given. However, when G98/G99 are switched, new F code must be designated. In G98 mode, E code cannot be commanded. If commanded, PROG ERROR 030 will be activated.

2.4. 2.1 Feed Per Revolution (1)

(G 99 Mode)
the spindle can feed) or E ( fine

EXAMPLE G99 S350 (r/rein) F200 ; ; . . . In the case of F32. is: r/rein

Tool feed per revolution of be specified with F (normal feed) .

GO1 U1OO. In the S

above = 2.0

case,

feedrate x 35o +x

(2)

The feed ranges that can be specified the F and E codes are as follows. G 99 Mode, F and E Feed Ranges

by

F x

mm/rev.

= 700 mm/m~n

Rangeof
Metric input Metric output
Inch

Feed/Revel ution mm/rev mmlrev

F 32 E34 F 24 E

F 0.01- F 500.00 E 0.0001-

E 500.0000

ql
4. Values of terpolation when two EXAMPLE G99 1 S1OOO (r/rein) U60, above
=
=

FEEDRATE

700 mm/mn

input

I I E 19.685000 I 26 1 E0.000004
F 0.0301 F19.6Ek50 in./rev F 32 E34 F 24 E 26 F 0,01 F1270.00 E 0.0003-E mmlrev 1270.0000

in./rev

F command at linear or circular in represent the tangential feedrate axes are simultaneously controlled.

Metric , Inch output Inch input input

; F50 the
x

mmlrev

GO1
FO.001 F 50.0000 F O.000010-E in./rev

W40. case,

; feedrate
Io(lf) r/rein

In F
x

the
S

is

50.00C0OO in/rev

0,

5 mm/reV

500 mm/min ~3002 rr

These feed restrictions

ranges are depending

subject on the

to the spindle

following speed S.

Metric output

F(E) XS~24,000mm/min F(E)XS S 2,400 in./min

I
I

Inch output

Xaxis

Notes : 1. Program feed per revolution within such a range that the X-axis component remains below 12,000 mm/min or

TANGENTIAL

+x

FEEDFIATE

1,200 in./min. 2. This uppar limit may still be reduced by the performance limit of the machine. Refer to the machine tool builders manual.

I IO ~
EXAMPLE G99 2 s1OOO U.. the above

#+ @~ x
Lz-axis feedrate component feedrate
~.o

+ 4002

component

~ 300 mm/mln

400 mm/mln

.Z

(a)

(r/rein) W.. . case, I

; . . the x F20 ; is:

Notes 1.

: G03 A command FO causes data errors. In feedrate 1000 (r/rein) for will FxS= 0.2 (mm/rev) = ; . . . . . Wrong of the . 200 mm/min 4fx2
CENTER

2.

Any minus value should not be specified If specified, the machine F commands. not operate properly. EXAMPLE F-250

fz2

3.

Feedrate commands in the direction Xaxis must be given in radius.

+x t L----

fx

.Z

(b)

11

2.4. 2.2
(1)

Feed Per Minute (G 98 Mode)


in mm/min or

EXAMPLE G98 GO1 programmed In this ;

Tool feed can be specified in/rein with F codes . The with feed range F codes is that can be as follows.

u60. case,

W40.

F500

(2)

G 98 Mode F Code Feed Range

F = 500 = ~3002 (mm/min) ~


Lx-axis

4002
~-a~i~

component

component

Notes : 1. Program feed-per-minute ccmponent feedrates. EXAMPLE G98 GOI U300. ! F1200 values so that the X-axis speed

EXAMPLE G98 G03 In ; X..

wi II not exceed

half the above upper limit

. case,

Z..

1..

F200

this

(Metric output, metric input) 2. The upper limit value is further subject to the limitation impoeed by the machine performance. machine tool build&s to be set in parameter manual. #6228 Refer to the

F=200=ifxZ+fz (mm/min)
CENTER

This upper limit value is

Notes 1.

: F command in FO or negative

Do not write
values.

I
2,4.3

2.

Commands speeds in Example G98; GO1

in the radius.

X-axis

direction

indicate

AUTOMATIC ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION

X200.

F700

Acceleration and deceleration for rapid traverse and for cutting feed are automatically performed without programming ,

F 700

-!-+
FEEDRATE 700 mm,mlq

2.4. 3.1 Acceleration

and Deceleration of Rapid Traverse and Manual Feed


operation, the pattern of autoand deceleration is linear.

In the following matic acceleration (See Fig. 2.3. )

l +,

Positioning Manual Manual Manual rapid

(GOO) traverse (RAPID) (JOG) (HANDLE)

Values of F command at linear or circular interpolation represent the tangential feedrate when trolled. two axes are simultaneously con-

continuous HANDLE

feeding feeding

12

Once specified, S-code is modal and effective until the next S-code. When the spindle stops M05 (spindle stoD) , S-command is stored in memor~ of the u~it. EXAMPLE GOO
TIME

at

S11

Fig. 2.3
x.. Rapid traverse rate and the acceleration eration constant of rapid traverse rate set by parameter. ( #6280 to #6287) /decelcan be GO1 Z.. . .

M03 ; . . . S command Spindle CW z.. F.. . . ; ;

Sll:

Effective

1 As shown in the following operation, linear acceleration and deceleration ified. (independent of each axis) o Cutting feed (GO1 to G03) the twostep can be spec(See Fig. 2.4. ) GOO X.. . Z.. . M05 . . c Spindle ; z.. F.. ; . . ; ; ; stop

1 Sll: Effective

..-M03 x.. . .

VELOCITY

P.
v

GO1

Z.. S22

G00

x . . .

z..

F..

S22:

Effective

t TIME

Note :

The two-digit machine when is issued.

BCD output is S and two-digit

sent to the command

Fig.

2.4

2.5.2 Feedrate vals and time constants feedrate bias are set is set at #6093) at 2 msec inter2kpps intervals (1)

S4-DIGIT

PROGRAMMING AT
S (S K K K K ) are speed in r/rein. used

by parameters.

( #6092,

Four digits following to specify the spindle

Note : The automatic acceleration /deceleration parameters are set to the optimum values for the Do not change the setting respective machines. unless it is required for special application.

(2)

2.5

SPINDLE-SPEED

FUNCTION

(S-FUNCTION)

When S command is given in a block together with M03 (spindle forward running) or the proceeds M04 (reverse running) , the control to the next block after the spindle speed reaches the speed given by the S code. For details, refer to the machine tool builders manual. EXAMPLE
S1OOO M03,

2.5,1 S 2-DIGIT PROGRAMMING (SPECIAL SPECIFICATIONS)


The spindle lowing the For each speed address is specified by S (S00 to S99) and its two . digits fols

SPEED 1000 FUMIN SYNCHRONIZATION . .

S code

corresponding machine tool

spindle builders

1I

speed (r/rein), manual.

refer

tO the

I
I I u

ACTUAL SPEED

SPINDLE

When a move command and an S code are issued in a block, execution will depend on the machine tool design and construction (Whether the S command is executed together with the move com mand or after the completion of tool movement) . Refer to the machine tool builders manual.

START OF THE BLOCK

13

2. 5.2

S 4-DIGIT

PROGRAMMING

A+(Contd)

(2)

For applicable tool number to be refer to the machine tool builders

specified, manual

(3)

S commands

are modal. Although the spindle stops at the M05 command, the S comTherefore, when M03 mand is retained. (or M04) is given, the spindle runs accordto the S command.

ing (4)

When S command is changed after the spindle start by M03 or M04, S command should be given selected within the by spindle range gear. of spindle speed

Notes 1.

: When the tool number is changed by the T command, a turret lathe begins to index the tool instantaneously. Therefore, the turret should be removed, before the command, from the area where an accidental collision might occur. Tool offset number 00 cancels the tool offset.

Notes

: The lower limit of the spindle speed depends on the spindle drive. Refer to the machir,e tool builders manual for the low-speed limit. Negative S commands must not be programmed.

1.

2.

2.

When the control is provided with the S 4digit command function, the Spindle speed override option can be built into it. With machine tools with which the main spindle gear ratio changes can be specified by M codes, first write the applicable M code to preselect the desired write the S command. the machine tool builder gear ratios, the speeds and other details. gear Refer ratio, to the and data then, of of ratios,

2.6.2

TOOL OFFSET MEMORY+

3.

The area in which tool position offset values, tool radius compensation values, and other compensation data are stored is called Offset Memory . (1) The entire including memory areas of Offset the options are as shown
OFFSET MEMORY NO

for the number at various gear

Memory below.

4.

When the control is provided with this func tion, the spindle maximum speed commanding function with the instruction G50 S . . . ; can be used.
TOOL OFFSET

2. 5.3

S 4-DIGIT

PROGRAMMING

B+
S4-digit comthe program-

MEMORY ,50 GROUP5MA:

f Ii ---

-----_-

---

~:~i;:; -MEMORY

(1)

This function is to modify the mand A output freely through mable machine interface.

I TOOL COORDINATE MAXI 1 I&/ TOOL RADIUS

;0 51 \ g

SUPPLEMENT

MEMORY (49 GROUPS

(2)

Basically, this function is used in the same as the S 4-digit command A function, way but it is normally used to set the manually controlled spindle speeds controlled by the rotary switch on the machine control station corresponding to S command speeds. For the details of S command speeds, refer to the machine tool builders manual.

MEMORY

-r-

Note : For the actually usable range within the above Offset Memory, refer to the machine tool builders manual.

(2)
2.6

TOOL FUNCTiON

(T-FUNCTION)

2.6.1 (1)

T 4-DIGIT PROGRAMMING
Four digits following the tool number. TDDDU Tool offset (O - 160r 1 Tool number 50) the address T specifies

The tool offset Nos. specified by the T function directly correspond to the offset memory Nos. , and their contents are used for various compensations. However, the tool coordinate memory Nos. ( for setting the work coordinate system) correspond to the tool selection Nos . in the T function . The work coordinate shift memory is an independent function, not related to the T function. )

selection

14

(3)

Write these data in the memory, before starting to operate the machine under automatic procedure, refer co; trol. - For the writing to 4.3.5, Displaying and Writing Tool Offset into Tool Coordinate Values . For writing Memory, follow the procedure described in 6.2.3, Work Measurement Value Direct Input *.

(3)

Description

of

tool

position

offset

motion

As mentioned above, when the tool specified by the address T and 4 digits is moved, the offset value corresponding to the tool offset number is added to the command value in the program algebraically and the tool tip is moved to the offset position. When there is no move command in the block, the tool moves only by the offset value. Once, the tool offset number is designated, the tool moves always to the offset position until another number is designated. When the other offset number is designated or the offset value is changed, the offset value is compensated for by the amount of the difference between the old and new offset values. OFFSET VALUE

2.6.3

TOOL POSITION OFFSETS

When the tool offset number is specified, the offset value corresponding to the tool offset number is added algebraically to the command value in the program and the tool is moved to the offset Therefore, the difference between the position. coordinate values of the programmed tool tip and the actual tool tip must be stored into tool offset memory in advance as the offset value. When the coordinate value of the actual tool tip has changed due to tool wear or some other reasons, the tool position offset values should be Thus, the programmed machining is set again. attained (1) without of correcting tool position the offset of program. value tool offset value

Range

The programmable is shown below.

range

I
(+ +x EXAMPLE Tlol GO1 X.. T115

T101 T (+6X1,

+ 6z~)

T115 T 6X2,

+ 6Z2)

{3
+- 8Z2:

OFFSET

MOTION

- Inch out put Metric

COMPLETION

OF

input

I
,
I

o- f9999.999rnnl
O

,,1+ L!x~

.-8KL 2

Inch input

fE@3.&307 in.
( X,z) 7 L?z.

(2)

Sign

of

tool

position

offset

values

store the tool position offset values in the The offset value is the deOffset Memory. viation from the tool tip position of the reference tool which is determined as zero. +x

. . . . . . . . . . ...+.....

tiOLpOToN
. Z.. ; . F(E) . . . ; . z

...... a

I
I

J .

_ I

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

..... B

6 ~

I&

DIAMETER)

( Block of the offset motion)

+Z (4) Move speed with tool offset

P~OGnAtMMED

Fig. 2.5

The move speed of tool offset is determined by the feedrate command that is effective in the block. Therefore, the feedrate command should be issued before (GOO or GO1 F ..) or in the block containing the tool offset number.

15

25

---

3 TOOL POSITION OFFSETS (Centd)


EXAMPLE G50 GOO X.. S.. x.. . . . 2.. M03 z.. . . ; TO1O8 ; ~ -x ; Off set mot ion is made at the rapid traverse rate.

EXAMPLE ~ GOO GO1 T0202 ; ;

X.. . Z.. . F.. .

GO1

U+. . .

W-.

. .

F..
,OE ~~L

T0216
OFFSET

DICFER~NcE T0216 / MOVEMEN ,.L T ,

l/AL~JE 3ET,vEEN

(5)

Instructions offset

for

commanding

tool

position

I
-~1
~

AhD T 0202 OF COMMAND ~, T07. R Ih <

UOVEMENT

wITHO IIT CCIMMAN17

Tool position offset is executed by designating the tool offset number corresponding to the actual tool must be designated. a. Tool offset starts at the block in which the T-code is commanded. When Tcode is read, the tool selection signal ( BCD) is fed and the tool starts to move by the offset value corresponding to the tool offset number. Since T code is modal, it is retained until the other T code is designated. EXAMPLE GOO T0202 ; . . . The tool number N 02 is selected. Tool offset motion is made accord ing to the contents of the tool offset number 02. value must be changed, is re

~-

;y

- -
-=. .Z
STARTING EXECUTION POINT

- THE ~,,

(BEFOQE

OF COMMAND

When the T command and the move command are issued in the same block, the tool nose Therefore, in moves to the offset position. the taper angle is corrected the above case, by the difference of the offset value between T0202 and T0216.

d .

When the tool position offset is required to cancel, the T code with the tool offset numK ~ 00) must be commanded. ber O or 00 (T The tool Dosition offset is instantaneously cancelled~ EXAMPLE GOO GO1 T0202 X.. . Z.. . F.. . ;

b.

When

the

tool

offset

the Tcode whose tool offset written should be commanded EXAMPLE GOO GO1 T0202 X.. . ; Z.. . F.. . ;

number again.

GO1

U+. . .

W-.

. .

F..

ro216

GO1

T0216

Tool offset number 02 is replaced with 16. Tool offset motion is made at the cutting feedrate , in this

GOO

X.. . Z.. . T0200

. . . . The

Note case, c.

that the

if the tool number is changed tool indexing motion starts.

offset motion is cancelled. Tool moves according to the position specified Xand Z. by

The angle of taper cutting can be changed by the following procedure. T code for change of tool offset number should be commanded in the block together with cuttin~ feed command .

The into G(IO T0200

block ~ of EXAMPLE two blocks. X.. ; . Z.. .. . . . . ;

can

be

divided

Only cancel motion is made at rapid traverse rate.

Notes

1.
2.

Tool position operation.

offset

is

cancelled

by

RESET

For positive shift values AX and AZ, the coordinate axes are shifted in the direction shown above. Xo and Zo are original coordinate system setting values.

The tool offset must or M30 is commanded. The tool Automatic When mand the offset Zero should Return

be

cancelled

before

M02

(3)
be cancelled also before ( G 28) is commanded.

3.

This shift function is executed any of the conditions described and d is met.

at each time in a, b, c,

4.

the control is reset by M02 or M30 comor by executing RESET operation, offset number becomes O (or 00) .

(4)

tool

5.

When the Zero Return ecuted, the tool offset tally. The zero the tool the the med

(auto or manual) is exis cancelled automati

When the contents of Work Coordinate System Shift Memory are rewritten, the new shift values become effective from the moment the operation a, b, c, or d above is subsequently executed, The procedure of 5.2.3, MEASURED WORKPIECE VALUE DIRECT INPUT is effective for the Work Coordinate Shift Memory with an offset memory No, 00. : The shift command by the Work Coordinate Shift function can not be cancelled unless the setting value is changed to O. NO reset operation is effective in canceling it. T~noO ;. . . . . Tool position coordinate offset cancel

(5)

6.

tool offset must be also cancelled before Return Check ( G27) is commanded. If G27 is commanded at the state where the offset is effective, the control will be state of Zero Return check error, because tool offset value is added to the program position.

Notes 1.

2.6.4 With

WORK COORDINATE SYSTEM SHIFT i 2.


this function, coordinate systems set by G50, etc.

the Work Coordinate System Setting function, can be shifted through desired distances.

G50

T~UOJ;

. . . Work
setting

system

(1)

Shift values in the X and Z axes can be written into the Work Coordinate System Shift Memory (one group ) with which the offset memory No. is 00, by the same procedure as for writing tool offset values. The written shift from the moment When When When G50 values become effective described below, system coordinate is set is set set

The tool offset No 00 in these instructions has nothing to do with the contents of Work Coordinate Shift Memory.

3.

(2)

When G50 coordinate system is set or when position absolute display is reset by ORG key 1, parameter #6018 D7 determines whether work coordinate system shift amount is effective or not.

a. b. c. d,

coordinate work

G50GT automatic

system system is

2,6.5

NEW

COORDINATE

SYSTEM

SETTING

FUNCTION
coordinate

Position Absolute display is reset by ORG key That is, when these coordinate systems listed above are set, the-shift values are simply Tools are not shifted. added. -v, 4
. . . .

2.6.5.1

Overview
to coordinate system function. The following

A completely new approach setting is employed in this are the features. (a) A coordinate system. The tool nose on the current There in the system is

a machine

coordinate

-x
(b) point can always be displayed value display (absolute) . to set the coordinate system

20

ORIGINAL

COORDINATE

AXES

Xoi2
p%

(c) +2

is no need program.

SHIFT

I , AX,12 2.6.5,2
Fig. 2.6

~+z

Functions
of coordinate and at what system frequency setting ? is

SHIFT COORDINATE

AXES

What kind performed

17

2.6.5.3 Setting The

Operation

Expression

for Coordinate

System

2.6.5,5 Timing of Coordinate the Automatic Mode

System

Setting

under

following is the
system ?

coordinate frequencies X-axis

operation setting at

expression various time

for

coordinate

value

= Machine position + tool coordinate memory + work coordinate system shift amount

Under the automatic mode, coordinate system setting is performed when the turret is called up The tool coordinate memory by the T code. number uses the turret number commanded on the command screen or the offset number for operation. Unlike the conventional offset method, the code command in the coordinate system setting specification is given as follows. T

Z-axis coordinate value = Machine position + tool coordinate memory + work coordinate system shift amount

The setting of parameter #6011 DO decides whether to set the tool coordinate memory number at the front two digits of T4-digit, or at the last two digits of the T4-digit, The execution setting differs as setting. (1) of the follows, coordinate system by the parameter

( 1)

The machine machine.

position

is

called

the

position

(2)

The tool coordinate memory value number is of two types; the number when the timing for the next coordinate system setting is manual and when it is automatic.
The work called the coordinate system offset TOO, X, or shift amount Z data. is

When set at the (#6011 DO = O)


T** T $$

front

two

digits

(3)

Offset 01

number

(Wear to 49

offset) (Tool nose R)

to 16/01

2.6.5,4

Timing

of Coordinate

System

Setting

under
,_

the Manual

Mode

Tool 01

number to 16/01 to 49 memory number)

Under the manual mode, coordinate system setting The is made with the following times (a) to (c) . tool coordinate memory number is created from the tool number binary value set in 1/0 input #13174 (TP1) to #13178 (TP8) , to be used for operation.

(Tool

coordinate

Note :

The

tool

The coordinate system can also be set up inside the NC, or by a request from the When set by a request of the sequencer. sequencer, coordinate system setting is executed to turn on output #12194 (end of coordinate system #13127 (coordinate setting output) when input
system
(a)

(tool number memory value + 50).


(a)

+ 50). selects

coordinate memory number is: Thus, the tool coordinate the contents of (tool number

setting

request

input)

turns

on.

By executing the T**$$ command, the turret is called up wherever the tool post is located, and is moved for the offset amount of the offset number, to execute the coordinate system setting corresponding to the selected tool coordinate memory number. By executing the T**OO command, the turret is.called up wherever the tool post is located, and the offset amount cancel movement is executed, to execute the coordinate system setting corresponding to the selected tool coordinate memory number, The tool nose coordinate system is always set by the coordinate system setting. When
(#6011

Upon zero point return. (NC internal setting at label skip, or sequencer setting for other cases. ) when On the tool setter, contacts the sensor upon internal setting)
When turret operation, indexing (Sequencer is

(b)

(b)

the tool nose measurement.

(NC

(c)

performed setting )

by

manual

(c)

Note : Coordinate system cannot be set by manual operation, when parameter #6011 DO = 1 [when the tool coordinate memory number follows the last two digits of T**$$I.

(2)

set at the back two digits


DO =

1)

18

T** -l-T

$$

These commands stop the advance reading of the control. For these M codes, M 2digit BCD code and their respective decoded signals are output.
Offset 01 (Tool number to coordinate (Wear 49 offset (TooI ) nose R) number) to 16/01

memory

1,
Note : (offset memory number (a)

2.7.2 M CODES FOR INTERNAL PROCESSING (M 90 TO M 109)


Tool 01 to number 16/01 to 49

M90 through M109 are for internal Even when they are programmed, output signal (BCD and decoded

processing. no external output) is sent. :

The tool coordinate memory number is: Thus, the tool coordinate number + 50). value selects the contents of (offset + 50) .

M96 -?: M97 : M98: M99:

Tool radius compensation circular path mode Tool radius intersection Subroutine Subroutine Not

compensation: computing mode program program used ( for call end special application)

By executing the T**$$ command, the turret is called wherever the tool post is located, and is moved for the offset amount of the offset number, to execute the coordinate system setting corresponding to the selected tool coordinate memory number. By executing the T**OO command, the turret is called wherever the tool post is located, and the offset amount cancel movement is No coordinate system setting is executed. performed. The tool nose coordinate by the coordinate system system setting. is always set

M100 to 109:

(b)

2.7.3

BUFFERING FUNCTION (M 93, M 92)+


The following M codes buffering function. are issued for

(1)

(c)

t
2.6.6

NOTES ****

WHEN

USING

THE

CONVENTIONNote:

M93

4-tIlock

buffering

AL G50T

FUNCTION
When power is applied wirh~. the current M code is changed However, it is not changed by to the M code maked

When using the coordinate system setting specification, do not give the G50 T**** Error will occur if commanded.

command.

RESET operation.

(2) 2.7

4-block

buffering

(M 93)

MISCELLANEOUS

FUNCTIONS

(M-FUNCTION)

The miscellaneous function is specified with the The function address M and a maximum 3 digits. of each M code (MOO to M99) is determined by the Refer to machine, except for several M codes. the machine tool builders manual for the function of M codes except for-the following M codes concerned with the control.

2.7. I M CODES FOR STOP (M 00, M 01, M 02, M 30) To stop the NC control codes are provided. MOO: MO1: M02: M30: Program Optional End End of of stop stop program tape and machine, the following (3)

When M93 ; command is given, the control enters the 4-block buffering mode, which remains until M92 is commanded subsequentup to 4 blocks of data ly . In this mode, are read in advance for subsequent opera tion. With programs in which the operation time for the 4 blocks read in advance is longer than the reading and processing time of the subsequent 4 blocks, interruption between blocks can be eliminated. This function is effective in avoiding a shiny streak on the workpiece caused by feed stop between blocks . 1- block buffering (M92) the 4-block and the 1 block

When M92 command is given, buffering mode is cancelled, buffering mode is restored.

Note : While the tool radius is being compensated for with the M93 function , up to two blocks not containing move commands ar-e permitted , and as the result, up to 6 blocks may be read in advance.

19

2. 7.3 EXAMPLE N51


N52 N53 N54

BUFFERING

FUNCTION

(M93,

M92)t

(Centd)

(3)

Commands of M96 and M97 become effective from the edge in the following command blocks . X.. . Z.. . F.. ; Z.. . M96 (or M97)
Z.. M97) Z.. . ; ; -1 F.. .

M93
GO1 X.. .

;
U.. Z.. . F.. ;

Start of 4-block advance


reading . ; . Stop between blocks for tool radius com pensation or other calculation can be avoided. 1

a. GO1

1 ;J
;

(GO1) X..

From the move around the edge in this block,

b.

GO1 M96 (G 01)

X.. (or X...

From the move around the edge in this block.

M58

M92

Canceling reading .

4block

advance

2.7.5
2.7.4 CIRCULAR PATH MODE ONIOFF ON TOOL RADIUS COMPENSATION (M 97, M 96)+ These M codes provided with option. are effective the tool nose when radius the control is compensation

SUBROUTINE

PROGRAM (M 98, M 99)


subroutine programs which and stored in advance are as many times as desired. M codes are used for this

With this function, have been numbered called and executed

(1) The

following function.

(1) The

following

M codes

are

used.
M code

Meaning

M cede

Meaning

M 96

Tool radius compensation Tool radius compensation (Execution of intersection

circular path on circular path off point)

M 97

Note:

When power is applied, the current M code is with~

changed to the M code m=ked However, it is not changed

(2)

Call of subroutine program


M98 P.. . Q.. . L.. . ;

(M98)

by RESET operation.

(2)

With the tool radius compensation mode by G41 to G44, the locus of the tool (center of tool radius) for commanded workpiece
contour lines gents larger two categories. with than the angle between tan 180 is in the following

With this command, the subroutine program starting with a sequence No. following Q in the part program with the program No specified times. However, by p is called and is executed L

when

M96 mode The center of the tool nose radius describes a circular arc around the perimeter in the contour line.

P is omitted:
subroutine program following the sequence No. Q in the main program is called. Q is omitted: subroutine program end of the program called. L is omitted: Subroutine 4 times.

starting at the leading No. specified by P is

M97 mode

The center of the tool nose radius moves along the locus that is formed by straight lines shifted from the contour line by the
distance equal to the tool radius.
lNTFFiSELll ON

execution programs can

is only be

once. up to

nested

.1

I
z

=Q!c3:000nOdO 3)
End of subroutine program (G99)
~,t~ reference pan! of lmtemacfmn.

b M 97 mode (calculation of

M 96 mode (circular arc) Fig.

intersection) 2.8

; is written at the end of subroutine M99 program to end it. When this code is written, the operation returns to the block immediately following the main block in which the subroutine program was called after the execution of the subroutine program.

M99

P..

; of a subreturns to p in the main

EXAMPLE
Man Program Subroutine program

When this is written at the end routine program, the operation the sequence program. No. specified by

(4)

Simple M99 P

jump

command

--

-; When this command is used in the main program, the operation simply jumps to the by Q in the main sequence No. specified program. If Q is omitted, the program simply jumps to the leading end of the main program. I
N1 N2 G50 GOO XO . . . 20 ; ;

J
2.7.6

-1 11
1 1 1

,1 ,A , ,/

,/ ,!
,

_,/$
--l

>:

\ \

1 \

N20 hi 99 ;

-:.
,--.,

ITotlmes
One hme

OTHER M CODES
How to use the other M codes other than the above depends upon the machine. Refer to the machine tool builderfs manual.

(1)

L
Writing multi this program make endless blocks (10 lines maximum) and executing cycle start operation. of Notes : 1. When the program No. specified by address P and the sequence No. specified by Q are not found, alarm code 041 is displayed. While command L for the number of repetitions is under execution, the remaining number of repetitions can be displayed. For details refer to 4.3.2.2. This function can be used when subroutine programs are stored in the part program Main programs can be commanded memory. through NC tap-es ~r the part program memory. When subroutine programs than 4 times, alarm code are nested more 042 is displayed.

Tadle 2.7 Typical


M code

Example

of M codes

for Machine

Meaning

Remarks

M 03

Spindle forwad running Direct switching from M 03to between M 04 cannot be done, them.

M04

Spindle reverse running

M 05 must be inserted

M 05

Spindle stop

M 08

Coolant on .. Coolant off

M 09

2.

3.

(2)

When these same block will, depend

M codes are commanded in the with move command, execution on the machine tool design and M commands with or after ) the control out-

4.

construction. (Whether the are executed simultaneously completion of move command. (3) For these M-code commands, puts M 2-digit BCD codes.

2.7.7
When

M 3-DIGIT BCD OUTPUT+


the control is provided with the M 3-digit

BCD output option, it can command codes between MOO and M999. (1) M codes between MOO and and M999 are output codes.
M89,

M 3digit

and

between

M11O

in

3-digit

BCD

(2)

M90 through M109 are M codes, and no BCD put. See 2. 7.2 PROCESSING .
M

internal code for FOR

processing them is outINTERNAL

CODES

21

27 (3)

7 M 3-DIGIT

BCD

OUTPUTt

(Centd)
are

(b)

#6645

With MOO, MO1, and M30, decode signals output in addition to the BCD output. See 2.7.1, M CODES FOR STOP. The specific usages of the M 3-digit

. . . For setting ing to the MD7


MD7 MD6

the M code corresponddecode output 1MD4 to

r?
=1224

I
~ ~

MD51MD4

(4)

codes

l--m-l

--

--

depends machine

on machine tool design. tool builder!s manual.

Refer to

36645 1

:.~=x

; xm---(Commanded by 2 digits)

2.7.8

HIGH-SPEED

M FUNCTION (Example of setting)


#6644 #6645 . . . 63 . . . 67 62 66 61 65 60 64

This function is used to execute the M function at high-speed without the need of the ending
response. The M code is not output when the M code is

commanded, but the M decode output is setlreset. Thus, there is no need for the M code decode in the programmable processing and FIN processing
controller. The M code that perform the high-speed function processing is preset in the parameter. (There are both a setting parameter and a resetting parameter. ) When resetting to hold or reset M

(3)

M code setting parameter decode output


parameters, of (2),

for resetting the


the same as in the

Sets the following setting parameter


(a)

#6646

. . . For

setting ing to the MD3

the M code corresponddecode output MDO to

by the
the

set

parameter, it decoding output.

can

be

==1

-T--..
MD3 MD2i MDl MDO

2.7.8.1
(1) For

1/0

Channel
output

decode

~. -_
F1224

FI
MD31MD2 7MD1 MDO

m-m lxx~x; xx rl- ~ ~ ----xx


i;
(Commanded by 2 digits)
. . . For setting ing to the MD7 the M code corresponddecode output MD4 to

:- ~ IMD71MD6 -

MD51MD4

(b)

#6647

2.7.8.2
(1)

Parameters
High-speed #6007D5 M function ... . . 0: 1: The The function function for is is disabled enabled the

=7
setting

(2)

M code setting
decode output

parameter

._. . 1 --~ --#q P, ~ , ,.. i


FD7F===TT7i
xxix.

Xx

lxx

(Commanded by 2 digits)

The 1,4 code is set in the parameter to the decode output bits.

corresponding
(Example of setting)

Up to four M codes can be set in a single parameter.


(a)

#6644 #6645
(4) Decode (upon

. . . 73 . . . 77
output reset)

72 ?6

71 75

70 74
setting parameter

#6644

. . . For setting ing to the MD3

the M code corresponddecode output MDO to

holdlreset

(a)

Sets whether output upon #6135 DO to

to hold reset. D7

or

reset

the

decode

(b)
t! 6644 ~--~- ~

.xxxlx~

When the decode output is to be held, the numerals corresponding to each bit are added The result is output to #1224. to the total.

(Commanded by 2 digits)

22

MD7 MD61MD5 128 64 32

MD4 MD3 MD2 MD1 MDO 16 8 4 2 1

2.7.8.4 Example Processing

of High-speed

M Function

The following are simple examples high-speed M functions. (1) Sets the parameter
#6644 #6645 #6646 #6647 (2) 01; M60; M61; M62; M63; M64; M65; M67; M30; (3) 02; M70; M71; M72; M73; M74; M75; M76 ; h177; M30:

of the

(for setting, resetting). M code setting


M code resetting setting for

Value of each is to be held (Exampje {M~~ M {;$$ JM67 of .. . ... ::: . .. setting)

bit

when

the

decode

output

63 62 61 60
67 66 65 64 73 72 71 70 77 76 75 74

Set MD1 output Reset MD1 output Set MD4 output Reset MD4 output Set MD7

setting

for

\M77
When set

OUtpUt ... Reset MD7 outpUt


the the decode output parameters as M code is to be follows. setting kept upon

reset,

#6644 00006100 #6645 67000064


#6646 #6647 00007100 77000074

for

setting

The left program is executed. The bits corresponding to #1224 DO to D7 are set. M60 to M67 do not wait for FIN. If an M code is to be held, set the total of each bit corresponding to #6135. The value to be held is set in #1224 at the end of the program.

M code

setting

for

resetting

The value of each bit corresponding and MD7 are added to #6135,

to MD4

The left program is executed. The bits corresponding to #1224 DO to D7 are reset. The M codes M70 to M71 do not wait for FIN .

16 + 128 = 144 144 is set in #6135. #1224 is 1001000 upon reset.

2.8
2.8.1

preparatory
LIST OF GCODES

Functions

(G-FuNcTlON)

2.7.8.3

Notes
Do not set the original the following M code. hl codes when setting Address G, plus ing of the block. their groups. (1) G codes following up to 3 digits Table 2. 8.1 specify the meangives G codes and

(1)

. MOO, MO1, M02,

M30 When these M codes code functions are lost; has the priority.

are set, the original M the highspeed M code

are broadly two types.

classified

into

the

. M90 to M99
When functions these have M codes are the priority. set, the M code
Modal G-code Non-modal G-ccdeeffestive G-cede G-code block. Meaning until the other

when (2)

Check that the above-M setting the M code.

codes

are

not

found

of the same group is commanded. effective only in the commanded

If an other process is waiting to be completed in the same block, it waits for the first process to be completed. Do not command same block. * If executed, two or more

G-code

(3)

M codes

in

the

(2)

G codes in groups modal. When the the power switch,

from

01 through

11 are

alarm

occurs.

in Table

2.8.

control is energized with the G codes marked with 1 are automatically selected.

23

2.8.

1 LIST

OF

G CODES

(Centd)

(3)

(3)

G codes of * group in the Table 2.8.1 are They should not be commanded nonmodal. together with the other G codes in one block . The modal G codes can be commanded ly in a block. mixed(4)

Along the axes specified by GOO, the machine slide moves in rapid traverse rates , independently of each other. The resultant tool locus may not be a straight line, and when working out the program , care must be taken to avoid fouling between the tool and the workpiece . GOO is a modal G code in the 01 group When it is commanded, it remains effective until other G codes in the 01 group are commanded.
For the positioning with G 00, the pulse distribution is started only after the ERROR DETECT state is turned on, and the program advances to the next block only upon the activation of the ERROR DETECT state after the completion of the pulse distribution. When this G code is used, therefore, the workpiece edges are machined true, and rounding is avoided. Notes :

(4)

(5)

G codes in Class B are basic, and those in Class O are options. The use of optional G codes is determined by the machine tool design. See the machine tool builders manual, Standard G codes can be coverted to special G codes I by parameters. This is a basic feature, and, when parameter #6005D7 is set to 1, standard G codes are converted to special G code 1. When the sDecial G code IIowtion is incor.

(5)

(6)

(7)

porated in the control, the setting of param eter #6005D 7 to 1 will convert G codes to Setting the parameter special G codes D. to the standto O will reconvert the G codes ard G codes.

(6) a.

The ERROR DETECT ON state means the decrease of the servo lag pulses to the permissible level after the pulse distribution for move command. When T code is commanded, GOO should be put in the T-code block. GOO is required for designation of tool traverse rate for tool offset motion using T code. EXAMPLE G50 GOO X150. TO1O1 Z1OO. S1OOO ; M03 ; . . . of traverse motion

b, 2.8.2

POSITIONING (G 00, G 06) Positioning (G 00) GOO X( U)...


This rate

2.8.2.1 (1)

Z(W) . . .

command moves to the point (X,

a tool at rapid traverse Z ) in the coordinate

system set by the G50 command or moves it away by (U, W ) from the present point for each axis independently. (2) For the rapid traverse rate, as it depends refer to the machine tool

. . . GOO for designation rate for tool offset

upon the builders EXAMPLE X-Axis: Z-Axis:

machine, manual.

(GOO)

X30.

Z5.

. . . GOO can be omitted in positioning.

12 m/min 6 m/min
-x

i
-5

,/

P- 1 -. ~,
/

E--l

i f
30 DIA

1-

-z [
z

B: Table 2.8 List of G Codes O:

Basic Optional

G Code r r G 00 GO1 G 02 G 03 G 04 GC6 GIO r r

Gscf~l G Special Code II


GOiI GO1 G 02 G 03 G04 GOB G 10 ~ 1 v v G# GOI

Group Positioning (rapid traverse feed)

Function

Section B B, O B, O B, O B

Linear interpolation, 01 ~

angle programming for linear interpolation

G02 G03 GM G06 GIO

Circular interpolation CW, (radius R designation) Gircular interpolation CCW, (radius R designation) . Dwel I * ERROR DETECT OFF positioning

Tool offset value setup

G 22

G 22 G 23 G 27 G28 G 29 Gm G31 ~ I i

G 22 G 23 G 27 G 28 G 29 G30 G31

Radius programming for circular interpolation CW

01
Radius programming fm circular interpolation -~ CCW

G 23 --+
G 27 G 28 G29 G30 G31

Automatic

return to reference

point

%T=T%G35 G% G%

tam=
Retunrn to 2nd reference Threadcutting, Variable lead threadcutting Tool set error compensation Stored stroke limit 3rd aea

-=

point

continuous threadcutting,

multi-start

O
* 07

-~

threadcutting

o
o o

G=
G 37 G38

G36
G 37 G28

G36
G 37 G28

Stored stroke limit 2nd area ON


Stored stroke limit 2nd area OFF Stored stroke limit 3rd area ON

o o o
0 0 0 0

06 ~-.;: v
G41 G 42 G43 G44

G39 G40
G41 G 42 G43 -. G44

G 39 r G40
G41 G 42 G43 G44 06 I

OFF

~ Tool radius compsmsation cancel


Tool radius compensation Tool radius compensation No. 1 No. 2 No. 3 No. 4

Tool radius ccfnpensation _ Tool radius compensation

~ shows the G codes selectedwhen the control is powered or reset. Notes : 1.

2.

When the control is reset, whether G code of 01 group should be GOO or kept as the current one can be set by parameter #6005D6. Radius programming for circularinterpolation can be made by G02 and G03 instead of G22 G23, respectively. Cornering can be programmed by GO1 instead of Gll and G12. Refer to 2.8.7 Cornering. Initial states of G codes of 05, 07, 08 groups when power is applied are determined by their respective setting data (#6001D0, Dl, D2).

3.

The followingG codes for initial state when power is applied can be set by parameters.
4. Group 01 04 03 G code GOOor G980r G900r GOl G99 G91 Parameter #6005 DG #?6005 DI h6005 Do 5.

25

2.8

PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS

(G-FUNCTION)

(Centd)
B: Basic Optional

Table Special G Code

2.8

List of G Codes

(Centd)

O:

G Code

; ~s~~~ll

II

Group

~ Coordinate system setup

Function

Section B
0

G 50
G 51 G 65

G 92

G 92
G,, --* G65 t--

.
G51 G65 *

Maximum spindle revolution setup, work coordinate system setup 4 -- --- i Return of current display value to origin L -.. User macro simple call User macro modal call User macro modal call cancel Mirror image by programming ON - L Mirror image by programming OFF Finishing cycle Stock removal in turning .- - .

- ~

0 0 --0

G 72 G 73 G 74 G 75 G 76 G90 G 92 I

G 72 G 73 G 74 G 75 G 76 G 77 G78 I

G 74 . G75 G76 G 77 G78 G 20 G21 I ~ 01 ; *

Stock removal in facing Pattern repeating Pack drilling in Z-axis -Grooving in X-axis Automatic threadcutting cycle .L I

Multiple

repetitive cycies

0 0 0 0

Turning cycle A

Threading cycle 4---B &-- -~ Facing cycle B

Constant surface speed control Constant surface speed control cancel Feed per minute (mm/min) Feed per revolution Absolute command 03 G 91 G122 r G123 Gill GI12 T r I G 122 ~ G 123 Gill G712 1 ~ G123 Gill GI12 I * ; G122 : 11 Tcml registration end Ta~r multiple beveling/rounding

o +. -
-H..

----J

(mm/rev) .---c B ] Tool life control 7.


o

G93

Incremental

command .

Tool registration start

0 .. ..
o . o

Arc multiple beveling/rounding

~ showe the G codes is powered or reset. Notes 1. :

selected

when

the

control

2.

When the control is reset, whether G code of 01 group should be GOO or kept as the current one can be set by parameter #6005D6. Radius programming for circularinterpolation can be made by G02 and G03 insteacl of G22 G23, respectively. Cornering can be programmed by GOI instead of Gll and G12. Refer to 2.8.7 Cornering. Initial states of G codes of 05, 07, 08 groups when power is applied are determined by their respective setting data (#6001D0, D1 , D2).

The following G codes for initial state when power is applied can be set by parameters.
Group 01 I I G cede GOOor G980r G900r G(X G99 G91 i

3.

I
~

Parameter #6005 ~6 ti6005 DI 46005 Do

4.

5.

041
03

2.8,2,2
(1) G06

Error

Detect off Positioning


z(w).;

(G06)

EXAMPLE G50 X1OO. T0202 x35. z60. s600 Z5. F1. ; ---Q ; Executed by ; M03 ;

x(u)

GOO With this command is identical to that following a. aspects. the positioning of GOO except process for the

@ GO1
G06 is a non-modal It is effective only EXAMPLE GOO G06 X.. x.. x.. b. . . . Z.. z,. z.. . . . ; ; ; Move Move by by G06 GOO G code in the * group. in the programmed block.

ZO

x60.

FO.2

linear interpolation GO1.

+x

i i // /

With the positioning of G06, the positioning pulse dis~ribution &. immediately started on the completion of the pulse distribution for the preceding block, after making an ERROR DETECT check, and the program advances to the next block after the comple tion of the pulse distribution process. For this reason, wrokpiece edges are rounded to the extent of servo lag pulses. The ERROR on DETECT only the ON /OFF signals

Note :

Angle

programming

for

linear

interpolation

(SMZ) are effective have no influence G06.

for cutting feeds, and motion under GOO and

With the control equipped with this option, linear interpolation can be commanded at specified angles. GO1 X(U) A.. . F(E) . .. ; (a)

2.8.3 GO1

LINEAR INTERPOLATION (G 01) 1


X(U) Z(W).. F(E). 0 ;

or GO1 Z(W). A.. F(E) . .. ; (b)

A tool is moved to the point (X, Z ) on a straight line at the traverse rate designated by the F or code in the coordinate system set by G50 moved away by (U, W ) from the present point. . F or E code must be specified in the block containing the G 01 or in the previous block. If Feedrate designot, i; causes a format error. nated by the F or E code is the tangential feedrate.
+,x
POSITION PROGRAMMED

With these commands, a linear interpolation will be executed by specifying angle A in the + direction of the Z-axis and distance either in X or Zaxis direction. rate in the tangential direction by the F or E code. The range specifiable with address The feedis specified of angle

A iS as fOllOWS.

% Metric Input

programmable

Range of Angle A

O- *360.0i)O0 z
\~ 1 /

Inch Input

u 2

I PRESENT TOOI POSITION

+2

27

2. 8.3

LINEAR

INTERPOLATION Table 2.9

(GO1) t (Centd)

Table

2.10 Meaning

Sign

Meaning

G 02

Circular interpolation, clockwise


.. ~ ..

A+

Angle counterclockwise from +Z-axis,

A-z

(; {1?

*
G 03

Circular interpolation, counterclockwise .

+sr.rl-pyJ-y&%
Angle clockwise + Z-axis, from Z

c)(;1)3
-z

.A

x (u) z (w)
I

End point of arc on X-axis (Diameter value) End point of arc on Z-axis

+ .x EfQD POINT
z Iv START POINT L j

Distance fTom start wi nt of arc to arc center on X-axis (Radius value) .

ii!=
~ CENTER --2 K

-z

START

POIN1

Distance from start point of arc to arc-center on Z-axis

EXAMPLE
+x

CENTER

~ ~

GO1 GO1

X50. zO.

A+150. A180. ;

FO.3

F
2.8.4

50 DIP

WJ--
CIRCULAR

/ )/
INTERPOLATION

7Y-f+150 / -1 I .
1 -7

U-/
Fig, 2, 9

Circular rant can

interpolation of be programmed

an arc on in a single

multiquadblock.

60
(G 02, G 03)

EXAMPLE

.x

G02(G03)

X( U)...

Z(W) ... 1.. . K.. . F(E) ...; B

A tool is moved on the circular arc whose center is away from the present position by (I, K) . The end point of the arc is (X, Z) in the coordinate system set by G 50 or away from the present position by (U, W) A tool moves along a circular arc at the traverse rate specified by the F or E code. The meanings of G02, G03 and each address are shown below .

60

1~
DIA

100 [11A

.Z

Table 2.11
Arc Center Coordinate I (10000, 100 60 =20mm 2 J2~2 K
202. ,;~

Note

shaded
2700)

that if the end point is designated area, the alarm is not displayed continue point to move coordinate the endlessly. should be

in the and the

tool The

will end

precisely is

commanded

when

circular

interpolation

= 19.596+

19.60

mm

The

above

case

can

be programmed

as follows.

apphed to the tool nose radius compensation, or the tool may not move properly. Generally, it is recommendable to calculate up to the next digit of least input increment and count fractions over 1/2 as one and disregard the rest.

3.

Gol ] G02

z-.

F.. . z-46.6

; 120. K-19.6 F.. . ; \

x60.

When the control is provided with Radius Programming for Circular Interpolation, radius value can be commanded by G02, G03 instead of G22, G23.

EXAMPLE The feedrate commanded feedrate.


x

by

the

F code

is

a.

G03

X80,0

Z15. O

1-10.0

K-30.

F150

tangential Notes :

END

1.

The direction of the arc of G02 for Clockwise is defined as follows. !! When viewing the X, Z plane in -Y direction in the righthand coordinate system, the tool moves clockwise from the beginning point of the arc. Therefore, the direction of rotation in the plate (-X, Z plane) in the figure below is presented inversely.
b. G03

aaatl=?oo
I
I
15.00

55.00

U40. O

W-40.

1-10.0

K-30.

F150

. u
-.
2. point of arc.

G 03

40.00

When the end point of arc is not designated on the circumference specified by the radius, the alarm is not displayed and the tool path The mark o indicates the end is as follows.

20.00

&
/

42

&
40 {Jo CENTER_~30 lx) 15 0[1 :,500

END POINT

20.00

10.0(1

*-W/c
CENTER

2.8.5 (1)

DWELL (G 04)
G04 U(P) . . . ;

This command interrupts feed for the length of time designated by the address U or P.
o--0

(2)
P /

Dwell block

is programmed .

as an independent

29

2.8,
(3)

5 DWELL

(G04)

(Centd)
time which U or P is can be as folP

Table

2, 12

The maximum length of designated with address lows .

Meaning

For specifying

tool offset No.

Dwell

time:

0.001

to

9999.99

seconds

x z

For changing the tcol offset value to the specified value. value to the original

Dwell time increment. EXAMPLE G04 G04 Notes 1. : U3.5 P3500 :

is

not

influenced

by

input/output

u w

For adding the specified tool offset values.

For changing the tool radius to the specified vai ue.

... . . .

3. 5-second 3. 5-second

dwell dwell The offset programmed values for which no are not changed. address is

G04 is a nonmodal

G code. EXAMPLE G1O P16 -r x32.5 wO.05 ; mm is added value to

2.

The counting of dwell time is started from the instant the control enters the ERROR DETECT ON state upon completion of the move command block before G04. Therefore, with G04 UO ; , the control advances to the next block immediately after detecting the ERROR DETECT ON state. EXAMPLE GO1 G04 GO1 W-1. UO.2 W-1. F25 ; ; ; program, 1 mm feed (2) O. 2 second 1 mm feed chip cutting feed dwell time

T7

~ 0.05
Z- axis

LContents of is changed

tool

offset

No.

16

The above format is used to make offset value tapes, and to store the values in Offset M-emery at once. The tape format is as follows .

With the above is obtained.

/
+x

\
Label

02 DWELL 1 mm

Q 0;
GIOP. GIOP. .. .. X... X... Z.. Z.. .R .R .. . ... ; ;

h .

GIO P... ~
2. 8.6

X.. ~

. Z.. .R

... ;

TOOL OFFSET VALUE (G 10)+


tool offset values can be

With G 10 command, set and corrected. (1) G1O P-. . X(U).

Z(W)

C..

R...

; are

With this command, tool set or corrected in part

offset values programs.

30

2.8.7
(1)

CORNERING (G 11, G @
Beveling (Gil) X( U)... Gll K.. 1.. . . This command removes Addresses the sharp corner of X and Z cannot be in a block. is shown below.

workpiece.

{ Z(W) . . .

F(E)

. . .

specified Meaning

simultaneously of each address

Table 2.13
Beveling for X-axis Beveling for Z-axis

Gll

X( U)...

K..,

F(E)...

Gll

Z(W)...

1... F(E)...

KEND POINT

K+
END POINT ,,50

N 45
+X

I+
START POINT I @7 / w

Ux 2
(DIAMEI ER)

I
K * L [
~

m
START POINT

I
Bevellng Value

f JZ
Bevellng Value (Raalus Value)

Bevellng

Dlrecllon

Llimited within (2) Rounding

Beve, ing Dlrectlon

Beveling values (K and the following values.

I)

are

(G12)

The command format error. GOO ~

exceeding

the

above

value

causes This command performs the rounding of the corner. Addresses X and Z cannot be spec ified simultaneously in a block. The corner ZLS a quarterround. is formed Meaning of

X30.

ZO

Gll

Z-20.

18.

F30

each

address

is

shown

below.

I (Gil)
I

x80. 20. +x

K-7.

7,

DIA

8.

lo

30

DIA

-z

Fig. 2.10

31

2. 8.7

CORNERING

(Gil,

G12)t

(Centd)
Table 2.14

Rounding for X axis

Rounding for Z axis

G12

X( U)...

K..

F(E). .,

G12

Z(W)...

K...

F(E)...

KEND POINT

KEND POINT > \ x [DIAMETER) I iv START ~OINr z b 1+ u ~ / START Po ,N?

-x

L.-...-.,
K L-,,,,,,
T-_

K*
,,!.

T___
T
w

,Our,lr,g

,Ja,e

qcu~d,r,g

c red

Rounding values ( K and the following values.

I)

are

limited

within

Notes

: .

1.
Ill<lwl 2.

]Kl

<lU/21

Gll and G12 are modal G codes in the A group They remain effective until other G codes in the group A are commanded. Gll and G12 are for one axis only. If they are commanded for both axes in the same block, they constitute a format error. EXAMPLE G12 X.. . W.. . K.. . ; Error 050

The

command format

exceeding error.

the

above

value

causes

GOO X20.

ZO

3. : m
.x

25.

no block without In the G 10 or G 12 modes, I and K nor block in which I and K are O can be commanded. If such a block is commanded, correct tool movement can not be assured.

.-. I .970
DIA 9 1 20 f DIA I +7

4. 5.

Tool radius compensation functional is effective to the blocks containing G 11 or G 12.


In the finish form commands G70 through G 73 of the special canned cycle t, blocks contain ing Gll or G12 can be commanded. GO1 code can be used fy identical beveling. X( U)... z(w) . . . instead of Gll to speci-

6.

GO1

7.

I GO1 code can be used instead of G12 to speciHowever, in this case, R must fy rounding. be used instead of I and K. Gol ~ X( U)... Z(W) ... i R... R, ..; F(E) ;

K.. . I 1$. . J

F(E).

32

2.8.8 INCHIMETRIC (G 20, G 21)+


Unit of measurement selectively

DESIGNATION BY G CODE

make the display reset opera b. In principle, tion when current position display (external) is useci. input G

(metric specified

or by

inch) the

of

data is codes.

following

4.

The tool offset values ently in the G20 mode G 20/G21 must the tool offset

are processed and the G21 after

differmode. modifying

be commanded values.

Stored Offset Values 15000

4
I

Processing (Inch)

in G 20

Processing

in G 21

(Metric) 15.000 mm

1,5000 in.

These G codes are programmed at the leading If these G codes end of a block of its own. are commanded, the units of all the following motions are than ged. a. b.
c.

2,8.9 RADIUS PROGRAMMING POLATION (G 22, G 23)+

FOR CIRCULAR iNTER-

Subsequent Tool part Part offset of of

part values

programs

settings manual

and

parameters

In programming, circular interpolation (G02, G03) the control requires the data of the arc-center Normally, they are given by using coordinates. the addresses I and K. (1) In programming of G2.2 or G23, the control automatically calculates the arc center coor dinates (1 , K) from the radius value designated by the interpolation. address R and performs circular

d. e.

movements

Displays

Notes : 1. When G20 or of inch/metric G 21 is commanded, the selection is changed. setting There-

fore, the state of G20/G21 power application depends by parameter #6001D0. EXAMPLE

at the time of on the setting

G22
( G23)

X( IJ) . . .

Z(W)

. . .

R..

F(E)

. . .

1
ER CR 01234 G20 ; ; Inch input designation

A tool moves along the circular arc whose center is radius R away from the present position. The end point of arc is at coor Z) set by G50 or is away from dinates (x, the present position by (U, W) . Tool moves along the circular arc at feedrate designated by F code.

(2)

The meanings of are shown below. Designaticm of

G22,

G23

and

each

address

(3)
T

radius

value

Radius value R is commanded by incremental value with a sign of radius programming. 2. When G 20 /G 21 selection is commanded program, take the following procedure forehand. a. Cancel used. work coordinate system in the be-

In this case,
When radius value R > 0, an arc, describing less than 180, and when R < 0, an arc describin~; more than 180 are specified.

( G50T ) , if

tool b. Cancel compensation 3. Take mand

position (G41

offset, G44)

and .

tool

radius

the following of G20/G21

procedure selection. point (G50)

after

the

com-

a. Program absolute zero before move command

for .

all axes

33

2. 8.9 RADIUS INTERPOLATION

PROGRAMMING (G22, G23)t


Table 2, 15

FOR CIRCULAR (Centd))

Notes

1.
2.

G22 and
until In the

G23 codes other G code


G22 or G23

are modal. of 01 group mode, the

They are kept is commanded . block in which

Meaning Circular interpolation by radius for


Cw

G 22 .I G 23

x
\

R is not contained or R is should not be commanded. designated by I and K .

designated as zero Radius cannot be

Circular interpolation by radius for Ccw

... L!4_
~(,z

3.

G 23

When R is varied with both start and end points fixed , the tool will move along the following circular arc .

-z

x (u)

=F-R -t

The X-coordinate
(Diameter value)

of the end of the i

+~
~

END POl-

arc

The Z-coordinate

of the end of the ~

l:w.~po. ---:
, +
z
!

Distance from the start point of arc to arc center (Incremental value with sign)

--&7 K:GIN
in not the following case, the arc cen

Therefore, ter does

exist which (alarms 031, 034).

causes data error

R < (Distance

between

start 2

point

and

end

point)

4. 5.

Tool for

nose the

radius

compensation G22 or

is

effective

block

containing

G23.

START POINT

Fig. 2.11

The block containing designated in finishing special canned cycles When the control is

G22 or 23 can be shape commands (G70 to G73) . provided with radius

of

6.

proby G02,

&
u X2 z \v

END POINT .-

ARC CENTER R

gramming option , circular interpolation radius (R) programming can be made G03 instead of G22, G23.

by

START POINT

2.8.10

REFERENCE POINT CHECK (G 27) G27 X(u) ... Z(W) . . . ;

(1)

I Fig. 2.12

EXAMPLE

GO1
$, G02

X40.
I(X40. )

Z-10.
z-52.5

F20

;
R30. (F20) ; ]

With this command, the tool is positioned to the absolute coordinate point ( X , Z ) or incremental coordinate point (U, W) by moving along the two axes simultaneously, and then, the position is checked for conformance with the reference point. For the axis for which no command is given, positioning and check ing are not executed.

ARC CENTER / / END POINT ,/ R 3U

.Z

Fig, 2, 13

(2)

If the position is the reference point, the returntoreference lamp lights. The posi tion is the reference point in all the axial directions specified, the automatic operation If the position is not is continued further. the reference point even along one axis, this constitutes the return-positionerror, and the automatic operation is interrupted. (Cycle start lamp goes off. )

INTERIU

POSITIONING

POINT

REFERENCE POINT

Notes 1.

The reference point is an fixed point on the machine tool to which the tool can return by the motion under the control of the automatic reference point return or G28 automatic ref See 6.2.1, erence point return function. Automatic Reference Point Return . If G27 is commanded in the tool position offset mode, the tool returns to the position displaced from the reference point by the tool offset value. Positioning cannot be made at the reference point. Before commanding G27, cancel the tool offset mode.

4+
-x .-
RETURN POINT z i \i x z

,,AR:TOY cd+--TO REFERENCE

+Z

Fig,

2.14

2.

The tool does not which instruction

move along is omitted.

the

axis

for

(2)

When the return pleted, Reference

to

reference motion Point Return lamp

is com for the returns the

EXAMPLE
a.

returned axis lights. When the tool to the reference point in both axes, automatic operation is resumed. offset in the block pre-

Canceling tool ceding G27. TEIE]OO G27 U.. . W..

(3)
; . ; block TGT.; containing OO ; G 27.

b.

Canceling G27 U.. .

in the W.. .

The series of RETURN TO REFERENCE motions are as follows, With initialpower application, the return motions to the reference point are as shown below in the low-speed mode as shown below.
APPROACH SPEED 1

3,

The mirror image function is effective with motion commanded by G27. To avoid the return position error, command G 27 in the G 69 mode ( Opposite tool post mirror image off) .

the

,pEE,r-U::j::TER

I SPEED REDUCTION LI!vIIT SVV REFERENCE POINT

2.8.11

AUTOMATIC RETURN TO REFERENCE POINT

Fig, 2.15 Thereafter, the RETURN TO REFERENCE POINT motion is in rapid traverse as under the command of GOO.
I
RAPID TRAVERSE

(G 28) (1) G28 X(U) z(w) ... ;

With this command, the tool can be brought back to the reference point automatically after passing througkl an interim point. In other words, the tool positions to the commanded absolute coordinate position (X , Z ) or incremental position (U, W) by moving simultaneously along the two axes, and then automatically returns to the reference point by the reference point return function. The specified point (X, Z) or (U, W) is known as INTERIM POSITIONING POINT , or INTERIivl POINT.

Fig. 2.16 (4) However, when low traverse speed is speci fied by parameter #6010D 5 set to 1, the same law motion speed as in the 1st time is obtaineci.

35

2.8.11

POINT Notes : 1.

AUTOMATIC RETURN (G28) (Centd)

TO

REFERENCE

(2)

For parameter setting and other details of the low traverse speed return motion shown in Fig. 2.8.11.2, refer to 5.2.1 Manual Return to Reference Point. The starting point for RETURN TO REFERENCE POINT motion must be in the area shown in Fig. 2.8.11.4. Fig. 2.8.11.3 can be started from any position. (3)

When G.29 is used, consideration on the distance between points B and C is unnecessary in programming. Especially when incremental instructions are used, this function is useful to return the tool to the original co ordinate system after returning to the reference zero. Motions C + B and B + D are made simultaneously along the two axes in rapid traverse. However, the tool will not move in the direction for which instruction is omitted.

2.

(4)
RETURN DIRECTION

Where G28 is programmed several times, the point B creat~d by the latest G28 instruction is effective for the motion by G 29. EXAMPLE Coordinates these two (absolute input) point is equivalent to

of interim blocks.

N20

G28

X1O.

z20.

;G.
(30. l--r ;

20. )

3.

Before writing G28 in the program, cancel the tool position offset as shown below . a. Canceling TU G28 b. X.. . in the preceding ; : block TE~OO containg ; G28 block N25 N26 I G28 G29 x30. x-40. ; z-50. 20. )

1100 Z.. .

Canceling G28 X.. .

in the Z.. .

GOO X30. GOO X-40.

Z20. Z-50.

I I

+-;

Notes : 1.
Commanding G 29 without G28 after turning on the an error 059. the execution of control constitutes

4.

When G 28 is written offset or tool radius offset or compensation celled.

with the tool position compensation on, the is automatically can-

2.

2,8.12
(1)

RETURN FROM REFERENCE POINT (G 29)


With this function, the tool is positioned to a specified point via the interim point, after it has been once returned to the reference zero point by the AUTOMATIC RETURN TO REFERENCE ZERO COMMAND (G28) .

cancel tool offset before proIn principle, gramming G28 or G29. If they are programmed while offset is effective, the interim point B will be offset, and the tool will pass point B.

G28

X..

Z.. .
B

Point A-+B+C
(reference zero point)

Point

G29

X..
Point

Z.. .
D ~ -&

Point

C+B+D

[REFERENCE

ZERO POINT,

RETURN TO REFERENCE ZERO INTERIL! POINT

.4.4

Fig, 2.17

3.

Commanding G29 in the TOOL RADIUS COMPENSATION mode (G40 - G44) or in CANNED CYCLES (G70 - G76, G90, G92 and G94) constitutes an error. EXAMPLE N50 N51 N52 N53 T0300 G28 T0400 G29 ; u80. ; u-80. w40. ; Notes
c ,/ / ,0 ,/ B / \ \ -x \ / (REFERENCE ZERO POINT)

EXAMPL12 G30 U-40. W30 ;

T-],,,,/-~~E:
w20. ;
INTERIM TO 2N0 POINT POINT REFEPENCE PARAMETER POINT t 6613

: Before commanding G 30, after the energiza-

1.

tion of the control, G28 or MANUAL RETURN TO REFERENCE POINT must be executed.

2.

For the 2rld REFERENCE POINT RETURN motion, there is no area from where returning is impossible , and the tool can be return from any position.

\\ \ \ \\ +Z ID

3.

The

same notes

3.

~L~l-

Automatic Return to G30 command.

and 4. of to Reference

(5) for Point

2.8.11 apply

%--l
2.8.13 (1)

40

2ND REFERENCE POINT RETURN (G 30)+ G30 X( U)... Z(W) . . . ;

4. When G29 is commanded after G 30, the tool moves via the interim point specified by G30 to the position specified by G 29. However, the interim point is renewed only in the axis specified by G30.

With this command, the tool first moves to an interim positioning point (X, Z) or (U, W ) in two axial directions simultaneously, and then, moves to the 2nd reference point. The tool does not move along the axis for which no coordinate position is specified.

2.8.14 (1)

SKIP FUNCTION (G 31)+ G31


X( U)... Z(W) . . . (F(E)...);

2ND z

REFERENCE

With this command, a special linear inter polation is executed. During the interpolation movement under this instruction, the tool interrupts the interpolation motion immediately, when a skip and proceeds to the signal is received. next block,

POINT

(2)

The motion varies with block.

after the receipt the instruction

of of

a skip the next

signal

a.
INTERIM POINT

When the next block mental values :

is programmed

in incre-

Fig. 2.18 (2) The 2nd reference point is specified in advance in terms of the distance from the 1st reference point commanded by G28, by parameters #6612 and #6613.

The tool moves incrementally in accordance with the next block from the point where the interpolation is interrupted.

37

2, 8.14

SKIP

FUNCTION

(G31)t

(Centd)

(3)

G31 is a non-modal

G code.

EXAMPLE G31 GO1 W120. u1OO. ; ;


ACTUAL MOTION

When no skip signal is received during the execution of the block containing G 31, the tool stops at the end of the block, and alarm 087 is displayed. (4) The feedrate for blocks containing G 31 are set in the following two methods, selectively specified by parameter #6019D 4. Designation by F in the same way normal programs . as with #6232.

COMMAND

,-+
1~~

--

:J
1 I ,50

a. b

Presetting of feedrates by parameter When

~z

/
SKIP SIGNAL ON

(5)

a skip signal is received, the coordinate


are automatically stored

values at that moment as parameter data. #6568 b. When the next block lute values only for The tool moves position in the at the position ceived, if axis EXAMPLE is programmed one axis: in absofor storing storing be

X coordinate Z coordinate used as system

value value variables

#656 9 for

to the specified specified axis. where the skip is not specified.

coordinate It remains signal is re

These data can in user macros. Notes


1.

: When parameter #6004D0 is set to 1, the program is advanced to the next block automatically even when no skip signal. is received during the execution of the block of G31. Before programming G31, be sure to program

G31
GO1

Z400.
X1OO.

;
;
ACTUAL MOTION x --400 Lz --l SKIP SIGNAL ON COMMAND ~ v ~ 100 DIA

2.

G40 for canceling SATION . Failure alarm 024.

TOOL RADIUS COMPENto do this initiates

3.

Commanding the program the current

G31 with skip signal ON to the next ~loc~ without block.

advances executing

c.

When the next block is programmed lute values along two axes : The tool from the received. EXAMPLE moves point

in abso-

2.8.15 THREAD CUTTING, CONTINUOUS THREAD CUTTING (G 32)


This taper ing. (1) function threads, is for cutting scrolls and straight threads, for continuous thread

to the commanded position at which a skip signal is

G31 GO1

W1OO. X300.
Z200.
x

SKIP SIGNAL

\ 2
200. \ 300 \ \ ___ 100 L I / ON

G32

X( U)...

Z(W)

. . .

F(E)

. . .

; up

DIP

With this command, the tool cuts threads to the point (X, Z ) specified in absolute coordinates or (U, W ) specified in incre mental coordinate values, at a lead desig nated by F or E code.

(2)

The range E codes is

of leads to be as follows.

specified

by

F and

Table

2.16

Feedrates follows.

are

limited

by

spindle-speed

S as

Metric Metric Input Metric output Inch Input E 26 I E 0,~0004-E19.685000 in. = F24 I FO,CxJOlF19.6850 in.

Output

F(E,XS<= 24,000 mm/min


F(E)x S S 2,400 in./min

inch Output

The half (4)

upper limit the above. Command below.

of

X-axis

speed

component

is

format

of threadcutting

is shown

F 32 Metric Input Inch output inch Input E 26 F24 E34

I I

FO.01 -F 1270.00 mm Type

Table

2.17

EO.0303-E1270.0000mm Straight Thread

Command format

FO.COl-F50.0000in.

R~ EO.O3OO1O-F5O.OOCOOO in.

F code E code

is

for

normal precise

thread thread

cutting. cutting.

is for

(3)

The direction of lead codes is shown below.


Direction

specified

by

F and

dI=*
EXAMPLE : Straight Thread Thread leac[ L = 5.0 mm 6~=5. Omm Omm mm tiz=3. Cutting depth = 1.0

of Lead

Limitation of Taper Angle

I
45

Direction of Lead

+x
o L~

(x,z)

~~~~

Lead in the direction of Z-axis

+2

0>

Lead in the direction of X-axis

+x

cI
I I

--------END POINT

Y
/ +Z START PO IN T

(iJ

GO(I u--42.
G32
w--68. ;

; F5. O

GOO IJ,Q.
w 68. u-44.

; ; ; ;

G32

w--68.

GOO U44. x

L [Lead)

Fig.

2.19

.-
I

_12+2

2.8.15

THREAD CUTTING, CONTINUOUS (Centd)

THREAD CUTTING (G 32) EXAMPLE Thread : Taper lead

Thread

L = 4.0 mm 51=3. 62=2. Omm Omm

1.

e
(b) Worm Screw

Cutting depth

= 1.0 mm

GOO G32

X13. x38.

; W-35. F4. o;

GOO x60. W35. X-n. G32 X36.

; ; ; w-35. ; ;
Notes

Since the stop time between thread cutting blocks is approximately zero, smooth, continuous thread cutting is possible. If thread lead specification is changed midway, the thread becomes irregular near the boundary of blocks. : Allowances 6 1 and 6 z are cutting because lead error starting and end points. required occurs for near thread the

1.

GOO x60.

+x

I
I
I

v f-------~
i & !

.Z

(.

2.
I

If spindle speed is not constant during thread cutting, the leads become incorrect due to the servo lag. thread G92 is not effective at (or G76t) should be

3.
Continuous G32 (G32) (G32) thread cutting Z(W) Z(W). Z(W). . . . F(E) ; ; . . . ;

Threading up for If necessary, G32. commanded.

X( U)... X( U)... X(U)

4.

The following operation is disregarded ing thread cutting including G 32

dur-

0.0 . Feedrate Override o Feed Hold Operation . Single Block Operation

Regarded

as

100%

This command

executes thread cutting.

5. 6.

The G 32 command in G98 mode.

should

not

be

commanded

In Dry rate.
Do

Run

mode,

the tool moves

at Jog feed-

7,

not command M code for continuous thread the commanded block cutting. If commanded, stops as feedhold and will not permit continuous thread cutting.

Pipe (a)

Joint

(6)

Allowance
+x

for

lead

error(

61,

2)

2.8.16

MULTI -S,TART THREAD CUTTING (G 32)


function, multistart threads containing more threads per lead can be machined shifting the starting point. In thread the tool feed is started in phase with a

With this

tJ-

#- i
Fig. 2.20
+Z

two or without cutting,

start point pulse ( 1 pulse /revolution) generated by a pulse generator installed on the spindle to control the starting point of thread always at the same position around the workpiece circumference.

61 and 6 z are obtained following equation.

approximately

from

the

Table 2.18
Equation

With the multi-start thread cutting function, after cutting a thread by controlling the starting point by the starting point pulse, another thread is cut by starting the cutting feed at an angular position of the spindle which is displaced from the starting pulse position by a preset angle.

L (mm): Lead of thread S(r/min): Spindle speed K: Constent (Normal value: a ( ): 33) Accuracy of thread _ AL. Lead error

m
LEAD

1In: Natural logarithm (Icg e)

1150

1/100

1/150

1/200

1/250

1/300
Two Start Thread

(ln~

1)

2.91

3.61

4.01

4.29

; 4.52

4.70

Fig. 2.21

(1)
EXAMPLE Lead Spindle Thread 61> (2) _3. ~= 60. K ox 500 60.K x3.61 3.0X500 60. K =3. =0 Omm p,qmm of thread speed cutting L = 3.0 mm

G32

X((J)

. . .

Z(W)

. . .

F(E)

. . .

B..

S = 500 rjrnin a = 1/100

With this command, the tool cuts a thread starting at an angular position which is displaced from the position corresponding to the starting pulse by an angle specified by B, to X(U) or Z(W) point, at a lead specified by F Or E code. by address B in the cutting function is

The data specified multistart thread as follows. Least input

increment: range:

O. 001 deg. O s B s 360.000

62>

Programmable

When decimal point input is used, B 1.=ldeg. The B code is non-modal, and is effective only in the programmed block.

41

2.8.16

MULTI-START

THREAD

CUTTING

(G32)

EXAMPLE G32 W. W. B90 Continuous ting cannot because of this block. thread cutbe performed feedhold at

(Centd) (3) Number of starts and


B code

G32

In principle, the thread


the the

starting points on workpiece circumference sh&jd divide circumference into equal portions. EXAMPLE GOO G32 GOO U.. W.. U.. . . ; ; W.. . . . . :

Two-start ; F.-. ;
1

Thread

2START THREAD START:NG POINT

3-START TbREACI STARTING PO NT

4-START THREAD STARTING POINT

~ Threading

of

part

I@)

@&@

w.. u..

1 S- n-READ 21,: 1PEA2

NO 8 CO MtJAh D E180

1 ST H REAC 2ND THRE/t2 3RD T}it?EA3

NC e c c 1.1 b> -.h 2 620 E240

1 ST T-IREAD 2N0 TH5EAD 3 R13 THREAD 4 T+ THREAD

hO B COMI.lANG B90 3180 B270

G32

Fig. 2, 22

GOO G32 Notes : GOO 1. Since (4096 the angular pulses/rev. position detection ) generated from pulses the spinw.. u G32 .

U.. W.. U.. ; ; W..

. . .

; B180 ;

dle pulse generator is used to define the angular position of the spindle with respect to the starting point as controlled by the B command, the least detectable increment is 360/4096 pulses ~, O. 08790/pulse. From the position commanded by B codes, an error up to fl pulse may occur. 2. The angular position from the starting can be specified in both forward and directions by BO - B 360. commands. pulse reverse

B180.

3.

When B command is made to specify angles outside the permissible range (O - 360.000) , alarm 062 is displayed, If multi-start thread cutting B is specified, continuous thread cutting cannot be executed.

2.8.17 (1)

VARIABLE LEAD THREAD CUTTING+


G34 X( U)... z(w) . . . K.. F(E) -$ ;

(3)

Confirmation variable lead

calculation thread

for

K command

of

cutting. in the following

a. With this command, controlled with the lead per revolution variable increase specified lead screws or decrease by address are of K.

K command conditions.

is restricted

(i)

Feedrate at end point must programmable range. 500 mrfl/rev (metric output) rev (inch output) Feedrate value. at end point must

not or

exceed 50 in

(ii)

not

be

minus

(iii)

Accumulated value of movement lead variation must not exceed mm (metric output) or 419.4303 output) . Feedrate variation (metric The control above using F: Fixed rev)

due to 4194.303 in (inch

VARIABLE

LEAD SCREW

(iv)

Fig.

2.23

Variable

Lead

Threadcutting b.

change corres~ondin~ to lead must not exceed 5, 400 mm /rein output) or 540 in /mm (inch output checks the restriction the following equation. lead command (mm /rev described

(2)

The lead Least

range screws input 0.0001 (Metric

of K programmable is as follows. increment: mm/rev. Input) range: feedrate feedrate 50 in/rev.

for

variable

or

in,f

0.000001 (Inch

in./rev. Input) K:

Variable in./ rev )

lead

command

(mm/rev

or

Programmable a. The highest programmable (metric) or

w: is within the maximum range ( 500 mm/rev (inch)) resulting following. output) output) from changes s: N:

Distance between on Zaxis (mm or For facing screw, as U on X-axis. Spindle speed

start inch)

and .

end

points

distance

is specified

b.

The total displacement in lead is within the 4194.303 419.4303 mm (metric in. (inch

(rev/rein) for movement points (rev) + (F +*)2 K between

Spindle speed start and end -(F N=

+$)

c.

Feedrate variation (metric Lead

change corresponding to lead must not exceed 5, 400 mm /rein output) or 540 inJmm (inch output). should not be minus value.

+2.

K.W

(i)

Equaticm F + ~

for + KN

limit

in

a.

(i) mm/rev in/rev (ii) or

d.

value

S 500.000 50.0000 limit in a.

Notes : (ii) 1. When variable lead threads are cut by continuous block programs, command pulses are interrupt ed at block junctions. (iii) 2. If K commands exceed the permissible alarm (1 060!! will be displayed. range, Equaticm for (F+~-)2+2Kw>I) Equaticm ~KN2 for S limit in a. (iii)

4194, 303 mm or 419,4303 in (iv) or 540 in/rein

3.

When G 34 command is executed in the Dry Run mode, the tool moves only at the speed specified by the manual continuous feedrate command, if parameter SCRDRN ( #6019 BIT5) is set to 1. !11oIN!! ( #6006D5) When parameter 1, least increment for K commands mm/rev or O. 0001 in./rev. Commanding address alarm 11(360.II B in G34 block is set is to

(iv)

Equaticln & . K.N

for S

limit 5,400

in a.

mm/min

4.

0.001

5.

causes

43

2.8.18

STORED STROKE LIMIT (G 36-G 39)+

G36

U.. z=

W..

1..

K..

This function is for preventing the entry of the tool into the prohibited area, in both automatic operation mode and manual operation mode, to Three types of pro secure safer operation. hibited areas can be set up as shown below.
1 ST PROHIBITED AREA (BY PARAMETER) OLTSIDE PROHIBITION 2ND PROHIBITED (BY G36) I AREA, / .4

coordinate

coordinate is turned ; . area off by a

The area check function single code block G37 (3) a. Setting 3rd prohibited

Set up + side boundary point E and - side boundary point F by the setting function. Selectively designate the inside side of the area between points parameter #6007D 1. or the outE and F by

b.

I) -x

c1
INSIDE OR OUTSIDE PROHIBITION ~ P

INSIDE OR OUTSIDE PROHIBITION

= c. In addition to the method by the setting function, the following instruction can be used to set a prohibited area, and to turn on the area check function also. G38 U.. . W.. 1.. . K.. . ;

4+--- z
(1)
a. Setting Set B by b. 1st prohibited boundary + side

3RD PROHIBITED AREA (BY G 38)

Fig. 2.25

Y--rPoint E coordinate - side boundary

Point F coordinate is turned ; .


for

area A and The area check function single code block G39 A off by a

parameter. the range between points

The area outside B is prohibited. This area programs. can not

Table 2.19 Parameters and Settings


be specified by part
Setting Prohibited Area Z axis
z 66m

c.

\
Ist Point A

X axis
z 66m

Division

(2) a.

Setting
Set

2nd

prohibited

area - side boundary

Prohibited

Area

Point B

~ %06

8 &137

Parameter

+ side

D by b.

the

boundary C and setting function.

Selectively designate the inside side of the area between points parameter #6007D0.

or the outC and E by

(4)

Coordinate

system

for

area

setting in

= c. In addition to the method by the setting can be to turn

The above Points A through G are all set absolute values on the machine coordinate is, the position system (MACHINE) . That is written as the distance from the ( lst)

function, the following instruction used to set a prohibited area, and on the area check function also.

reference point ( 1 = least output (move) inthis function will not crement) . Therefore, become effective unless the manual or automatic RETURN TO REFERENCE ZERO is ex ecuted once after the energization of the control.

44

(5)

Effective-ineffective are a

selection

of

prohibited

With the following setting, the 2nd and the 3rd prohibited areas are selectively made effective and ineffective.

Setting

Meaning 2nd prohibited area check OFF 2nd prohibited area check ON 3rd prohibited area check OFF 3rd prohibited area check ON

o
~6001 DI 1 0 1

EXAMPLE
1STPROHI131TED AREA
+x 1 A (2003, 10CO) )

When G36 through G39 are commanded, these setting data are automatically rewritten. Therefore, the ON or OFF state ultimately specified by G code commands or setting The 1st profunction becomes effective. hibited area is always in the CHECK ON mode.

/ /
i:D AREA(NISIDE) 10,-8000) E (-4000 6500) / / / / / / / 7-/////////
B . D (-11000, -10000)

+Z

REFERENCE POINT

ir

3RD PROHIBITED AREA(INSIDE)

(6)

Starting

area check

7000, -9000) /// ////////// / /h.

<_.

WORKPIECE CENTER

When the tool is returned to the reference point once manually or automatically after the energization of the control, the area check function is started immediately. Therefore, if the reference point is in the prohibited area, immediately, STROKE LIMIT ERROR will be caused. In this case, turn off the area check function, and change the data.

Table 2.20

Inside/Outside

(7)

Stored When

stroke

limit

error

the tool enters the prohibited area, it stops just inside the boundary line, and the control enters STORED STROKE LIMIT ERROR state. In this case, the tool can
only tion. be moved manually in the return direc-

=s
Pararnetar/ Setting

Contents

~ 6007 DO a 6007 D, ~ 65rXI

o o

5000

+ 6501
:6502

6000

11000

# 6503

10000

(8

Displaying

remaining

distance

Third Area

With this function, the distance between the current tool position and the boundary of the prohibited area in the X and Z directions are displayed on the CRT . Refer to 4.3.4.6. Stored Stroke Limit .
First Area

e;
#e601
?6606 + 6607

~L

1000
11000 ICQOO ) B

Notes : 1. The points on the axes are included Two prohibited overlapping. In the CHECK MACHINE function boundary line in both in the prohibited area. can be set with partial

2.

areas

3.

LOCK is not

ON mode, effective.

AREA

45

2 8.19 TOOL NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION (G 40 THROUGH G 44) of a nose radius of lathe tools, there is a deviation between the desired curve and the Therefore, tool offsets actual curve produced. are not enough for taper and circular cuttings. The tool nose radius compensation option resolves See Fig. 2.26. the problem of nose radius.

VI RTJAL TIP NOSE

Because

ALL ROUND INSERT

Fig.

2.27

m-+

For the writing of radius values for tool nose radius compensation, refer to Fig . 4.3.5 Displaying and Writing Tool Offset Data. The address character is R .

(2) a.
CENTER PROGRAtiMED CIJTTING CONTOUR, WITH TOOL NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION j \ TOOL NOSER

code

designation for tool nose with radius sign of compensation (+ or T -) .

The must

T code be

programmed

~n

~~

(In the case

4-digit)

l--T-l-

VIRTUAL TOOL NOSE

Fig. 2.26

(1) a.

Tool Radius

nose

radius

values ~

L
ll+l! . . .

1- Offset
Tool

number offset and tool compensation number

for tool position nose radius

value

storage

Direction of compensation Right side viewed of tool travel Left side viewed of tool travel 1-

tool

nose

radius

Tool nose radius value must be written in the storage before the tool nose radius compenNumber of pairs that sation is commanded. can be written in the storage depends upon the machine. T T Refer 3-digit: 4-digit: 9 sets 16 or 50 sets Offset Memory+ .

in

the

direction

rl_ll

. . .

in the

direction

..,1. ,,

to 2.6.2, Tool

b. Range
Radius range.

of

tool

nose can

radius be set

values within the following

value

x -lfiii2 4iiL
Fig. 2.28

Metric

Inch

i
o *99.999 I o *9.9999

b .

c.

Setting

of

tool of

nose tool

radius nose

values must be set with-

When a tool is used for turning and for facing , as the direction of tool motion changes , the correct direction of compensation should be programmed with sign of T code .

Radius value out signs.

q,~~. s,~~
,X CO!b)PEhSATION (T ~ LEFT SIDE COMPENSATION

*
Fig. 2.29

-z

The direction of compensation is changed from + to or - to + during program execushould not tion. G40 or T~ U 00 command be necessarily programmed to cancel the tool nose radius compensation.
(3) a.

(ii) When the power is in effect.

supply is turned on, G40

(iii) When the RESET button is depressed, G code of 06 group are cancelled and G40 becomes effective.
(4) Tool sation
a. Fig.

G code designation (G40 to G44) G code of tool nose radius compensation


(G41 to G44) One of G41, G42, G43 and G44 and T code should be programmed before the execution These of tool nose radius compensation. four G codes specify the relationship between the virtual tool nose and the tool center.

motion

on the

tool

nose

radius

compen-

motion

2.31. .

shows

the

outline

of

the

tool

-Ku2) - L=VIRTUAL TOOL TIPS

... ..>
BLOCK OF COMPENSATIOh WITH G 00 :3;,

~, +x

-Z

Q>l G 43 \ TOOL CENTER

Fig.

G~~
Fig. 2,31 2.30

Regardless compensation,

of

the mode of the current

tool nose radius position of the by depress

When the compensation programmed contour of virtual tool tip (

is cancelled, meets with the @ and @) .

the path

virtual tool nose is displayed ing the POS pushbutton. b. Issue G40 pensation. Cautions to cancel the tool

nose

radius

com-

c. (i)

in programming

G code

In compensation mode, the tool center path is deviated by radius from the programmed contour. Therefore, the path of virtual tool nose does not meet with programmed contour. But the current position displayed by depressing POS ke is the position of virtual tool tip ( (iii) bto @).

Since G40 to G44 are modal G codes of 06 group, they are retained until the other G code is commanded. Before switching one of G41, G42, G43 and G44 to another, G40 must be intermediated to cancel the compensation.

The (connection between two blocks in compensation mode is provided by the intersection of tool center paths (M97) and I:)y the circular arc (M96) . In the above diagram, blocks 3 and 4 are connected by a circular arc. Block @ for compensation start and

El
G 42 \ //

n]
G NJ \\

c1
G41 G 44 c1

(iv)

block @ for compensation cancel perform the connection of compensation mode and compensation cancel mode. Program should be made carefully for these blocks. b, Relationship pensaticm between tool tool position nose radius offset com-

c1
G 43

and

Tool nose radius compensation apply to the programmed contour which has been offset by the tool position offset function.

47

2 8.19 TOOL NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION (G 40 THROUGH G 44) (Centd)


~)

(b) GOO GO1 G02 T+0202 G41 U30. x20. W-15. ; z7. 115 F600 FO.2 ; ;

(5)
a.

HOW

to

enter

compensation

mode

@ @

Compensation mode is set when both the tool offset number by T code and G41 (or G42 through G44) are instructed. When this mode is set, tool nose radius compensation is started. More precisely, compensation mode is entered when the AND condition between T code and G code is established. Hence, the order in which these codes are specified does not affect the operation.

Compensation

Mode

7 Movement at Start of Compensation (for GO1)

-x
G U1 CEhTEP .

DIA

3 h -z

b.

At the start of compensation. is offset onto the n~rmal of

the tool the origin

center of the c. If the block of the G41 (or G42 through mode G44) condition

block G41 to G 44 which entered the compensation mode first or of the block immediately The offset is made to the after T code. right of tool advancing direction when T + is specified and to the left when T is specified. Sample Program (a) ~ GOO GOO GO1 T+ O1O1 G41 z-18. Mode X30. FO.25 ; Z5. ; [ ;J (A) : Movement at Start of Compen sation ( for GOO)

satisfying

compensation

(2J
,-, 3 U

does not have the move command, the compensation starts and the tool center is moved on the normal. Since G41 (or G42 through G44) involves such a movement, it is necessary to specify GOO or GO1 in th last or current block for the G code of 01 group. Specification of a G code other than GOO, GO1, and Gll will result in alarm 026. EXAMPLE (B) : G41 (or has no move command.
(c)

G42 through

G44)

Compensation

l@ g (3

GOO GO1 GO1

T+0303 G41 X.. . F.. Z..

; . . ; F.. . ;

48

(d) @ @ GOO
GO1

(ii)

T-0404 G44 F..

; . ;

For an outside corner (tangent-line angle is more than 180) , the movement is controlled. by the following M-code commands: M96 ... Tool radius compensation circular path ON ... Tool radius compensation circular path OFF (execution of intersection calculation)

G03

X..

Z.. .

1..

F..

; M97

m
I
CENTER

G44

M96: Note that the tool center point normal to the start diately after G41 (or G 42 T code, for each of above through (b) . If G41 (or is offset onto the of the block immethrough G44) or examples (a) G42 through G44)

\/\\ m
/ \
., \ .

Circular

Path

Mode

block or the block following T code has no move command, one block ahead is read and the compensation start operation is performed With no move command specion that block. fied, up to two blocks may be programmed However, if three or more consecutively. blocks caused. have no move command, an error is

M97:

Intersection

Computing

Mode

(6)

Movement

in

compensation

mode

Movement of circular path is included in the previous block. Normally, M96 is used for this operation However, when there is a possibility of an overcut in cutting special shapes with the M96, M97 should be used.

When the tool nose radius compensation mode is entered by G 41 (or G 42 through G44) command, the tool center keeps moving along the path which has been offset by the tool nose radius by the program command, until the mode is cancelled by G40 or T l 000 The path is automatically calcucommand. So, only the cut conlated by the control. tour may be specified in the part program. However, the following should be considered for the inter-block movements and special contours: a. (i) Inter-block movement

b, Movement

in GOO mode

The instruction G 00 positions tools independently alc,ng each axis toward the final offset position,. Care should be taken on the cutter path so that tool does not contact the work.

TOOL

MC VEMENT

For an inside corner (tangent-line angle is less than 180) , the intersection point (Intersection is computed and is passed. point computing formula.

GOO G 01

OR

PROGRAMMED COMMAND

Fig.

2.32

v
PASSING POINT INTERSECTION

49

2.8.19

TOOL

NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION

d.

(G 40 THROUGH G 44)+ (Centd )

Command involving sation mode

no movement

in compen-

(6)
c.

Movement Programming mode

in compensation consideration

mode

(Centd)

in compensation

(i)

Be careful not shaped cutting Wrong

to program contour. TT

a wedge-

(a)

M 96

IY.---~--- -=:: --._.:,___________ QINTERSECTION

-------

~;;::oo, f i ;l&cJp,4::

NOSE OF GET IN

The control normally reads two blocks ahead during tool radius compensation mode and calculates the tcml path. If either of these blocks gives no coordinate instructions such as G04 (dwell) , the control reads a block further ahead and makes calculations. When coordinate instructions are missing in three or more blocks , tool radius compensation becomes impossible and accurate tool path can Therefore, in a program not be obtained. where G41 to G44 are used ensure that, after them , two or more blocks without movement command in the compensation plane will not follow . GO1 G41 F.. .

IS 4 FAR AWAY

(b)

Correct T+ T G04 U.. . ; . ;

\l 97 ------i----------L ~ ----. 1 ; j _

\f 97 PROGRAM IS MADE SO THAT TOOL NOSE OF 2 R CAN GET IN THE WENDGE

M..

Compensation is normally made by the two or less blocks without move command.

Q
1

M40 If

(ii)

Program the tool movement so that the tool nose of 2R diameter can be in the contour, e. Wrong
PROGRAMMED CONTOUR

instruction is programmed no movement in three consecutive blocks , tool center is offset on the normal line at the end point of the block immediate before them.
Use If of dummy blocks to specify a move command

(a)

it is impossible

in three or more consecutive blocks and the offset on the normal line is not satisfactory, a dummy block may be inserted. The dummy block does not cause an actual This block is specified for the movement. purpose of providing the data necessary for the tool nose radius computation. For the address of this dummy command, I and K are used. (b) Correct
PROGRAMMED CONTOUR

I:

X-axis

K :

Z -axis

dummy dummy

command command

(incremental) (incremental)

. .

EXAMPLE N1 N2 GO1 X.. .

: G41 z.. . X.. ; . Z,.. F.. . ;

I and

K should of the
,M96

be

signed
arc.

according

to

the

type

circular
CIRCULAR

PATH MODE)

N5 N6 N7 N8 N9 N1O Nll

2.. 1.. fvfxx G04 MM

. .

; K.. . ; Dummy

U.

1
;

Three

blocks or more

block By dummy block N 11, the linear command block of N 10 stops at point A for the following circular movement.

f. Switching
mode

between

T + and

T - in compensation

X. Z. . Ii

z.. ;
11

This coml?ensation provides the switching between T + and T - without canceling the compensation by G40 or T 3P 00 command. EXAMPLE:

%0

IN5

GOO -T+O1O1

; ~

~
THREE BLOCKS OR MORE INCLUDING NO MOVE COMMAND

N6
N7 N8

G41
GO1 x.. .

X.. . Z.. .
X.. ; Z.. . . . Z.. .

;
F..

compensation facing {he proceeding direction


. ;

Designates hand side

right-

Namely, specify incremental to K, which are equivalent in N6 for the dummy mand, If the purpose Remarks: is a circular interpolation, linear dummy block that tion of the tangent line the circular command. EXAMPLE N1O IN1l N12 N13 N14 rN15 N164. GO1 GO1
kfxx

commands
N 10 block

I and com-

block. of the dummy block

r:
N9 N1O
x

T-O1O1 X..

F600 7::::~:eft;

; compensation

> F..

generate the specifies the direcat the start point

(M96

MODE)

of

: Z. 1(-a)
;

F..

; ; I

K(-b)

MOO MM G02 .

; ; X... I Z...

Dummy

block

1...

K...

;I g . Modification of tool offset volume

CENTER

in compenoffset

sation mode code in compensation mode. The originally specified tool offset number remains valid until the compensation mode is cancelled by G40 or T G3 00 command.
-b Nil DUMMY BLOCK (LOQEAR LINE)

It is invalid number by

to newly T

specify

a tool

51

2.8.19

TOOL THROUGH

NOSE

RADIUS (Centd)

COMPENSATION
SINCE THE TOOL POSl TION OFFSET IS CANCELLE2 THE POSITION IS (110 40) FOR THE REFERENCE TOOL \@ c ()[, (;4!

(G40 (6)

G44)

Movement

in compensation

mode

(Centd)

,,7,

However, the tool nose radius value may be changed by varying the offset memory con tents corresponding to the originally speci fied tool offset number, by means of MD I operation. After this modification, the new tool offset number is made valid beginning with the block newly stored in the prefetch buffer.

,, /

---::-----=U

--+---
(b) (T+0202, G41) MOTION ON COMPLETION OF COMPENSATION (GOO)

(7)

How When

to cancel

compensation

mode

@
@ @ @

GO1 GO1 GO1 GOO

X.. U24. G40

Z..

F.. ; z40.

a.

G40 or T q~ 00 is specified, compensation mode is cancelled, terminating the tool nose radius compensation operation.

FO.3 x80. ;

I
F6. ; -1

.~i

% *CJ
~-d
~o

T+0200

CLz . g. U G40

I._.
. j---i6iO; ; G40 ;

____ -; --G~Oj-iOlOo ;

TOlOO b.

Upon termination of compensation, the tool center is offset onto the normal line to the end point of the finalblock in compensation mode, or the block immediately before that for which G40 or T 3700 has been specified. (Consequently, if a retracting which results in acuteangle contour is specified in G40 or T 3E 00 block, no uncut portion is produced. ) Then, the tool moves so that the virtual tool nose matches the end point of the move command specified in G40 or T all 00 block.
EXAMPLE
(a)

--+---z
c.

If

the block of G40 (Nose radius compensation cancel) does not have the mov-e com mand, the virtual tool nose moves to the specified end point.

A :

(T+ O1O1, G41) .~f z

(and T DU 00) commands contain movement. Specify GOO or GO1 in the block previous to or the same as G40. If the G code of 01 group is other than GOO, GO1, or Gil, alarm II027!! will be activated.

G40

21.

1.
(~1 ~ IQ GO1 GOO TO1OO U20. G40 ; FO.25 X11O.

MOTION
TION (GOO) ; Z40. OF

ON

COMPLE-

COl [PENS ATION

si? 1

; ~

in

EXAMPLE B: G 40 block
(c)

Move command for canceling

is not included compensation.

Notes :
a.

programmed errors

shapes that produce

input

(T-0303,

G41)

(i)

When programming compensation, if tool radius d

an inside programmed

arc arc

with tool radius R

@
~

GO1 GO1 GOO

X... G40

Z... F... ; ;

F...

T-0300

G41 \ ,5; / ,. / ~] ,~, MOVEMENT AT , -

62
--. R :> r.. R 7

TOICL

P (d) (T+0404, G44)

COMPENSATION START BY 2

r~:$.?.L --., ,
r
r<d

Outside compensation made even when r < 1 I

is correctly R

G02 GO1 GOO X.. G40 . Z.. F.. . ; . : Z MOVEMENT


I s:H%s8TON I COMMAND AT

-. -

K..

F..

; (ii) When :no intersection point exists on the locus lofthe offset tool center.

T+0400

,--

m
cc ,., .-

NO INTERSECTION

/
\)<

-.

-.

5,2:
, , I ~ TOOL

L_.. -_. i

, /

G44

%
(a)

CENTER

Note that, for each of above examples (a) through (b) , the tool center is temporarily offset onto the normal line to the end point

NO INTERSECTION

of the block immediately before G04 or T E200 command.


When tool nose radius compensation is cancelled by the use of T~E 00 command, the is pertool position offset cancel operation formed concurrently with the operation at tool nose radius compensation termination.

&

R,

(b)

The cancel operation provides the movement in which the virtual tool nose matches the last specified position for which tool
position offset has been cancelled. If co-

existence of these operations is not desired, cancel either of them by the use of GAO
command.

53

2.8.19

TOOL NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION (G 40 THROUGH G 44) (Centd) (iii) When reversing command or an angle close to reversing command is programmed in M97 (Outside Corner Circular Arc Path Off) mode. (a) Reversing command

Usable G codes

Remarks

GOO, GOI, G 96, G 97

G04,

G06,

Gll

Constant surface speed control G 98, G 99 Feed function designation (G90, G 9t) designation Absolute/incremental

G02, G70,

G03, G71, G112

G12, G72,

G22, G73

G23 Inhibited in the block of compensation cancel or start

Command

including circular arc

(b)

Command

close

to reversing

Multiple repetitive cycle Gill,

Multiple cornering (Beveling, rounding)

d. The
fied

subprogram (M98 or M99) in compensation mode.

may

be

speci-

In M96 mode, all of the correctly compensated.

above

shapes

are

e.

When the tool offset mand of 00, T:= ing two meanings : Tool Tool The position nose offset

number is T code com00 command has the follow-

b.

Interference

check from cutting deeper was programmed in into the advance.

(i) ( ii)

is

cancelled. is cancelled. specified:

To prevent the tool finished shape than

radius

compensation can be

Interference check error is activated when the difference of moving direction is 90 to 270 between the programmed virtual tool nose and compensated tool When an error is detected, the block prior center, to the block in which overcutting may occur is immediately stopped and an alarm is shown.

following

program

N2 N3

G41 GOO

; T+O1O1 ;

This function does not always prevent over cutting. There might be occasions when overcutting is not detected as an error or normal cutting is detected as an error.
:1 N21 GOO TOlOO ;

TOOL RADIUS COMPENSATION MODE WITH TOOL NO . 110111

TOOL

RADIUS CANCEL

COMPENSATION TOOL POSITION OFFSET

N25

GOO

T-0202

; TOOL RADIUS COMPENSATION MODE WITH TOOL NO. 02

OIRECTION

IS 180C

DIFFERENT

:1
c.

G codes

usable

in

compensation

mode N40 GOO G40 T0200 ; ; should N41

As a rule G codes other than shown below not be used in the compensation mode.

54

f. Inhibition
(i)

of MDI

mode

i,

Even in M96 mode sation and circular

(tool arc

nose path

radius compenare on) , if

Operation in the MDI mode cannot be performed in the compensation mode. When ,RESET button is depressed, GOO (compensation cancel) becomes effective and the operation in the MD I mode becomes possible. G40 through G44 cannot operation in MDI mode. Command or compensation operation for be written

circular arc distances AX, AZ are smaller than the fixed values, the tool does not follow the corner circular arc path but moves directly to point B . The fixed values are those which are set by parameter #6230.

~z
@X,2 -- \
. TOOL MOVEMEN1

(ii)

by the

g.

canceling
*
PROGRAMMED COMMANO

The following command or operation during tool radius compensation, cancels the compensation completely or temporarily. The command or operation should not be performed:

A/
S NEGNR S NEGNER Constant parameter value for setting

In

case

of

AX/2 AZ

NEGNR:

1. Three

consecutive blocks without move command 1 MO1 command

2< MOO or 3.

M-code set by parameter for stopping advance reading (6 Max)


G commands for advance reading G38, G39 M02, Reset Turning stopping G36, G37,

Temporarily cancelled
EXAMPLE ?41 G50
X140. s1700 G41

A :
z.30. M03 XO ; T+02132 z5. ; ;

N2 N3

COO (cOO)

4.

N4 GO1 20 F0,2 ; 1 Completely can celled, i j rJ5 X20, ; N6 z-20. ; N7 X30, w-15, S11OO ;

_TOOL NOSE CO,MPENSATION START BLOCK

5. 6. 7.

M30 commands operation

N8 G12 w-20. 13, ; ROUNDING


N9

off

power

supply

Gll

X50.

K-3,

S700

BEVELING

N1O GO1 X-70. ,

h. Commands
The for 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. they G28, G50, G74, G90, G31 G68, G122,

causing

error must not be given,

following cause G29, G51 G75, G92, - G35 G69

commands errors. G30

CIRCULAR Nll G22 X90. Z-90, R20, s360 ; ARC BY RADIUS N12 GO1 xI1O. S300 ;
N13 N14 G04 (GO1) UO : DWELL

TOOL NOSE COMPENSATION

Z-11O. ;

N15 X120, ; G76 G94 TOOL NOSE N16 GOO x140. Z30. T0200 ; ~o~p~Ns*~~oN
COMPLETE N17 G40 ;

BLOCK

,. ~lj :___

=-------------------------------a :O;
CC$,IPENSATION ---ill;-CANCEL - -----__.. T~j:~&~:N->;,@ OF%ET MOTION,,. /. PROGRAMMED CONTOUR COMPENSATION START +X:J I 50. // ~ 3;3 ; II I j ,{ \ j# /, ~~~L CENTER

G123

1109;$

.1 DIA
1 ~ 30.

,! DIA 15.
1

3 fv/M

BEVELING

R3 RI:) UN61NG

20.DIA 20.
b

II N4 5

: 1 It

-z

20.
b

:!0. k

15.
r

20.

K-no.

--90. P-70

55

2.8.19 TOOL NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION (G 40 THROUGH G 44) (Centd)

2.8.19.2

Conditions

for the Automatic to be Enabled

Nose

Compensation
(Centd)

Function

(7)

How to cances

compensation
~. T -

mode

becomes effective Automatic nose R compensation the projected tool nose point by four conditions: designation set by the offset number, the radius of tool nose R, the offset side setting by G41 and G42, and the T code command. The following are the details.

2.8.19 point (1)

.2.1

Designation

of

the

projected

tool

nose

Direction

of

the

projected

tool

nose

point

T+ (a) Normal TInsert


All ROUND INSERT

The shift direction of automatic nose R is prescribed by determining the projected tool nose point position by specifying a numeral of O to 9. The direction is as shown in Fig. 2.34 (X

plus specification) . 2 6

G41 T.

G 42 ~_

4 G -il T:

G42 T,+

@
VI RTIJAL TOOL NOSE

71
I

09

I
Fig. 2.34

L
Projected

8
Tool Nose Direction

(2)

How

to

set

the

projected nose point 2.35) .

tool is set

nose

point the

The projected offset screen (a) Select

tool (Fig, the

through

m ~~ function. n tool offset memory

(b)
is decided
Fig. 2.33

All

Round

by setting
Relations for Tool

Insert ( G code to be used side of virtual tool nose. )


G code and Sign of T Code

(b)

Select the corresponding from TO1 to T49.

between Nose

Radius

Compensation.

projected

tool

nose

point

is

3.

2.8.19.1

Automatic

Nose

R Function

Nose R compensation is performed by the nose R control point (0 to 9) command and G41, G42. The offset side switching from the end face to the outer diameter becomes simple.
When the T command is executed, the selected and the nose R and control point corresponding to the tool is also selected, tool is

Then the tool coordinate system based machine coordinate system is set.
After the T command is given, for nose R compensation is performed control point and G41, G42.

on the
Fig. 2.35 Offset Screen

the calculation by the

56

2.8.19.2.2
memory

How to set the tool nose R data

(1) (a)

Approach

GOO + GO1 or

relief

GO1 + GOO

The tool nose offset screen (a) (b) Select the

R data memory (Fig. 2.35).

is

set

through

the

OFS

function. tool offset memory

When the cutting command move axis direction is larger than 45 against the Z-axis vector (wall) (1 X/21 > I ZI ), a projected parallel to the Z-axis is assumed, to calculate the compensation with the cutting move axis. The position. machine moves toward this calculated

Select the corresponding from TO1 to T49.

(b)

tool

nose

R data

is

O, 8 mm ,

2.8.

19.2.3

G41, direction by the ).

G42

command is plus

When the cutting command move axis direction is smaller than 45 against the Z-axis ( lX/21 < = I ZI ) , a projected vector (wall) parallel to the Z- axis is assumed, to calculate the compensation with the cutting move axis. The position. machine moves toward this calculated

The offset commanded specification G40: G41: G42:

of the current cutting G41, G42 commands (X

Nose R offset off Forward direction of nose R Forward direction of nose R

x on on the the left right is center is center


LARGER THAN -z 45 a

2.8.19.2.4

code

command
PROJECTED VECTOR

The T code number ( 4 digits) determines the coordinate system, wear off set, and tool nose R. For details, refer to par. 2,6.5 ! New coordinate system setting function. It
PROJECTED VECTOR

(a)
x

T** -rT

$$

offset

number

(wear (tool

offset) nose R)
SMALLER -z THAN 45

01 to

16/01

to 49

Too,
(tool 01 to

number
coordinate 16/01 memory number)

to 49

(b) 2.8.19.3 Offset Calculation Approach of Automatic Relief


has

Nose

Compensation

and

The automatic nose R compensation function been improved from the nose R compensation function of the conventional YASNAC LX3. 2.8. 19.3.1 compensated. performed.
2.8. 19.3.2

The In

GOO + GOO block is short, positioning

not alone

is

Compensation

is

performed

for

approach GOO + GO1 (G02, G03) by setting a prolected vector (wall) on the tool to prevent excess infeed or shock, as follows. Compensation is performed for relief GO 1 G03) + GOO, by setting a projected vector to prevent insufficient cut, as follows.

(G02. (wall)

57

2. 8.19.3

Offset

Calculation and

of Automatic

Nose

Compensation (Example)

Approach

Relief (Centd)

Tool nose point 3

U7

-7.
ED

,/ /
/ / / / ,/// /,,

,
,, . I

(PARALLEL

WITH

I
PROJECTED

(a)

THAN

45-1 ---\ ~ Ooy:<;.. ,

PROJECTED VECTOR

(pARALLEL z-AXIS)

PROJECTED vECTO R

//. M-WITH #T,, Q ,, / &/ c:, 1 I

(b)

co],

@42)

l/ /

SMALLER THAN 45

GOO(G42:I

(2)

Approach (or G03)

GOO + G02 + GOO

(or

G03)

or

relief

G02

(a)

When the circular cutting command move direction is larger than 45 against the Z-axis, a projected vector (wall) parallel the Zaxis is assumed, to calculate the compensation with the cutting move axis, The position. machine moves toward this

axis to

calculated

(b)

When the circular cutting command move axis direction is smaller than 45 against the Zaxis, a vector (wall) parallel to the Zaxis: is assumed, to calculate the compensation with the cutting move axis, The position. machine moves toward this calculated

58

( Example)

Tool

nose

point

PROJECTED

VECTOR

SMAIIER

THAN

45

PROJECTED

VECTOR ?HAN 45 / /

QQ , G,/

j;/ @/

SMAIIER

T C03(G G03(G 42) 42) /

59

2. 8.19.3 Offset Calculation of Automatic Nose Compensation Approach and Relief (Centd)
Table 2.20A Automatic

Nose

R Approach

and

Relief

Patterns
LINEAR

CIRCULAR 45 ~ OR LESS MORE THAN 45

\\

i, \ \
C=l

2.8.19.4
Cancel Nose

The

G40

GOIXZIK Available in the

; Command Automatic

Function R Function

is Also

ZIK : command cancel The G40 GOO X function (menti=ned~at=) , ~s well as the same function by the GO I command are available. This commands command, makes a projected wall by the I, in the block before the G40 GO1 to execute the nose R calculation. K
ABSOLUTE ZERO POINT (O, O) d

x .
2

+Z

Notes :
1.

The nose R center is on the normal of the end point in the G40 GOO X Z ; block or G40 single-block. The nose R complete cancel is performed in the block immediately before the G51 singleblock or G28 block, The cross point is calculated in the block immediately before G40 GOO X Z I K ; and the vector indicated by ~, K. r When GO1 and G41 (G42) are commanded at the same time, the nose R center will be on the normal of the start point of the next block . However, in canned cycle, start up can be performed by GO1 G42 of the first block, but cannot be performed by repeating the command later. (2) G50 U.. .

Fig. 2.34

2.

W.. .

; (Incremental

G50 )

3.

When the addresses U and W are specified instead of X and Z, the new absolute coordinate is set up by adding incremental values U (X-axis) and W ( Z-axis) to the absolute coordinate previously set. When the tools the incremental use f ul. groups. are very cliff erent in length, G 50 (addresses U, W) is

4.

The tools should be divided into two Then, the difference between the length of the reference tool and that of the second group of tools can be set at the incremental G 50 command and an absolute coordinate system can be stored. G50 U1OO. W-1OO. ; . . . Setting Position of B

5.

; and G40 GO1 Z I ; are G40 GO1 X K of the sam~command format as th~ ch>mferin g command, but the cancel function has priority only when the G40 command is given.
+x B I H FOSITION OF THE SECONO GROUP

100.

G50 COMMAND OF REFERENCE

FOSITION TOOL

50 y

/(G50x

2.8.20 (G 50)

PROGRAMMING

OF ABSOLUTE ZERO POINT

Absolute coordinate system should be set before After setting up the absolute move command. all motions can be commanded coordinate system, on the absolute coordinate system.

+------+
Fig. 2.35

(1)

G50

X..

Z..

This command makes the present position of tool tip the absolute coordinates (X, Z) . The values with a sign following the addresses X and Z are the distances between tool tip and the absolute zero point (O, O) to be Therefore, it can be said that G50 set. command specifies the absolute zero point.

61

2.8.20 PROGRAMMING (G 50) (Centd ) (3)

OF ABSOLUTE ZERO POINT

4.

When

Assume that the tool No. 01 is reference tool, and perform the setting of the following coordinate system for this tool: G50 X80. z62. ;

the power supply is turned on, the preof tool is set to the coordinate sent position Therefore, the absolute coordinate (o, o). system should be set up before operation.

5.

The current position of the tool in G 50 coor dinate system is shown in POSITION ABSOLUTE of current position display. The coordinate system which was set is not affected by reset operation. The cmrdinate system is reset by one of the following operations:
The

6, then , select the tool No. 02 which has the tool position compensation value shown in the figure below and peroform the compensation operation, and the tool No. 02 moves to point A.
N3 N4 G50 GOO x80. TO1O1 z62. ; ;
(ii)

(i)

reset operation 4.3.4.2, POSITION

by ORG
ABSOLUTE)

key

(see
is per-

formed. G50 mode The XO ZO ; command and is executed. power


is

is written

in MDI

(iii)
7.

turned

on

again.

N1O

GOO

T0202

When setting work coordinate system by G50, Work parameter #6o 18 D7 can select whether System Shift in 2.6.5 will be efCoordinate fective or not.

2.8.21
TOOL NO 02

MAXIMUM SPINDLE-SPEED SETTING (G 50)t


function S 4digit G50 S.. is used for designation . ;

H+
G50 COMMAND POSITION AT TOOI NO 01
~;

This with (1)


=

the control
option.

provided

40mm

+------+z
Fig. 2,36

the address S Four digits following the upper limit of spindle speed specifies in rpm. If an S command exceeding the limit is issued in subsequent blocks, the spindle speed is governed at the upper limit,
(2)

If the coordinate system setting is performed tool and tool position com with the reference pensation is applied to the other tool as shown above, the tool movement may be programmed on a single coordinate system for alltool noses.
Notes :

In G 96 (Constant Surface Speed Control) mode, when spindle speed rises up too fast as the current X-coordinate of the tool is too small, the spindle speed is clipped the limit. EXAMPLE

1. When

T , S and M commands following that in the block

are programmed containing G50, in the block. rate for tool

G50

S2000

; spindle speed is clipped at

be programmed GOO should the traverse This designates offset motion.


G50 GOO
2.

The maximum 2000 r/rein. Notes :

X.. S500

Z.. M03

; TO1O1 ;

1.

G code which is valid only G 50 is a nonmodal block. in the specified the other Generally, be G codes, and M, S, and T codes cannot

Maximum spindle speed specified by G50 can be displayed on the CRT display. Refer to 4.3.2.1, Command Data Display. The specified maximum spindle speed is not cleared by reset operation. In case of S 4-digit designation B , unit of Refer to address S is not shown by rpm. machine tool builders manual. For S 2-digit designation, this function cannot be used.

2. 3.

specified in the same block. Note that is a ;or G50 T.. . ; command G50 S.. . separate feature and is not for coordinate system setting.
3.

be commanded after G 50 should set and tool radius compensation

the tool offare cancelled

62

2.8.22

WORK COORDINATE MULTI-SHIFT

(G 50T, G 51)+
+Z
Ztn I

This feasure is used in combination with 5.2.3, Measured Workpiece Value Direct Input option. Hence itis necessary for the programmer to be familiarwith paragraph 5.2.3. The purpose of this feature is to retain a work coordinate system with a certain point on the work used as absolute zero point by performing G 50T coordinate system setting at the replace ment position of each tool. In other words, programming may be performed with a single coordinate system throughout the entire machining.

Tn

Atn

TOOL SLIDE AT THE POSITION INDICATED BY CURRENT POSITION DISPLAY (0, O) (SEE NOTE 1) Xtn

Zm r -1 Xm (< T, I \ :~g~~ DIRECT COORDINATE SYSTEM SET BY TOR AT WORK MEASURED VALUE INPUTOPERATION +Z % wORKPIECE

(1) Tool coordinate value memory


a.

(number)

It is necessary, before specifying G 50T, to write the coordinate data for each tool to the tool coordinate memory. For the writMeasured Working procedure, see 5.2.3, pieceValue Direct Input.
The number of available tool coordinate memory units corresponds to the number of tool offset memory combinations as shown below.
Number of Tool Offset Memcxy Combinations %tilable Menwy Tool Coordinate Number

Fig. 2.37

(2)
a.

Work G50

coordinate system setting (G50T)


TZLAA 1-1--

b.

Specifies tool offset number


(00
to

50)

Specifies memory

number set the

tool coordinate (51 to 99)


coordinate with setting

Using

this

command,

system for each of the following work value: Work coordinate system setting value Content of programmed
Tool Coordinate Memory I Tool No.

K axis and Z-axis coordinate system

c. For ease of use, write the coordinate data for tool No. 01 in tool coordinate memory No. 51, etc. , as shown below:

tool memory

coordinate

[~:~n: 1[ 1
+ Content of programmed tool offset memory offset

1! unit current position value is Note : the one which is shown in POSITION [EXTERNAL] screen of the current position display (POS ) on CRT display.

b. Usually,
number

00 in the tool specify specification field AA . :

d.

It

ory

is assumed contains

that the tool coordinate the following coordinate

memdata

EXAMPLE

Xtn and Ztn for each tool Tn:

G50

T51OO
L

;
1100,1 specifies the work

coordinate system setting with the contents of tool offset memory being zero. When the above program is specified with the tool slide at a given position (for example, x, z in the unit current position display) , the work coordinate system defined by the operator is set correctly as shown below :

63

2,8.22

WORK COORDiNATE MULTI-SHIFT

(G50T,

G 51)T

4.

(Centd)
T1 WHEN TOOL SLIDE IS AT A GIVEN POSITION (\, :)

When the G 50 T work coordinate system setting is performed, 2.6.4, Work Coordinate System Shift is made valid. The current position of the tool in the set work coordinate system is shown in the cur rent position value POSITION ABSOLUTE. It is not shown in POSITION EXTERNAL. The work coordinate system set by G 50 T cannot be cancelled by a reset operation. EXAMPLE A : (The start point is current position display (0, 0))

5.

-x

M
z,,
r, / WORK COORDINATE SYSTEM

+--T--;T,
P, -~ . ~

I ,

--i 6.

1 VJHEN TOOL SLIDE IS AT POSITION (O, 0)

X,l

N1 G50 T51OO

Work coordinate system setting for tool No. 01.

N2 GOO TO1O1 M03 s1OO ; Selection of tool No. 01 (Note 1). (Machining by tool No. 01)
2.38

Fig.

c.

G50

TOOOO

N20Goox. N21 G50

..z. T5200

..; ;

By this command, the coordinate system is set with the unit current position value. This means that the canceling of the work coordinate system setting is performed with the content of tool coordinate memory = O and the content of tool offset memory = 0 by the specification of TOOOO. (3)
a.

N22

GOO T0202

Positioning to a given point. Work coordinate system setting for tool No. 02. Selection of tool No. 02 (Note 1) .

(Machinig Return to current position origin (G 51) to the the unit N40 G51

by

tool

No.

02)

By G51 ; command, tool is returned point at rapid traverse rate where current X-axis position value and Z-axis. a part program is (O,

O) , on both

Return display

to current (O, O) .

position

b.

With

that

uses

work

coordinate system start point is the (O, O) in principle, command facilitates point (O, O) after c. G51 command a single block

setting, the machining current position value Hence, the use of G51 the return to the start completion of machining. always be specified on

Note 1: The tool position offset in TO1O1 and T0202 commands may be used for the When specified compensation for tool wear. during machining, the tool position offset may also be used for the compensation for taper machining.

should basis.

Notes : 1. G 50 T and G51 are nonmodal G codes which are valid only for the specified blocks. When this function O (G50 off) . is preset used, of set parameter

2.

#6005D5to display is 3.

POS-EXTERNAL

G51 ; command is equivalent two block commands.

to the

following

wCRK

COORDINATE

SYSTEM

m Consequently, after the execution of this command, the tool offset number is cancelled together with the work coordinate system, setting the tool offset number to 00.

MACHINING BY TOOL NO 01, 02 CAN BE PROGRAMMED ON THIS COORDINATE SYSTEM

64

Notes : EXAMPLE B:

N1 N2

G50

T51OO

; M03 S1OOO ;

GOO TO1O1

If the machining which was started by the following program is interrupted and the program is restarted without returning the tool to the machining start point, the tool correctly moves to the first approach posi tion. N1

(Machined

by

TO1)

N25

G50 GOO

TOOOO x-50. . . .

; z-35. ; Tool replacement

G50

T51OO ;

N26

N2 N3 @ N4

GO1O1 G96

position

S150

M03 z2.5

; ;
iN27 N28 G50 GOO T5200 T02020

of T 02 is current position display (-50, -35) . ;I M03 s800 ;

GOO x20.

PROGRAM STARTED AT THE POSITION OF CURRENT POSITION DISPLAY (20 27 5) AFTER MACHINING INTERRUPTION /

(Machining

by

T 02)

-x

p
(
/1
WORK COORDINATE SYSTEM

.P
T 01
-rO1
40. B

--l

MACHINING CURRENT 10 o)

START POSITION POSITION OISPLAY

N48 The by

G51

; system are setting as follows: values

coordinate this command ) )

480.

A APPROACH

POSITION

[20

25)

X z

= (-50. = (-35.

+ 110. +40.

= 60. = 5.

~z

TOOL COORDINATE 51X=80 512=40

MEMORY

88
This is because N1 G50 T51OO ; command at point B performs coordinate system set ting with the following values to retain the work coordinate system, thus keeping approach position A unchanged: = = 60. 12.5
P+x 110 / F--h. s. 40. 47.5 $

1
= MACHINING START POSITION = CURRENT POSITION DISPLAY (O, 0)

TO

DI.A

30. 2
100D[A
35.

X = (-20. Z = (-27.5)

) + (80. ) + (40. )

Z=i.

I
T

To,[Z

T 01

EXAMPLE

C :

This example shows a program for which the replacement position of each tool is different from each other, and the values for work coordinate system setting .

Tool Coordinate Memory No.


51 52

x
Im. 110.

z
47.5 40.

+r z
\ wORK COORDINATE SYSTEM

x=

60.

DIP,

28.23

MACRO PROGRAMS (G65

AND G67)

Special programs written by the machine builder or user by the use of a group of instructions are memory. These registered in the part program programs can be called by the use of G65 or G66
command These to execute special them . programs are referred to as the

The argument designation: in calling a macro program body from the main program makes it possible to assign the real numbers to the variables in the body. This enables this macro program to run as a series of specific programs that provide tool movements, In this manual, the macro program body is some times referred to as simply, macro. II

macro program body, which can be written and stored in the same format as a subprogram. 2. 8.23.1
Main Program

Macro Program Call Commands


body manners: ma~ be called in the

User
/+09001

Macro

Body

A macro program
following fiv;

#
G65 P9001
(Argument Designation)

r ~ Variable

No.

Type of Call

Code

-. tiemams

/
L

Operation Command Control Command

1
( 1)

1 2 3 4 5

Simple call Modal call Call by arbitrary G cede Call by M code Call by T code

G 65 G 66 Gxx Mxx Txxxx 4digits max. G 67: For cancel

YI

M99

Main

Program

Subprogram Simple Call (G65) (argument whose designation) program ; number was

G65 The

P.. . L.. .
macro

program,

specified by p) is called and is executed L times. The default value of L is 1. When the designation of an argument to the macro program is desired, specify it in (argument designation) . I!Argument designation is the assignment of real numbers

used in the to the Ilocal variables For details, see 2.8.23.2, macro program. ARGUMENT DESIGNATION. Modal Call (G66 and P.. . L.. . (argument G67) designation) ;

However.
gram ( 1) (2) allows:

unlike

a subprogram,

a macro

pro-

(2) G66

Use of variables.
Computation between variables or between

constants. (3) Use of al branch. These to provide complicated control commands such as a condition-

This command calls the macro subroutine specified by program number P. Each time a move command is executed, the specified macro is run L times. G67 ; cancels the modal callmode.

features enable the user macro body a generalized program that requires computations and decisions .

This command

(3) Gxx

Macro

Call

by

Arbitary

G Code ;

(5)

Macro

Call

by

Code

(argument

designation)

All the T code commands mand .


G. . .
X.. .

provide a macro call com-

This provides the command with is equivalent to (argument designation) ; . For Gxx, G65 P... ten G codes of GO1 through G199 excluding those designated by NC maker can be set by parameter. The macro program numbers which correspond to these G codes are as follows:

Z..

Txxxx

With this command, the macro of program num ber 09000 is executed after the move command in the same block is completed.
Transmission of T code and TF signal is not performed. Whether a T code is to be used as a macro call command may be specified by the following parameter : Parameter No.

#6120
program

~. . Sets
number

G code which 09010.

calls

the

macro

of

#6121 . . ~ Sets G code which program number 09011.

calls

the

macro

of

\
#6129 ...
Sets G

#6134 number code which calls the macro of 09019.


o ... T code

designation is handled as a T code.


as a macro of program

program

1 . . . T code
Note : Macro call by arbitrary G code permits Namely, the macro which only sin gle nesting. was called for by using arbitrary G code, M code, or T code does not permit another macro call by arbitrary code.

designation is handled call command to call the macro number 09000.

(4) G.

Macro X.

Call
Z--

by

M Code

hixx;

This command may call macros. In this case, the macro is executed after the move command is completed in that block. MF and M codes are not For Mxx, four M codes may be destransmitted. ignated by parameter excluding MOO, MO1, M02, M30, M90 through M99. which calls the macro of

When a T code is specified as a macro call command, the value designated by T XXXX (up to decimal 4 digits) becomes the argument of common variable #149. NOTE THAT THE ARGUMENT DESIGNATION OTHER THAN THIS IS NOT PERMITTED . When a T code is programmed in a macro subroutine that has been called by an arbitrary G code or by a macro M or T code, it will be processed like a normal T code.

(6)
a.

Multiple

Call Call is And called G66 Modal from Call sub-

G65 Simple
a subprogram

#6130
program

. . ~ Sets M code
number 09001.

As

another

#6131 . program

~ Sets M code which number 09002.

calls

the

macro

of

#6132 . . . Sets M code which program number 09003. #6133 ~ .. Sets M code which program number 09004.

calls

the

macro

of

program, a macro program may be called from another macro program. Quadruple nesting is permitted for simple call and modal call combined. Multiple call is disabled for the macro call by arbitrary G code, or M code or T code.

calls

the

macro

of

b, In

Multiple

Call

by

G66 Modal

Call

NOTE DOES

THAT THE MACRO CALL NOT PERMIT ARGUMENT

BY M CODE DESIGNATION.

When a macro M code is programmed in a macro subroutine that has been called by an arbitrary G code or by a macro M or T code, it will be processed like a normal M code.

modal call, each time a move command is executed, the designated macro is run. This is also valid for the move command in the macro called by multiple call. The macros are sequentiallyexecuted from the one designated latest.

67

2. 8.23.1

Macro Program Call Commands

(Centd)

For the address in which no argument need designated , the command may be omitted, Sample Program #1 #2
#24 + #26 + z50.2 ;

be

S ample

Program

1
G66 P9400 ; GOO X1O. ; G66 GOO G67 G67 GOO 09400 ; GOO X40. ; GO(J z50. ;
M99 09500
GOO

++ @ G65 @
Main Program

P9500 ; Z20. ; ; ; Z30. ;

P91OO

L3

A30

B60

x34.8 I Argument P art

Designation

17
@ 0 Macro

(2) A, K

Argument B, and

Designation and

D 10 sets

+=

; ;

Id
@ o
J

x60. ; GOO Z70. ; *I M99 ;

Macro

of I, J, and I, J, and K The relationmust be designated in this order. ships between the argument designation address es and the variables are as shown below . arguments may be designated.
Address of Argument Designation H Variables in

C arguments

-l

User Macro Body #l 72 #3 *4 85 #6 87 *8 ?49 $10 *11 *12 #13 #14 #15 #16 #17 #18 #19 %20 #21 #22 #23 $24 $25 #26 $27 $28 #29 WI #31 #32 K33

The above sample program following order:

is executed in the

2. 8.23.2

Argument Designation

Argument is the real value to be assigned to a variable used in the macro program body. Argument designation, therefore, is the act of assigning real values to variables, Argument designation is of type I and type II, which can be selected as required.

(1)

Argument

Designation

Argument may be designated in any address exThe relationships cept for G, L, N, O,and P. between the argument designation addresses and the variables are as shown below .
Address of Argument Designation A B c D E F H I J K M Q R s T u v w x Y z I Macro Variable in Program Body M #2 #3 $7 :8 #9 #11 #4 ;: $13 Z17 k18 ?19 420 ?!21 #22 #23 #24 #25 #26

A B c 11 J, K, 12 Jz K~ Is J3 K3 Id J4 K4 Is Js K5 1~ Je KG IT J7 K, 1~ J8 K8 19 J9 Kg 1,~ JIO K,.

The

suffixes

1 through

10 to 1, J, of the

and

K are 1, J,

de-

termined by the order and K combinations. For the address designated, the

designated

be

in which no argument need command may be omitted.

68

Sample

Program #4 #5 #6 #7 #9

2,8,23,

3 Overview

of Macro

Program

Body
using the

+++++
G65P9005A. .. C.. .C. .. I.. .J..K,..K...K...;

A macro
combination (1)

program body is programmed of the following commands.

Variables Local Common System operation Arithmetical Functional variable variable variable (#1 through #33) #549) #5104)

Argument

Designation

Part a.

(3) An

Position

of Decimal

Point

in Argument

b. c. (2) a.

( #100 through ( #1000 through

argument may generally be designated with a For the designation withsign and decimal point. out decimal point, the position of decimal point is as shown on the next page.

Commands operations operations (+, (SIN, -, *, COS, /, ) ROUND, . ..)

Address in Argument Designation A, B D, H E F (In G 99 mode) F (In G 98 mcde) 1214

Metric Input 3 o 4

Inch Input 3 0 6

b.

(3) a.

Control Branch

Commands command (IF < qualification> GO TO n) < qualification> m) a program which and conditional re-

b.

Repeat

command

(WHILE Do

1012
3 (2) o o 4 (3) 0 0

1, J, K, C
M, S, T Q R

Using these commands, quires complicated operations

3 (2) I
3(2) I

4 (3)
4(3)

u, v, w
x, Y, z

3 (2)

4 (3)

judgements may be written in the general format. Hence, the feature of user macro is to enable the programming of the wide range of NC functions from a simple machining cycle which is rather a subprogram to a special, complicated canned cycle, and the storing of these cycles in the machine. Described below are details of the commands mentioned above.

The value shows the position of decimal point as counted from the least significant digit. The value in parentheses indicates the number of digits that follows decimal point at the time of parameter #6006-D5 = 1.

2. 8.23.4

Variables

(4)
a.

Considerations

in

Argument

Designation

assigning a value to an adInstead of directly dress in a macro program body, the address may be designated by a variable. When this variable is called during execution, the corresponding value is fetched from the variable area to provide the address value. There variable, Each are three types common variable, by of variables: and system number. can be part of local variable.

Argument designation types I and II may be If the same variable has been used concurrently. designated twice, the last one is validated.

is identified

a variable

b.

For

both

types

I and

II,

addresses

I,

J,

and other

To the local variables, real numbers assigned using the argument designation macro call command by G65 or G66.

K should addresses c. In the

be designated in this order. The may be designated in any order. argument designation may be part, used

(1) negative regardless sign and decimal of the address. point

Local

Variables

(#1

through

#33)

G65 and G66 should d. In G65 and G66 blocks, always be specified before each argument desigThis holds true with the macro call by nation. G code.

A local variable is the one that is used for each That is, when the local variable macro locally, is used, the variable area ( #1 through #33) is independently allocated for each macro call, Certain values are stored by argument designation, and the results of operations in macro are retained ,

69

2,8.23.4

Variables (Centd)
Main Program

Single-level Macro
09201 ;

Double-level Macro ~.
09205 ;

G65 P9201 A.. .B. .. C,* ;

#1,

#2,

#3

#i
#2

G65

P9205

#3

o
Argument Designation (2) Common #549) Variables throuth

~
eadlwrite Enabled

\\

#l

=...

ow
Read /write Enabled #l =... area macro Local variable area for duplicate-level macro

Local variable for single-level

Hence, the variables #1, #2, #3, , . . of the same macro assume different values each time it is called. Each local variable is reset for each macro call and is registered by argument designation. The variable not designated becomes blank. Each local variable is set to blank at the time of power-on and reset operations.

a.
are

#100 through
cleared at the

#149: time

operations and are set trols, they are not cleared by reset parameter #6008Dl is set at 1. b. #500 through are not cleared operations. These #549: at the time of

These common variables of power-on and reset to IIblank. !1 In some conoperation if

common powe-on

variables and reset

( #100 through

#149,

#500 The common variables are available to the They cannot be user without restrictions. designated by arguments. Indirectly, however, they can be designated as follows:

A common variable may be shared by all macros and through all macros of all nesting levels. That is, the common variable enables a macro to refer to the results obtained by another macro. Common Variable Area

oJIoKIJ\oK
(3)
Single-nest Macro Double-nest Macro Tripple-nest Macro Quadruplenest Macro a. Common variables are divided two types depending on clear into the following conditions: #1015, b. #1115,

Argument

Designation

of

#1

System

Variables
use is unique types of sys-

A system variable is the one whose There are following to the system. tem variables: Interface #1032T output signals input signals

. . . #1000

through

Interface #1132.~

. . . #1 100 through

c,

Tool

offset

amount,

tool

coordinate

data.

YASNAC

and tool wear amount #2051 through #2080, through #2150, #2151 through #2199, #2201 d. e. Alarm Clock message . . . #3001,

#2050, . . . #2001 through #2081 through #2099, #2101 through #2180, #2181 through #2250 . . . #3000

display

#3C102

f. Single-block completion wait

stop and auxiliary-function control . . . #3003 and exact-stop

Feed-hold feedrate-override, g control . . . #3004 h. RS232C data output . . . #3100

(printout

feature). i. Modal information . . . #4001 through #4120

jm

Positional

information

. . . #5001

through

#5102 Note: The interface input and a. and b, may not be installed. specifications of the machine output signals Follow the builder. the deof

tool

tails

The following paragraphs of the variables mentioned

describe above.

a. Intervace #1032)~ i. When one

Input

Signals

( #1000 Through

#1015,

of

the

system

variables,

#1000

through #1015, is specified to the right-hand side of an operational expression, the on/off state of each of usermacrodedicated 16-point The relationships between input signals is read, the input signals and the system variables are as shown below.

Each read variable is 1, 0 or O. 0 when the assoor open respectively, ciated contact is closed regardless of the unit system of the machine.

When system variable #l 032 is designated, ii. the input signals (UIO through U115) that consist of 16 points (16 bits) are collectively read as a decimal positive value. #1032 = \5# [1000 + i]
* 2i

#loo7 #l@36 #loo5 mo4 UI 7


27 :1015 UI15
~15

mo3
UI 3 23 :1011 Ulll
211

*IOO2 fm)l
UI 2 22 :1010 Ullo 20 u! 1

#looo

UI6
26 #lo14 UI14
214

UI 5
25 #lo13 (JI 13
~13

UI 4 24 #lo12 UI12
212

UIo 23
Sample IF

i =0 Program [#1015 EQ O

#1009 #1008 UI19


.29 UI 18 28

GO TO

100;

Bit 215 (U115) is read and, if it is O, is made to sequence number N1OO.


#130 = #1032 AND 255

a branch

Variable Value

Input Signal

Bits 2 through

27 (UIO through U17) are tively read to be stored in common variable as a decimal positive value. Note: System not be placed expressions. variables #1000 to the left-hand through side of

collec#130

#1032 canoperational

71

2.8.23.4
b.

Variables (Centd)
Output Signals (#1100 Through

11.

Interface #1132)*

#1115,

i. When one of system variables #1100 through #1115 is specified to the left-hand side of an operational expression, an on or off signal can be sent to each of the usermacro-dedicated 16Point output signals. The relationships between the output signals and the system variables are as shown below:
#1107 Uo 7 #1106 UO 6 #llo5 Uo 5 #llo4 Uo 4 ZII03 Uo 3 $1102 Uo 2 #llol I #lloo

.,-.,, t . ., . . . ,,----When system variable 7fl15LIS speclllea, Tne output signals (UOO through U015) that consist of 16 points (16 bits) are collectivelyoutput. At this time, the decimal positive value substituted in #1132 is output in the form of binary 16-bit value.

#1132

~ #[1100 i=O

+ i]

* 2i

i~i. With system variables #1100 through #1132, the value sent last is retained. Hence, when one of them is written to the righthand side of an operational expression, its value is read.

Uol
2 20
#1109 U09

i Uoo

27
#1115 UO15 2

26
#1114 UO14

25
%1113 Uo 13

24
#1112 Uo 12

23
~1111 Uoll

22
~#1110~ ~ Uolo

#1108 UO 8

iv. Considerations
When any values other than 1.0 or O. 0 are substituted into one of the system variables, #1 100 through #1115, the values are handled as follows:

15

14

13

12

11

10

29

~ 28

Variable Value 1 o

Output Signal Contact Closed Contact Open

Blank and any values less than O.5 are assumed to be O. Any values of O.5 and over and other than blank are assumed to be 1,
Sample #llo7 Program = #lo ; (#lo = 1.5)

YASNAC

20 21 G-4

I
o Uoo Uo 1

The output signal of bit 27 (U07) is outputted in the contact (closed) state.
#1132 = (#1132 AND 240) OR (#8 AND 15)

U02 U03 U04 U05 U06 U07 U08 U09


Uolo 211

The output signal of bits 24 through 27 (U04 through U07) are outputted without change and the contents of local variable #8 are outputted to the output signals of bits 2 through 23 (UOO through U03) . (Decimal 240 = 11110000 Binary 15 = 00001111)

c. Data,

Tool

Offset Wear

Amount Amount

And

Tool

Coordinate

Tool

#2001 #2101

#2050, #2150,

#2051 #2201

- #2099, - #2250

#2151

#2199,

i,

When

one

of

the

system

variable

#2001 side

b 22 h-t

Uoll U012 U013 U014 U015

through #2250 is specified to the right-hand of an operational expression , the tool offset amount, tool coordinate data, and tool wear amount can be read, ii. The numbers below : relationships between the and the system variables tool are offset

as shown

When 1.0 or (). O are substituted in any of #1100 through #1115, the associated output contact is output in the closed or openstate.

72

System

Variable

Tool Offset Memory No.

d.

Alarm

Message

Display to be

( #3000) occurs in a user

#2001
X-axis to

01
to
50

When a condition macro program, specified to put i. #3000

alarmed

system variable #3000 may be the machine in the alarm state. message>);

#2050

= n ( <alarm

I
Tml Nose Radius

#2201
to #2250

I
I

Using this command, specify the alarm message (less than 32 characters) preceded by a 3-digit alarm number n and enclosed with control-in and controlout symbols. The alarm number should
01 to 50

be three chine. ii. When

digits this

and

not

be one

used

by

the

maALM

#3000 command

is executed,

System

Variable

Tool Coordinate Memofy No.

or A/B is displayed on the bottom of CRT screen regardless of the mode and function. Its message can be seen by the following operation: Press ALM function number of CRT key. and message screen. and displaved . . on

#2051 X-axis to #2099

51 to 80

The alarm the bottom

#2151 Z-axis #2t~80

51 to 80

\ ALARM 09100 NO054

I
I iii. When one of the above system variables is USERS 550 E: ; tool offset for common number variable 16 for X-axis ?41 16. t ALM MESSAGE MACRO ERROR: specified expression, Sample to the lefthand its value can side of an operational be changed. Programs :A oiRd

#116 = #2016 The contents are substituted #2081 The tool is erased are set. = #24 wear and of

; amount (memory the contents of No. local 81) of X-axis variable #24 When cause
state

Message

display area and sample display

RESET key is pressed of alarm, the message can be cleared.

after removal of the display and the alarm

Sample #3000

Program = 550 (MACRO FLOW ) ERROR : DATA OVER-

73

2.8.23.4
e.
i.

Variables (Centd)
(#3001 , #3002) variable #3001 or clock can be read. #3002 for clock

Clock

is

When system specified, the

When the finish signal is not waited for, the distribution end signal (DEN) is not transmitted. In this case , the FIN is waited for in the block with the check skip cleared. Hence, when the FIN is not waited for, be careful not to specify the next auxiliary function.

System Variable
;3001

Type

Unit
I

At Power-On

Count Condition

+3003 o

I
I

Single Block Switch Valid

[
!

FIN Signal Waited

lClockl

I lms

Reset to O Same as power-off time

Always When STL signal is on

Z3002

Clock 2

1s

ii.

g.
To preset the clock, system variable put substitute the at the left-hand value side with of

Feed-Hold,

Feedrate-Override, Control ( #3004)

And

Posi-

tioning

Completion

this the expression.

Sample Program
#3001=o; iii. The . . . The clock is preset to value O. 1

When the value listed in the following table is substituted in system variable #3004, feed hold, feedrate override, and positioning completion can be made valid or invalid.
I

Restrictions
accuracy of clock 1 is 8 ms. reached, to O. When and overflow

$3004

Feed Hold Valid Invalid Valid Invalid Valid Invalid Valid Invalid + I I I

Feedrate Override Valid Valid Invalid Invalid Valid Valid Invalid Invalid

Positioning Completion Valid Valid

o
1

4294968000 msec has been occrus, setting the clock

21
31 41 51

I I I

Valid Valid Invalid Irival id

The accuracy of clock 2 is 8 ms. When 429496800 sec has been reached, an overflow occurs , setting the clock to O. t Sample Main Program Argument of variable designation #1 Sample for

I
I

I I

61 7

Irival id
Invalid

Program

Program Cycle (Incremental

[~]

. . . Macro ,Seconds to wait

Special Threadcutting Command) Macro Program


+x

o~

09351

G 0(1

-+

I
lJ2

#3002 = O ;
WHILE END [ #3002 1 ; ; LE #1 ] DO1 ;

ii
%~ AKk

THREADCUTTING

M99

I
Macro Block Wait Stop And Auxiliary Control ( #3003) Function

r? / \
C all

-7 ,y

f. Single Completion

When the value listed in the following table is substituted in system variable #3003, the single block switch can be disabled or the next block may be entered without waiting for the checking of the finish signal (FIN) of the auxiliary func tion (MST) .

%Lead
[L
#21: ~ #6: radius #23: Negative value Negative value,

Without

sign, value

value diameter

74

Macro

Program

iii.

The

above

output

is performed

when

system

09093 M93 ;

; Buffering [#6] ~#21] [#23] *2 ; 4 blocks

#10 = ROUND #11 = ROUND #12 = ROUND #3003 = 1 ; ;

variable #3100 is executed in It is required, therefore, to the external equipment such RS 232c interface and preset use the interface. Sample #3100=( #3100 #3100 Program ); = (TOOL . . . Carriage OFFSET 01) ;

the macro program. previously attach as a printer via the parameters that

+#10 +#10 Single block invalidated r switch

ret urn /line

feed

GOO U#ll #3004 G22

= 7 ; w-#6 ; w-#6 ; F#9 ;

U-#10

G32w#12 G32 U#10

#3004

= o ; ; ;

1
(#3100)

Feed hold invalidated F eedrat e override invalidated Positioning completed

= (I.JU Xuuuuuuuuuu z UUUUUUUUUU


R);

#3100 = [ #2001 #3100 = [ #2101 #3100 #3100 = [ #2201 = ( ) ;

;..

. = 10.000
-10.000

mm mm

;. ..= :..

. =0.800mm

GOO U-#11 GOO w-#23 #3003 M92 M99 ; ; = o ;

Printout I TOOL

Data OFFSET 01 z R

I
Output messages external interface. the above

I
1

UUUU1O. OOOOUUU10. I I
Data

0000 uuuu I

I-10.80000

h.

RS232C

A ~aximum of 6 digits (data plus signs) before the decimal point can be output.

When system variable #3100 is specified, and NC internal data can be output to euuipment via RS232C data input/output is a printer, If- tie external equipment information is printed. i, Output of Messages

i. i.

Modal

Information

#4001 Through

#4120)

#3100 When

= (<Message>) this command is specified, and the message is output,

When one of system variables #4001 through the modal commands that are #4120 is specified, specified up to the immediately preceding block These modal commands are somecan be known. times called the current values of modal information commands.

enclosed by controlin via RS232C interface. Each (Carriage #3100 which output Return

controlout

message is followed by CR/LF /Line Feed) . Hence, when

System

Variable

Modal

Information

= ( ) is specified, only CR/LF is outputted, is useful in tabulating the punched data. When by the message is output, it controlin and controlout. should be

# 4001
# 4021 ?$4108

code

(group 01 ) \

Note: enclosed ii.

G code (group 21 ) E code F code Sequence number Program number S code T code

Output = [ i

of Data variable >]

#4109 #4114 #4115

#3100

specified, the value of the variable, or system varia ble at the right-hand side is output via RS232C interface as plus or minus decimal 9 digits (4 digits after the decimal point, 5 digits before the decimal point) data. Notes: 1. The value is rounded after the decimal point. 2. When the value is of the decimal point, the

When this command is local variable, common

#4119 #41 20

Notes : 1 M code can not be read out because of non-modal

information,

out

to the or

fifth more

digit before

The just

value before value.

of either being

E (#4108) stored, giving

or

F ( #4109) and

is specified # 4109 the

# 4108

6 digits asterisk

same

is output.

75

2,8.23.4

Variables

(Centd)

System V=iable $5061

Positional Information X-axis skip signal position (ABSKP) Z-axis skip signal pesiton (ABSKP) X-axis tool offset amount Z-axis tool offset amount X-axis servo position deflection amount Z-axis servo position deflection amount

Read During Move (Note) Enabled

ii #4001 through #4120 cannot be placed to the left-hand side of the operation expression. Sample Program

#5062
#5081

Enabled

Main Program
$5082

G65 P9602

<Argument

Designation>

T5101 z5102

(Note) Enabled

Macro

Program

~Gcodes(.oothr.u.h
Note: Reading of #5021, #5022, and #5102, performed dingly, when commandd after

z5041,

#5042,

?I5101, will be Accor-

during movement, of the movement.

GOO GO1 G03 GOO G#l M99

X.. Z.. X.. Z.. ; ;

.Y.

.;

I
R...;

G03) of retained.

01 group

ar~

completion

nose

radius

compensation

is not performed.

.F .Z. . ;

. . . ; ..

G codes of 01 group are restored.

Mnemonic

ABSIO

ABSMT Command current position (same as Pos. MACHINE display). Machine ccardinate system

ABSOT Command current position (same as Pos. ABSOLUTE display). Work coordinate system

ABSKP Position at which skip signal did not go on in G31 block. Wofk ccordi nate system

End posi tion of Meaning block immediately before.

].

Positional

Information

( #5001

Through

#5102)

When system variables #5001 through #5102 are specified, various positional information can be

Coordinate System

Work coordinate system

obtained, The unit of the information is millimeters or inches .

Tool Position Offset Tool Radius Compensation Amount Notes:

/
Not included

,
Not included

~ Included

Included

Iv
v

Included

Included

In the macro
feature is

program invalid.

body,

the

input

unit

10

1. When the skip signal is not turneri on in G 31 block, the skip signal position is at the end of G 31 blcck. 2. The input unit x 10 feature is valid up to the macro call

System Variable

Positional Information X-axis block end position (ABSIO) Z-axis block end position (ABSIO) X-axis current position (ABSMT) Z-axis current position (ABSMT) X-axis current position (ABSOT) Z-axis current position (ABSOT)

Read During Move Enabled

block (the argument designation in valid in the user macro body.

pert by G&5 or G 66) but is

X5001
115002

3. System variables iz5001 through ~5102 may not be placed to the left-hand side of operational expression.

#5021

(Note) Enabled

$5022

IJ5041

(Note)Enabled
I

z5042

76

Sample

Program specified system, returns location performs to the start


Variable No. # 1 to #33 #loo to #l@

List of Variables

The tool is positioned to the (X, Z) on machine coordinate and the specified M feature, point. Main Program

Meaning .mcal variables. :ommon variables (reset to blank at

power-off). $500 to #549 Common variables Dff) rllo~ to #lo15 Interface input signals (each signal for each bit). (retained at power-

G65P9603X.

..z

OM #:.:

#13 #26 L Macro Program #24

zH032

Interface input signal

,=0

#[lOCO + i] *

2i )

irlloo to #1115

signals Interface output each bit).

(each signal for

#1132 z2001 to #2050 to #2150 to t2250 to 12080 to ?i2180 to ti2099 to #2199

Interface output signal

~ #[1100+ ( ,=~

i] * 2 i

).

09603 #1
K

;
#5001 ;

#2101 #2201 #2051

amount Tool offset [X-axis, Z-axis, nose radius) data

Tool coordinate [X-axis, Z-axis)

#2 = #5002

#2151 #2081

Tocl wear amount [X-axis, Z-axis) display.

G91

; ; ;

:2181 g3000 #3001 #3002

GOO X [#24 -#5021] GOO Z [#26M#13 ; ; ; #5022]

Alarm message

Clock 1 (In units of 1 ins). Clwk 2 (in units of 1 s).

GOO Z#2 GOO X#l M99 ;

+3003

Single block stop, auxiliary function complete wait control.

f13004

Feed-hold, exact-stop

feedrate-override, control.

and

83100 Z4001 to *41X

RS 232 C data output (print out feature). Current value of modal information command.

$5001

to $5002

End position of the immediate preceding block (for each axis).

85021

to #502Z

Current position of machine ccerdinate system (for each axis).

#5041

to +5042

Current position of POS. (for each axis).

UNIVERSAL

+508 1 to 85062

Position at which G 31 skip signal is turnad on (for each axis).

t!5081 to # 5082

Effective tool position offset amount (X-axis, Z-axis).

~5101 to $5102

Servo position deflection amount (for each axis).

77

2. 8.23.4 (4)

Variables

(Centd)

Sample (i) When #l = 45.2346 x#l ... = X45.235 mm (for metric input) in a variable number
(ii) When F#2 ...= #2 = O. 255 FO. 26 (mm/rev)

Variable

Representation

Each variable is represented that follows #.


a.

How

to designate a number
,2,3, #lo 4,...)

directly:

(iii) When #3 = 5.37672 G04 P#3 ... = G04 P5, 377 (see)
(iv) When #4 = 2.7236 M#4 . . . M03 GW. 4. the ..GO3 Value for each address maximum programmable value with that follows <expression should value. not exceed

#i(i=l me

#130 #2000
How b. number: to designate an expression as a variable

# [ <expression>]

5. The replaced

an address >.

may

be

&22E&

# [#loo]
# [#500 + 1] # [#2012J

(J. The constant without decimal point enclosed in brackets [ ] is assumed to have a decimal point at its end.
#i may >]. be (6) Undefined Variable

In the following description, variable replaced with variable #[< expression

(5)

Variable

Reference an address may be

a. The replaced

value that follows by a variable.

The value of an undefined variable is assumed to be blank. An undefined variable occurs in the following situations:
a. The local variable for which argument designation was not performed in macro call command. b. time Common of variables and #100 through reset operations. #149 at the

When < address> #i or <address> -#i is specified, the value of the variable or its negative value (complement, more exactly) is made the specified value of the address .

poweron

Es!2P.k

#30= #lol #lo3 #140 G#30

l.o; = 100. = 300. = o. 3 X#lOl

; ; ; Z-#102

c. The local variables and common variables for which the values were not written from MDI panel.

F#140

;
to the

The above specification GO1 Notes: 1. Address bles . Sample

specification below. Z-300.

is equivalent

x1OO.

FO.3

/ , 0,

and

N may

not

refer

to varia-

/#8,

N#100

. . . Error. may not be replaced with

2. A variable a variable. Sample

number

##20 . . . Error. #[ #20] . . . Correct. data, the are round-

3. When a variable is used as address values below the least significant digit ed.

Designation and function of <blank> is classified in the following two versions A and B. The Switching from control is set for either version. versions A to B and from B to A cannot be inter changed,

2.8,23.5

Operation

Commands

Version A Version B .#O defined as No conception Concept of #0 of #o. Commanding causes alarm. *O variables of (blank>. Commanding #0 at the lefthand side of the equation. -Where (blank>, means *3 = <blank}. -Where #2 is #2 is com-

Various operations can be performed between variables and between variables and constants . The operation expression is represented in the form of #i = <expression> , in which < expression> is a general arithmetic operational expression produced by combining variables and constants with operators and functions. The available operations and functions are as follows. Instead of fi and #k, constants may be used.

(1)

Variable . . .

Definition definition,

and

Replacement

#i = #j

replacement.

Variable

<blank> in

Where #2 is (blank>, command #3 = n2. means #3 = O.

(2)

Add-Type
#j+#k

Operations
. . .

is commanded the replacement aquation.

mand #3 = ?22;

#i.
#i=#j #i=#j #i=#j

Sum. Difference. Logical 32 bits) sum . (for each of

-#k OR#k XOR

. . . . . . #k...

Where #2 is Variable <blank> (blank>, command 600 ~ #2; is equivaler to command G C GOOXO; is commanded in the part prcgram.

<blank>, command6CX3 X $2; is equivalent (Address is ignored.) to command G 00;

Exclusive (for each Operations

logical sum of 32 bits).

(3) #i=#j

Multiply-Type *#k /#k AND . . . . . . #k...

Product. Quotient. Logical product (f& each of 32 bits)

Where $2 is <blank>, Variable

Where <blank),

ti2 is

#i=#j #i=#j

<blank>

#3 is O. @condition IF #3 EQ #2 is established, @Condition IF #3 NE w2 is not established.

#3 is O. @Condition IF #3 EQ #2 is established. @Condition IF #3 EQ X2 is established.

is commanded in the condition of EQ and NE.

Note: In OR, XOR , or AND variable value (or constant) the binary 32bit equivalent is performed on each bit.

operation, the is converted into and the operation

?3 =F [#o+~o] ?3=R2 *60; Y3=PO+$O; Y3=*OI$O; ?3=5*+O; ?3=2$0; ,!3 =51} <Blank>
I

In these command, #3 = (Blank) In these commands, $3 =0.

(4) #i=

Functions SIN [#j] . . . .. . . . [#j/#k] . . . Arctangent Square Absolute Convert Convert Produce root. value. from into BCD. BCD . by fractions rounding. . . Sine Cosine Tangent (in degrees) (in (in degrees) degrees) . . .

#i=cos[fi] #i=
described

maans #3=2 O; causes alarm. in the replacement

TAN[#j]
K

#i

ATAN

Others

above is treated as O. Condition IF ?3 GE Z2 is established

#i=

SQRT [~]

[#j]

. . . . . . . ..

when #2 and P3 are <blank>, or #2 is O and $3 is <blank), -Condition IF:3 established (blank>, and *3 = O.

i+i=ABs #i= #iBIN[fi] BcD

LT fi2 is not

when #2 and P3 are

[#j]

. . .

or 72 is (blank),

#i = ROUND #i= FIX

[#jj .. [#j]

integer the

... Truncate ... Raise


the

#i= FUP[#jj

fractions

to a unit.

79

2.8.23.5 (5)

Operation Commands (Centd)


of Operations

GOO

X#10

Combinations

Usually, ROUND is not used as mentioned it is used as shown below : Sample (b)

above;

The above operations and functions may be used in combinations. A functional operation is performed first. Then, a multiply-type operation is performed. An add-type operation is performed last. S ample #i= #j+ k * SIN ~ @ Y [#L]

When ROUND is used as follows, the program turns to the start point correctly: @ @ @ @ @ #10 = 12.3758 #11 = 13.1236 G()O U#10 GO1 GOO U#l~
U-

re-

; ; :;;;a +x [#lI]] ;

; F.. . ; [#10]

[ROUND

+ ROUND

IJ2._J
(6) Change of Operational Order by [ ]
Priority may be given to an operation by enclosing it in brackets [ ] . Up to quintuple (fivehold) nesting of brackets is permitted including those of functional operations.

This is because the data of #10 and #11 in @ and @ blocks are substantially rounded before being executed. If @ @ block is GOO U- [#10 +#11] is made ; by the following

then, the movement amount: U- [#10 + #H]

Sample

*h]

= U - [12.3758 + 13.1236] = U - [25.49@ - U - [25. 499]

On the other hand, ~+@is

block movement

of

I
I
(7) Considerations for Operational decimal to have a. The constant without <expression > is assumed at its end. b.

rJ#10 + U#ll

= U12. 376 + U13. 124 = U25. 500 of @ is not correct.

Hence,

the program

Commands point used in a decimal point

(8)

Operational

Errors

The data format and the operational errors in the macro programs are as follows:
a.

Data

Format

When used in conditional Expression IF or WHILE, function ROUND truncates the fractions.

The numeric data handled in macro programs of the floating point format.

are

c. When used in address data, function ROUND rounds off the part below the least significant digit. Sample (a)

m
where, M is sign + data 52bit binary, E is sign + data 10-bit binary. b. Operational Errors

#10 = 12.3758 When the least significant digit of address X is O.001 mm, the following command
Goo x means [ROUND [ #lo]];

Each time an operation is performed, the following error is caused and is accumulated. The number of significant digits is 15 to 16, which compensates the error sufficiently.

GOO x12.376 because 8 of This command

; 12.3758 is also

is rounded. equivalent to

80

2.8,23.6

Control

Commands which control the flow of the are of the following two types: . . . IF [ f conditional expre-

Conditional and LE.

expressions are EQ , NE, CT, LT, They are represented as follows:


ExWession Meaning (#i= ?#j)

GE,

The commands microprogram

Conditional

a. Branch command ssion>] GO TO n ; b. Repeat Command > ] DO m , Command

#i EQ#j #i NE#j

(ifi=k?fj) (#i> #j)

. . . WHILE

[ < conditional

#i GTi!j #i LT#j

expression (1) a. Branch IF

(#i < #j) (#i2#j) (#i Z #j)

#i GE#j #i LE#j

[ < conditional

expression

>] GO TO

n ;

If < conditional expression>of this command is established, a branch is made to the block of sequence number n within the same program. When a variable or an expression is used for n, the branch destination may be changed. If the condition is not satisfied, the program proceeds to the next block.

constant and < expression> may and #j. A variable and <expression used for n.

be

used > may

for be

#i

Notes: 1. The sequence number must be located at the head of the block when it is called for by a branch command. Otherwise, the data prior to the sequence number is ignored as shown below:

GO r E ;F [< Conditional>] Q expression ; .(Next Block) ~ - * m . 0 5


~..;l

TO

n;

Branch Destlnatloc

Se~uence

No

~ ,gnored

2. The reverse longer execution

branch on the time than the

program forward

takes branch.

(2) IF [< conditional provide a simple expression>] may be omitted to branch command as shown below:
a.

Repeat WHILE

Command [ < conditional 3) expression >] DO m ;

(m = 1,

2 and

END GO TOn;
While blocks When to the

<conditional expression > is satisfied, the between DO m and END m are repeated. it is unsatisfied, block following the END processing in. branches

Nn. .. ;

---- .
TJ
.c m

- WHILE

<Conditional [

DO
1

m;e

expression> ~ ~

2 ~ * :

d m;

END

(Blockfollowing END m)

81

2. 8.23.6

Control

Commands

(Centd)

5. Triple DO-loop micro progralm.

nesting is permitted for each

When the specification is made omitting WHILE L< conditional expression>], the blocks between DO m and END m are repeated infinitely. Generally, this is used in the format shown below .
I DO1; I)ol; D02; D03;

I
IF [< Condlt> onal GO TOn;
expmssmn>] I

D02; D03;

G65.. ABC
END END 3 ; 2 ;

;.

Gb5... XYZ ; END 3 ;


END END 2 ; 1 ;

END 1 ;

.; .
Enabled
-Nn.. , 6. The codings shown

Enabled
below cause an error:

(i
Notes: 1. DO m should be specified before END m.

DO1;

?
The returndestination of END 1 isunknown.

? DO1; J --l END 1 ;


(ii)

2. m of DO m and END m should have the same value. However, only 1, 2, or 3 may be specified in m.

DO1;

DO 1 1
END D02 1~ --l

1
?

One END 1 ismissing.

The valueof m, 1, 2, or 3 iscalled the identification number, which isused by


Do and END to calleach other.

J END 1 ;

-J END 1 ; ( iii DO1; DO1; Overlapof DO rangesisnot ? permitted. Rewriteas shown right. D02; END 2 1 ; ENDl; I

D02;
3. The same identification repeatedly except where 4. To get out of a Do number may be used repeat ranges overlap. loop, a GO TO n can enable be

1 1 ; END

used. However, a GO TO n does not entrance to a DO loop as shown below:

DoI; 5 al GOTO 100 ; 25 ,% END 1 ; !$ N1OO ;

: ; L !__
GOTO 100
; DO1; z d .2 Q N1OO

-1 END

2 ;

END 1 ;

82

(iv)

DO1; D02; D03; DO1; 1END 1 ;J END 3 ; END 2 ; ENll 1 ;

(2)

Classification

of Program

Numbers

The program following:

numbers

are classifiedinto the

Quadruplenesting. Max. nestingpermitted istriple.


09000 to
09999 When D 7 of #6021 is set to 1, the registration, erase, and adit of programs are disabled.

(v)

DO1;

2.8.23,
Variables

Display

and

Write

of

Local

and

Common

~ ; T
END 1 ; I IF.,GO 2. 8.23.7
(1) How
T07000 ;d

enteredfrom I be outside.

Do loopmay not

Local variables (#1 through #33) and common variables (#100 through #149, #500 through #549) can be displayed and written by the following operatio~s:

(1)

Display of

Operations Variables Mode select position

Display
a.

Registration
to Make

of Macro Programs
of Macro Programs

may Registration b. The registration and edit of macro program bodies are performed in the same manner as usual part Hence, there is no programs and subprograms. program size restriction that applies to the user Part programs, subprograms, and macro body. macro programs may be stored together in the part program memory to its full capacity.

Press SET function key. be provided anywhere.

Key-in the variable number

and press

cuRsOR I key or ~ ~uR-soR key. However, # 1 need not be keyed in. Ten sets of variable num hers including the specified variable number and their data are displayed. The data are displayed in the signed 8-digit integer part and the 8-digit fraction part. Macro nesting level (0: Macro not ln execUtlOn) MACRO 01234 0035

I SETTING
*LEvEL #oloo 0

#olol
#olo2

-12345678, 12345678 0.00000001


3. 00000000

#olo9

RD Y Sample Display of Common Variables

83

2. 8.23.8 Display And Write Of Local And Common Variables ( Centd )

2. 8.23.9
Programs

Considerations

and

Remarks

for

Macro

(1) Summary display may Remarks


a.

of Restrictions

be scrolled up or down,

a.

Available Variables
#33 #149 #549 T ~~ ~ Local variables. variables.

#l through
#100 through

Common

Common for review.

variables may

always be displayed
#500 through System

variables Variable Values

For local variables , those of the macro currently executed are displayed. Consequently, when a macro of a nesting level is in execution, the local variables belonging to macros of the other nesting levels cannot be seen. The local variables after completion of execution are all rest to blank.
(2) Write of Operations Values to Variables Mode select position

b.

b.

Available

Maximum Minimum
c.

value value

o.- :10+308 ... +10308


Usable in < Expression >

Constant

Values

Writing
a.

:(8 digits above decimal point) . decimal points ). Sample Maximum Minimum

(7 digits below

may b.

Press SET function key. be provided anywhere. Key-in the variable number

value 399999999.9999999 value 30.0000001


Accuracy

ress
ever,

# need not be keyed-in. The keyed-in variable number is specified and the cursor is positioned to it. ~. Key-in the value to be written. Press WR key. The keyed-in value is stored as the data of the variable number with the cursor positioned. d. Press key ~w or PAGE ~ n key key or =1 to move the key or

to be

written d. Operational

ey r .CG,9K eya Ow-

Decimal 15 digits significant.


e. Macro Call Maximum Nesting Level

Quadruple
f. Maximum

(four-hold) .
Nesting Level for of Repeat macro. m Command

Triple g. ~A-GE n cursor.

(threehold) Command 3. Nesting

each

Repeat
K

(DO)

Identifier

m
in c. and variables. d. to write the h.

1, 2, and
Maximum

e. Repeat operations values to the desired

Level

of

Brackets

Quintuple Remarks a.

( five-hold)

Common
Local other

variables can always be changed.


variables may not be written at any than when a macro is in execution.

(2) Difference program.

between

Macro

Program

and

Sub-

b.
time

a.

Any attempt to do so is invalidated. However, rewriting of local variables during macro execution may cause an unexpected failure. Before attempting the rewriting , stop the machine operation by single stop function and check to see if it is safe to rewrite variables.

User macros designation but b.

G65 and G66 the subprogram

allow argument (M98) does

not.

The written local variables and common varic. ables #100 through #14$1are reset to Iblankll by the reset operation or the power-on operation .

The macro program directly branches to the macro program body without executing any command that was specified in G65 or G66 block and has no relationship with the macro. With the subprogram, however, a branch is performed after the execution of the command (if any) other than P and L in M98 block.

The maximum nesting level of macro program c. That is quadruple including G65 and G66 calls, of subprograms is also quadruple but separately. If macro programs are specified via MDI d. during automatic operation, the maximum nesting level is restricted to quadruple. With subprograms, up to four levelS of nesting are permitted in tape mode or memory mode, or separately in MDI mode, (3) Relationship with MDI Operation call and the

(6)

Relationship

with

Optional

Block

Skip

The slash / character used in the right-hand side of an operational expression or in brackets is assumed to be the operator for quotient. It does not mean the optional skip. (7) Parameter Setting of Program Number

Classification (1) Disabling And Edit of Program Registration, Erase,

a. MDI execution

writing permits of the called

the macro macro,

b. MDI writing does body commands such control commands.

not permit or as operational

execute macro commands and

The following setting is permitted to protect the registered user macros and subprograms from inadvertent destruction: Setting Number #6004 D2 =1... The programs of program for numbers registra-

c. When a macro program being stopped by the single block stop MDI writing command not related may be specified and executed. (4) Relationship with Address

executed is function, any to the macro

#8000 through #8999 are tion, erase, and edit. Search D2 =0... Registration,

disabled

erase,

and

edit

are

The address search function is not permitted to search for the sequence numbers in the macro body. (5) Relationship with Single Block Switch

enabled.

Parameter Number

a. The operational command and control command blocks do not singleblock stop if the This switch single block switch is turned on. is enabled for the other macro program blocks. b. However, when setting number #6004D1 = 1, the single block switch is enabled for the opera tional command and control command. System variable #3003 (for the control of c. single block stop see 2.8.23. 5) and setting #6004 Dl mentioned above operate as shown below:

#6021 D7 =1... The programs of program for numbers registra-

#9000 through #9999 are tion, erase, and edit. D7 =0.. . Registration,

disabled

erase,

and

edit

are

enabled.

(8) a.

Effects A reset

of

Reset

Operation resets all local variables variables

operation

When Single Blcck Switch is on

(#l through #33) and part of common ( #100 through #149) to blank.

4 I T
Dl=l Dl=l

L-DI=O =lor3 DI=O =lor3

None of the operational commands, control commands, and general commands stoD, Operational commands and

b, A reset operation resets the user-macro multiple call state and the multiple DO loop state, making the program pointer return to the program head.

=Oor2

control command do not stop. General ccfnmands stop.

None of the operational command, control commands, and general commands stop. All of the operational =Oor2 commands, control commands, and general commands stop.

85

2.8. 23.9
Programs

Considerations
(Centd)

and Remarks

for

Macro

2. the Body

When the codes shown NC unit for punch-out (UC) or before, lower

below are output from or other purposes, the code (LC) is output

(9)

Special

Codes

Usable

in

Macro

Program

uPPer code immediately a. b. Codes Code

(1) The special codes listed below may be used in the user macro body :

preceded preceded preceded . . . (,) by

by LC

UC

. ~ ~ #, . . . @.

+,

$,

?.

C. Codes designation

by UC only , *, =.

at parameter

2.8.23 .9.1 Command

Outline

of

User

Macro

External

Output

The following macro commands addition to the standard user (1) (2) (3)

are available in macro commands.

Open command (POPEN) Data output command (BPRNT Close command (PCLOS)

or

DPRNT)

The above commands are used to output and characters via external devices with RS-232C interface.

variables the

2.8.23 (1)

.9.2 Open

Details command POPEN

of

Each

Command

(POPEN) La] T ; port number

(Format)

-RS-232C (Function)

Notes :
1. For the hole pattern of EIA code, when the character is attached with an asterisk, the pat tern shown above is standard. However, other patterns may be specified by using the following pzirameters: #6110 #6111 #6112 #6113 .. [

The DC2 control code is output from Give this command the NC side. before the sequential data output The RS232C number can commands.

be specified as 1 or 2. The default is the 1st RS-232C. (Example) POPEN POPEN ; ..... Opens the 1st RS-232C. [2] ; ,... Opens the 2nd RS-232C. (BPRNT or DPRNT)

(2)
(a)

Data output command BPRNT

. . . J . . *

(Format)
. . . = 1
BPRNT [a $b

#6114 #6115

.. ...

(1 )J

[cl.,..]; L
Effective digits below

Read the desired hole pattern in the binary value, convert it into the decimal equivalent, and set it to the parameter. For examfile, the hole pattern shown below is set as 152 :

L;::: ~Character

pon

When the value of the parameter is O, the hole pattern listed in the above table is provided.

86

(Functions) 1 The commanded characters are directly output in 1S0 code, . Alphabets (A to Z) . Numerals . Special characters (*, /, +, -) However, * is output by Can be output. the space code. The value of the variables is regarded as 2word data (32 bits) considering the digits below the decimal point, and is output from the higher order bytes, directly as binary data. The effective digits after the decimal point are commanded in parentheses after the variable command. 3 After outputting the command code is output in ISO code. data, the EOB

The variable values are output from the higher order digit, digit-by-digit, for as many digits as commanded. The decimal point is also output in 1S0 code. The variable value is output by commanding the variable number after l#il . Then the digits before the decimal point, and the digits after the decimal point are each commanded in parentheses. Assume that the variables have a maximum of 8 digits. When the higher order digit is O, the output follows parameter #6016D7. [Parameter #6016D7 = 0: #6016D7 = 1: Output space code. No output. :

(Example)

BPRNT [C ** X #100 [3] Y #101 [3] M #10 [01; When the variables are; #100 = 0.40956 #101 = -1638.4 #10 = 12.34 it is output as;

When the digits after the decimal point of the commanded variable is other than O, as many digits after the decimal point as commanded, digits after are output. When the commanded the decimal point is O, no decimal point is output . When the sign is positive, the output of the space code follows parameter #6016D7. [Parameter #6016D7 = O: #6016D7 = 1: Output space code. No output. ] data, the EOB

C3

AO AO D8

01 9A

59

FF

E7

Cl) 00

4D

OC

OA

(Hexadecimal)

After outputting the command code is o~tput in ISO code. DPRNT (Example) When; Variable value

~~~T~~o~

~12

[X#2[531Y#5[531 T#30[2011; #2 = 128.47398 #5 = 91.2 #30 = 123.456

And; When
Space Space

parameter

#6016D7 = O

AO c

AO

AO

61

B2

B8

2E

B4

37

B4

I
(b) DPRNT DPRWT [ a (Format) #b[c

TTT

I
~

~ L
d].. ]

128.474 -x

Digits after
point

decimal

Digits before decimal point Variable Character

~;-2
D4 AO B2 33 OA

(Functions)
1

The commanded characters are directly output command. in 1S0 code, as in the (i) BPRNT

87

2, 8. 23.9
Programs

Considerations
(Centd)

and

Remarks

for

Macro

(2)

The output data output command can be stopped by resetting the command. All later data will also be erased. Therefore, if reset is commanded by M30 , etc. At the end of the output program, it necessary to give the close command at the wait until all the data end of the program, are output, and then command M30, etc.

When

parameter

#6016D7 = 1

is

~:

(3)

User macro and required to use

1/O interface this function.

option

is

p. 8.23.

I(I

Alarm

Number

Of

Macro

programs

~;

Shown below are the usermacro-associated and their causes.


105

alarms

???

htAc Ro

ERROR

(CONSTANT)

L
(3) Close (Format)

I
command

~EOB -23 T

The number of constants is in excess of the specified range. 106 MACRO There ERROR G67 cancel codes.
(FoRMAT)

(PCL OS) [a]; RS-232C port number

PCLOS

are too many


ERROR

107

MACRo

(Function)

The DC4 control code is output from the NC side. This is commanded after all the data output command is given. The RS-232C number is given in the same manner as the (1) POPEN command. PCLOS; .... Closes the 1st RS-232C.

A format other than expression

has an

error. 108
The ber MACRO ERROR (UNDEFIN #NO) num-

value not defined is designated.

as a variable

(Example)

109
2.8,23 .9.3 Function (1) When

MACRO The variable the one that

ERROR

(#NO

NOT

LEFT)

Setting Necessary

when

Using

This

of assignment statement is is disabled for assignment.

outputting data by the BPRNT, DPRNT command, set #6022D3 = O (no parity bit upon ISO tape output) . If #6022D3 = 1, the data cannot be output correctly.

110
The the

MACRO

ERROR

( [

5 LIMIT) is in excess of

bracket nesting upper limit (5) .

level

(2)

When outputting data by the DPRNT command, set whether the leading zero is to be output by spaces. #6016D7 = O: Output space as leading zero when outputting data by the DPRNT command. No leading zero is output.

111

MACRO

ERROR

(MOVE

G66 - M99) in the G66. macro

A move command is specified end command M99 called by

112

MACRO

ERROR

(5) level . is in excess

= 1: 2,8.23 .9.4 (1) Notes

The macro call nesting of the upper limit (4)

The open command (POPEN) and close command (PCLOS) do not need to be commanded in sequence. Once the open command is given, there is no need to give another open command until the close command is given.

113

88

114 DO

MACRO and

ERROR are not

(DO

FORMAT)

T :

END

paired.

Type I for small number of variables. This type allows the use of U , W and F and therefore makes the argument designation easier to understand.

115 The

MACRO format

ERROR of

([

] UNMATCH)

S:
<expression > has an error.

116 DO

MACRO m is not

ERROR in the

(DO range

- END of

NO.

) 3.

1 Sms

117

T:
118 MACRO GO TO 9999. ERROR (GO TO N) of O Sn L S:

m3)
Right, former OK. (P4) Using these variables program (P 2) . , rewrite the ~ ~ GOO U#21 G32 w#23 GOO U-#21 GOO w-#23 this ; F#9 ; ; ; ~ ~ Is all right? add this body. and we have a complete Yes. user Just macro Thats easy.

OK. When type I is used, we have the following variables:

n is not

in the

range

2.8.23.11
(1) T Canned (Teacher)

Exercises Cycle :

of by

Macro G92

pro9rams

We have ed rules

discussed you have

many complicatto understand to

write user macros. Now, lets create some user macros as exercises. Lets take straight threadcutting cycle by G92, because it is a simple operation. S (Student) T: : Where shall we start?

T:

~ An example of usual following format: G 92 command takes (Pi) T: G92 u-50. w-60. F6. O : the s:

Then, using G65, create this macro call and the macro program body in the complete formats. Let me try it.
Supposing the body is 09093; be: program No. of macro program the macro call command will

This command is divided into the following It is and executed within the NC unit. assumed that Rapid Pull Out of Threading is not included i; this command. (P2) (?J Q__ m I ~ @
L

s:

(P5)

G65
GOO U50. GOO w60. ; ;

P9093
macro

u-5o.
program

w-6o.
body

F6. O ;
is: (P6)

l&1

(Z
-z

The

Fir st, these moving distances and lead threads can allbe converted into variables.

09093

; ; F#9 ;

GOO U#21 G32 w#23 GOO U-#21 GOO w-#23 1M99 ;

S : They are local variable #1 through #33, arent they ? But which type of local varia ble ?

89

2.8.23.11
T:

Exercises

of Macro

Programs

(Centd)

T :

Very

good.

That looks OK. **********


s: Id like pull-out to try .

**********
to program Rapid threading

s:

I think something is wrong. With this program, I have to specify points W and F every time ! Thats true. With a usual canned cycle, when points W and F have been specified once, their values are retained. Thereafter, only U is specified. Do you have any trick to overcome convenience ? this in

T:

OK.

How about designating the width of rapid threading pullout using address K ? AH right. Lets see . .. . .

T:

s:

s:

T:

common variables I do. In such a case, Using common variables, (#100 - #549) help. write points the macro to designate W and F. got it! Now, I divide the position of

s:

Ive

the

macro

body Macro call is as w-60. u-50. u-51.4 U- . . . ; follows: K4.8 ; ; F6. O ;

into ;WO parts as follows: (P8) 09000 ;

G65 P9000 G65 P9093

#100 = #23 ; #lol = #9 ;

G65 P9093 G65P9093

M99 ; (P9)
Macro 09093 ; ; F#lOl ; ; ; 09000 #100 #lol #102 M99 ; ; = #23 ; = #9 ; = ABS [ #61; body is as follows:

GOO U#21 G32 w#100 GOO U-#21 GOO w-#100 M99 ;

and

I write

the

macro

call

as follows: (Plo)

09093

; [ #1021 *2 ; ; [#102] ;

#10 = ROUND #11 = ROUND G65 P9000 G65 P9093 G65 P9093 G65 P9093 G65 P9093 w-60. u-50. u-51.4 u-52.6 U. . . ; F6. O ; ; ; ; #12 = ROUND GOOO U#21 ;

[ #211 + #10

[ #1001 + ROUND

G32 W#12 F#lOl G32 U#10 W-#102 ; ;

; ;RAPID THREADING PULL-OUT

GOO U-#11 GOO w-#100 M99 Is this OK?

90

T:

your reasoning is right. Practically, Yes. vou had better prevent a malfunction by invalid control of single ~rogramming #3i03: invalid control of feedhold. block or #3004: This threadcutting can be performed in Uand W-directions only. Now wed like to expand this function in four directions.

09093 #3003 M93

; = 1 ; _ ; ~ Single 4-block [#102] LT *2 ; GO TO 4 ; block invalid

buffering

#10 = ROUND IFIABS] [#21]

#10] Tel;

?-??_-Q
II - --%w ,,

IF[#21GTo]Go JF[#21EQO]GOT04; #11 = ROUND #12 = #lo GO T02; N1 #11 = ROUND ; ;

~-__---#+

[#21 ] + #10 ;U:

Negative

UL---J
s: Let me think. I see. --- How about the next program ?

[#21]

-#n

;U:

Positive

#12 = -#lo N2 IF

#13 = ROUND [ABS [#100ILT GT EQ

[#102] #13] 3 ; 4;

; GO TO 4 ;

IF [#100 IF [ #loo

O] GOTO o ]GOTO [#1001

#14 = ROUND #15 = -#13 ;

+ #13

;W:

Negative

L----------G 00

U, K:

K:

Designation Designation

with a sign without a sign VALUE) VALUE)

?)

GO T05; N3 #14 = ROUND [#100] -#13 ;W: Positive

#15 = #13

u = #21 (DIAMETER W = #23 K = #6 (RADIuS F=#9 The macro call

GO T05; N4 #3000 = 499 (MACRO INPUT L ERR. ) :

Error

display

command

is as follows:

N5 GOO U#21 #3004 = 7 ; 3

; Feedhold Feedr ate Positioning completion ; ;---( :~~_~;threading override 1 Invalid

G65 P9000

w-45. u40. u41.4 U.. . ; ;

K4. O F5.0

; I G32 w#14 G 32 U#12 #3004 F#lOl W#15

I I

G65 P9093 G65 P9093 G65 P9093

; -~

= o ; ; ;

GOO U-#11

The macro program

body

is as follows:

GOO W-#100 M92 ; = o ; ;

09000

#3003 M99

#100 = #23 ; w #lol = #9 ; [#6] ; 1:1 T:

#102 = ABS M99 ;

Well.

If

Uor

W=

O,andl

U/210rl

W I<K,

error will be displayed in yourpro~rarnming, Thats good.

91

2.8.24

PROGRAM MIRROR IMAGE (G 68, G 69~

h. The operational direction after X-axis tool position compensation is inverted. i. T command for tool nose radius compensa tion tool nose center is inverted in the sign. ~. G command for tool nose radius compensation virtual tool nose position is inverted.

Program

mirror image is the feature to reverse the NC program operation in all directions around the work center line (Z-axis) by the use of G command. G68; . . . Program mirror image on. The program mirror image on state is held until G 69 is speci fied. - Program mirror image off. The program mirror image off state is held until G68 is speci fied.

(1)

G69;

?rogrammeo !00 rad]us com~en sation Tool center ,, .,,, T-, ..,.. Wrtual 1001 r ose G 41

til RTUAL VIRTUAL

TOOL TOGL

NOS?

.
NOSE COm PellSatlOfl T. and tool center G44 when PROGRAM m,rr Or Image fumt,o m 0. OOL CENTER . P

When program mirror image is on, the Xaxis operation by the NC program IS inverted with Z-axis being the center line. The manual operations (manual continuous feed and handle /step feed) are not affected by this feature. (2)

Fig. 2,40 Details of program mirror image

When the PROGRAM mirror image feature is on, the movement by the NC program is inverted with Z-axis being the center line. The following inversion is processed in the NC unit:
a. X command inverted. for X-axis coordinate value is

b.

U command for X-axis value is inverted. I command arc center Circular for x -axis is inverted. motion direction

incremental

coordinate

c.

coordinate

value

of

d.

inverted.

{ G 02.

PROGRAMMED CIRCULAR DIRECTION OF ROTATION ..-

ARC

CHANGED TO G 03

CIRCULAR ARC ROTATIONAL OIRECTION OF ROTATION WITH PROGRAM MIRROR IMAGE FEATURE ON

Fig. 2.39 e.
I

command for X-axis volume and direction

beveling/rounding is inverted. cycle taper Xaxis

f.

I command for canned distance is inverted. U and finishing I commands allowance, for

!3.

special are

canned inverted.

cycles

etc.

92

(3) a.

Cautions

for

G68 and

G69 commands G commands They must basis, image reset which be speci-

Power +

on

G68 and G69 are modal belong to 10 group. fied on a single block

Manual

reference point return

in principle. off) is used at operation, and

+
Program execution

b.

G69 (program mirror the time of power-on, program reset. These commands tool nose radius state. These commands finishing shape cycle.

c.

must be specified in the compensation cancelled

NOOO1 G50 x240. N0002 NO003 X40. G68 ; U480. z80. : u480. z40. ; Z120.

Z220. TO1O1

240.000

1 u-144.000

d.

may not be specified program of the special

in the canned

; 96.000 -96.000

NOO04 G50 NOO05 x80. NOO06 G69 N0007 G50

; Tllll ;

+384. 000 +144.000 -144.000 336.000 TO1O1 ;176.000 u-160.000 u240. 000

e.

If automatic origin return G28 X. . . Z. . . ; is specified when the Xaxis mirror image of the interfeature is on, the positioning mediate point specified in X and Z is affect ed by the mirror image, but the machine origin, which is an absolute position, is not affected by this feature.

NOO08 x120.

+x

G28 X...:...:
/ / /

,----\ / 7
\___ --PROGRAMMED iNTERMEDIATE POINT

x
ABSOLUTE ZERO POINT OFFSET 01 X56. 28

t
220 F

TURRET

u
EXAMPLE :

T 01

INTERMEDIATE POINT PRODUCED BY X-AXIS MIRROR IMAGE FEATURE

+Z Fig. 2.41

Described below is a sample program which uses G68 and G69 for the opposed tool rest shown in the diagram on the following page, and the X-axis movements. B
OFFSET TURRET 11 X64 Z 8.

93

2.8.25

MULTIPLE

REPETITIVE

CYCLES (G 70 TO G 76)+

(3)

The ing

internal memory shape program:

for

storing

the

finish-

2, 8. 25.1

General

This option makes program simple and short. For instance, both stock removal and finishing are performed only by commanding the finish ing work shape.

Table 2.21 G code Name


Finishing cycle

Multiple Repetitive

Cycles Remarks (4)

To shorten the stock removal cycle compu t ation time, the finishing shape program is binary-converted and then is stored in the memory for storing finished shape program (one pair) in the unit. This memory is called the internal memory for finishing shape program, which differs from the part program memory. In the block after G 76, the G codes specified again. group G codes may have been the cycle of G70 through of 01 group should be This is because the 01before the cycle to other G codes

G 70
G71 G 72 G 73

Stink removal in turning -~

Finishing ~ byG70 possible Tip nose radius ~ comknsa~on possible

specified changed

Stock removal in facing = Pattern repeating

by the execution of this cycle.


(5) It is possible compensation G73. to perform tool on the cycle of nose radius G 70 through

G74

Peck drilling in Z axis

-=c!=minxais .: ::=::discOmRnsatiOn
G 76 ]
Automatic threadcutting

(6)

Tool nose radius compensation cannot be performed on the cycle of G14 through G76, Any attempt to do so will result in an error.

(1)

G70 through modal. The program by G71, G72 The memory is 45 blocks.

G76

are

in

group

and

non-

(2)

of finishing and G73 are capacity for

shape stored the

specified in memory. shape

finishing

Program

of

finishing

shape

S 45 blocks

~ J

When cornering (Gil, G12) and Note: multiple cornering (Gill, G112) are used, each block containing them must be counted as the value listed below.

No. of blocks

One blwk
or G12

including

G 11

TWO blocks Four blocks

One blcck including

G 111

One block including G 112

Five blocks

2.8, 25.2

Stock

Removal

in Turning

(G71) allowG71. between caved monotonous increase shaped path. /decrease and con-

Stock removal ante remained Commands for (1) Monotonous shape

in turning with the finishing uncut can be commanded by finished contour are different increase /decrease finishing

ns:

Sequence Sequence

number number 1~.,.

for for K*. ..

cycle cycle D..

start finish . F(E) . .. S.. . ;

G71

Pns

I--nf

T_TT__l==_
Depth of cut (designation Rough finishing

Feedrate and spindle-speed designation for stock removal in turning in X-axis direction without signs) in Zaxis direction

Nns

. . . .. . .. . .

; .

allowance in

. . F . . . . . s . . . . . . . . Nnf . . . . .

; ; Rough (radius
I

finishing allowance designation) in the

X-axis

direction

Finishing direction

allowance of Z-axis

Finishing allowance in the direction X-axis (diameter designation)

of Note: Feed command F(E) and spindIe command (S) are given for executing

Finishing shape program (45 blocks maximum) A+ A+B Tool path: Sequence number should start with ns and end with nf. F and S commands are effective only when G 70 finishing cycle is executed. x

(Relractlng) ~-r -------A

+x

E&x
L-, \
~\ \* -1 ~_ ! !~I ING AL I*

Start and f(n!sh at posjt!on A

------1 NE-t-H-H
+Z Fig. 2.42

Flnlshlng shape program Stock removal cycle Rough fln!sh[ng cvcle

FINISHING ALLOWANCE

~ Q
stock removal cycle.
(Retrac:ng) / 4

3;

!-4

+2

Fig.

2.43

G 71 starts at point A, executes rough finish cycle () and the rough finishing to point A to be cycle (--) , and returns terminated. In the case of I = O and K = O (or no designation) , the rough finishing cycle is omitted.

Retracting is performed by rapid traverse Thrust motion depends on the speed GOO. (GOO or AA. GO1) specified by the program of

Each depth of cut D along X-axis can be overrided by 10% step within the range of O to 200%, by G711G72 cut depth over ride selection or setting . See item (3) , g.

95

2,8.25.2 Notes : 1.

Stock

Removal

in Turning

(G 71) (Centd)

Note 1: Specifies the feed command (F(E)) and spindle command (S ) for the execution of stock removal cycle.
Note 2: concaved specified. Computes finishing the cutting path for the shape program if R 1 is
FCSIT:CNI Shl FTED FRC~J POINT ABYu2-

The tool path of finishing shape should be programmed to be monotonous increase or decrease in X and Z coordinates.
The following should be taken into consideration in programming the start block ( Nns) and the end block (Nnf) of a finishing shape program.

2.

IRelr,]ct r \--+ B \ \ \ \\ \ w%. i -x \ \ \ L . 21 FINISHING SHAPE ,,/ / :p<~ pg~:;c, ,.~ ----j---+~j-, /

.GI

, .1 :/

1)

X ;pxq:,

MONOTONOUS INCREASE

MONOTONOUS INCREASE

[Cti TTlh S, / ~~~ A FINISHING ALLOWANCE $,,,

id !

-+---

- ________ _ t1.--l
11
.4~
A Nns AA IS N ~A;&LEL Speclf!ed :$:& WITH I

12&5iil
g. b. Cautions gram (i) finishing format
ns: Sequence number farcyclestart

~i~<,s~,~~ ~~Af3E PL30GRAM STOCK REMOVAL CYCLE ROUGH FINISHING CYCLE

G71 starts at point A, executes the rough and the rough finishing cutting cycle ( ) to point A to be cycle (---) , and returns if I is not specified, the rough terminated. finishing cycle is skipped. lletracti~g is per forrn~d by rapid traverse Thrust motion depends on the speed GOO.
( GOO or GO1) specified by the program of Each depth of cut D along X-axis AA. can be overrided by 10% step within the range of O to 200%, by G71/G72 cut depth See item (3) override selection or setting.

for

concaved

finishing

shape

pro-

Rough cutting cycle the closest concave

by G71 starts from to the start point. 23

(2) a.

Concaved Command

contour
COMMAND POINT Cf FINALBL02K Cf FINISHING SHAPEPRffiRAM

START POINT

J
G71 PAS

~
CJf u:.

.,:
..

Sequence number forcyclef>nish


12 . . . D..

F(E) Note 1

S... R1

;
A COMMAND PO(NT OF 1ST BLIXK OF FINISHINGSHAPE PRCGRAM

~ Nns.. , F.
s. .. ..

Note 2

; ;
;

lTI

T Depth of cut m X-axis direction (designation withoutsigns)

...,,,
Nnf . . . . . .. . .

,~ ;J I_

Rough

finishing allowance m X-ares directmn (radiusdesignation)

Finishing allowance in the direction of X-ax~s (diameter designation) (45blocksmaxmtum)

Fnmshmg shape progrm Tool path: A + A! + B

Since cutting starts with the concave nearest the start point, the cutting path is interrupted if it hits the convex be The concave is cut to yond the concave. Then, the its bottom. turns to the interrupted cutting beyond it. cutting cycle repoint to perform

(iii)

Any contour having an overhang does not allow cutting. Hence, the Z-axis specification value of the finishing shape program should be a monotonous variation.

(iv)

The termination block for the finishing shape program has the following limitations:

DISCONTINUATION DEPTH OF CUT D

(ii)

For

a simple concave, only one interrupted However, for a complex point is provided. concave containing a smaller concave and a convex as shown below, the cutting path interrupted first at the larger convex is

For the G command ; ) , specify (Nnf. . . pal. (v) The cYcle retracting may be

of

the termination block GO1 or GOO., in princi

amount set by the

after

each

approach

setting.
SETTING

then at the smaller convex.


RETRACTING AMOUNT #6202 (FOR G 71) DISCONTINUATION 1

)T
.-----
CUTTING 1 \

PATH

cONcAvE \

UA

/
(vi) Each block of the finishing shape program should be of monotonous increase or monotonous decrease. A circular arc which extends over two or more quadrants must be divided into two blocks before being programmed. Generally, Zaxis finishing allowances W and K are not specified. Otherwise, a bite is caused into the wall of the corresponding side. If R 1 is not specified, the conventional monotonous increase /monotonous de crease stock removal cycle is provided. Approach is performed at the feedrate. [t is not affected by the G code of the finishing shape program. Hence, depending on the finishing shape program, positioning may be performed by rapid traverse after the approach at feedrate.
A A

CONCAVE

The maximum number of interrupted points that, allows cutting is three, beyond which cutting is disabled, causing 097 error. Within this limitation, any number of concaves is allowed. (vii)
DISCONTINUATION 1 ,

(viii)

DISCONTINU-vA ATION 4

Sample

Contour

Not Allowing

Cutting

:ing
APPROACH

d
97

2. 8.25.2 (3)
a.

Stock

Removal

in Turning G71

(G 71) (Centd)

Rules

in programming

Addresses U , W, I and K must be programIf a wrong sign is promed with signs. grammed, the workpiece may be gouged. An address D for depth of cut must be programmed without signs . Finishing shape program must be programmed immediately after the block containing G71. Even a block between them is ignored. When F and S codes are not specified in the block containing G 71, F and S codes specified in the preceding block are effective for G71 mode. F and S codes specified in the program of finishing shape become effective only for G 70 mode and are disregarded in G71 mode. The following should be taken into consideration in programming the start block ( Nns ) and the end block (Nnf) of a finishing shape program.

f. The above rules and cautions in programming G71 also apply to G72 cycle. In other words, the G72 cycle is the same as G71 except that cutting is made in parallel with X-axis.

g.

Cut

depth

override

of

G71 and

G72

b.

Ten percent step override may be applied, within the range of O to 200%, to the depth of cut D of each time in the following two manners: (i) By setting with #6004D3 5-bit code. through ) D7.

(Set
(ii)

c.

By G71/G72 cut depth override switchEither of the above methods ing. shown in (i) or (ii) may be selected by parameter #6023D2.

Parameter

Function

d.

Usable G code

Remarks

Gill

A blcck containing these codes


must be counted as four blccks. A blcxk containing these codes must be counted as five blwks.

G112

e.

When a program has entered the tool nose the G 71 radius compensation mode before
is tive commanded, for the the G71 compensation is effec cycle. is executed but in the not rough

However, the compensation in the stock removal cycle

finishing cycle. Thus, the compensation is ineffective for the program in which the rough finishing cycle is omitted. (I = O, K = O)

EXAMPLE

A:

Tool

finishing shape

nose compensation without concaves

applied to

+x 1

!
------. i

.-

D -- (260 220. )

J-u
100. DIA
60. DIA

m-~mm)
k.

(L+qi
!
30.

---

40.

DIA.

-+
-0.5

mm 0)

O.,rnm (})

+Z 30. 10. mm (W)

1-

40.

10.

20.

,.

N1

G50

x260.

Z220.

; TO1O1 ;

N2
N3 N4 N5 N6 N7 N8 N9 N1O Nll N12 N13 N14 N15

GOO S1OOO M03


G41 X145. G71 GOO GO1 x60. G12 GO1 W-20. X140. X145. G40 GOO x260. P6 X40. W-40. w-30. W-20. X1OO. ; W-20. ; ; z180. Q13 ; U1.

F
1

Stock

removal

in turning

WO.5 ; . ; ;

12. Rapid cutting

K2. traverse

D4.

FO.3 \

s800

s800 FO.15 s600 15.

Finishing ; ~qb:fikl~t s300. ; 0 = 9 blocks

shape

W-10.

S200

; /

Z220.

TO1OO

99

2. 8.25.2 EXAMPLE concaved

Stock Removal in Turning (G 71) (Centd)


B : shape Tool compensation not applied to

-x

CENTER I

~.

1P
1 ./( 6(

1
25 R

1
15. i ~ >Ji .

\
120 L)IA

I
5.15 I 20. I 1

wI
ii
10. 1

\~/
t
10, I

20.

IT

%A
:0 \ 1 50, !

I
z

I
+2

NO1

G50

x260.

z70. M03
;

;
TO1O1 ; ~ Stock S250 RI removal ; in facing

N02
N03

GOO S500
x124. Z-10.

,
N04 N05 N06 N07 N08 N09 N1O Nll N12 N13 N14 G71 GO1 x80. W-10. x 110. ; X90. w-20. w-5. w-5. ; ; ; / 270. TO1OO ; W-20. 125. 115. ; K-20. ; P5 Q14 ; FO.1 S500 ; U2. D6. FO.2

X120. Z-50. ; w-lo.

Finishing shape I

W-10. G02 X11O. GO1 X120. x124.

N15 N16 N17 N18 N19

GOO T0202 G50 X124. G70

x260. ; x255. Z-10. P5 Q14

z70. ; ;

Executes

finishing cycle of G 71 shown

above.

100

2.8,25.3

Stock

Removal

in

Facing (G72)
G 71 is for cutting in parallel with Z axis and G72 is for cutting in parallel with X axis.

This

cycle
in

finishing remaining

provides facing

stock removal and rough with the finishing allowance

(1) a. G72

Monotonous Command Pns

increase format

ldecrease

finishing

shape

Qnf

Ut...

Wf...

If.

. .

Kf,

..

D..

F(E)

. . .

S..

Nns

. . . . . . . .. . . . . ...< F s .

; ; ; ; ~T Significance is the same

T Depth of cut in Z axis direction (without signs) of each address as that of G71 command. (45 B blocks maximum)

. .. . . . . . . . . . . .

.........
Nnf . . . . . . . ..

;
; J Finishing shape program Tool path: A + A +

+x {

l-%

Retracting is performed by rapid traverse Thrust motion depends on the speed GOO. ( GOO or GOl) specified by the program of AA. Each depth of cut D along Z-axis can be overrided by 10% step within the range of O to 200%, by G71/G72 cut depth over ride selection or setting .

b. Rules
shape

and

cautions

in programming

finish

G72 is the same as G71 cuts into the workpiece Refer to 2.8.25.2 axis. Turning.

except that the in parallel with Stock Removal

tool Z in

_ -----

Flmshlng shape prograrr Stock removai cycle Siart and ftnlsh at PosIton A

Rough flnishlng cycle

Fig. 2.44

Cycle moval turns

starts at point A executes cycle and rough finishing to A when completed. K = O (or

stock cycle,

rere

In case of I = O and
the rough finishing

no designation)

,
Nns ~~~ AA IS IN PARALLEL WITH Z AXIS Nnt ~~~ BA IS IN PARALLEL X AXIS 1 Speclfled ,n GOO or G 01 mode

cycle

is omitted.

Fig.

2.46

Fln!shng

shape program cvcle

Stock removal

Fig. 2.45

101

2.8.25.3 (2)

Stock Removal in Facing (G 72) (Centd) finishing shape ns: Cycle start sequence Cycle finish sequence Kf. .. D.. . number number S.. . R1. .. ;

Concaved

G72 Nns ........ . ........ ; F ...... . s ...... ;~ ........ ; Nnf ........ .

r Pns

Qnf

nf:

W~...

F(E) ...

(See Note 1.) T Depth of cut in Zaxis direction (without signs )

~T

Rough finishing allowance in Z-axis direction Finishing allowance in Zaxis direction

Finishing shape program (45 blocks maximum) B Tool pat~ : A- +- AI-+

cutting path is comIf R1 is specified, Note 1: puted for the- concaved finishing shape program.

b.

Cautions gram

of

concaved

finishing

shape

pro-

_----

FINISHED SHAPE PROGRAM ROUGH ROUGH CYCLE CUTTING FINISH

G 72 only performs the operations which are The same cautions as parallel to Z axis. with G71 are applied to G72 except that the retracting amount of G72 may be set by setting #6203.

(3)

Cautions The same

for

G 72 command as with G71 are applied

cautions

to G72.
RETRACT MOTION FINISH ALLOWANCE

EXAMPLE

In

case is not

of I

= K = O, tool

nose

radius

compensation
ROUGH CUTTING ALLOWANCE

applied. i
mm (1))

x
-x L.: \ ~. 4 -z L1l-1 ~M K R D I ,

I
+

t-l

m
160.

LMA

G 72 starts

at point

A , performs

stock

re

moval cycle (- ) and rough finishing cycle (---), and returns to point A when comIf K is not specified, rough finishpleted.
ing cycle is skipped. Retracting is perI I 1 I -,.

formed by rapid traverse rate depends on the speed specified by the program E-ach depth-of overrided by O to 200%, by selection or

GOO. Cutting (GOO or GO1) of AA. can be range of override

cut D along X-axis 10% step within the G71/G72 cut depth setting.

102

N1

G50

X260.

z60.

; T0202 ; i--Stock removal in facing

N2 N3
N4 N5 N6 N7 N8 N9 N1O Nll

GOO S1OOO M03 X170.


G72 GO1 x120. Z-50. P5 z-60. s250 ;

Z5.
011

;
uO.6 FO.15 ; ; WO.5

IO

KO

D4.0

FO.3 at feed

s200

. . .. .

Cutting

x80.
Z-20. X40. Z5. ;

Z-40.
; ZO

S400

I I
I
Finishing shape program

S800

J
z60.

N12 N13 N14 N15

GOO T0303 X170. G70

x260. ; Z5. P5 011

;
Ul>o

Executes

finishing

cycle

$li7?sl.%
A x
+Z WORK SHAPE OR G71 AND FINISHING ALLOWANCE x-

U,l >0 W,K<O

,-

%2
A
U,l <o WK<O U,l <0 w,K>O

In

the case that U, W, I and K z O are erroneously programmed.

Fig. 2.47

Relation between

Finishing

Shape Program and Signs of Addresses U, W, I and K A wrong workpiece sign will cause a grouging as shown below . of the

2.8.2.5.4

Pattern

Repeating

(G 73)

This cycle is useful for cutting the workpiece such as moldings and forgings whose cutting shapes are roughly made beforehand. (1) Command

G73

W*. ..

If.

. .

K+. . .

D.. .

F(E) ... Note

s.. . ;

Nns

. . . . . . . . . . . .

l-I

I
allowance

L Number of cuttings (1 S D S 127, without signs)

L Rough finishingallowance in Zaxis direction L Finishing allowancein X direction (Radius designation)


Finishing

in Z-axis

direction

Finishing allowancein X -axis direction (Diamet& designation)

Finishingshape pro~ram (45 blocks maximum) Tool pat;: A- A-+ B (See Fig. Sequence number should startwith ns and end with nf. F and S commands are effective only when G70 finishing cycle is executed. Note: Feed command (F(E)) and spindle speed command(S) are given for executing closed loop cutting cycle.

-x

K
(Retractlnal t--i c

(2) a.

Rules

in programming I and

G73 K must be program-

r B ?

Address U , W, med with signs.

b.
THRUST MOTION

Address D for number of cuttings programmed without signs, obeying lowing restriction.

must the

be fol-

FINISHING ALLOWANCE

u ( -1 2

t#& I
Flnlshlng shape Pattern repeating program cycle

D command 72

out

of

the

above

range

causes

data error. (Alarm code 096) When D is 1, the cutting of I and K values is completed in a single cycle remaining finishing allowance.
c.

Slart anc f]nsk at posltlon A

Finishing mediately The start finishing

shape after (Nns) shape

should be programmed imthe block containing G73. and cycle end (Nnf) block of must be programmed not be parallel a

Fig. 2.48

d.

with GOO or GO1. But these 2 blocks X or Z axis.

need

with

e.

Finishing shape program does not be repetitive monotonous increase crease in X or Z coordinate.

need to or de-

EXAMPLE Incase AI = ~

2 of I =0. 01 mm, K =0. 01 mm, D =7

Notes :

=0.001mm

1.

When F(E) and S functions are not specified in the block containing G73, the F (E) and S functions specified in the preceding blocks are effective in the pattern repeating cycle. F (E) and S functions specified in the program of finishing work shape are effective in finishing cycle G 70 and ignored in pattern repeating cycle. Table below shows the G codes which can be specified in the program excluding the blocks of Nns and Nnf.

AK

=+=

0.001mm

Therefore, the cutting allowance of each cycle is as follows. 1st to 6th cycle . AI .AK 7th cycle ...... AI =LK (6) When the program =0.001mm .O.004mm

2.

has entered the tool nose


before G 73 is comis effective for

Usable G codes GO1, G06, G02, G 03, G 22, G 23 Gil, Gill GI12 G12

Remarks

radius compensation mode manded, the compensation all cycles of G73.

EXAMPLE

Counted as 2 blocks Counted as 4 blocks Counted as 5 blocks

L/
20.)

3.

When I and K are O or not designated, it causes input error. (Alarm code 096 is displayed. ) A I and A K (rough cutting allowance per
+Z

4.

cYcle ) are calculated as follows.


K D-l where *K= D~2 D-1
N1O N1l G50 x260. z220. ; GOO s300 M03 T0303 ; ~ W1. ; 18. K8. Pattern repeating D3 FO.3 S200 ;

AI=~

N12 X220. z160. ;

Note

that

the

control

ignores

the

value

below 0.001 millimeter. program should be made are not smaller of 1 than AI

As a rule, the so that A I and

N13 G73 P14 019 U2.


AK
N14 GOO x80. N15 GO1 w-20. N16 w-40. FO.15

s400

O. 001 millimeter. AK

Processing EXAMPLE In case D=7 *1 = of

and

X120. w-lo. S300 ;


; ;

Finishingshape program

N17 W-20, N18 G22

x160. W-20. R20. S200 x180. w-10. ;

I = 0.005

mm,

K = 0.005

mm,

N19 GO1 N20 GOO

0.005 6 0.005 6

x260. z220. ;

=0 Input =0 1 error occurs.

*1

105

2.8.25.5

Finishing

Cycle (G 70)
G73, the commands

a,

Operation in Tape G71 Pns Qnf. .

Mode ; Stock removal in turning Finishing shape program (A) (25 blocks maximum)

After rough cutting of G71, G72 and finishing cutting can be made by the

followin~ Gi0. (1) G70

Pns

Qnf

; Sequence number cycle finish


Sequence number cycle start

T nf:

for

:sNnf. ..

L
I
;J
Qnf. . . ; Pns Pns Qnf . . . ; . . . ; L

ns:

for G70

Execution of finishing cycle Stock removal in facing

This command permits the execution of the finishing shape program in G71, G72 or Gi3 which is commanded previously.
F(E) and ing shape ing cycle. S functions specified program are effective in the finishin the finish-

G72

Nns

F(E) and S functions for rough cutting specified in the block containing G71, G72 or G73 are ignored in the finishing cycle.

Nnf ... .
After

Finishing shape program (B) (25 blocks maximum )

J
the above program the pro-

executing

The internal memory for storing the finishing shape program: To shorten the stock removal cycle time, the finishing shape program is binary-converted and then is stored in the memory (one) pair) in the unit. This memory is called the internaf memory for finishing shape program.
(2) G70 does not need to be commanded immediately after the block of G71, G72 or G73. Necessary information such as tool change from a rough cutting cutter to a finishing cutter can be inserted between them.

Note :

gram (A) is eliminated and the program (B) is retained in the finishing shape memory. Therefore, the finishing command with G 70 in the trailing program is effective for the finishing shape program (B) . If the sequence number specified by G 70 does not match the sequence number in the memory for finishing shape program , an error (091 ) is caused. b. Operation in memory (MEM) mode

and operaHowever, the following command tion should not be programmed between them .

Inhibited Command and Ooeration

] Result

When the sequence number specified by G 70 matches the sequence number in the memory of finishing shape program, the finishing cycle is normdl y executed. If they do not match, a search for the specified finishing shape program from the part programs is performed. Then, the program is stored in the memory and is executed. This is called the finishing shape program search feature. This feature enables , only in memory mode, the programming in which the stock removal cycle (or closed loop cutting cycle) is per formed two or more times as shown below and then the finishing cycle is performed for each stock removal cycle :
Stock

(3)

Storage program

and

search

of

the

finishing

shape removal + removal *cycle 4 cycle cycle cycle (A) (B) (A) (B)

The processing of the finishing shape gram is different in tape operation mode and memory operation mode.

proStock

Finishing Finishing

Supplement: (i) The ture use of the finishing the cycle shape time shape program as follows: program search fea-

(ii)

This

search

feature

is executed program

only

in the

increases of

part program having the for which G70 is specified. Notes : 1.

number

, Example time: When cters) gram the the

finishing

machining

tape

is

5 m ( 2000 charof shape prothe tape,

For the sequence number ns for cycle start and nf for cycle finish, the following case causes input error.
When the sequence numbers ns and nf of G70 are not commanded in the finishing shape program (Tape operation) When the sequence number ns of G70 is commanded in advance of sequence number ns, or ns = nf.

long and the finishing is stored in the middle cycle time is about

100 msec.

. Example of the execution time for storing the searched finishing shape program in internal memory: When the size of the finishing shape prothe execution time is gram is 30 blocks, about 1 sec. However, the storing of the searched program in internal memory is performed in the block which precedes the block of G70 command. Hence, the cycle time is increased by the amount obtained by subtracting the execution time of the preceding block from the above time (about 1 see) .

2.

When the program radius compensation manded, G70. the

has entered the tool nose mode before G 70 is com is effective for

compensation

2.8.25.6

Peck

Drilling

in Z-axis

(G74) of peck drillwith Z axis.

This command permits the operation ing with pecking motion in parallel (1) Command G74 format z(w) ~~~~~ f...

X(U)*

1..

K..

D..

F(E)

.. . $eedrate

(Rl) N~tel

1
Depth Move Z coordinate X coordinate of position amount of in C of position B

Retracting amount of the tool cutting bottom (without signs) in Zaxis direction direction (without (without

at the

cut X-axis

signs)

signs)

R -x i F ~.

Rap]d traverse Specified Retracilong by F code amount

(Sett!ng t6204)

The cycle starts and finishes at position A. The fixed amount of pecking is set by the parameter No. 74.
is of the cause Note 1: The above diagram R1 is not specified. When R1 is where specified, the retracting amount ( 6 ) for each approach is ignored and the tool returns to the approach start point, namely point A in Z-axis. This cycle starts at point A and ends at it.

m:
+------z
Fig. 2.49

107

2.8.25.6
Notes : 1.

Peck

Drilling

in Z-axis

(G 74)

(Centd)

8.

The tive

tool nose radius compensation for G74 and G75.

is ineffec-

Addresses I, without signs.

K and

D must

be

programmed

EXAMPLE G74 X40. Z50. 14. K15. D1. FO. 25 ;

2.

When the command of I >lU/21 is issued, the cycle finishes after the finish of the pecking motion from position B following the pecking motion from position A. When the command of K > I W I is issued, the cutting is made at once to the cutting bottom without the pecking motion. When D is programmed as O or D is not programmed, the retracting motion is not made at the cutting bottom. The final cutting K and the final tion I are amount in the Z direction move amount in the X direccalculated.

+x

3.

-h: -=53
1

15

80. DIA

4.

40. DIA -z

5.

automatically

50. 6.
If X(U) , I or D is omitted, only one-cycle of Z-axis, operation which is is made used for in the direction drilling.

120.

7.

When the contents of setting #6204 are set to O, the cutting is made at once to the cutting bottom without pecking motion.

2. 8.25.7 (1)

Grooving

in X-Axis

(G 75) the operation of peck motion in parallel with

This command permits drilling with pecking Xaxis. Command format

a.

G 75

x(

+...

Z(!A

TT~te=
Retracting cutt!ng amount bottom of the tool signs) at the (without Move amount jn Z-axis d(rection (wtthout signs) wttmg

depth (n X-axw d!rection B

(without s(gns)

coordinate X coordinate of pos(tlon

of posit{on

108

EXAMPLE

: X86. X50. Z70. Z40. ; 16. K4. (DO) FO.2 ;

.. +x
B -F .- R
N2
R F 8 Rapid traverse Speclfled F code Retracing amount (Setttn G# 6205) by

h?

N1

GOO G75

Fig. 2.50 The above diagram is of the case Note 1: where R 1 is not specified. When R1 is specified, the retracting amount ( 6 ) for each approach is ignored and the tool re turns to the approach start point, namely point A in X-axis. This cycle starts at point A and ends at it. Notes : G74 permits the cutting in the direction of Z-axis, and G75 in the direction of Xthe cautions in programming axis. Therefore, G75 is the same as those of G74. Refer to 2.8. 25.6 Peck Drilling in Z-axis (G74) .

+2

2.& 25.8 This cycle and taper (1) G76

Automatic provides threadings

Threading

Cycle

(G 76) of straight of thread.

automatic cutting along the angle

Command X(1

format Z(w

t _.. .

*... .

It.

. .

K..

D..

F(E)

. . .

A..

T T T =-First Height of

Lead

of

thread

depth

of

cut

(without signs)

signs)

thread

(without

Distance ( radius

of tapered designation)

section

Z coordinate of position C
X coordinate of position C

109

2 8.25.8

Automatic Threading Cycle (G 76) (Centd)

The sign of figure following the address I is decided by the direction of position B viewed from position C .

Fig. 2.53

(3)
,Z

Rapid threading pull-out If Rapid threading pull-out input (CD Z ) is on when G76 is specified, Rapid threading pull-out is performed. (y) may be set to parameter #6080, in the range of O to 25. 5L and in increments of O. lL , where L is the lead of the specified thread.

Fig.

2.51

The
The

following shows
poin~ B (In starts G76 cycle

the cuttin~ position


case and of tap~rthread) ends at point . A.

Notes : 1.

around

The depth of cut D in the first cycle is restricted by height of thread K as follows.

,
----CYCLE 2ND CYCLE 3RD CYCLE NTH CYCLE

Addresses K and D must be programmed without signs.


2.
j> FIXED AMOUNT (SETTING .6206)

When taper threading is commanded with an effective angle, except O, X coordinate of threading start position does not extend to the depth of cut.

Fig. 2.52
~.

The depth of cut in Nth cycle is:

441
THREADING L). ,q:~ .-. -.. _ THRE4DING START POSITION

The following six angles can be used command of thread angle.


A = 0, 29, 30, 55, 600, 80

as the
3.

If the thread angle other than the above listed (0, 29, 30, 55, 60, 80) is arbitrarily commanded, the next larger angle is selected.

Cutting in final cycle is made with the depth of fixed amount a, which is set by the setting #6206.
(2)

EXAMPLE (Command) When A j A15 80, _ A80 is (Execution) executed. A29

Straight thread When the address I is O or not designated, a straight thread is cut as shown below.

110

4.

When the depth of cut in the final cycle along the thread angle ( = D ) is not met with (K - a), the difference between K and a is deThe depth of cut in first ducted from D. cycle never becomes larger than D.

5.

Thread

cutting hold (option)

N,.,

D K
a

When this option is used, depressing the FEED HOLD during thread cutting causes the tool to perform threading up immediately and then return to start point A. When parameter #6019D7 K 1, the tool stops at position B where Rapid threading pull-out is terminated. Then, the tool returns to point A upon depression of CYCLE START .

.-.
--.-

B DIFFERENCE

EXAMPLE Incaseof a (Fixed D =5. amount) = fix = H Omm, K =9.8 = 0.2 mm 5.000 D mm,

r
-D

= 10.000mm (K - a) - 0.200)

1
First Second Third Fifth

Difference

o
~------k_ l~zR HOLD

THREADCUTTING CYCLE PATH WITHOUT FIOLD

START POINT

i,,

=EED HOLD

= 10.000 - (9.800 =0.400 > 0 depth of cut

If the thread cutting selected, depressing cycle is

hold option is not of the FEED HOLD the

Thus, the as follows. cycle

in each

during thread cutting does not hold the operation, which stops at point C where retracting operation is completed.

5.000. = 4.600 mm . . . fix

0.400 (4) Tool nose radius compensation available for G 76. t is not

cycle

5.000-0.400 mm (5)

= 6.671 cycle . . .

fix 5.000-0.400 = 8.260 mm 5.000-0.400 mm + 0.200 (a) = 9.800 mm

G code of 01 group must be newly programmed in the next block of G76 cycle. EXAMPLE

Fourth cycle ... ax


cycle . . . . . ..

= 9.600

G76. . . GOO M30

; ;

9.600

111

2.8.25,

8 Automatic Threading Cycle (G 76) (Centd) :

Single

block

operation

EXA.MPLE

. Executing switch ON

G70 through G76 at SINGLE BLOCK brings the following results.

GOO G76 GOO

X66. x56.2 . . .

Z115. Z30.

; K3.9 D2. F6. A60 ;


G70, G71, G72, I G 73, G 74, G 75 Program Stops at Every Block.

r- -~
-x

Program stops ;tr:::; IS finished. :Y.le

t
1 I

G 76

I <

64. im~
(a)

56. 2 1)1.1

Symmetrical
.2

pattern

The symmetrical four patterns can be commanded by each of G71 to G76. Signs of U, W and I should be properly specified in the finishing shape program for G71 to (See Fig. 2.8.25.33) G73.
Command position of (X, Z) or (U, W) spect to position A should be properly ed for G74 to G76. with respecifi-

30. 1 ),. ,,. \

60
(b)

/
a

~ 390 +x ~, ~--,]

u-, w-. 1

Depth of cut for a (fixed amount) 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th cycle cycle cycle cycle cycle

each cycle when is O. 2 mm

1.700mm 2.528 3.164 3.700 3.900

mm mm mm mm

LJ+, W-.1I

L,w , I+ -z

Though D20(I (2.0 mm) is programmed, the actual depth of cut becomes 1.7 mm by the calculation of = D because of the dif ference between ~= D and (K - a) .

Fig. 2.54

Four patierns

of G 76

2. 8.25.9

Precautions in Programming

G 70 through

G 76

Prohibition

of

MD I mode while G76)

. Operation in MD I mode cannot be made multiple repetitive cycles ( G70 through are executed. . Multiple repetitive cannot be writtenin MDI mode.

cycles (G 70 through G 76) Through the operation in

112

Table 2.22
Cutting Cycle

Multiple Repetitive Cycles


I

Command Format

c
n~ 1 -l L-\\, > l-G 71 Stock Removal in Turning
TAPE COMMAND N(ns) N(ni)

- ---

___

A 3

(1) Monotonous increase/decrease path G71Pns Qnf U... W.. . 1.. . K.. . F(E). . . S.. . ; Nns. . . 1

D.

-1 F 112

1 ~

I
Nnf. ; I

Finishing shape program

(2) Concaved shape G71Pns Qnf U...

1...

D...

F(E)...

s.. . F/J;
Nns. . . ; Finishing shape program Nnf. . . ;.

(U, W, 1, and K must be programmed with signs.)


TAPE COMMANO

t-%
A (1) Monotonous G72Pns F(E)... Nns. . .
TAPE COMM I u ~

increaseldecrease W.. . ;

path 1.. . K.. . D

Qnf U... S... ;

Finishing shape program

ivti G 72 Stock Removal in Facing (2) Concaved G 72 Pns s.. . ~ ; Nns. . .

Nnf.

; J shape )f W... K.. . D.. . F(E)

Finishing sham Nnf. ;

program

(U, W, 1, ar._ K must be programmed with signs.)

\\

2. 8.25.9
through

Precautions
G 76 (Centd)

in Programming

G 70

Table

2.22

Multiple

Repetitive

Cycles

(Centd)

Cutting Cycle

Command Format

Kl\ ._ <
I -

G73Pns F(E). . . Nns. . . ;

Quf U... S.. . I


I

W,,

1.

K.. .

D.. .

G 73
Pattern Repeating

I
~ Firwshing shape program

Nnf.

(U, W, i, and K must be programmed with signs.)

.
G 70 Pns Qnf ;

G 73
Peck Drilling in Z-axis

:;: I
IL. . K.. .

x(u). . .

z(w)
F(E), . . ~;

D.. .

(t) R 1 not specified: The operation shown left is performed (2) R 1 specified: Retracting amount (6) is Ignored and the tool for each approach

returns to the !evel of point A every time. G 75 Grooving in X-ais (1, D, K must be programmed without signs.)

G76

X(U)... A.. .

Z(W).. . ;

1.. .

K., .

D.. .

F(E). . . G 76 Automatic Threadcutfing A:

Angle of thread (0, 29, 30, 55, 60, 80=)

K and D must be programmed without signs.

=--

.4

2,8.25.10

Improved

Multiple

Repetitive

Cycle Function
also be against

(1)

G74 executes
by the following of (Upgrade

a cycle as shown command. 2.8.25.6 B_


TT

in

Fig.

1,118,

2.8.25 .10.1 Nose R compensation can executed in the finishing form program G70 to G73 cycles.

the

Par. _K_D_A_

(l).

G74x(u) _z(w)_l . This adds G41 and G42 to the G codes that can be specified in the blocks of the finishing form Nose program (except for the Nsf. Nnf blocks).

F(E) _(Rl);
-

R compensation is enabled by the G41 or G42 command blocks in the rough finishing cycle and finishing cycle. When commanding G41/G42 in the starting block of the finishing form program, also command the GOO or GO1 move command. Commanding in a single block is prohibited. . Upgrade of Itparo 2 .8.25.2 (notes uPOn commanding
. Upgrade (5) . Upgrade (2) of

IL
L
I nfeed Clearance (without Z-axis direction (without sign) X -axis direction (without sign) C ooint Z-axis (with sign)

Feed ~orn~and

Tool width
(without steps sign) sign)

(without

at the bottom sign) infeed distance

move

the G71 command)


Par. 2.8.25.4

(4), (5)
and remarks)

(notes

coordinate

of

Par.

2.8.25.5

(notes

and

remarks)

B Doint X-axis (with sign)

coordinate

STEPS

2.8.25

.10.2

The

code

command

can

also

be

NT

executed against the G70 to G73 cycles in the finishing form program.
the F, S, T codes commanded This enables finishing form program (G70) and disables during outer form rough cutting, . Upgrade the G71 . Upgrade (1) of l~par. command) of 2. 8.25.2 (3) (notes and remarks) (nOteS Upon in the them giving

WIDTH

Mparm 2 .8.25.4

2.8. 25.10.3 start point commanded

A finishing form program in which and end point differ can also be against the G70 to G72 cycles.

+2

2 .8.25.2 (notes n he . Upgrade of !tpar. (BA does finishing form program) (1) . need to be parallel with the Z-axis. ) . Upgrade finishing parallel of Mpar - 2 .8.25.3 (BA form) (2). with the X-axis. ) (notes does on not he need

not

(2)

G75 executes a cycle as shown by the following command. (Upgrade of Par. 2.8.25.7 (l).

in

Fig,

1.119,

) F(E) _(Rl);

to be G75X(U)_Z(W)_.1

_K_D_A_ B_ l--rl

2.8. 25.10.4 When both rough and K are omitted against the finishing margin U and W can rough finishing margin. Upgrading D1 = 1. is enabled by related

finishing margins I G70 to G73 cycles, be executed as the

parameter

#6009

2.8. 25.10.5 The A command (infeed steps) and the B command (cutting tool width) are added to the G74 (end face cutting cycle) and the G75 (outer diameter cutting cycle) functions to allow execution of the groove machining canned cycle.
c point

Z-axis direction (without sign) X-axis direction (without sign) B point Z-axis (with sign) X-axis

r
L
L Clearance (without coordinate

Feed command

Tool width (without sign)

I nfeed steps (without sign) at the sign) infeed distance bottom

move

coordinate

(with

sign)

115

2.8.25.10 Function

Improved (Centd)

Multiple

Repetitive

Cycle

(d)

TOOL R ; I A

WIDTH START POINT

When A is commanded, the return amount is the #6208 setting amount (G74) or #6209 setting amount (G75) , If the contents are lfo It, no pecking is performed. (Addition to Par. 2.8.25.6 96 occurs f B (tool Notes when width) and the . remarks) command .) is groove

(e)
+

Alarm width

-r 1

~t
n L I
T

1
I
1

;TEPS

2,8.26

CANNED

CYCLES

(G 90, G 92, G 94)

Y
II -+ -/---

A series of ally in four block . There are

basic lathe operations specified usublocks , can be commanded in one

the

following

three

canned

cycles

I
I

2,8.26.1 (1)

Turning

Cycle turning

A (G 90) cycle Z(W) . . . F(E) . . . ; is ex-

---

!
-

x +Z

Straight G90

i
of the improvement cycle functions of

X( U)... ~ this

2.8.25 .10.6 Notes multiple repetitive

the

The cycle ecuted by

to ~ shown command.

below

+ .x (1) The following conditions are added to Pars.


2.8.25.10.1, 2,8.25.10.2, and 2.8.25.10.3. (a) The upgrading #6011 D1 = 1. effective by related parameter z
Rapta traverse Specjf, ed w F code

(b)

This improvement expands the maximum storage of the finishing form program to 39 blocks . (Improvement of Par. 2.8.25.1 (general) (2).)
made to Par. 2.5

~
Fig. 2.55 Since G 90 is modal,
the cycle operation will cut

(2)

Notes on G741G75

improvement

(a)

Without both conventional

commands A and G74/G75 movement

B, the is executed. shift of

be continued by specifying the depth of in the X axis direction in the following blocks as follows. x(u) x(u) EXAMPLE . . . . . . : x94. X80, : z62. W-42. ; FO.3 ; ; ;

(b)

When B alone is commanded, tool width is performed at the beginning and end G741G75. Details are as follows.

(i)

The first movement is the shift for the tool width, from the positioning location of the block immediately before G741G75 to the Xaxis command direction (G74) or Z-axis command direction (G75 ) . The final movement is positioning location of before G741G75 to the and then to return to block immediately before When A alone is to positioning from the the block immediately tool-width shift position the position of the G74/ G75. only groove

N1O
Nll N12

GOO
G90 X70.

(ii)

N13 N14

x6o.

; ;

II

Cycle start ~ G90 is executed with depth

cut changed .

GOO. ..

(c)

commanded,

machining is performed width shift.

without ex=cuting tool

116

+x

2. 90. U 1A 40.

60.

1)1.A 1 1

(2)

Taper

cutting

cycle

G90

X( U)...
~ by

z(w)
to this

...

I. .

F(E).
below is

The cycle executed

~ shown command.

. .

Rap[d traverse ~pcecjf:d by

. I
1>

The sign of figure following the address I is decided by the direction of position A viewed from position B.
Fig. 2.56 EXAMPLE N20 GOO : X87. z72. ;

~ N25 -x GOO. . . ;

Lw
30. _ -------

+J
1

8(1. D[.A

7(], DIA

1(1.

40

2.

5(I 1)1.4

87 DIA tz

117

2.8.26.1 (3) a.

Turning Cycle A (G 90) ( Centd ) in programming G90

Rapid threading pull-out : If rapid threading pull-out input (CDZ ) is on when G92 is specified, rapid threading pullout is performed. Rapid threading pull-out value (Y) of O may be set to parameter ##6080, in the range
to 25. 5L and in increments of 0. lL , where L is the lead of the specified thread. Generally, it is convenient to create and use the sequence in which rapid threading puil-out (CDZ ) is turned on/off through the use of a given .M code.

Cautions

for G90 cycle must be T, S and M functions specified as a rule beforehand in the preceding blocks. T, S and M blocks without move commands are effective in the effective area of G90.

G90X. x.. x..

.. ;

I..

.I.

. . F(E)

. . . ;

h
Effective area of G90

; M05 ; E

Since G92 is be continued the direction x(u). x(u) . . . .

modal, the cycle operation will by specifying depth of cut in of X-axis . ; ;

x . . . T0505 GOO X...;...;

G90X.

..

I..

.I.

F(E). .

; Effective area of G90

EXAMPLE: N30 N31 GOO x80. G92 x66.4 z76.2M. z25.4 F6. ;--M ; out .,: ON Rapid pull-

x.. . ; x;... GOO X.. .


T0505 M05 ; s x . . . z.. . ;
I

threading

N32 x65.
N33 I N34 x63.8 x62.64

;
; ;

I
I I

Threading
cycle four cutting times

effective area of G91) is from the block containing G 90 to the one before the block in which the other G code of 01 group is specified. This rule also applies to the G 92 and G94 described later. b. In Single
cycle ~to@. Block mode, the execution of G90 stops after the completion of the cycle

The

N35 GOO X1 OO.Z1OO. M..-M LLLL : Rapid threading pullout OFF x

~_..

T_ -

5.

- ---V
k 7Z
Depth of cut

II

2.8.26.2 (1)

Threading

Cycle

(G 92)

I
Straight G92 threading Z(W). cycle . F(E) . . . ;

( 62. 64DI.I 7(I. DIA 1 /


I *

X( U)...

F!rsl cycle Second cycle cycle Tn)fd cycle

18rnm
07mnOfinm 058mnl

Lead The cycle ecuted by + .x ~ this

! designation below

(L)
is ex

25.4

76 2
to ~! shown command.

/
I

Fojrlh

z
. ~ ---

START POSITION

Hapd traverse

1-

.~

w -&I P 13 (N d 1% APPRGX $.;

Fig. 2.57

DetaIIs of Chamfering for Thread (M 23)

118

(2)

Straight G92 This alon to -x A ~ X(U).

thread

cutting z(w). .

cycle K

with F(E)

angle -- ;

EXAMPLE
T

command permits the thread cutting ~ the angle of thread . The cycle shown below is executed.

I
I 70. 111A

76

!2

I Angle of thread ~_6~

T
DIA

Depth of Cut d,=18mm d,=25mrn d,=lflmm d. 3.68 mm

F code

(or E code)

=
I K1 = -1.8 = -2.5 = -3.1x = -3.68 GOO G92 x65. x63.8 x62.64 GOO K2 K3 K4 N40 N41

-+?-

Calculation of K. .. x 0.57735
x 0.57735 0.57735

= d.tan(60/2) = -0.866
= -1.443 =-1. mm mm

Fig. 2.58
The sign of figure following decided by the direction of ed from position A.
ANGLE a

address position

K is A view

790mm mm

x 0.57735 z76.2 z25.4 ; ; ;

= -2.125 MOO ;

OF THREAD

X80. x66.4 K-1.44

K- O.87

F6.

-----

Y .A

/(!
1,10
First cycle Second 1 cycle +/ K k ~ ~ .4~/

f:~

-; 1>
1, ,, DEPTH OF CUT

N42 N43 N44 N45

K-1.79 K-2.13 x1OO.

z1OO.

MAA

CYce

(3)
IK,, I= dn~n(;)

Taper

threading

cycle

-1+@
a

K,

G92

X(U)-

Z(w)

1..

F(E) below

. . .

Fig. 2.59 For the threading along the angle of thread, the K for each cycle obtained from the above formula should be programmed.

The cycle @ to @ cuted by this command

shown

is exe

+ .x

tan (s/2) 0.258618

~
1 & ~

Speclfled by F code (or E code)

290
30

I
I

0.267949 0.520567
0577350
0.839100

550
60 60

+Z

I
I

!-L--3+
L
Fig. 2.60 Details of Rapid TPfeadlng Pull-out

119

2.8.26.2

Threading Cycle (G 92) (Centd) c. ~ .--. ---

The sign of figure following address I is de tided by the direction of position A viewed from position B . Since G92 is modal, the cycle operation is continued by specifying threading depth in the X-axis direction in the trailing blocks as follows.
x(u) x(u) EXAMPLE N50 GOO . . . . . . : X80. Z80.8 MOO ; ; ;

{f I-7
OF

-+

Fig. 2.62

N51 N52 N53 N54

G92 x70. x68.8 ; x67.8 ; GOO X1OO.

w-50.8

1-1.5

F2.

Z1OO.

MAA

For the threading along the angle of thread, the K for each cycle obtained from the following formula should be programmed. 1 I dn. tan(a/2) IKn{ = It ~ .tan(a/2) The sign in the denominator depends on 0 :

m,
:: \
@711 -r

et < 900
e! > 900

~
~

11+11
II _ 1!

EAD20
!15 tz Depth of Cut ::::

Note : For the control equipped with Multiple Repetitive Cycle~, the above troublesome calculation can be omitted by using G76 (Automatic Thread Cutting Cycle) . The control performs the above calculation automatically by the G 76 command.

Second cycle Th:,d cycle

(5) a.
(4) Taper along threading the angle cycle with angle (Cutting of thread) Z(W) . . . 1.. . K.. . F(E) ...;

Cautions T, S and

in programming M functions for

G 92 G92 cycle must be

G92

X( U)...

specified as a rule beforehand in the precedT, S and M blocks without move ing blocks. commands are effective in the effective area of G92.

This command permits the threading along the angle of thread in taper threading. The figure following the address K must be programmed with a sign.

b.

ln Single Block mode, the execution of G92 cycle is stopped after the completion of the cycle @ to @ .

c.
.x
1 ,

Thread

cutting hold (option)

w
c --. ___ ,...
Rapid traverse Specfed by F code (or E code)

g . J I
2

When this option is used, depressing the FEED HOLD during thread cutting causes the tool to perform threading up immediately and then return to start point A. When parameter #6019D7 = 1, the tool stops at position B where threading up terminated. Depressing the CYCLE START at start point A or B restarts the current processing from the beginning.
THREADCUTTING CYCLE PATH WITHOUT HOLD

tz

SWT
POINT

Fig. 2.61

FEED HCLC

Fig. 2.63

120

If the
lected, thread which

threadcutting hold option is not sedepressing of the FEED HOLD during cutting does not hold the operation, stops at point C where the retracting is completed. in Multi G92 comcan be

(2)

Taper G94

facing X( U)...

cycle Z(W) . . . K.. ~ . to F(E) ~ . . . :

operation d.

The taper facing cycle cuted bv this command +x


#.

is exe-

Six angles of thread can be used ple Repetitive cycle G76. In the mand, arbitrary angles of thread performed for threading.

Q1

,+

When

G92

(threading

cycle)

is

used

with
Rapid traVerSe

chamfering ON, thread pull-up value of O may activate alarm 064.

2,8,26,3
(1)

Facing Cycle B (G 94)


facing cycle z(w) -

Straight G94

X(U).

F(E).
to

;
@ is

Fig. 2.65 The sign is decided of figure by the following direction the address K of position A

The straight facing cycle @ executed by this command. -x

viewed from position B .

A
u 2

f?
A 3) -.

EXAMPLE
START POINT A __: Rap]a traverse : Spec!fled by F code

: X74.
X20. ; ; ; Three by cycles

l!a ;g, I , ~ B

N70
N71 N72
+2

GOO
G94 z25. Z20.

z32.
Z30.

;
K-5.29 FO.3 ;

r-l
I

N73 N74

Fig. 2, 64

GOO. . .

G94 command

Since G94 is modal, the cycle operation will be continued by specifying depth of cut in the Z-axis direction in the following blocks as follows.

7.

x
2.

z(w) z(w)
EXAMPLE N60 GOO

... ...
: x65.

; ;

Z42.

; I

+2

c;:::es
N64 GOO. . . -x ; -z

(3) a.

Cautions

in programming

G94

T, S and M functions for G 94 cycle must be specified as a rule beforehand in the preceding blocks. T, S and M blocks without move commands are effective in the effective area of G94.

Block mode, the execution of G94 b. In Single CYC~ is stopped after the completion of :3 to &l .

121

2. 8.26.3

Facing Cycle B (G94)

(Centd )

Table 2.23
Code Straight Cycle

Canned Cycles
Taper Cycle

G90

X(U)...

Z(W)..

F(E). . .

G90

X(U)...

Z(W).

..

1.. .

F(E). . .

/
R

R , F R( ! ~,~

G 90
Turning Cycle

11F z w

u/2

~!

x
a 1 x

.G92 X( U)...
Z(W)... F(E) ; G92 X( U)... z(w)

.,.

F(E). . .

F
G 92
Threading Cycle

u,/2

1G94 Z(W).

THREAD PuLLOUT 7

l-Z(W). ..

THREAD PULLOUT

..

F(E). . .

G94

X(U)...

K...

F(E),.,

G 94
Facing Cycle

122

2.8.27 CONSTANT SURFACE SPEED CONTROL (G96, G 97)+ This feature may be installed when specificationoption is selected. The following G codes are used: the S4 digit

Before the block of G96 command, the spindle maximum RPM should be specified by G !50. This specificationprevents the spindle RPM from getting abnormally high by the computation of surface speed when the X-axis
current EXAMPLE value : is smaller.

G 96

Specifies the constant surface speed control.

N1O
Nll N12

G50
MAA G96

S2000
; s150

Specified limit of

the upper spindle RPM.

G97
the

Cancels

the constant surface speed control.

M03

~At vialed. These group. (1) a.

time

of

power-on,

G97

(cancel)

is FI ro

(2)
are modal G codes which belong to 02

Constant G97 S.. .

surface speed control cancel (G97) (M03)


command,

;
directly specify the

Constant

surface

speed

control

(G96)

Using

this

G96
Using speed

S.. .

(M03)

this command, specify the surface of the work in a numeral of up to unit of the

spindle RPM in a numeral of up to 4 digits The constant surface after address S. speed control is cancelled and the usual spindle feature of S 4digit specification is resumed.

digits after address S. The surface speed is as follows:

(3)
a.

Cautions How

for

constant

surface system

speed (See

control Note)

Unit i

to set

coordinate

+=+-=
When the surface speed is specified, the equipment assumes the X-axis current value (Note 1) to be the diameter of the work and computes the spindle RPM every 100 msec so that the specified surface speed is ob tained. The computation result is sent as the analog voltage output or the binary 12bit signal output. In the subsequent blocks, the surface speed may be varied by S speci fication. b. For
a machine tool that allows spindle gear change, instruct the M code for gear change specification before the block of G96 com For details, refer to the instruction mand. manual for that machine tool. EXAMPLE N8 MAA : (ii) ; M code for spindle gear change ( gear No. 4 is specified) M03 ; ratio .

When performing the constant surface speed control, make programming by setting G50 coordinate system or G 58 work coordinate system so that X-axis coordinate value of the spindle rotational center become O. In other words, the coordinate system should be set such that its X-axis coordinate value correctly represents the diameter of the work at its machining point.

b. How

to handle

tool

position

offset

amount

(i) When

per formi~g the constant surface speed control, parameter #6020D 1 is generally set to O. This enables the control to perform the computation for constant surface speed control without adding the tool position offset amount to the specified coordinate value. If a large value is used for the offset amount, the tool position offset is normally executed and, at the same time, the constant surface speed control is correctly performed. When #6020Dl is set to 1, the value

N9

G96

S1OO

(Specified coordinate value + tool position offset amount) is assumed to be the work diameter to compute the constant surface speed. Hence , care should be taken not to use a large value for the offset amount by performing coordinate system setting for each tool and using the tool position offset for tool wear compensation.

123

2.8.27 CONSTANT SURFACE SPEED CONTROL (G 96, G 97)+ ( Centd )


(;

00/
/ /

THIS PROVIDES POINT SURFACE

END SPEED

and #6020D7 are independent from each other. position obtained by adding the tool position offset amount and the tool nose radius compensation amount is shown in the current position display POSITION ABSOLUTE.
#6020D7 = o #6020D7 = l . . . The position the tool position by not adding amount is shown in the current display POSITION ABSOLUTE. . . . The

Note:

#6020DI

AT START OF GOO

O@-/
.4 ~ x,

AT THE TIME OF GOO CONSTANT FOR THIS SURFACE SPEED IS COMPUTED

Fig. 2.67 EXAMPLE: N4 G50 S1500 ; s150 M03 25. ; ; ; ; 7 #6020 ;+ = O Upper limit of spindle s~eed clam~ (in r/rnin) . M code for gear change
1 .,.

obtained
offset position

Thus , the switching of the computation for constant surface speed control and the switching of the computation for cur rent position display on CRT are performed separately.
c.

1N5 MAA N6 G96

N7 GOO X40.

Constant surface speed 150 m/min )

N8 GO1 20 FO.15 The spindle gear may be changed in the for maximum of 4 steps . The parameters the gear change are as shown below. For details, see the Parameter List.
COMMAND 10 h SPINDLE TO MOTOR 4 T 4

I
t

N9 x80. Nlo Nll N12 N13 N14 w-lo. G22

2-30. ; X120. ;

Constant surface speed control

W-20.

R20.

GO1 U1O. G97 G50 S500 S2000

J
Cancel of constant ;

OR
4095

; -~

L
+x

surface speed control

5. ! 120. SPINDLE SPEED ,-, ..

DIA

+Z

20.10. 30

2.8.28 FEED/MINUTE SWITCHOVER

AND

FEED/REVOLUTION

These G codes are used to switch between the designation of feed per minute and the designation of feed per revolution, before specifying F(E) code (feed) command.
Fig. 2.66
d.

When parameter #6020D0 = 1, the constant surface speed control is performed on all positioning blocks ( GOO, G06) also. For positioning , however, the constant surface speed is computed for the end coordinate of the positioning block. The constant surface speed is at every moment computed for only the cutting block . Jvhen #D6020D0 = O, the constant surface speed control is performed only on the cut ting block and the positioning block immediately before it. For the positioning block, the constant surface speed is computed for its end coordinate.

(1)

G98

; the F(E) on a feed code specified per minute basis

command, By this after is executed

G 98

Meaning mmlmin designation inlmin designation

eiCd- -
Inch input

124

(2)

G99 By

; this command, the F(E) code per specified

b. T designation for tool lifecontrol For the T designation in the part program, the special T designation for tool lifecon trol must be used. c. Input/output signals for tool life control.

after basis.

is executed

on a feed

revolution

. Tool =
Notes :

lifecontrol I/0 signal.

Tool skip input.


. Tool . Tool remain

replacement

completion input. completion group number

replacement input.

1.
2.

G 98 and G99 are modal G codes, which valid until the designation is changed.

When switching between G 98 and G99 is performed, F (E) code designated before is canSo, it must be designated again. celled. an error is caused at the next Otherwise, cutting block.

The above inputs are provided to implement the highly efficienttool lifecontrol feature. The following describe these three steps in detail: (2) Registration of tool information The part program for tool information

3.

The initial G code at power-on may be switched between G98 and G99 by the use of the following parameter:

a.

registration

1
G code for tool information registration start Command for group number and life Address P : Tool group number [ Address L: Life per tool

2.8.29 TOOL LIFE CONTROL (G 122, G 123)+

This feature allows a long, unattended operation by replacing the tools each time the designated number of pieces or the designated use hour is reached. (1) The tool lifecontrol consists of the following three steps:
G123 ; 1

The tool numbers of the group designated by address P, and offset memory number :~1 : Tool number (1 to 50) _:: Compensation memory [ number (1 to 50)

a. Registration of tool information (i) Registration of tool group number. The tool numbers of the tools of the same type are registered as one group .

G code for registration

tool information completion.

Group No.

(ii) Registration of The number of by a tool to be group and the istered.

life of each tool group. pieces that can be machined registered in each tool usable hours of it are regLife per

19 groups, 1 to 19, may be used. For groups 1 to 9, life is designated by the number of works (1 to 9999 works)

Number of pieces

(iii) Registration of use offset number tool.

of each

Tool Use hours

These must be registered from the part program in the memory of the equipment before starting machining.

1-
For groups
designated by use hours (1 to 9999 minutes).

10 to 19, life is

125

2.8.29
b.

TOOL the

LIFE CONTROL part program

(G 122, G 123)+ (Contd) for tool information

(3)

T designation for tool lifecontrol Using the following special T commands , create the part program for machining :

When

is executed, the following screen registration on is shown in the COM function display The screen enables the confirmation CRT. of the registered information. (Depress PAGE key to display the following screen. )
EXAMPLE The display : of the the information following registered

a. Use the following T commands

The tool of the group specified is given as T command. position offset is cancelled.

in Z= tool

However,

by executing shown.

program

is

The tool of the group specified in TE2

TC091

is given as T command and, at the same time, the content of the registered offset number is applied as offset.

0... ;
G122 P1 ; L7890 ; ; ; ; ; ; L7890 ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; Note:

TO1O1 T0303 T0606 T0909 Tllll T1313 P12 T0404 T0808 T101O T1212 T1414 G123 M30

When two or mme compensation

memories are used

for a single tool, refer to the description in subparagraph (5), a.

b. When
ber of number

a group

number

registered

by

the

num-

pieces 1 to

machinable per tool of group 9 is specified, give TE T99 command at the

(C Zis the group number) for the for counting the number of pieces, completion of machining .

deWhen the group numbers 10 to 19 which operating time of a signate the maximum

single tool, the control automatically counts the-feed time as operating time. T-command need not be programmed for time counting on part program.

c.

Display

for

confirmation

of the contents of

TOOL LIFE CONTROL TOOL GROUP


COUNTER

01234 N,1234

TUD 91
EXAMPLE: When the executed

command.

1 (LIFE7890 COUNT)
o

TO1O1 ; T0303 ; T0606 ; T0909 ; Tllll ; T1313 ; RD Y


Fig. 2.68 Tool Life Data On Tool Life Control by No. of Pieces to be Machined

following after the

part program tool information

has been registra

tion described in subparagraph

(2) :

c). .. GOO T0191 ; ) T0190 ; ) TOO T1291 ; @ 0 (3 Q

TOOL LIFE CONTROL

01234 N1234

) T1290 ; ) T0199 ; M99

TOOL GROUP 12 (LIFE7890MIN.) TIMER O MIN. T0404 ; T0808 ; T101O ; T1212 ; T1414 ; RDY
Fig. 2.69 TOOI Life Data on TOOI Life Gontrol

by Operating Time

126

At

the

execution

of

the

part

program

speci

(4)

Input

/output

signals

for

tool

life

control are pro-

fied with tool life control, the tool number in the current group and the offset number beiniz used by TG 791 command may be shown in COM display on CRT screen. In the above program, T0191 specifies the ~ shows that machining by T0606

The following vialed for the

input /output control:

signals

Table 2.24
Signal Name Description

in the registered tool information. ( ~ shows that T0190 becomes T0600. ) TOOL LIFE CONTROL TOOL GROUP
COUNTER

01234 N1234 (LIFE 7890 1234


COUNT)

TLSKP

Tool skp input.

TLCH

Tool replacement Tool replacement

request output. completion input.

TO1O1 ; END T0303 ; END T0606 ; CUTTING T0909 ; Tllll ; T1313 ; RD Y


Fig. 2.70 Example A of Display of Tool No. and Offset No. of Current Execution The

TLAII TLA12 TLA 14 TLA 18 TLA21 Tool replacement completion group

number input (BCD code),

TOOL LIFE CONTROL TOOL GROUP TIMER 12

01234 N1234 [HFE 7890 MIN.J 1234 MIN.

on the

T0404 ; END T0808 ; CUTTING T101O ; T1212 ; T1414 ;


a.

operation for each input /output depends operation panel and external sequences provided by the machine builder. For details, refer to the instruction manual offered by the machine builder. The following describes the control function in response to the input /output signals to facilitate the understanding of the tool life control feature. Tool skip input

TLSKP

RD Y
~ shows that T1291 command the machining by T0808 in the tool information. (~ shows that 11T129011 becomes command. )
Fig. 2.71 Example Offset B of Display of Tool

specifies registered !1T0800

An ~,,,, * ,
This is the input signal for replacing the tool before the registered lifeof it expires. When TLSKP input is closed during the time from the output of the tool registered by group number 1 to 19 as T command to the output of another T command, the con trol outputs the T command of the next tool registered in the group at the time of the next T command output.
b.

No. and

No. of Current

Execution

TLCH

Tool replacement request output


YASNAC

I I

P-a-

127

2 8,29

TOOL LIFE CONTROL (G 122, G 123)+(Contd)


number number output executing is are given of pieces turns ON when or use when:

All tools in each group the registered life (the TLCH hours) expires. . Tool when life expires of in

d.

T K C 99 commands specified.

number

workplaces

o Tool life expires number is given use hours. (iii)

and T command of its group when tool life is determined

by

Tool replacement completion input (TLRST) and tool replacement completion group number inputs (TLA1l through TLA21). These signals are used to indicate the re placement completion to the control after the tool replacement request output (TLCH1, TLCH2) goes on and the tools whose life has expired are replaced with new ones. When the tool replacement operation is completed, set the group number to tool replacement completion group number in )Ut (TLAII, TLA12, TLA14, TLA18, TLA21 and put the tool replacement completion input (TLRST) in the closed state.

T command for life ber was executed.

completion

group

num-

When the tool replacement signal goes on, alarm number the CRT screen. c. TLCH1, output TLCH2: Tool

request output 157 is displayed

on

replacement

request

After all machining life of registered tool with either tool group No. expires, TLCH1 and 2 are closed by performing program end When main input is or reset operation. check for the tool No. of machining closed, life expired and replace it. When tool replacement request inputs Note: TLCH1 and 2 are closed; automatic start is mode. prohibited in automatic operation

I 1; I
0 0 0
0
0

L ;
0

0
0 0 0 0

When the tool replacement request output signal goes on, look at the CRT screen, namely , the tool life control display screen of COM func tion, make confirmation of the number of the erouD in which all tools have come to the expie. ration of useful life, and replace them.

k
0 0 0 0 0

L % G-I

EXAMPLE

Shown below is a display example in which the life of the tools belonging to g-roup r,umber II 11(has been completed.

TM. 18
T1.A21
1

TOOL LIFE CONTROL

01234

N1234 #/henthe tool replacement oDeration has been completed with the tool re~lacement com II look at the tool life pletion input II closed, control display screen of COM function on CRT and c-heck to see if the control internal memory is accepting the completion of the replacement operation. When this operation is found accepted, perform a reset operation (depress RESET key on MDI & CRT panel or close external reset input ERS) , and the tool replacement request output goes off and the displayed alarm code disappears.

TOOL GROUP 1 (LIFE7890COUNT) CO CNTER 7890 TO1O1 ; T0303 ; T0606 ; T0909 ; Tllll ; T1313 ; END END END END END END

EXAMPLE

(i)

Shown below is a display example in which !! 12!! tools has expired. the life of the group

Make specification as follows of the part program for tool registration:

by the use information

TOOL LIFE CONTROL TOOL GROUP TIMER T0404 ; T0808 ; T101O ; T1212 ; T1414; END END END END END

01234

N1234

12 (LIFE7890MIN.) 7890 MIN.


Elm:

Tool

number

A A :

Tool offset memory number

RD Y

Shown below is a display example in which 12 is set as the tool replacement completion group number put and the tool replacement completion input is closed after replace ment of all tools .

in

i
G123 ;
As

shown above, consecutively specify to be used and the offthe tool numbers
set memory specified memories EXAMPLE numbers in the group to be Up to 5 offset by address p. may be -used for one tool. :

TOOL LIFE CONTROL TOOL GROUP TIMER T0404 ; T0808 ; T101O ; T1212 ; T1414 ;

01234

N1234

12 (LIFE 7890MIN.) OMIN. )

G122 P1
TO1ll TO1O1

; L7890
; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; L.. . ;

RD Y

T0121 T0131 T0141

(5)

Supplementary control

explanation

for tool life

T0202 T0212 T0222 T0232 T0242 P.. .

a. The tool lifecontrol in which multiple tool offset memories are used by a single tool is performed as follows:

)
G123 This is the display of tool lifecontrol group No. 1 of COM function on CRT screen at registration of tool information by the execution of the above program. ;

129

2.8.29

TOOL

LIFE CONTROL

(G 122, G 123)+ (Centd)


--l

TOOL LIFE CONTROL

01234 N1234

TOOL GROUP 1 (LIFE 7890 COUNT: o COUNTER TO1O1 : END TO1ll T0121 T0131 T0141 T0202 ; CUTTING T0212 T0222 T0232 T0242
T0192 ;-t-

Becomes T0202 command Becomes T0212 command Becomes T0222 command Becomes T0232 command Becomes T0242 command Becomes T0200 command
When tool 01 of group number 1 has been reDlaced

!
T0193 ; L

[
IU3Y

T0194

; L

by tool 02.;

i
Fig.

2.72

Display of Tool Offset Memories Used for One Tool

T0195

; L

ii)

The Use

part program the following

commands

Table 2.25
Ccxnpensation Compensation registerd first. is 00. is the compen-

-1
T0190 ( ;

The display of tool life control group No. of COM function on CRT screen at execu tion of the above program is as follows:

sation memory number

TOOL LIFE CONTROL


Compensation The tool of the group specified in OU given as T command. is is the compensation memory number registered second. Compensation registard third. is the compenis the compen-

01234 N1234

TooL GROUp I (HFE 7890cOuNT) COUNTER o TO1O1 ; TO1ll ; T0121 ; T0131 ; T0141 ; T0202 ; T0212 ; T0222 ; T0232 T0242

sation memory number

~ Compensation

sation memory number registered fourth. Compensation registered fifth. is the compen-

RD Y
sation memory number Fig, 2,73

b. The T commands in the execution of the

Tool

life

control

in which

work

coordinate

system setting (G50 (i)

T ...) is used.

following program of tool information are as follows:

after the registration shown in EXAMPLE

Use of work coordinate system setting does not require to modify the program for tool information registration.

(ii) The work coordinate system setting command to be used in the part program should be as follows: G50 TOZ90
_

;
Group number ( 1 to 19)

130

There . The

are tool

following number

restrictions: used is 01 to 30. to

. The tool coordinate memory number be used for each tool is as follows: Table 2.26
Tool Coordinate Memory No. 51

IIRegistration of tool information not Note: from the part program but by the writing of settings and the presetting of the number of tools by settings are provided for However, these operspecial operations. ations should n~t be performed in principle.

Tool No. 01

(6) a.

List

of

Settings of

for group

Tool

Life

Control for each tool

Registration

number

02 03

52 53
Setting No.

Table 2.27
I

Contents
The group number of tcol

Remarks

I
30

*86r)l

to be selected

by

T 01 * ~k command.

(iii)

When the command G50 T 3C 90 is executed in the following programs, the control operates as shown in the table below.

The group number of tool

Tool groups are 1 to 19. The tool whose life has expired has a minus value.

ti8602

to be selected

by

T 02 * * command.

Program

for

Tool

Information

Registration

\
The group number of tcol

o . . . G122 ; P1 L1OO TO1O1 ; T0303 ; T0606 ; 1 G123 M30 ; ;

$8650

to be selected

by

T 50 * * command.

* * indicates

compensation

number,

b.

Registration

of

life

of

each

tool

group

Table 2.28
Setting No.

Contents
I The life of group number l. (The number of machinable pieces) I

Remarks

Part

Program

The setting range of the number of machinable pieces

I L(

T0190 ; G~O T0190

; -1-1

u+
The life of group number n6169 Operation The life of group number 1O. (Machinable hours)

is 1 to 9999 ~ (units),

9. (The

number of pieces)

Tool no, of GrouD no. 01

I
!

machinable

by G 50 T 0190 G50 T5100 . $6170

01

03
C6

G50 T 5300
G 50 T 5600

The setting range of the number of \ machinable is 1 to 9999 (minutes). hours

c.

Tool

life

control

and

setting

The registration of tool information and the monitoring of the currently used tools are performed using below is the list life control. the setting of settings area. used Shown for tool

131

2.8.29

TOOL

LIFE CONTROL

(G 122, G 123)+ (Centd)

e.

Monitoring of the currently used tool in each group


Table 2.31

c.

Registration number

of

tool

offset

memory

and

tool

Table 2.29 Setting Contents Remarks

Setting

Contents

tiemarks

TG 1 CNT (*6181)

The number of pieces being machined by the currentlyusad tool of group number t. The number of machinable

TOFN 01 (X8651)

The tool number which uses offset memory 01 (T * * 01).

+---- -.
TOFN 02 (~8652) .!--The tool number which uses
Of fSet MemOry 02

pieces is set in
$6161 to C6179.

(T * * 02). -1

Tool number is 1 to 50. TG9CNT (n6 189)

The number of pieces being machined by the currently used tool of group number 9.

t
TOFN 50 (:6700)

TG IOCNT (F6 190) offset memory 50 (T * * 50).

The tool number which uses

The use time of the currently used tool of group number 1O. The machinable hour is set in

d.

Registration when memories are used

multiple tool offset by a single tool


TG 19 CNT

The use time of the currently used tool of group number 19. (76 199)

$6180 to ?6189.

Table
Setting

2.30 Remarks
Notes

Contents
The registration of the

TOFO 01 (2!8701)

offset designation

number in

The number not used in tool Iife control is O.

1.

the tool life control program of offset memory 01 (T* * 01).

To use the T memory

the tool lifecontrol feature. select 4-digit designation and the offset addition options. or of the the other 99 is specified the T command part program, tool life control than above

2.
The number useb in tool life control program is W to 95 91 designation is l. 92 designation is 2. 93 designation is 3. is

The registration of the TOFO 02 (~8702) offset designation number in the tool life control program of offset memory 02 (T* * 02).

When 90 through 95, in the low-order 2 digits ( 4-digit designation) in the control executes A T- command feature.

does not cause the execution of this feature and is processed as an ordinary T command. Hence, it is possible to specify the T command for tool life control and an ordinary T command in a single part program. 3. The maximum number of tool number + offset memory number pairs which can be registered in a single tool group is 16. G 122 and G 123 commands should specified on a single block basis. Between only the P: L: T: Group Life for always be

The registration of the TOFO 50 (~8750) offset designation number in the tool life control program of offset memory 50 (T* * 50).

94 designation is 4. 95 designation is 5.

4.

When

the

part

program , a, and

shown

in

subany

5.

paragraph (5) one of 1 to 5,

(i) is registered, O is stored here.

G 122 command and G 123 command, following should be specified: number. each tool. and compensation memory

Tool number number. other

Any

addresses

cannot

be

specified.

132

6.

The tool replacement completion input is accepted also when the tool replacement request out put is not on (the usable tool is still left) if the automatic operation is in the hold state. Care should be used in the handling of this feature. Tool life control is applied mand in the part program. by the manual intervention affected by this control. only to the T comThe tool operation during run is not

Table 2.32 (Centd)


Al~m No.

Cause A value other than 1 S compensation memory number S 50 is designated for the compensation memory number. The tool information of the same group number is registered twice. It was attempted to register more than 16 pairs of tool number+ cnmpansation memory number in a single group number. An address other than P, L, and T is designated in the tool information registration
program. More than 6 pairs of companastion memory

152

7.

153

8.

The count time of the tool life control by use hour is held after the power-off. Precisely, however, the maximum of one minute of count time may be discarded between power-off and This is because the count time is power-on. held in units of a minute. At the start of the tool information registration by G122 command, the control cancels all the registered contents before starting new registration. Hence, the registration partial tool information is not allowed. Always register the entire tool information. IIG50 TLd91il to !IG50 TC~95 may be

154

150

9.

159

numbers are registered for a single tool. The tool of the specified registerad. TCIE192, TH~93, TU~94, o+ TU095is group number is not

of

155

10.

speci
155

fied for the work coordinate system setting command to set the work coordinate system added with the contents of offset memory. In this case, however, the deviation of machining start position or the like This specification should may be caused. not be performed, in principle. 11. For tool life control during use ( group No. 10 to 19) , do not use multiple tool offset memories for a single tool. (Refer to ( 5) Supplementary Explanation in 9.) if T command is given for In this case, changing tool offset values after tool life expectancy has been reached, the tool will be exchanged for a new one causing an unexpected impact on the machine. [7) List of alarms to be given by tool life control

specified but the correspond ng compensation memory number is not registered. Zero or a value greater than 20 is designated

152

in (group number) of T 90 through T 95, or T 9?3. Some registered tool in the tool group desig-

Im

nated in ~ 3 of work coordinate system setting (G 50 T ~ greater than 31. in the control and offset

90) has a tool number

Tool life control is designated 156 memory addition options. 157 The tool replacement

having no T 4-digit designation

request output is on.

Table 2.32 EXAMPLE Alarm No. Cause G 121 or G 122 command is not specified on a single block basis.
The designation 151 vialed. designated. . The designation 151 vialed. designated. A value other than 1 S tool number S 50 is designated for the tool number. of life per tool L is not prois of group number P is not pro-

Setting

Tool

Semn~TOO1

150

+ E

EO L

Or a value other than 1 S P S 19 is

Or a value other than 1 S L S 9999

152

133

2.8.29

TOOL

LIFE CONTROL

(G 122, G 123)+ (Centd)

No. of
Executions

Block shown by $

Blcwk shown by z

Tool

No.

Offset Memory 01 02 03

Type of Cutting

110 times
11-20 times times

I GOOTOIOI
I I G 00 T0202 GOO T0303 Tool change reauest

GOO TOlOO
G 00 T0200 G 00 T 0300

TO1 T 02 T 03 T 04

Rough cutting

21-30

31 ST time 04 I Finish cutting

Programs

for

Tool

Information

Registration The processing control: after the completion of tool

0.. . ;
G122 PO1 TO1O1 T0202 T0303 G123 M30 ; ; ; L1O ; ; ; ;

life

When the machining of TO1, G02, and T03 has been completed and the tool replacement request output is turned on, input the value of compensation memory for the new tool then perform the following operations: (i) Set 1 as the number input Turn input Perform tool (see replacement (4) , d.) completion

(ii)

on the tool replacement (see (4), d.) the RESET operation.

completion

(iii) When the above program is executed, TO1O1, T 0202, and T030-3 a~e registered as group number 1 and with the number of machin able pieces per tool being 10,

2.8.30

MULTIPLE CORNERING (G 111,G 112)+


used taper to perform beveling and circular arc por

Part

Program

These commands are and rounding on the tions of a work.

0.. . :
G code NOOO1 G50 GOO T0191 X.. ; . Z.. ;
Gill GI12 I Multiple cornering on taper portion. Multiple cornering on circular arc portion. Meaning

These

commands

enable

the

control

to perform circular computation.

beveling and rounding on taper and arc portions without making complex

NO02 G50 X.. . 2 ... GOO T0404 ;


2. 8.30.1 Taper Multiple Cornering (G 111) may be specified

(;;:%:)

The following four in a single block: Taper + Beveling Rounding

operations

GOO T0400 T0199 M99 ; ;

Taper

Beveling Rounding

The typical contours for which taper multiple cornering is specified are shown in Figs. 2.8.30.1 to 2.8.30.5 on pages 102 and 103.
When the above of ~ and ~ mands: program provide is executed, the following blocks com -

134

END POINT

b.

IMAGINARY CROSS POINT 2ND STRAIGHT LINE

1 ST

POINT END POINT

L
(1) Command format multiple cornering for a.
Q 2 NO STRAIGHT
LINE \ IMAGINARY CROSS POIT \! L 5 ; I 1ST STRAIGHT

.4; z

START POINT

Gill Gill Gill

Z(W) Z(W) Z(W)

. .. . .. .. I..

IA. .A.

..

B..

PO. Q ..P. ..Q*. Q.

; ; ;

Fig. 2.74 configurations for

O. A. OCBCP. .KB. B.

Cp O.

Fig. 2.76 c. D

*X

SECONO BEVELING

2 ND STRAIGHT LINE

B u 12

ST OuNDNG

L1

IMAGINARY CROSS POINT ~ I A

1 ST STRAIGHT LINE

I ~NE
. .. . .. . .. I A B.. A.. .A. .B. . B.. ..p .p .p Q..; - Q Q. .-; .;

u.~~~

Glllx(U) Glllx(U) Glllx(U)

G1llx(U) Gill Gill X( U). X( U).

l. .. .. A.

A.. .AC.

B B.. ., B---

C. .C

D. D..

; ; ;

K. B-.

.B.

OA. ,B.
Fig. 2.77

C-DO

Fig. 2.75

135

2.8.30.
d.

1 Taper

Multiple

Cornering

(G 111) (Centd)
Address Word

Table

2.33

(Centd)

Contents

Unit first

2 ND BEvELING

Virtual intersection K
IMAGINARY CROSS POINT

between

and second straight hnes. Z-axis distance from start point.

P
I ST STRAIGHT LINE

The first rounding radius (without sign), The second rounding radius (without sign). The first beveling amount (without sign). The second beveling amount (withoul sign). ]
1 = 0.001 mm or 10.0001 in.

I Al

D
k K i A START POINT

I z

(3) a.

Designation of contours Designate the contour as shown


Table 2.34

below:

Gill Z(W) ... A.. .C. .. B.. .C. J-D... Gill Z(W) ... A.. .C. .. B.. .C. D... Gill Z(W) ... A.. .C. .. B.. .C. .. D...
Fig. 2.78

; ; ;
A: 1:

First straight line move angle Virtual intersection X-axis distance


intersection distance

First Straight

(Z. )

Meaning

of addresses

Line

from start point K:


Virtual

Specify

two.

The following address words may be specified for the taper multiple cornering command. Simply specifying the contour determining address words permits the required operation.
Table Address Word X-axis (U:
Contents

Z-axis
from

start

point

First Bevel ing of Rounding

C:
D:

First beveling
amount First rounding

~Specify either J

radius B: Second X-axis

2.33 straighetiine end point Specify two. combinations not permitted: X and U Z and W Howare ever, the following move angle. X (U): [(U): coordinate

Unit

x (u)

end point coordinate Increment from start point)

Second 1 = 0.001 m or 1 = 0.0001 in. Straight Line

[
Z (W):

Increment from 1 X-axis start or I


end point) ]

z (w)

Z-axis end point coordinate


(W: Increment from start point)

Z-axis

end point

coordinate (W): Increment from Z-axis


L

Move angle of the first straight line 1 = 0,001 deg Move angle of the second straight line Virtual intersection between first and second straight lines. Xaxis distance from start point (radius value). Second Beveling or Rounding 1 = 0.001 mm or 1 = O.CQO1in.

start or j

end point)

D: Q:

Second beveling value Randius for second rounding Either D or Q should be commanded

b.

The first rounding touches second straight lines.

the

first

and

Table 2.35
B command

Directions of Second Beveling

c.

The second beveling and rounding depend on the designation of second straight line as shown below: The second B and X(U). straight line is specified with

value for second straight Iine move angle

Beveling direction +x L Beveling in X, Z positive direction -z

Other conditions

(i)

. ..------/
B=o = 360.000 = 360.000 Beveling in X negative direction, Z

First straight line moves in X positive direction.

First straight line moves in X negative direction.

positive direction

ROUNOING STRAIGHT TO ZAXIS

TOUCHING THE LINE PARALLEL

Beveling 0 <6, B <90.000

in X, Z posi-

tive birection

(ii)

The second B and Z(W).

straight

line

is specified

with

S60.003

<B,

B c 270.000

Q B
Beveling tive direction

in X, Z pcsiFirst straight line moves in Z posi tive direction.

& z ( w)
ROUNDING TOUCHING THE STRAIGHT LINE PARALLEL TO XAXIS

B = 90.000 = 270.003 Beveling in X positive, Z negative direction First straight line moves in Z negative direction.

d.

The second beveling and rounding are preformed in the direction in which the second For details, refer straight line advances. to Table 2.35.
90.000< B <180.000 B,

)
\
Beveling in X positive, Z negative direct ion

270.000 < B, B < 180.000

/
Beveling in X positive, Z negative direction First straight line moves in X positive direction. B = 180.000, 180.000

....

Beveling in X negative, Z negative direction First straight line moves in X negative direction.

/--------

137

2.8,30.

lTaper Multiple Cornering (Gill) (Centd)

Table 2.35

Directions of Second Beveling (Centd)

Table 2.36

Direction of Second Runding (Centd)

B command value for second straight Iine move angle

Beveling direction

B command .x i Other conditions value for second straight line move angle

Rounding direction

+x Other conditions L }Z

+-z
Beveling in X, Z posi-

Rounding

in X,

180.000< B, B < 270.OCO 18CI.000 < B,

posi-

tive direction

tive direction

B < 90.000 ) CI <B, Bevelig in X, Z negative direction

Second straight line is specified with B, Z (W).


Rounding straight touching line parallel the to

.)
in X negative,

B <90.000 First straight line moves in Z negative direction. 360.000 c B,

X-~is

B < 270.OCKl

Second straight line is specified Rounding touching the straight iine parallel to First straight line moves in Z pa3i tive direction Rounding in X, Z positive direction ..First straight line moves in Z-axis positive direction. Z-wis with B, X (U).

B = 270.OCO 90.000

Beveling

Z positive direction

Beveling in X negative, 270.OCO < B, B <360,000 90.000 6<0 < B, Z positive directjon

/
B = 90.000 270.000

J
positive,

z (w)
command may not be used.

Rounding in X Z negative direction

First straight Iine moves in Z-axis negative direction.

--Table 2.36 Directions of Second Rounding

(
Z negative direction

Rounding B command value for second straight Iine move angle L direction Other -x -z conditions

Rounding in X positive,

Second straight line is specified with B, X (U).

90.000< B,
Rounding in X negative, Z posi First straight Iine moves ~.---6=0 = 360.000 360.000 Rounding in X, Z positive, direction in X-axis negative direction First straight line moves in X-axis tive direction B <180.000

Rounding touching the straight line parallel to

270.OCO < B, B < 180.000

als

x (u)
command may not be used. Rounding touching the straight Iine parallel to X axis

Second straight line is spwified with B, Z (W).

7---

positive direction

Table 2.36

Direction of Second Rounding

Table 2.36

Direction of Second Rounding (Centd)

(Centd)
B command value for second straight Iim move angle B command Rounding direction +x I +-z i value for second straight line move angle

Rounding direction -x I

Other conditions -.

&.z

Rounding in X positive, Z nagative direction

First straight line moves in X-axis positive direction

Rounding in X negative, Z positive direction Second straight line is specified

.
B = 180.000 180.000

....

x (u)
command may not be used. 270.OCQ < B,
B <360.000 90.000 B<O < B,

with B, X (U). Rounding touching the straight line parallel to Z axis

Rounding in X, Z negative direction

First straight line moves in X-axis

~-----

negative direction Rounding touching the

Second straight line is specified with B, Z (W). straight Iine paral Iel to X axis

Rounding in X, Z negative direction Second straight line is specified with B, Z (W). e.

Supplementary

description , and Z (W) of the second specified, the first straight one of the A, 1, and K

180.000< B,
B <270.000

Rounding touching the straight line parallel to X axis

(i) When

180.000 < B, B ~ 90.000

all B, X(U) straight line are line may provide commands.

(ii) The
Second straight line is specified Rounding touching the straight line parallel to Z axis Rounding in X, Z negative direction First straight line moves in Z-axis negative B = 270.OCCI direction Rounding X negative, Z positive direction with B, X (U).

taper multiple cornering command specifies the first and second and straight lines by selecting addresses X, Z, 1, K, A, and B. Hence, unlike the other G commands, X, Z, I, K, and B do not allow the The speci omission of 0 specification. fication of O have different meaning for IIo!! should always be X, Z, I, K, and B. specified. omission of address O specification command. of

z (w)
command may not be used.

taper

multiple

cornering

= 90.000
First straight

Table 2.37
O specification may be omittechot omitted

line moves
in

Address

--

Z-axrs

positive direction

x
z
I K A B P Q c D May be omitted. (Cornering amount is O) May not be omitted

139

2.8.30.1

Taper Multiple Cornering (G 111)

(CentD)

(i)

Outside the rectangle enclosed by the start and end points .

(iii) When

the second straight line is designated by X(U) and Z (hJ) commands, the second beveling and rounding are disabled. If this designation is attempted, an error is caused.

PO;N-

+--,
1 I L _ ___ 1 1 SrAf7T POINT

(iv)

The combination of the first beveling and the second rounding or the first rounding ble. and the second beveling is also availa -

(v)

When the first straight line designation addresses A, I, and K are allspecified, A is ignored. The first straight line is created by I and K commands alone. When the second straight line designation addresses B, X(U) , and Z(W) are all specified and two of the first straight line designation addresses A, 1, and K are further specified, B is ignored. The second straight line is created by X(U) and Z(W) commands.

(ii) Between point to straight point at


END PCllNT

(vi)

\\\ \\\ h
I ~i. \\ \ \ \ \\ \ \

the straight line going from start end point at angle of 45 and the line going from end point to start angle of 45.

45

\ START POINT

(vii) How to specify straight line move Aand B:

angles

The end point in the above diagram is the end point of the second straight line with no second beveling and rounding . 4
When Gill basis, the performed blocks . block is movement assuming executed on a single block up to the end point is the maximum of four

Specify a positive value for the counterclockwise rotational angle from Zaxis positive direction, and a negative value for the clockwise rotational angle from Z-axis positive direction. (Specification range: -360.000 S A, B ~ 360. 000)
EXAMPLE \ :

4--+*
A1350r A225 Notes 1. : G 111

Writing G 111 block in the buffer, the control unit performs all computations for the first and second straight lines and the first and second beveling and rounding. For some contours, the computation time requires more than 500 msec. If the move time in the pre ceding block is shorter than the computation time, the movement stops, sometimes causing undesirable effects on the cutting surface . To prevent the stop of movement due to the

the ? ti.

nonmodal G code is specified block.

and

is

valid

only

in

computation time, ii is recommended to pro vide the buffering state (M93 command) be fore the four blocks before specifying G 111 block command.

Addresses hi, S, and in the block specified

T cannot be with Gill.

specified

3.

If the first beveling portion to be by address C of the block specified G 111 has the contour shown below, specification is disabled:

specified with the

140

6.

Some commands which assume that the 45de~ree straight line, going from start point to end point; is the fi~st line or second line may cause an error. Example
Gill

7,

List of alarms caused by incorrect G 111 command


Table 2.39

1:
I-25. C5. A225, D5. ;

Alarm Code 140 Commanding specifying 140 one address of addresses B, X (U), Z (W)

Z-1OO. B180.

second straight line. two addresses of addresses B, X (U),

Commanding

This command L1-

will result in error.

Z (W) specifyhg

second straight line.

In addition to

z-loo

this, one or no address commanded

among addresses

C5
140

A, 1, K specifying first straight line. Address C specifying first beveling and address P specifying first rounding commanded.
[ 25 START POINT

3
L) 5.
+2

8180

140

Address D specifying second beveling and address Q specifying s=ond rounding commanded. Angle for angle programmingA, B by G 111out of range 380 S A, B S 380,
Ist beveling part outside the rectangle composec start and end Wints. by

141
.4225.

142

142

Ist beveling portion between 45 straight lines of start to end points and end to start points.

Example
Gill

2
1-25, C5. A225. D5. ;

143

No intersection between Ist and 2nd straight lines


START POINT

Z-1OO. B270.

------

&

143
This command will not cause an error. z-loo D5
144 143

Ist straight line and second straight line on the same line. M, S, T commanded in G 111block.

-E
.nf
A-l-

Command values fof addresses A, 1, K swifying straight Iine are determinad as follows, and programmed shape cannot be formed. Command value for A
380,000, 180.000, 180.Cf30, 360. COO 90.OCKI, O,

first

;%
143
A 225

Address I commanded

for

, specifying first straight line. Address K commanded specifying for

27.000,

90.0CX3, 270.030

first straight line.

Command values for addresses

B, X (U), Z (W) specas follows, and

ifying first straight Iine are determined programmed shape cannot be formed.

Command value fw B
380.003, 380.o@3 270.OCKI, 90.000, 90.000, 180.000, 0,

I
Address X (U) commanded for second straight line, Address Z (W) commanded for specifying straight line. second

270.000

141

2. 8,30.1

Taper Multiple Cornering (G 111)(Centd)

b.

Taper

combined

rounding

- -2q
Table 2.39
Alarm Cede
I

(Centd)
Cause

I(JIJ 1, #?oo ;

143

Command values for addresses

C and D for beveling Operation

i5R

too large for the programmed shape.

cannot be made according to the command.


ENO POINT -----1 \ START POi NT b c

143

Command values fof addresses

P and Q specifying

radius for rounding tco large for the programmed shape. Operation cannot be made according to the command.

d50 command
broken line

shown

by ;

---- -1
P

?
14C Commanding and rounding.

b START
POINT

Gill W-1OO. 115. A90. B165. P3. Q5.


or

I
addresses

Gill w1OO.
Command

115.

KO B165. by solid

P3.

Q5.

shown K-2.

line

X and Z specifying second second beveling

straight line and Q and D specifying

(G12)

X200.

; )Command shown by broken line after the command shown by solid line

EXAMPLE

-----\, !)c T
I \$ zoo, I

a.

Taper

combined

beveling

100.

I
I

.x

1
+

,50

3C

(GOI

W...

;)

d50 command
broken line B165. A90.

shown

G1ll or Gill

w-1OO. w1OO.

115. 115.

C3. C3.

D5. ;

KO B165. shown by

D5. line

Command

solid

2.8.30,2

Circular Arc Multiple Cornering (G112)

c.

Arc

combined

rounding
START

in

facing

G 112 be able to specify the following four operations in a single block: Straight ~ line Beveling Rounding ~ Circular ~ Beveling Rounding arc

Depending on the direction of arc combined beveling /rounding or taper in turning combined beveling /rounding in facing may be executed.

(1) a.

Cutting configurations and command Arc combined } rounding in turning K

format

G112

Z(W)

. .. K..

.Q.

..

P..

.Q.

..R.

.;;

d. 1,
CIRCULAR ARC LINE

Arc

combined

beveling
START POINT

in

facing

G112X(U)

. .. K..

.K.

. .

P..

Q.R...

STRAIGHT LINE \ c

K N

b.

Arc

combined

beveling 1

in turning
I

i
CIRCUI -AR ARc

~ ARC CENTER z

CIRCULAR

ARC

2 ND BEVELING

G112X(U)

. ..

D R

143

2.8,30.2 (2)

Circular of

Arc Multiple Cornering (G 112) (Centd)


addresses First

Table 2.41

(Centd)

Meaning The word

The rounding which is performed in the radius designated by P command in contact with straight line and circular arc. The beveling which is performed in the dimensions

addresses

for

circular

arc

multiple

Rounding

cornering command

are as shown
2.40

below :

Table Address Word X-axis x (u) turning (U: Increment

designated Unit Second Beveling between

by D commarid at the intersection designated by X (U) command (arc in

the circular arc and the straight line par-

Contents end point coordinates

allel to Z-wis to X-axis facing).

(circular arc in turning) or the straight line parallel designated by Z (W) command

for arc combined rounding in from start point) Second Rounding

The rounding which is performed designated designated by Q command

in the radius

in contact with the (circular arc in desig-

Z-axis

end point coordinates

circular =C and the straight line parallel to Z-ais by X (U) command turning) or the straight line parallel to X-axis

z (w)

for arc combined rounding in facing (W: Increment from start point)

nated by Z (W) command

(arc in facing).

X-axis distance from arc center start point 1 = 0.001 mm or Z-%is distance from arc center start point Circular arc radius First rounding radius (without sign) 1 = 0.0001 in, (decimal point mav be enter~d)
a;, ;CENTER OF CIRCULAR ARC CENTER OF CIRCULAR

Second rounding radius (without i


sign) -4 First beveling amount (without

m
CENTER OF ~

fm

sign) Second beveling amount (without sign) L:AR\ 1

(3) a.

Designation

of

contours subjectare as

The contours of the portions to be ed to circular arc multiple cornering shown below :

r-----l (-----l
R
R

~
~ POINT

STA~l POINT

Table

2,41

Straight Line

The straight line which is parallel to Z-axis in turning) or X-axis point, The point from which the arc is circulated designated point. The beveling which is performed designated straight line and circular arc. by I and K commands

(arc

(arc in facing) from the start

Circular Arc

is

from the start

First Beveling

in the dimensions of

by C command at the intersection

144

c.

To supplement the above description, the following discriminants for determination of the circular arc cutting directions in the control unit are provided:
Table 2.42
Values of I and K Commands

Table Address Word I K R P Q c D 1O command

2.43

Result is provided.

K O command is provided. R O command and alarm are provided.

Circular Arc Rotational Direction


Circular =c turning in 1 Circular arc in facing

0 command is provided. Beveling and rounding are not performed.

120.

K20

Counterclosk wise (CCW) (Equivalent to ~~r;;~

Clwkwise (CW) (Equivalent to Notes :

120,

K<0

1. 2. 3.

1<0,

K20

CINkwise Cw) wise (CCW) (Equivalent to (Equivalent to G 02) G 03) Counterclock wise (CCW) (Equivalent to G 03) Clockwise (CW) (Equivalent to G 02)

G 112.is a nonmodal G code and is valid onlv -, for the specified block. The block specified with G112 does not allow the specificationof M, S , and T . When G 112 block is executed on a single block basis, the movement up to the end point is performed assuming the maximum four blocks.

I<o,

K<O

of

When a negative value is specified for the circular arc R, the circular arc cutting direction mentioned above may be inverted as follows:
CIRCULAR ARC ROTATIONA1 OIRECTION WITH POSITIVE VALUE SPECIFIED FOR R

4.

When G 112 is used for the finishing shape blocks G71 (stock removal cycle in turning) , G72 (Stock removal cycle in facing) , and G73 (pattern repeating) of multiple repetitive cycles the block specified with G112 is equivalent to five blocks. Do not specify other codes to the G 112block; otherwise, an error willbe caused. After wiring G 112 block to the buffer, the control unit performs allcomputations for the straight line, the circular arc, and the first and second beveling and rounding. For some contours, the computation time becomes more than 500 msec. If the move time in the preceding block is shorter than the computation undesirable effects on the cutting surface. To prevent the stop of movement due to the computation time, provide the buffering state (M93 command) before the four blocks before specifying B 112 block command.

5.

COUNTERCLOCKWISE WHEN I< O,K<O

6.
CLOCKWISE I< O,K<O WHEN

-x

J--+Z

,L

CIRCULAR ARC ROTATIONAL DIRECTION WITH NEGATIVE VALUE SPECIFIED FOR R

d.

Address words X(U) and Z(W) are used to make discrimination between radius measur in g circular arc and front circular arc . They cannot be omitted if the end point and the start point are on the same coordinates (UO or WO should be specified) . When the address words other than X (U) and Z (W) are omitted, the following results are obtained:

7.

List of alarms to be given by G112 command error


Alarm Code I 145
145

Cause I X(U)
I

or.Z(W)

not specified specified.

Both X(U) and Z(W) R not specified.

145 14.5 -k

Or O specified. Or O specified for both.

I and K not specified.

145

2.8, 30.2

Circular Arc Multiple Cornering (G 112) (Centd)


Table 2,44 a.

EXAMPLE Arc

: rounding

combined

Alarm Code

50.
Both P and C specified. Both Q and D specified M, S, or T specified. Tool moves in the direction reverse to the center of circular arc from the start point.
CENTER OF CIRCULAR

145

145 144

+x

-----
z

/r--r

+-

(GO1 X1OO. Z-50.


~ &

;) Shown
line arc

by before

broken circular

146

A.&

G112
START POINT

uOI1O.

K-50.

P5.

Q5.

R30.

; line

(GOl

X-150.

;) . . .

Shown by broken after circular arc

There is no intersection straight line.

between

circular arc and

b.

Arc

combined

beveling

CENTER OF CIRCULAR ARC 146 R

I START POINT

. -____ Q1

100. L)l.4

There is no intersection point command. between circular arc and end

L(GO1 x1OO. Z-50. ;) . Shown by line before arc D5. R30. broken circular G112 (GO1 UO11O. Z-150. K-50. ;) C5. ; line

146

Bweling formed.

specified

by C command cannot be per-

by broken . . . Shown after circular arc

146

2.8.31

ABSOLUTE/lNCREMENTAL

PROGRAMMING

(G 90, G 91)

Beveling specified foimed.

by D command cannot be per-

*
G91

Incramental

designation

14B

G . \

For lute

the details of the G codes, and Incremental Inputs .

see

2.3.5, Abso-

2.8.32 (G150,

GROOVE G 151)

WIDTH

COMPENSATION

A control point is the tool nose point used in the automatic nose R function, which is indicated by 1! CT! on the right corner of the offset screen.

Groove width compensation is to shift the coordinate for the groove tool width and to change the tool nose point by the G151 command, according to the tool width and control point set This function allows groove via the offset screen. machining without considering g the tool width in the program.

When it is a diameter designation, the X-value end face groove is shifted by two times the tool width. Commanding shift on both X and Z axes can be set in the parameter to trigger an alarm. fPM6018
DO 1:

G150 G151

. . . Groove ... Groove

width compensation width compensation

OFF ON
\

Alarm occurs upon Xl Z axes shift in groove compensation.


Alarm does not occur axes shift in groove compensation. upon

o:

X/Z )

Notes :

1.

The program cannot be started under the G151 status. Always cancel G151 once before starting the program, Commanding G151 without commanding the control point will cause an alarm, as the direction of the shift cannot be determined. G150, G151 are members of group 13.

2.

Contrl

point

diagram

3. The compensation point as follows. the G150 command command shifts the tool nose The compensation is canceled or by the T command. 4. by

This G code cannot be used unless the new


optional provided. coordinate system setting function is

( Example
Inner, outer diameter groove End face groove

of

groove

width

compensation

program)

L1
Set the tool width
OF S31, (Example) Offset Tool
Tool TOOI
fdo.

GOO XO: G151 ; . . . . . . Zo; X-20; GO1 Z1O; GOO XO; G150; .. . . .. Zo;

Enable

compensation coordinate amount is for set the as tool offset

Shift the width. The shift number. Cancel

compensation

in

the

offset

numbers

from

as

follows.

Tool width OFS34X,


OFS35X, OFS36X,

4
5

OFS04X,
OFS05X, OFS06X,

Z, R, C
Z, R, C Z, R, C

Z
Z Z

No.

No. 6

147

3.1 TAPE CODE 3.1.1 LIST OF TAPE CODE


Both EIA punching
EIA 1S0 code code code and ISO a paper tape. (EIA (1S0 Rs-244-A) R840) . code are available for

3.2 (1)

2 GENERAL

PROGRAM

FORM

will be generally made A part program the following form.


<EIA Code>

in

.
<

LA_8~L jER CR I <ISO Code ) i ,, I i

_F~4Q

PART PROG

M30 I

Cq ER

Punching shown in

patterns Table 3.1.

according

to

these

codings

are
<

~,4BEE~?ALF:NL I !

%OG_~~PART

PROG

M30

LF~NL k I I_-[OR M(32}

Before programming, KIA and 1S0 codes through a tape.

select the code cannot be punched

to be used mixedly

L These are called EOB o, END of BLOCK character . !hls nanual ! L . TF.e~e are ~a]led E(JR Or REWIND STOP cha, acler ,n t. s manual

3.1.2

EIA/lSO

AUTO

RECOGNITION (2) Any LABEL can be written at the beginning of tape to classify easily the tapes. In label skip function the control ignores the data from LABEL to the first EOB code. Therefore, the undesignated address or function characters can be used as LABEL. Iq addition, the modified code which disregards parity is also available. EOR point code next to LABEL of tape rewinding. means the stop

The control performs automatic recognition of EIA/ISO code. It recognizes the code punched EOB code in Label on tape by reading the first Skip state, and automatically adjusts the followon data to read by the recognized code. RESET operation 1 activates Label Skip state and cancels this function, Note : The setting #6002D can specify the code when NC Internal data7is output (punched out) , and does not affect the tape reading operation.

(3)

3.2
3.2.

PROGRAMMING
(1) PROCESS SHEET ends with EOB (End-of-Block) character. EOB character is represented by CR in EIA code and LF/NL in 1S0 code. In this manual, mark ; is substituted for them to read easily this manual. A block

e
of the
LABEL

(4)

Where storing NC tape data into memory, with the label skipped, the memory stores the data between the first EOB code and the next EOR code. Therefore, EOR code at the end of tape must not be omitted. IN PROGRAMMING

PRECAUTION

The programming is performed with the process that the process sheet sheet, It is recommended to match final specifications should be made by users, considering the readily perceived form and convenience for rewriting. Fig. 3.1 shows
an example process sheet.

(2)

A part program ends with the block including M02 (End-of-Program) , M30 (End-of-Tape) or.M99 (End-of-Program) . When M02 or M30 is commanded, automatic operation2 is stopped. In most cases, the control is reset, or rewinds the tape (or memory) automatically . As the details are determined by the machine, refer to the machine tool builders manual.

(3)

I
I
PROGRAM NO

Fig.

3.1

An

Example

of

the

Process

Sheet

RESET operation means resetting the control by depressing the RESET key on the operators control station or remotely. Automatic operation means operation in TAPE , YIDI, or LMEM mode.

148

Table 3.1 Tape Code

1-1

1 -Inlln

I ,-In

[u]

Iulul

ICI

Ir-1 o

Notes: 1. For the hole pattern of EIA code of the characters with an asterisk, the pattern Howshown in the table is standard. by parameters. 2. EIA cwie of character # can be desig-

* *

ever, other patterns may be specified

nated by the parametef ##6017,

* * * *

149

3. 2.2
(4)

GENERAL
The character and Function programming

PROGRAM

FORM

(Centd)

3.3.2

NC TAPE PUNCH tape punchto contents

specified on 2. 1.2 Address Characters should be used for , but others should not.

NC tape must be punched out with the er for EIA code or 1S0 code according of process sheet.

(5)

Where the tape vertical parity check (TV number of characters in a check) is made, block must be even. If odd, it should be made even by using SP character.

When punching the tape, at the beginning and the end of the tape, provide the feed holes part needed for the tape feeding . Where the punched tape is wound on the reel+ of tape reader, the feed holes part will be 70 cm in length.

(6)

The disregarded characters such as BS, Tab , SP, UC , LC and Del should be avoided from the significant data area, if unnec essary.
The maximum in a block is ters such as eluded in allowable number of characters The disregarded charac128. BS and Tab are not in Del,

3. 3.3

NC TAPE CHECK can be checked by using the following

NC tape function. . Machine

lock lock t

them.

M function Dry run block

Mak, PQ [he Ndmber

of Cnaraclers

e,ec

,gr W Check

o Single
f

operation

N12 G 00 X40000Z200000 S?

~20 CHARACTEQS~ (EVEN NUMBER (Odd number causes taoe ~e,.lcal car ly error 1 mum Allowable N~mbef c, Characters lr, a Block. TTe rnax!

3.4
3.4.1

NC TAPE HANDLING
SPLICING NC TAPES

(7)

SP

(Space)

character

SP character is usually disregarded when However, in the followtape data is read in. ing cases, SP is read and its function for providing space on the CRT screen is effective. SP used in parentheses.

To splice NC tapes, stick a joining tape (O.08 mm thickness) with sprocket holes , or fully perforated joining tape on the one side of the spliced NC tape, make NC tape. Before using the spliced sure that the sprocket holes are in position. The joining part of tapes should not be extremely thick, and do not use the rigid adhesive agent without flexibility.

3.3

NC TAPE

(NBC

SPLICE

TAPE

3. 3.1 PAPER TAPE

Eight-channel paper tape for computers complyThe diing with JIS1 -6243 is used as standard. mensions are 25.4 *O. 08 mm (1 inch) width and O. 108 mm (O.0042 inch) thickness. It is recommended that the color of the tape is black or gray, but not that of high transparency. If the tape with high transparency is used, the tape reader may misread it.

Nc

J===NG
8-CHANNEL FULLY PERFORATED 1SILVEP iApE

Splicing

of NC Tape

3. 4.2

KEEPING

OF NC TAPE tape, the following

For life handling

expectancy of NC is recommended.

When keeping NC tape, avoid moisture and oil. Do not handle the tape with oil-stained gloves.
Properly reading kept tapes will and rewinding. permit 300 times of

1 Japanese

Industrial Standard

150

4. STANDARD NC OPERATORS STATION WITH CRT CHARACTER DISPLAY


4.1 PUSHBUTTONS, KEYS, AND LAMPS
Fig. 4.1 shows an overall view of NC operators station with 9 CRT display with keyboard on The names and functions of right side of CRT. operator devices are as follows.

>
[( > )

R--D ~-R-FI

;+

Cziz@

.,

~ n
m
~

FuNCTION

Pm

[diaia Eal [F=I=%=l


OATA

>

AOORESS

mEl[Ewl[mBl [mmal
EMEEl[El[nl[Kl PII!HI!H1 [WzE1.] [DWWEI][EIITEIIEI

n
~

El[mml[mlliizl [Fi!!mm] ~ [Zl[m[izlm [Q][~][@ +, +

Fig. 4.1 Standard NC Operators Station with 9 CRT Character Display (Keyboard on Right Side of CRT)

NC overators station with 9 CRT display (kevboar& below CRT) is also available. Operation is the same with both types. Instructions given in this manual are for operators panel with keyboard on right side of CRT.

151

4. 1.1 POWER POWER ON

ON/OFF

PUSHBUTTONS

4.1.3 The key

FUNCTION key selects

KEYS one of eight functions for the ~

pushbutton

operation

To turn on the power for the control: Depress the pushbutton first to turn on the controi power and depress it again to turn on the Push this button to recover the servo power. servo power after an emergency stop. POWER OFF pushbutton

of the display ~nd MDI. pushing makes it effective and light up.

f
~

t
FUNCTION

\ EIRRR

B
I

[~[%hB
Fig. 4.4

To turn off the power for the control: Depress it to turn off both the servo and control powers.

!ll~/All

,11.11

(Alarm)

key

Select this key for display of alarm and status The function becomes effective when codes. the power is turned on or an alarm occurs.

I)(;X
Fig. 4.2

(Diagnosis) key :
key status. (Parameter) key for for display of input /output

select this
signal 4. 1.2 CRT CHARACTER DISPLAY 11{11

key: display or writing-in of

According to each operation, this display indi data in a regular size, cates the alpha-numerical
double-size size. 13raun tube and quadruplesize of the regular

Select this parameters. , 5FT

(Setting this key data.

) key: for display or writing-in of

size:

9 inches of characters: 32 characters 512 characters : , .~) , (EOB) .i , ~ .:, through ~ . , ~ L Select this key of the command , ,
i]~(lj ~

Maximum

number

Select setting x 16 lines = (at regular size) ,Lf~~ll

(Command)

key: for display or writing-in (MDI ) data for automatic operation. key: display or writing-in of a

Indicating Numerals Alphabetic Special -

characters ~j

through

characters code ~

(Program) for

(slash) , etc. Select this key


part l(1>~ Select program. (Position) key:

,.., *

this key for display of various current positions. OF% I (Offset) key:
Select this key for display or writing-in of tool offset values.

Fig. 4.3

Braun

Tube

152

4. 1.4

ADDRESS

KEYS

These keys are to designate an address character when writing in various data.
~k=iJ-c==3 ---

,CAX I (Cancellation) key: For cancellation of the numeric data erroneously keyed.

value or address

~~ AOORCSS OATA

(write)

key:

For storing address data by address keys and data keys into buffer storage. ~S1lIFT (shift) key: ISHIFT key after depressing ~ Depressing key makes the display to~, ~ or ~ turn into ~ to i? , 7 , R which are
written These macro. on the upper left special characters cornerof are used the keys. in user

Elma)m[mm [Pl!!l=ml
EllEmml[mKl Emflm mmiiimllma (Fl!mf=l El[=l[mm[mal (Fl!m!!nl [q[~]cq) [EI]IEIIE][FI
Fig. 4.5

4.1.6 Note: Special characters n L (Slash) key: For an optional block skip command. ~J~ (EOB) key: For the block end command. On the CRT display, ; is displayed instead of EOB.
4.1.5 DATA KEYS

NEXT

KEY key is used for special purpose and function in display or writing data.
of additional tape in EDIT mode.

The NEXT expanding


. Writing

. Display of specified number


. For other function. special purpose

in DGN
and

function.

expanding

4+
These keys consist of 15 keys in total, such as ~~mthrough ~, U (minus) -]WI -] and can be used for writing-in of such all numeral values as tool offset value setting data, parameter data, and so on, in addition to command value.

Fig. 4.7 mm 4.1.7 PAGE KEYS

The PAGE key is used to display the next page the previous page when CRT display is r-e garded as page. For example, when a bundle of tool offset values are displayed by OFS key, this key is pushed to display the next bundle of tool offset values, which just looks like opening the pages of a book.
or
Fig. 4.6 Notes:
r. ~

(1)

Depressing page.

~~A[~ L.4

key displays the next

,:0
~]

:in~) ::;,
(decimal point)

or

input of numerical data

(2)

Depressing vious page.

~ ~3G~

key displays the pre-

key:

For

input of decimal point

(3)

Keeping the PAGE key depressed makes the page step automatically forward or backward.

153

4.1.8

CURSOR

KEYS control key is used to move the example, when a page of parameter by PRM key.

4.1.10

EDIT KEYS keys are for editing a stored part program. key: key: key: Used Used Used
for

The CURSOR cursor . For data are

These
ERASE

displayed

erasure of data in storage.

INSRT
(1) Depressing sor backward. Y9 key moves the cur-

for insertion of data in memory. for alteration


of data in

ALTER

memory.

(2)

Depressing sor forward.

~ ~uRTSOR ~ .

key moves

the cur-

MEM

OATA

(3)

Keeping the cursor control key depressed makes the cursor move automatically forward or backward.

EiEE
i~~
EOIT

d
RES
I

I[E33] [Fw=kql

Fig. 4.9

4.1.11 MEM

DATA (MEMORY

DATA) KEYS

TAPE KEYs are to start the tape operation except They are effecin the automatic operation mode. tive only in the EDT mode.
Fig. 4.8

(1)

OUT

key is to start outputting various data through data I/0 interface.

This key in memory (2)


4,1.9 The

IN key This key is to start storing various data into memory through tape reader or data 1/0 interface.

ORG (ORIGIN)

KEYS

position ORG key is used to set the current of the machine tool as the Zero point of coordinate system. The origin setting can be made for each axis. The reference coordinate system means the coordinate system which is set by G92 command or system setting. the automatic coordinate

(3)

VER

key mem-

This key is to start verifying between ory data and punched tape data.

ORG

key is used

for

the

following (Position

operation. External/

Reset of current
Absolute) - Reset of operation

position

time

154

4.1.12 This

RESET KEY
key resets the control.

4.2

POWER ON1OFF OPERATION


ON POWER

4. 2.1 TURNING

Check the machine before turning on power, referring to the machine tool builders manual for details. Operations after completion of inspections are as follows.
POWER ON POWER ! APPROX ! 2 SECONDS ~ ~ NRD (NC REAOY) I CONTROL POWER ON

Fig. 4.10
SERVO POWER I NRD (NC READY)

Operations

to be command register code

executed cancel clear if the

by

this

RESET

key

are:

I I I I 1 I MRD (MACHINE READY) MACHINE POWER

Move
Buffer Alarm Tool

release cancel function function

cause

is

eliminated

II READY LAMP

offset

t
cancel ON
ALARM CODE

1
j 280,1 !

I
BLANK

Auxiliary Label Memory Sequence RST signal skip

~ 310, I

Fig. 4.12 Sequence pointer number rewind reset

of Turning on Operation

(1)

Depressing

the

POWER

ON

pushbutton

to

transmission G codes List of G Codes be affected and by Groups . (2)

Resetting

Refer to 2.8.1,

turn on the control power. The internal timer will be read in about two seconds. Then the servo power is ready for turning on, which is shown by alarm code 310. Depress the POWER ON pushbutton again to turn on the servo power. The NRD (NC READY ) signal is sent out when the NC power is normally supplied. When the NRD signal turns on the machine power, and the MRD (MACHINE READY) signal returns back to the control, the READY lamp will be lit.

The following will the RESET key. . Current position

not

operating

values

of

each

axis.

. F commands . S , T and Tool data Depressing the RESET key or the reNote : mote reset pushbutton is defined as Reset operation in this manual. offset B commands values, setting data, parameter (3)

155

4.. 2.2

TURNING

OFF POWER

4.3

DISPLAY AND WRITING


DISPLAY

OPERATION

Depressing the POWER OFF pushbutton causes both the servo and control powers to be turned off simultaneously. However, for more stable operation, use the following procedure . (1) First depress the EMERGENCY STOP pushbutton to cut off the servo power. The NRD (NC READY) signal is interrupted, which usually results-in turning the machine power, too. Depress the POWER OFF off the control power , Ek4ERGENcY STOP pushbutton to cut

4.3.1 CONSTANT

The following display is made on both the top and bottom on the displayed picture of CRT , irrespective of the FUNCTION key currently selected.

.... ... . .
f.+LARM
COMMAND

PRO GRAL! SU!VIBER

(2)

DIAGNOSIS Ill

POWER OFF

~
LIGHT ERROR

.
CONTROL CONTROL POWER READY { I I I I I LlALREADY IN J

SERVO POWER :* NRD (NC READY)


MACH IKE POWER IN D.4T.4 DISPLAY

P LSK AL! RDY F BUFFER LABEL SKIP DISPLAY BCF] [ LSK;

=d
-ALARM

BLINKING

KEYING EDITING
: BLINKING) (IN 1

I READY STATE DISPLAYED WHEN SYSTEM 1S READY RD Y

DISPLAY

READY ALARM

LAMP

I I

CODE

BL.4NK !

r330JI
\4sl

ALARM OR BATTERY FAILURE 1S DISPLAYED (BLINK IXG) ALM1 BAT .4/B [J ~IX D\t ELL, FEED DISPLAY (BLINKING) M,S, T, FAXDP DWELL [.

Fig. 4.13

Sequence

of Turning off Operation

Fig. 4.15

(1)

Function message Any one of the following eight function messages corresponding to the function key is displayed at the top of CRT display, ALARM DIAGNOSIS PARAMETER SETTING COMMAND PROGRAM POSITION OFFSET

(2)

Program

No.

O and 4 digits of program No. under execution is constantly displayed at the top of CRT display irrespectively of function key.
(3)

Sequence

No ,

execu N and 4 digits of program No. under tion is constantly displayed at the top of key. CRT display irrespectively of function

156

(4)

Display of keying data Up to 32 characters of keyed in data can be displayed at one time. The data is processed by using ERASE key, INSRT key, ALTER key, etc. Display of 1/0 and editing (blinking) The following messages are flickerlingly displayed during loading of punched tape, address search or edition. INI1 ... loading tape

(9)

Display of ready state llRDyll ... indicates the system is normal and the control is operable.

( 10) Dispay

of light errors (flickering)

(5)

The messages shown below indicate light errors which occur in keying or searching operation. Differing from the alarm codes,
these

pres:jing

error messages some key.

are cleared (Generally

by CAN

dekey)

111 NpUT

ERROR!

IIvER! ... verifying tape oUT lIASII ... ... punching tape out
ALREADY IN !

..Format error of keyedin data


. . The same number of been part program has stored already.

searching address mode EDIT LOCK mode mode


MEMORY

.ALT 4 altering data in EDIT INS ERS


(6)

..- inserting data in EDIT o.. erasing data in EDIT

ON! ...Editing operation is made with Edit Lock on


Part program to be stored is beyond memory capacity

Display of MSTFIN and feeding


M
11s11 IITII 11~11

signal waiting, dwelling

OVER!

..
. . . . . . . . .

waiting for FIN signal of waiting for


waiting feeding 1! R!! is loading for FIN FIN signal signal of of

1~

command

PROGRAM

OVER!

S command T command

. . . Registered

number

of

part program 99 (basic) or (option) NO I FOUND! . . . D esired been data

is beyond 199

displayed

at

rapid

traVerse

has

not

lip},

. . .

tape

located.

DWELL ... dwelling


M, S, T, F and ly each other. (7) Display skip IIBUF II of the P are displayed independent4. 3.2 state of buffer full and label COMMAND Depress DATA DISPLAY COM the data key. following three digits appears.

(1)

. . .

displayed advance displayed

at completion reading at label skip

of

Any One of

a. Command
on

( COMMAND)

LSK

. . .

b. Repetition
(SUB PROG.

number of subprogram NESTING) life control (TOOL LIFE CON-

(8)

Display

of

alarm

(blinking) flickeringly RESET opera

c. State
TROL)

of tool

Alarm continues until the cause tion is made.


IIALMII . . .

to be displayed is removed and

(2)

The ward

above by

display

steps

forward

or

back-

depressing

PAm

or

- : PAGE ]

indicates indicates ing

alarm battery

state

occuring

ltBA-pl

...

one b y one.
alarm occur

llA/BLl ... indicates


battery

both of alarm alarm occuring

and

157

4. 3.2.1

Command

Data

Display

4. 3.2.2

Display

of Subprogram

Run Status

(SUB FROG. NESTING) The display shows the block data under execution or just prior to execution in which compensa tion calculations have been completed. The conditions of the data to be displayed is as follows. (1) The data shows the contents of the active register during an automatic operation or a feed hold. While the control is stopped at a block end, the contents of the buffer regiter are displayed. If the buffer register blank (BUF is not displayed) , the contents of the just executed block are displayed. When the program being executed is in the subprogram called by M98 (subprogram call command) the following information is displayed : CALL : The program number (O to NO) and sequence number (N to NO) specified with M98 (subprogram call command) : The program number (O to NO) and number (N to NO) of the subprogram called by M98 The remaining number of repetitions of the subprogram by L ---- (subprogram repeat command, K = L1, indicates the number of repetitions) The order in which subprogram call commands are called. of Subprogram Run multiple

(2)

START

LOOP :

r
G

CODES

OF

01

TO

14

GROUPS

NEST:

~NON-MODAL

G CODE

Example

Status Display

3-AXIS SPEED

MAX OF

SPEED 3-AXIS

DESIGNATION IN OPERATION

__J Subprogram Remalmng Number of Repeiitlons

Fig. 4.16

Command

Display

Fig. 4.17

010000

)20000

030000

>40000

iol

10

NO130 No120

NO1OI

P2000QO11O L1O ;

M98

!0200P3000QO120M98 La ;

/
NO21OP4000QO130M98 L6 ;

M30
M99 1

,M99

M99

CRT screen displays that the subprogram has executed the 3rd level one time and entered into the execution of 3rd time of the 3rd level

158

4. 3.2.3 Display of Tool Life Control (TOOL LIFE CONTROL)

Use Status

The following information is displayed use ) of each status (e. g. condition, tool group under the tool life control LIFE : The life of the screen Groups the tool group

for the tool in each feature : on

TOOL LIFE CONTROL TOOL GROUP TIMER T04** ; T08$* ; TIO** ; T12** ; T14** ; T18** ; T20** ; T22** ; END END END END END END END END

01234

U1234

12 (LIFE7890MIN.) 1234 MIN. T24+*; END T28** . CUTTING T30**: T32** ; T36** ; T38** ; T40**;

displayed

1 to 9:

The number operations. Machining

of

machining

Groups COUNTER/TIMER:

10 to

19:

time.

The number of machining operations /machine time the currently used tool.

of Fig. 4,19 Example B of Tool Life Cent rol Status

T codes correspond ing to the tools registered in the group displayed on screen are all shown.

T K V**; T o ~**; T El~**;

END END }

The tool whose life has expired. tool currently

4.3.3

WRITING

IN BLOCKS

AND DISPLAYING

CONTENTS BY MDI
used 4. 3.3.1 (1) Multi-block Writing writing and Operation in MDI mode in MDI Mode

CUTTINGThe

TOO**; . 1 The used. tool to be

Multi-block

1
; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; END END CUTTING T21** T26*$ T29** T31**

By tt, e following 10 lines of data a. b. Select MDI mode.

operations, a maximum of may be written in MDI mode.

Depress the PROG function key. . . . PROGRAM (MDI) is displayed screen. Depress the RESET The buffer for MDI key, is emptied.

on the

TOOL LIFE CONTROL

01234 N1234
c.

TOOL GROUP 1 (LIFE7890COUNT) 1234 COUNTER


TO1** T03** T06** T09** T1l** T13** T16** T19**

d.

Fig. 4.18 Example A of Tool Life Control Use Status e.

The part program is written by the use of the address key and data key. As shown below, the keyed data is written to the bottom line on CRT screen from left to right. The maximum number of characters that can be written at a time is 32. If the data is comprised of 32 characters or less, it may be keyed in over multiple words or when the 10th character blocks . However, is keyed in, the normal display at the right of this line is blanked.

Depress the WR key. The keyed data is stored in the The blanked display is restored Up to 10 lines operation may operations

MDI buffer. to normal. MDI the

f.

of the part program for be written by repeating and e. above.

in d.

159

4, 3. 3.1

Multi-block Writing and Operation in MD I Mode (Centd)

(3) a,

Operation in \lDI mode the CYCLE START button in Depressing MD I mode can automat ic~liyexecute thr part programs stored in the MD I buffer. When the PROG function is active, the cursor is displayed at the head of the block currently executed . \\Thenthe execution of allpart programs is completed, the part programs and the CRT displays are erased If M99 is written at the end of a part program , this program is executed repeatedly. The repetition may be stopped by depressing the FEED HOLD then RESET .

c. While a program is being run, the PROG function need not be active. Depressing POS can display the current values on the CRT.
Referred entered has, to as tithe data which (32 characters maximum) . just been

Note:
II :. II

The depression of the EOB

key displays

Fig. 4.20
(2) Editing MDI data 4. 3.3.2

4
N2 N8

NI coo U-40. ;
CO1 W-20. FO. 3;

REPEATED
IN MD I

RUN

MODE.

M99:

Display

in Memory

Run Mode

(PROGRAM [MEMI ) The part program being executed in memory mode (MEM mode) may be displayed by the following operations: (1)
(2)

run

INSRT , and ALTER keys permit editing multi-block data written in. Address rword) pointed to by the cursor willbe edited. ~ CURSOR keys and i ~U~S~ The 1 move the cursor forward and backward. a. ERASE key: When this key has been depressed, the whole word designated is erased. b. INSRT key: This key inserts the data which has just been entered next to the word the cursor points to.

Select the MEM

mode,

Depress the PROG function key. On the CRT screen, the cursor is positioned at the head of the block currently execut ed. The cursor moves to the next block when its execution is started.

c. ALTER key : This key replaces the word which the cursor points to with the data which has just been entered . d. WR key: This key appends the data which has just been entered at the end of the program displayed. In MD I mode, only one screen currently displayed may be edited. Unlike EDIT mode and MEM mode, the display and edit of multiple screens cannot be performed , When the RESET key is depressed, the stored programs are allerased.

CURSOR

Fig. 4.21 Display of Part Program in Memory Operation

160

Up to 10 lines may be displayed at a time. When execution of the ninth has been completed, the next page appears with the tenth line of the last screen appearing at the top.

(2)

Completion of search
the disappear. search is completed, AS will

a. When

(i) In
4.3.3, See 3 Display 4.6 in EDIT Mode

EDIT.
Address Search

MEM or EDIT mode, the pointer of the part program memory points to the data of block found (indicated by the cursor) . In all cases, only search will be performed but neither BUF display nor advance reading will be performed.

4. 3.3.4

Search continues until a data (character string) held on tape or in the memory which coincides with the data (character string) entered through The contents the NC operators station. of tape willbe searched in TAPE mode and those of the part program memory in MEM or EDIT mode. (1)
a. b. c, operation Select Depress Depress and the program (MEM, or EDIT EDIT mode) mode. function key.

~.

MEMORY POINTER

t
DATA FOUND

MEM, the

PROG

the RESET key. LSK appears pointer returns to the top of the number in MEM mode. in one of the following

d.

Search is performed three methods:

AS disappears and NOT FOUND ! appears on the CRT if the desired data is not found. This message willdisappear when you depress a key (CAN normally) of the control station.
Remarks

(3) (i) Key-in the word (an address data) to be searched. If the leading zero of the data is omitted, the search operation is still possible. (ii) Key-in only a single character without data. This permits searching the character read first. (iii)Depress the NEXT key then key in any data (less than 32 characters) to be searched. In this case, the search operation is performed exactly according to the keyed data (character string or nu meral string) , thus disabling the omission of leading zero.
a.

Commands encountered during search will be ignored even if they are modal commands.
On Cycle Start after search, the data of a

block which the pointer points to willbe read in and executed.

.
e.

Depress starts.

the

CURSOR .

key.

Search

AS blinks during search.

f. When the NEXT key is depressed, depqess it again to cancel the pattern search func tion

161

4. a d. 4 Haaress (4)
Search

bearcn

i~ontctj
number to in

h, ERROR i. COMMAND
(2)

PULSE PULSE --PAGE PAGE keys to select

of program

The address search function also permits search a part program out of those stored the memory. a. b. c. d. Select Depress Depress MEM or the the EDIT mode. function key. number 10 ~ D c K . be omitted. key.

Depress

the page including any of the above . Note : Page including error pulse or command pulse willse displaye~ when SYSTEM No. switch is set at 4. 4.3.4.1 Position
(1) [EXTERNAL]

PROG RESET

Enter the program Leading zero can

The current value to be displayed in EXTERNAL is the accumulated value of the tool movement from the position reset to Oil by the ORG key. HOW to reset POSITION [EXTERNAL]

e.

Depress

the

m
1 .,

key.
(2)

The designated program number will be searched. The result of search is as de scribed in ( 2). In MEM mode, you may de press the CYCLE START button immediate y after completion of search to start automatic operation from the beginning of the program.

Display the POSITION [EXTERNAL] screen on the CRT , select the axis by the address key, and depress the ORG key. The display of the selected axis becomes O. This display reset operation is always valid even during time when the movement is being made by the automatic run of part program . Notes :

4. 3.4

CURRENT

POSITION

DISPLAY be dispro-

rhe current position of X-, or z -axis can played at any time in all modes. Operating cedure is as follows. (1) Depress POS key. will be displayed

1,

When parameter POSEXT ( #6005D5) is set to 1, the value displayed in POSITION EXTERNAL becomes the same value as dis played in POSITION ABSOLUTE . Regardless of the state of parameter POSEXT , the value displayed in the external current value display (option) is the same as displayed in POSITION [EXTERNAL] . Hence, resetting the external current value display auto matically causes the reset of POSITION EXTERNAL . The value in the current value display of the equipment described in 2.8.22, Work Coordinate Multi-Shift G50T and 5.2,3, Measured Workpiece Value Direct Input refers to this value in POSITION EXTERNAL. The display lock feature TION [ EXTERNAL]. is valid for POSI-

2. on the

One of the. following CRT screen.

a. POSITION b. POSITION c. POSITION d. POSITION e. PROGRAM f. DISTANCE g. PULSE

EXTERNAL ABSOLUTE INCREMENT 3. RETURN TO LIMIT

COUNTER 4.

162

Fig. 4.22 Display of POSITION [EXTERNAL]

Fig. 4.23

Display of POSITION [ABSOLUTEl

4.3 (1)

4.2

Position

[ABSOLUTE]

4. 3.4.3

Position

[INCREMENT]

The current value displayed in POSITION indicates the tool position on ABSOLUTE the coordinate system provided by coordinate system settings. Coordinate system setting is performed in the following cases: The execution of G 50coordinate system setting. The operation of automatic coordinate system setting (option) . The ORG current value reset operation by the key (see (2) below) . coordinate

Displayed in this mode are: . In automatic mode, distance to the end point of the block at every moment. . In mzmaal mode, distance to the position where manual operation is to start. . The increment display in manual mode willbe cancelled in automatic operation mode.

a.

b.

c.

d.

The execution of G 50T work system setting . How to reset POSITION

(2)

[ABSOLUTE] key de-

The reset operation by the ORG scribed above is as follows:

~creen ABSOLUTE Display the POSITION on CRT , select the axis by the address key, and depress the ORG key. The display of the selected axis becomes 0. However, this display reset operation is valid only in the manual operation modes (RAPID, JOG, and STEP (or HANDLE) ). Depressing of the ORG key is invalid during operation or in the buffer full state. Note : If the display lock is on, the display of POSITION [ABSOLUTE] is not locked.

Fig. 4.24

Display of POSITION INCREMENT

4, 3. 4.4
(1)

Position
all positions are collectively

In POSITION,
displayed.

(2)

POSITION MACHINE displays the tool current position on the coordinate system with the reference point returned by the refer ence point return feature being O. The data on the following features are defined on this coordinate system:

163

4. 3.4.4 a.

Position

(Centd)

Stored stroke limit. by tool.

b . Stored stroke limitas arranged c. Leadscrew

error compensation .

Fig. 4.26 DisDlay of PROGRAM


=ETURN

4.6

Stored

Stroke

Limit

Fig. 4.25

Display of POSITION

(3)

Clear

position @ ~ key can be operated

STORED STROKE LI.MIT displays the remaining number of PuLses in the four directions of X-axis pluslminus and Z-axis pluslminus from the tool current position to each boundary of the first,second, and third limit areas.

The

in the position screen , to display O as the external current positions. The external current pc)sitioncan be displayed as O by the following operation.
1

The setting of S~ORED STROKE the display of rem~ining number STORED STROKE LI!vIIT

LILMIT and of puIses:

. . . . Change

the X-axis value of the external current value display to O. the Zaxis value of the external current position display to O.

X-axis plus direction boundary value STORED STROKE LIMIT ~

X-axis minus direction boundary value STORED STROKE LIL41T

~ Set by ~ parameter

. . . . Change

Z-axis plus direction boundary value STORED STROKE LIMIT

. . . . Chance

the X and Z axes values of the external current position display to ,!O. !!

Z-axis minus direction boundary value

The value of X-axis plus remaining number of pulses The value of X-axis minus remaining number of pulses The value of Zaxis plus remaining number of pulses The value of Z-axis minus remaining number of pulses

The value other than the external current positions does not change. The same operation can be performed external current position screen. on the

4, 3.4.5

Program

Return

PROGRAM RETURN displays the information necessary for program restart. For details, see 6.2.6, program Restart .

164

CURRENT POSITION

SPINDLE COUNTER PULSE COUNTER

01234 N1234 FOE SPINDLE PULSE

FOR EXTERNAL

LIMIT AREA

aENcE

~RENCE ~

POINT . .. G .x


!~> o c. .? @ @4 FOR INTERNAL LIMIT AREA

12345

\,jj @ CURRENT POSITION :Z .@

RD Y

L *

tz

Fig. 4.29 Fig. 4.27

Display of No. of Spindle PG Pulses

4. 3.4.8

No. of Servo Lag Pulses

Display

(ERROR PULSE) ERROR PULSE displays the difference between the momentarily changing command position and the tool current position. The display is performed on a 1 = 1 pulse basis (the minimum move unit) .

ERROR

PULSE

04000

NOOOO

520

z
Fig. 4.28 Display of Remaining No. of Pulses in First Stored Stroke Limit

1.

027

LS K

RDY

(2)

The display shown above will correspon to 1st, 2nd, and 3rd prohibited area.
Fig. 4.30 Display of No. of Servo Lag Pulses

4.3.4,

7 Spindle

Counter 4. 3.4.9 Command Pulse Accumulation Register Display (COMMAND wLsE)


COMMAND PULSE displays the contents of the command pulse integration register (SMC register) in the control unit. This screen is displayed only when the system number switch is 4.

SPINDLE

COUNTER displays the number of spinindexing origin dle P G pulses from the spindle during the execution of the spindle indexing feaThe display is performed on a l = 1 pulse ture. basis.

The SMC register is set to O when the power is turned on and keeps adding command pulses until the power is turned off. When a value is set to parameter XSMCB (#6658: for X-axis) or ZSMCB (#6659: for Zaxis), the value obtained by subtracting the value set above from the content of the command pulse integrating register is displayed.
Note :

43.

4.9

Command

Pulse Accumulation PULSE) (Centd)

Register

Dis~ JIay (COMMAND

Fig. 4.32

Display of TOOI Offset Amount

d. The screen of the following or preceding five pairs of tool offset amounts may be ~ . displayed by depressing
Fig. 4.31

PA(;E , r

; PAGE :
,j

key.

In this case, the cursor is

positioned to the firstof the displayed tool offset numbers.


4.3 5 DISPLAYING AND WRITING

TOOL OFFSET DATA+


e.

When the options shown below are selected , designating the corresponding offset mem r-

The tool offset amount is stored in the offset memOry in the unit. Regardless of modes, the tool offset amount may be displayed and written any : including the automatic operation time. time

ory number
~ A~E I

by depressing

~
I L_

PATG~

key or by two-digit value key-in


can clisplay each data.

operation

(1)

Display of tool offset amount The display of tool offset amount and other offset memory contents is performed by the following operations :
(i)

Work coordinate system shift option: Work coordinate system shift amount.

(ii) Work measuring value direct input option: Tool coordinate data. (iii) TOO1 wear compensation option: Tool wear amount.

a. b.

Select the OFS

function key.

Key-in a two-digit tool offset number like CURSOR ~ or O, 1, and then depress , -. I * -1 CURSOR

I+

1
* wORK COORDINATE .\c 1

The tool offset amount and the tool nose radius are displayed in five pairs including the tool offset number of the keyed value. The cursor is positioned to the designated tool offset number .
c.

s*lFT MEMoPy IGQOUP,

,,

1< T 3DIGIT BASIC

t>iE$.lORY 150 GROL!PS MAX 1 OFFSE r M:MOP,Y Supplement

The preceding tool offset number may be CURSOR or designated by depressing 1 .. I CLRS~ If the operation is performed . outside the range of the tool offset numbers displayed on one screen, the following or preceding five pairs of tool offset amounts are displayed.

* TCC.

COORDINATE ~,1 E~,lOF\ (30 _ GF?OLIPS MAX )

-, I
.,

~ 1 I

I * rOOL WEAP V=MORY(19 S~OUPS ihlAX I {


*TOOl RADIUS ;,~EklORY _

-rFig. 4.33

166

(2)

Writing of tool offset amount The writing of the offset amount and other offset memory contents is performed by the following operations:

Notes :

1. The contents of offset memory


after the power is turned off.
2.

are retained

a. b.

Depress

the OFS

function key,
3.

Regardless of modes, the writing by the above operations is always possible including automatic run time. The tool offset amount rewritten in automatic run is made valid from reading of the com mand of the next block. For the tool offset amount of the currently executed block or the block stored in the prefetch buffer, the value before change is used.

By the operation of PAGE key and CURSOR key or keying in two digits designate the tool offset number to be written.
Using the address key and the data key, key in the address data to be written. In this case, the meaning depends on the address as shown below:

c.

4.

When the data shown below is rewritten, the timing in which the data value is made is as follows:
(i) Work coordinate s~stem shift amount:

Table 4.1
Axis Designation Write to X axis Write to Z axis Write to X
u

Address

The time when G56, G50T , or other coordinate system setting is performed next. ii)
Writing of an absolute value. Namely, the value is written to memory without change. Writing of an increment. Namely, 5%

x z

Tool coordinate data: The time when G 50T is specified next.

iii) Tool wear compensation amount: The tl,newhen T 99A A is specified next. The writing operation of the above tool coordinate data is performed when the PST INPUT button is not depressed. If this button is depressed, the data to be written is completely different from the above data. For details, see 6.2.3 Work Measuring Value Direct Input. The contents of offset memory by the following operations: (i) (ii) Depress the OFS are allerased

axis Write to Z

the current value is added to the preceding value and the result is written to memory.

axis Tool nose radius Writing of an absolute value.

6.
d.

Depress

the WR

key.

The address data keyed in is written to the tool offset memory according to the meaning of the data. e. Repeat the operations of c. and d. and b. through d. to write allnecessary tool offset amounts. f. When the options shown below are selected, if the corresponding offset memory number is designated at the operation of d. , the data may be written to memory. However, address R has no significance and therefore should not be designated.
(i) Work Work coordinate coordinate system system value data. shift shift direct option: amount. input option:

function kev. .

Key-in O - 9 9 9 9 , and depress the ORG key. The contents in offset memory are all erased,

( ii)

Work measuring Tool coordinate Tool Tool wear wear

(iii)

compensation amount.

option:

167

4.3.6

DISPLAYING

AND WRITING

SETTING

DATA

(SETTING)

With this unit, the setting data is stored in the internal memory. According to the contents of this memory, a particular function is turned on/ off. These contents are also used for the con trol constants of functions . For details, refer to Appendix 1, List of Setting Numbers. The display and write of setting data are always enabled including the time when automatic run is being performed. The setting data is of the following two types: (1)
(2)

Setting data of bit display format.


Setting data of decimal display format,
DEC;MAL INDICATION

4. 3.6.1

Setting

Data of Bit Display

Format

Fig. 4, 34 Display of Setting Data Shown In Bit Display

#6000 through #6004 have the Setting numbers II setting data of bit display format. Each number has 8-bit information of D7 through DO, each bit displaying on /off of the corresponding function. (1) Display of setting data (bit display format) Setting data is displayed by the following operations : a. Select the SET function key.

Note: When #6000 is designated, the screen dedicated to the display of on/off state of the internal toggle switch is provided. For details, see 4.3.6.2.

(2)

Writing of setting data (bit display format) The writing of the setting data of bit display format is performed by the following operations:

a. b, Key-in 4-digit .. numeric


or

Depress

the SET

function key.

setting
.

number
]

and

b.

depress

~lJ~~SO~~

L CURSOR __

~ ey

#:need not be keyed in. Up to four pairs of setting data including the keyed setting number are displayed . To the right of bit display,the decimal value indicating the sum of the data on that line is shown. The cursor is positioned to the designated setting number.
c.

By the operation of PAGE key and CURSOR or keying in 4 digits, designate the setting number to be written.
key

c.

Depress the INSRT key. The cursor moves to the bit data from a setting number. Designate the data of D7. DeDress the cLRsOl<key Each time

d.

The setting number

designation may be upkey,


e.

CURS6R Or dated by 1 CURSOR and the screen may be updated by key.

the key is depressed , the cursor moves by one bit toward DO. Locate the cursor at a desired bit position Depress the WR key, The designated bit data reverses (0 to 1 or 1 to O) . If you depress the WR key again, the bit data will reverse again Normally , ) 1 designates on state and O off state, To write data in decimal mode, locate the cursor at the right most column (decimal data)

f.

168

EXAMPLE Entered 0 WRA

: data

Writing 765

in decimal

mode

Notes : 1.

43210

000000000 1111111 steps If you key by b, through the f. m the in the to write 1 255 2.

255WR~ g. Repeat data.

The internal toggle switch is an optional function. Hence, which internal toggle switch is available depends on the controlled machine. The display for unused tog gle switches is blank. For details, refer to the instruction manual of the machine in question.
When the machine control station is provided with the switches that turn on and off the above functions, the state of the switch on the machine control station is ORed with that of the operators panel to determine the final ON/OFF state.
Switches on Mac~iiomtrol Resultant I ONIOFF

required

keep

7 , CL RTSOR

depressed, column

r cursor screen

will auto-

move column matically. h. When data

has

been

written,

depress

the

Setting Data

Cursor returns to the position INSRT key. of setting number normally, this sequence of operations begins and ends both with the depression of the INSRT key.

4.3, (1)

6.2

Internal

Toggle

Switches+

When the eight basic function switches shown below are omitted from the machine operators station, each function may easily be turned onioff by the setting operation from the NC operator panel. The setting numbers are #6000D7 through D o of bit display format. By the operation of the writing of bit display format setting described above, turn on /off each function. When When 1 is set, O is set, the the function function is turned is turned on. off.

4. 3.6.3

Setting Data of Decimal Display Format

The following setting numbers have the setting data of decimal number display format: #6160 through
?#6500 through #8600 through #6219 #6579 #8750

(2)

These setting numbers are used for the control constants of tool lifecontrol and multiple repetitive cycles.

(1) Display of setting data (decimal display


format ) The setting data is displayed by the following operations: a. b, Depress the SET
Key in the 4digit

function key.
settine number and de-

press

p:ti~

or

~~L~so~] key.

The maximum of 10 lines of setting data including the keyed setting number are displayed. The cursor is p~sitioned to the designated setting number. c. Display shows that Single Block and Display Lock are on.
Fig. 4.35 Display of Internal Toggle Switch Status

The setting number designation may be upCLJRS~R or ~ dated by key, ~CLJRTSOR E. _. I and the screen may be updated by ml . or [,x keY

169

4, 3, 6.3

Setting

Data of Decimal

Display

Format

4 :

TEST

(0)

(Centd)
Normal operation is similar to the case of 1 O1! SYSTEM. Self-diagnostics of the memory contents and checking of reference zero return point are omitted,
Notes :

1.

Setting values other than those described above will prevent correct operation. Setting can be effective only when the system number switch provided on the upper part of the unit is set at O. No. Setting (#6219)

2.

Alarm Display of System

Fig. 4.36

Display of Setting inDecimalMode

Data

When setting #6219 is set at 11or 4, Cycle Start is prohibited or self-diagnostics are over looked, causing unexpected errors. To prevent
this, alarm status a value other than is displayed O. if

(2)

Writing of setting data (decimal display format) The writing of the setting data of decimal display format is performed by the following operations:

#6219

is

set

at

a. b.

Depress

the SET

function key.

v;
SYSTEM MESSAGE
I

NO. SETTING

(#6219 ):[11 I
I

By the operation of PAGE key and CURSOR key or keying in 4-digit value, designate the setting number to be written. Key-in the value by the data key and deThe keyed value is press the WR key. written as the data of the setting number designated by the cursor. Repeat operations of b. and c. to write the necessary setting data.
> No. setting (#6219) parameter numthe

c.

System number #6219 for writing parameters,

should

be

set

at

except

d,

REMARKS System

. System number can also be set by the rotary switch on the main printed circuit board. For details, refer to Maintenance Manual.

Set system
ber. value

No.

at II111 to write

4.3.7 DISPLAYING

AND WRITING

PARAMETERS

System number of #6219 through

can be set by the operators

setting panel.

Setting of #6219
llO1!: SYSTEM

In this system, varying parameters are stored in the memory and they determine operating conditions such as tape code and feedrate. For details,see Appendix 2, LIST OF PARAMETER NUMBERS . The parameters may be displayed at any time even during automatic operation. The parameters (1) are of the following two types:

For normal operation. vented.


!ll!l:

Writing parameters

is pre-

The parameters of bit display format. The parameters of decimal display format.

PARAMETER

(2) To write parameters. start is prevented, At this position, Cycle

170

4. 3.7.1

Parameters

of Bit Display

Format

4. 3.7.3 (1)

Displaying Operations

and Writing for parameter

Parameters display

Parameter numbers #6oO5 through #6049 indicate the parameters of bit display format. Each num

ber has 8-bit information of D 7 through DO.

The operations for parameter display are the same as those for setting display except key is depressed inthat the PRM function
stead of the see 4.3.6. SET function key. For details,

(2)

Operations for parameter writing

a. The parameter values are preset according to the performance of the machine and applications.Therefore, you should consult the machine tool builder if you want to change parameter settings. b. The parameters are protected with a system No. switch provided on the tape reader so that they should not be destroyed by wrong operation. Normally system No. O is selected and, at this time, the parameters cannot be rewritten by any operation. c. The operations for parameter writing are the same as those for setting display except for the following: (i) First, set the system No. switch to 1.
key instead of the PRM function the SET function key. Then, the parameter data may be written by the same

Fig. 4.37

Display of Parameters in Binary Mode

4.3.7.2 Parameters of Decimal Display Format The following parameter numbers indicate the parameters of decimal display format: #6050 through #6160 through #6500 through #8000 through #6149 #6349 #6659 #8225

(ii) Depress

operations as those for the writing of setting data of bit display format (4. 3. 6.1, (2)) or for the writing of setting data of decimal display format (4. 3.6.3, (2)). (iii) After ation, the completion set the system of the writing operNo. switch to O.

d.

When parameters have been changed, be sure to reset the control by depressing the RESET key. Some of the parameters cannot be effective until power is turned off and then turned on again. For setting, refer to APPENDIX 2, LIST OF PARAMETERS .

Fig. 4.38 Display of Parameters in Decimal Mode

171

4.3,

8 DISPLAYING

STATUS

iNPUT/OUTPUT

SIGNALS

(1)

Depress

the

ALM

key.

Depress the DGN function key, and the state of every input loutput signal willbe displayed on the CRT. This is possible at any time even dur ing automatic operation. 170rmore detailof this operation, see IIyASpJAC Lx3 Maintenance hfanu~. The state of the input /output signal is also given in the hexadecimal notation at the rightmost column for the ease of maintenance work.

Then up to four pairs of alarm code and message willbe displayed, with more serious one on a higher line. The alarm screen willappear during an Note : alarm state and, therefore, it is not needed to operate the 1AGE + key.

Fig.

4.40

Display

of Alarms

Fig. 4.39 (2) TO reset the alarm status and screen, re-

4,3.9 ALARM CODE (ALM) DISPLAY Alarm codes and other data are displayed by the following operations : (,1) Depress the ALM function key. following screens is displayed: One of the

move the cause of alarm then depress the RESET key. For the detail of alarm code, refer to Appen dix 5 List of Alarm Codes .

a. Display of the alarm number message. (ALARM) b. Display of operating time.

and the

4, 3. 9.2

Message

Display

(ALARM)

(TIMER) number.

c. Display of registered program (PROGRAM No, TABLE ) d. Display of maintenance


(MAINTEFJANCE)

This feature can display messages on the CRT screen by the instruction of PC when the machine sequence control option (PC system) is built in the unit. Normally, this feature is used to display the cause of the alarm detected by the
Pc .

history.

(2)

When the message display instruction (macro instruction) is executed in the PC, ALM or A /B flashes at the bottom of the CRT screen regardless of mode and function.
-1

The above screens may be selected by depressing PAGE . or

.PAG~

key.

In this case, the message by the following operation: (1)

may

be displayed

4.3.9.1 Alarm Code Display If an alarm status has happened, ALM or AI B (on battery alarm) blinks on the bottom line of the screen regardless of working mode and function. If this happens, the detailed informa tion of the alarm status may be displayed by the following operation.

Depress the ALM function key. The message is displayed at the bottom of the screen along with the sequence error code. The message to be displayed depends on the machine. For details, refer to the instruc tion manual of the machine in question.

172

l-.._

MESSAGE

DISPLAY

AREA

Fig. 4.41

Example

of Message

Display

REMAINING

NUMBER

OF CHARACTERS MEMORY

IN PART PROGRAM

(2)

When the RESET key is depressed after removing the cause of the alarm which dis played the message, the message display and alarm state may be cleared. message 400: display SEQ

The

remaining

number

of

characters in the

in

part

program memory is displayed left corner of the screen. Fig. 4,42

lower

only the Note: In some cases, is provided without displaying ERROR.

This screen displays only the registerNote: A program number is ed program numbers. registered by depressing the PROG function key in EDIT mode.
Program Number

4.3.9.3
(PROGRAM

Display NO.

and TABLE

Deleting ~r)

of Registered

This screen displays allregistered program numbers and the number of remaining characters in the part program memory. (1) The number of program numbers that can be registered depends on options.
.W

The program directory screen used to be displayed in the alarm functions, but is now improved to be displayed in the program functions. Therefore, the program directory screen is no longer displayed in the alarm function. In the program function, the program directly screen and program screen are displayed alternately regardless of the mode, each time the m II 1!screen is depressed. When it is under @ the edit mode, program 1/0 verification,and deletion can be made on the program directly screen.

1 No.
1 . 2 +Max Number I 1 ~ Basic i Option 1
Option 2

of Programs 99 199

Type I

Program No. Table 01 to 02 01 to 04


01

999

to 19

(2)

All

program

numbers By

already

registered or may

are

displayed. T :_PAGEj obtained. (3) Depress ERASE

depressing page

key, the

~I)AC,E a 1 shown below

be

the PROG key and then key to delete part program.

depress

173

4.3.9,

4 Operation

Time

Display

e.

When

1,

112,3,

14,!! IORGI! kev~


shown above

~re
are

The system counts the duration of automatic operation and it may be displayed. This function permits the display of the time it has taken for a single piece of work or the total operational time of the system.
(1) Three played kinds of operation in hours, minutes, time will be disand seconds.

depressed, all the reset at a time.

times

4. 3.9.5

Maintenance

History

Display

(MAINTENANCE)

(1) s. POWER ON: Total operating POWER ON time after

This screen displays the maintenance information on the control unit. This display is independent of the control unit functions.

b .

CYCLE

START:

Total operating CYCLE START operating time of

time

of

c. d.

FEED

Total

FEED

EXTERNAL INPUT f: Total while external input signal

operating time is ON (optional)

Fig. 4.44

4.4

LOADING PART PROGRAMS INTO MEMORY (IN)

AND NC DATA

Fig. 4.43

operation

Time

Display

This paragraph describes the operations for ing the following data into the corresponding ternal memory of the NC :

storin

. Part program (2)


Reset of operating

time display

. Tool offset amount . Setting data and parameters If these data are to be stored in the form of a punched tape, enter them through the tape reader or the data input/output interface (option). For the methods of setting the input/output equipment (setting #6003) and the baud rate (parameters #6026 and #6027), refer to yASNACLX3 Maintenance Manual Date Input/Output Interface. The following description is made assuming that this option is installed .

The above operating time displays may be reset separately by the following operations. In the state where the operating time is displayed;
a.

Depress 1 lrl then


The time of

ORG

keys. is reset. .

POWER

ON

b.

Depress The time

112!! then of CYCLE

ORG

keys

START ORG keys .

is reset.

c.

Depress 1 311 then


The time of FEED

CUTTING keys.

is reset.

d.

Depress

4 then ORG

The time of EXTERNAL

INPUT

is reset.

Unless this display reset operation is performed, then operating time display is retained when the power is turned off.

174

4.4.1 (1)

LOADING PART PROGRAM TAPE INTO MEMORY

g.

When the tape reader has read M02. ;, !!M30 ;,!! or I!M99 ;,11it stops and IN disappears from the CRT
been stored gram has . NOW the in memory. part pro-

Loading a part gram number. Select Depress Load the EDIT the NC

program

which

has

a pro

Notes :

a. b. c.

mode. PROG tape key. to the device. tape reader or an

1.

Program number 00000 is always in the registered state, so it cannot be erased. This program number should not be used general. The be tape stored which has no program before. number However,

in

equivalent

external

2.
M30, % 1
HOLD HERE

may

as described

0/.,01234;
PROGRAM

G50, XOYO
NUMBER

d. e.

Depress

the the

RESET IN key,

key.

Depress

Then the system starts to read the tape and enlists the program number punched on the tape as the first record. The system checks for duplicator of program number as in 1. Operation ends with error if the designated program number is not found on the tape. When the tape reader has read M02 ; , IIM30; ,11 or M99; , it stops and IN disNow the part proappears from the CRT. gram has been stored in memory.

write a program number to the head of the tape, in principle. The operation of Oxxxx IN described before causes only program It does not cause the number registration. storing of information of 00000 into the part program memory. only the program number on tape is stored into the memory. Assume that a tape having no program number is stored and then all part programs are punched out by depressing O, -, 9, keys. Since this 9, 9, 9, and OUT tape contains programs with no program number, the correct restoring of all part programs may not be performed by depressing IIo 9, 9, 9, 9, and IN keys. , -,

3.

Consequently, when a tape having no program number has been stored, write the program number to the head of part program by the EDIT operation. The stop position of tape can be changed by parameter #6021Do, with parameter setting 1, program completes by M02, M30, or M99, However, with parameter setting O t, program does not stop till %. EXAMPLE N1 : G50 XO ZO ;

(2)

Loading a part gram number. Select Depress Load the EDIT the NC

program

which

has

no pro4.

a. b. c.

mode. PROG tape keys. to the device. tape reader or an

equivalent

external

N1 G50

XO

--

M02 I

O/. (

When this cursor to and PROG Oxxxx

is in the first block, position the N and key in as follows (in EDIT modes) : ; N1 ALTER

The tape slops al m? Iocatmn E comoleled

when load!ng

(3) d. e. Depress Depress program Depress the RESET key. O key then enter the

Storing changed

a program I

with

program numbers

the address number. the IN key.

To register a program with a program number different from the one punched on tape, perform the following operations: a. b. Select Depress the EDIT mode. key.

f.

The system starts keyed-in program registered program

blinks on the CRT delete the program number, f. while the tape a. through IN blin-ks on the CRT.

to read the tape. If the numb er coincides with the number, ALREADY IN If this happens, screen. then repeat steps is being read,

the

PROG

175

4. 4.1 LOADING (Centd) c. Set the

PART PROGRAM

TAPE INTO

MEMORY

The tape reader stops each time it has read M02 ;, M30 ;, or M99 ;. f Depress the IN key again.

NC

tape

to the

tape

reader

or

the

external equivalent equipment. The tape reader resumes to read the tape, Repeat this operation until allprograms are loaded. %,01234 G50, XOY0 \
I

M 30
1 HOLD

?(O

(5)

Storing a program changed II

with program

numbers

PROGHAM

NuMBE7

HERE

d. e. f.

Depress Key in

the O the

RESET and IN

key. NUMBER.

When O key is depressed and program number is keyed in before depressing IN key in proas described in (4) above, the keyed
gram number the program is registered in preference to number punched on the NC tape

PROGRAM key.

Depress

The program number entered from the key is registered in preference to the program number punched on the tape. At this time, the program number on the tape is written to the part program memory simply as a label. and the stor M02 ;, M30 ; or M99 ; is read ing operation is completed.

(6)

Loading

programs

continuously

l?rograms existing on a tape as shown in (4) may be loaded continuously without inter ruption. For this purpose, depress O,
I,_ ,,

,,9, ,,

,19,

,,

,Ig,ll

depression of the IN stops at the position

and 9 before the first key. The tape reader of %.

4. 4.2 Note : If a program is stored with a changed program number as described above, the program number punched on the tape is stored in the part Consequently, program memory without change, to avoid the confusion in the later handling, re place the program number in the part program memory with changed program number by the EDIT operation.

MAKING

ADDITION

TO A PART PROGRAM

Perform
part a. b. c.

the followine oDeration to add data to a


which EDIT the the ~s &eady loaded.

program Select Depress Depress

mode. PRGG O key key then enter the designated data to the the part C[KSOI{ program tape pro

(4) a. b. c.

Loading Select Depress Load the equivalent

part EDIT the

programs mode. PROG key.

from

a tape

gram number and depress key. The system searches the

d. Load
reader. reader or an

the

tape

of

adding

NC tape to the tape exte-rnal device ~

e. 1.,01000, $
The tape to Iravel

Depress

the RESET the NEXT

key. and IN keys in this

M02 0200 ,

M30, 0500 1
T1e .aoe stops to t,a.e here

M99,O/. I \

! slops
here

The tape stops to travel here

f. Depress order.

The data will be read from the tape into the memory. Notes :
You cannot add data to the middle of a pro1. If necessary, delete the last part of the gram. program by editing operation and add the data.

d. e.

Depress Depress

the the

RESET IN key.

key.

Then the system starts and enlists the program on the tape as the first tem checks for duplication ber as described in (2)

to read the tape number punched The sysrecord. of program num.

2. Continuous storing operation of NEXT IN needs reset key operation every time.

and

176

4.4,3

LOADING

PART PROGRAMS

BY MDI through the Perform the

4.4.4

INPUTTING

TOOL

OFFSET

DATA INTO

MEMORY

Part programs may tape reader but by following.

be loaded not MDI operation.

Normally, the tool offset data is written to the tool offset memory by MDI operation. This data may also be entered in the form of a punched tape.
(1)

a. Select b. Depress c. Depress d. Depress


gram

EDIT the the the number

mode.

The

format of the tool offset data tape is


below:

PROG RESET

key key. the part WR key. pfo-

as shown

O key then enter and depress the

The designated program number will be regIf this number already exists, istered. IN!I blinks and, in this case, it flALREADy

T03X .... Z.... R.... ; T99X .... Z..... %

is required to delete the registered program number. e. Write the part program by operating the address key and the data key. As shown in the figure below, the keyed in data is displayed on the bottom line from left to right sequentially. The maximum number of characters that can be written at a time is 32. Within this limit,data may be keyed in over multiple words or blocks. However, when the 10th character is keyed in, the normal display shown to the right of the line is blanked. f. Depress the INSRT key.

(2)

The storing is performed Select Depress Set the reader. Depress Depress EDIT OFS tool

of the data by the above tape by the following operations: mode. key. offset data tape onto the tape

a. b. c.

d. e.

the the

RESET IN key.

key.

The keyed in data is stored in the part program memory. g. Repeat the operations of e. and f. above to The program edit write the part program. oDeration is enabled bv the use of ERASE,
IfiSRT, and gram storing ALTER k~ys operation. during this pro-

The tape reader starts to read the tape. !!lN 1! blinks on the CRT while the data are f, The read.

tape reader stops when it has read NIN II disappears from the % (or ER). CRT . Now the tool offset data has been read into memory.

(3)

Remarks G1O: In the case of the tool offset data tape of the format by tool offset data designation, performing the cycle start in TAPE mode causes to store the data into the tool offset memory.

Fig. 4.45

h.

Key in M02 ; , M30 ; , or M99 ; and depress This completes the storing of INSRT key. the part program.

177

4. 4.5 DATA

INPUTTING

SETTING

DATA AND PARAMETER

4.5

TAPE VERIFYING

Through setting data and parameter data are input in their memories by MDI operation normally, they may also be entered by means of paper tape, Setting data and parameter data may be input tape. from a single (1)
The tape format is as follows.

The punched tape of the data shown below may be compared to the contents of the NC internal memory to check if they match. ~ Part program . Tool offset data . Setting data and parameter The punched tape is entered through the NC tape reader or the data input/output interface (option). For the methods of setting the input / output equipment (setting #6003) and the baud rate (parameters #6o26 through #6029) , refer to YASNAC1LX3 Maintenance Manual. The following description is made assuming that this
option is installed .

I %

LABEL % ; N6000 X128;


N6002 X O;

~
I

4. 5.1 VERIFYING
N8750 X O;

PART PROGRAM program

TAPE tape having pro-

(1)
-. J

Verifying a part gram number Select Depress Set the the EDIT

a.

mode. function tape key. key. key. to the tape reader.

(2)
a. b. c. d. e.

The Set

input the

operation No.

is as follows switch at 1.

b. c. d.

the part the the

PROG program RESET VER

SYSTEM EDIT the the IN mode. PRM

Select Depress Depress Depress

Depress Depress

key. key.

e.

RESET key.

The tape reader starts to read the tape. IN blinks on the CRT while the data are being read. The tape reader stops when it has read % (or ER) . !!lN!! disappears from the CRT . Now the setting lparameter data have been read into memory. f. g. Return Turn the the system off No. then switch on. to O. (2)

started to compare the con The tape is tents of the part program memory to the During contents of the part program tape. IIVER )! keeps flashing. If this operation, a mismatch is found , INPUT ERROR is displayed flashing . When a match is found and this operation is completed, the tape reader stops, upon which VER display is erased. By the operation of RESET , VER, Note: the verifying feature verifies the data from the tape head to % code.

power

Verifying program Select Depress Set the the

a part number EDIT

program

tape

having

no

The NC operation by the newly stored setting data and parameter may be performed.
At the end of operation e. , the op erations on the NC operat~]rs panel are all the power must be Hence, invalidated. turned on again.
Note:

a. b. c. d. e+

mode. function to the key. an[{ key in program key. tape reader

the part the the

PROG program RESET ()

Depress Depress number.

key

178

f.

Depress

VER

key.

4. 5.2

VERIFYING

TOOL

OFFSET

VALUE TAPE

The tape starts to compare the contents of the part program memory to the contents of the part program tape. During this operation, !!VERI!keeps flashing. If a mismatch is ERORII is displayed flashing. found, lllNpUT
When a match is found and this operation is completed, the tape reader stops, upon which !!VER!! display is erased. If the keyed-in program number is not found in the !!NOT FOUND! u is displayed flashing. case, depress the operation of d. Notes :
1. The gram ber is operations number punched processed on in number by the on . when in. the the operation information program a tape no program of OXXXX as the VEf7 in for different the The tape verification from are to keyedin the the the with same a pronumas those number

The contents of compared to the by the following ( 1) Select the

the tool offset value tape are contents of the offset memory operations: EDIT mode.

(2)

Depress

the

OFS offset

function value

key.
tape to the tape

memory, In this with the

(3)

Set the tool


reader.

CAN

key

and

start

(4) (5)

Depress Depress

the the

RESET VER

key. key.

program

of (2) above.
program

program

preference

punched

2,

Verification regards formation Hence program be keyed

punched verifying

keyed-in

number. should

containing number

The tape starts to compare the contents of the tape to the contents of the tool offset During this operation , VER memory . keeps flashing. If a mismatch is found, INPUT ERROR is displayed flashing. When a match is found and this operation is completed, the tape reader stops, upon which IVER display is erased.

numbers,

(3)

Verifying programs

a tape

containing

multiple

part

4. 5.3

VERIFYING

SETTING

AND PARAMETER

TAPES

Multiple part programs tape are continuously ing operations:

punched in a single verified by the follow-

a. Select b. Depress c. Set


er. the

the

EDIT

mode. function tape key. to the tape read-

The setting data tape or the parameter tape is compared to the respective contents of the memory. It is possible to punch the setting data and parameter on a single tape and store them at a time by the following operations: (1) (2) Select Depress the EDIT PRM mode. function key.

the part

PROG program

the

d. Depress e. Depress

the the

RESET VEX

key. key. the tape part pro up to % (3)

For the tape punched only with depressing the SET key causes effect. Set the setting data

data, setting the same tape

and /or parameter

When M02, M30, or M99 is read, reader does not stop but all the grams are continuously verified code. When the verification the tape reader stops at the code.

to the tape
(4) (5) Depress Depress the the

reader. RESET VER key. key.

is completed, position of %

The tape starts to compare the con tents of the tape of the contents of setting or parameter. During this operation, VER If a mismatch is found, keeps flashing. INPUT ERROR is displayed flashing. When a match is found and this operations completed, the tape reader stops, upon which VER display is erased. is

1 7s

4.6

EDIT
REGISTERED PART PROGRAM

(5)

Depress

the

CURSOR .

key.

4. 6.1 CHECKING NUMBER

part programs, make confirmation 13efore editing of the registered program numbers and the re maining number of characters in the part pro gram memory by the following operations: (1) (2) Depress Depress the PROG the function key. or :_~J1{,sO1l
NO. number (6)

The designated program number is searched. One screen of data (for 10 lines) from the head of the searched program is displayed If the program number has on the CRT. is displayed not been found , NOT FOUND flashing. This display may be reset by depressing CAN key in general. The preceding or following screen may be displayed on the CRT by depressing the -. = I.k(;E key. I.%(;E r -

_ ~.R~cjR

key to select the screen TABLEDD ) of registered display.

(PROGRAM program

(7) is depressed,

preceding

the cursor is moved to the or following word on a word basis.

The above operations make the word (address and data) designated by the cursor ready for such edit operations as modification, insertion, and deletion. The search for a program number may be Note : performed also in the MEM mode. But the cursor IPAGE or key is movement by the PAGE disabled.

4,6.3 MODIFYING
tJUMBER OF REMAINING PROGRAM CHARACTERS NUMBER REGISTERED

PART PROGRAM

BLOCKS

This screen only displays information but also deletes program No, and therefore cannot be used to register program numbers.
Fig. 4.46

Modification of part programs is all performed in the EDIT mode and the PROG function by the operations which follow the operations described in the preceding paragraph 4. 6.2 Displaying And (1) C~ecking

<tired ~art Programs.

Depress the page key and the cursor key to designate the word to be modified. Depress the address key and the data key to enter the word to be modified. As shown in the figure below, the keyedin data is displayed in the bottom line on the CRT screen from ieft to right sequentially. The maximum number of characters that may be written at a time is 32. Within this limit, data may be keyed-in over multiple words or blocks . Depress the ALTER key.

4, 6.2

DISPLAYING

AND CHECKING

STORED

PART (2)

PROGRAMS

may be displayed on the Stored part programs CRT screen to check their contents by the following operations:
(1) (2)

Select the EDIT


Depress the

mode . function key. (3)

PROG

(3)
(4)

Depress
Key-in

the RESET
O PROGRAM

key.
NUMBER.

The word designated by the cursor is deleted and the newly keyed-in data is displayed in that place. After modification, the altered word is in the designated state.

180

(4)

Repeat the operations of (1) through modify any number of words .

(3) to

4. 6.4

ADDING

PART PROGRAMS mode and shown below Displaying

PROGRAM

(EDIT)

00003

NOO03

A part program is added in the EDIT the PROG function by the operations which follow the operations of 4. 6.2 And Checking Stored Part Programs.

03; N1 N2 N3 N4 N5 N6

(1) Depress
G50 X1OO. ZIOO. ; GOO TO1O1; G96 S150 M03; X20.3 21.5; 20.5: z-10.5 F5;

the page key and the designate the word immediately portion to be added.

cursor before

key to the

(2)

Depress the address key and data key to key in the word to be added. Within the limit of 32 characters, the data may extend over multiple words or blocks. Depress the INSRT key.

*Keylin
PROGRAM (EDIT)

11

G01Z0,5F20 1

(3)

After insertion 00003 NOO03

The keyed-in data is added to the portion immediately after the word designated by the cursor. After the addition, the added word is in the designated state. (4) Repeat to ~dd the any operations n-umber of of (1) words. through (3)

I
I

L
I

03; N1 N2 N3 ~5 N6

050 X1OO, Z1OO,; GOO TO1O1; G96 S150 M03; GO1 ZO.5 F20; Z-10.5 F5;

I
IS K
~.
Fig. 4.47

RDY

L1

After !nsertlon

I
Fig. 4.48

181

4. 6.5 Part and (1)

DELETING program the PROG Deleting

PART PROGRAM blocks are function. words deleted

BLOCKS in the EDIT mode

(Before deleting)

Perform the operations the operations of 4.6.2 Checking a. Depress designate Depress Stored Part

below which Displaying Programs:

follow And

the page key and the cursor the word to be deleted. the ERASE key.

key

to

b.

The word designated by the cursor is deleted. After the deletion, the word subsequent to the deleted word is in the designated state. c. Repeat the any number operations of words. of a. and b. to delete

EOB ERASE

1 1

(2)

Deleting Data of following

blocks one block may operations: be deleted by the

a.

Depress the page key to position the cursor block to be deleted. then block

and the cursor to the head of

key the

(After deleting) Fig. 4.49

b.

Depress

EOB

ERASE. designated by the cur-

All data of the sor are deleted.

Note : If the cursor is of the block to be deleted the key are depressed, position to ; code are also deleted, the words ed in the next block.

positioned to the middle and EOB key and ERASE data from the cursor deleted. Since 1; is left undeleted are includ-

(3)

The data from the word where the cursor is located, to the block pointed by the sequence number specified by ~**** can be erased as follows.

a. Enter address .N followed by the destination sequence number, in the program screen.

b. Then,

depress the

MS=

key, and the block

The cursor will be to hi**** are erased. displayed at the head of the block next to the erased block. When N**** is at the end of the program, the cursor will be displayed at the last address of the block immediately before the erased block. If N**** cannot be found, a !INOT FOI.JND1l alarm will appear on the original screen.

182

(4)

Deleting A program

program number

number is deleted by the following

4. 7.1

OUTPUTTING

PART PROGRAM

TO PAPER TAPE

(1)

operations: a. Select the EDIT mode. a. program function. No. of

The part program number is punched operations :

of

the designated program out by the following

b. Display
PROG

the registered function or ALM

Connect the external equipment the tape puncher to the NC via input /output interface. the operation. external equipment

such as the data

C. Depress do Depress number. e. Depress

the PROG

function key. b. Make


relay for

O key and key-in the program the ERASE key.


c.

Power

on the NC. mode. function key.


external equipment is

The keyedin program number and the corresponding part program are deleted.
(5)

d. e.

Select the EDIT Depress

the PROG
if the

Deleting all program


All program numbers following operations:

numbers
are deleted by the

f. Check
ready.

to see

a. Select b. Depress
function c. Keyin

the

EDIT

mode. function key or ALM

g.

Depress

the

RESET

key.

h. Depress
the key. PROG

O key and key in program


the OUT key.

number

i. Depress

O, -9999.

d.

Depress

the

ERASE

key.

All registered program numbers and part programs are deleted. However, only proregistered with gram number O is newly EOB not deleted.

The part program of the keyed-in program number is output to the external equipment. If it is a tape puncher, tape punch is perWhen the output of the part proformed. gram is completed, the tape puncher stops automatically. During the output of data, !! OUT is flashing.
j. To discontinue the punch out operation, depress the RESET key. However, the discontinued operation cannot be resumed. Go back to f. and repeat the operations all over again.

PART PROGRAM AND NC DATA OUTPUT OPERATIONS


4.7 The following data, which are stored in the NC internal memory, may be sent to the external equipment through the data input /output iter face (option) :
. Part program

Note :

When

RESET,

OUT

are

operated

without

keying in the program number, the of the currently displayed program outputted.

part program number is

. Tool offset value . Setting data and parameter


When the external equipment has the tape punch feature, the data may be punched out; when it has the print feature, the data may be For the methods of setting the printed out. input /output equipment (setting #6003) and the baud rate (parameters #6026 through #6029) through this data input /output interface, refer to YASNAC-LX 3 Maintenance Manual.

(2)

Punch

out

of

all part

programs

part programs may be output equipment by the above O-9999 mustbe operations except that keyed in the operation of h. AH part programs stored in the memory are output (punched out, etc. ) consecutively.

AH registered to the external

183

4. 7.1

OUTPUTTING

A PART PROGRAM

TO PAPER

4.7.3 OUTPUTTING
PAPER TAPE

SETTING/PARAMETER

DATA TO

TAPE (Centd) j~~te : The contents of program number are outputted only when #6231D 3 = 1.

00000

Setting/parameter data may the following operations. (1)

be punched

out by

47, 2 OUTPUTTING

TOOL

OFFSETS

TO PAPER TAPE

Connect the external equipment such as the tape puncher to the NC via the data inputl output interface. Make the external equipment operation. Power on the NC . mode. ready for

Tool offsets may be output to paper tape by the following operations:


( 1)

(2)

Connect the external equipment such as the tape puncher to the NC via the data input/ output interface. Make the external equipment operation. Power on the NC. mode. ready for

(3) (4) (5)

Select the EDIT

(2)

{ 3) (4) ( 5) (6)

Depress the PRM function key if the output of both setting data and parameter is de sired. If the output of only setting data is desired, depress the SET function key. Check to see if the external equipment ready. Depress Depress the RESET the OUT key. key . is

Select the EDIT

(6)

~Jepress the OF S function key. (7) Check to see if the external equipment ready. Depress Depress the RESET the OUT key. key. is (8)

(7) (8)

All contents of the offset memory such as tool offsets and tool coordinate data are outputted to the external equipment. If the external equipment is a tape puncher, tape punch out is performed. When the output of the data is completed, the external equipment stops automatically.
(9)

All setting data and parameters are output to the external equipment, If it is a tape puncher, tape punch out operation is performed. When the output oi the data is completed, the external equipment stops automatically.

To discontinue the punch out operation, depress the RESET key. However, the discontinued operation cannot be resued. Go back to (6) and repeat the operations all over again. The format of the punched out tape is the same as that of the tape described
in-4.4.4, (l).

184

(9)

To discontinue the punch out operation, depress the RESET key. However, the discontinued Go back

to (6)

operation and

cannot repeat

be resumed. the operations

all over out tape described

again. The format of the punched is the same as that of the tape in 4.4.5, (1),

a
OUT ( -.

KEY 3 FEET J FEED HOLES ----% H 01 X TOOL OFFSET DATA FEED HOLES P --------- 3 FEET

(SETTING

ANDIOR

PARAMETER

DATA)

O/., O 01234,

G92

XO

Y
OUT

KEY (To PUNCH

OUT ALL PART PROGRAMS) 1 FOOT k SPACE CODE SP PuNCHED 1 FOOT w

Note

3 Feel = 36o characters

3 FEET

3 FEET FEED HOLES

FEED HOLES p-------[ DEPRESS WHICH THE CAN KEY BEGINS WITH O/. AND THE PAPER TAPE PUNCH SIGNIFICANT DATA IMMEDIATELY BEGIN TO PUNCH DEPRESS PUNCH THE CAN KEY STOPS TO PUNCH /.0100 M02, SP 0200 M 30 SP 0500, M 30,

h ----------

I AND THE PAPER TAPE SPROCKET PERFORATION

Fig. 4.50 Data and Program Formats on Paper Tape

185

4.8

SUMMARY

OF STORING AND EDITING OPERATIONS

System I
0p3fation

I I%k
panel

0 i ae: Switch I ~1 + 1 /

Func- ! tion Parameter number RESET ~ IN

Procadure

Stwi ng frm L---

NC operatms )(*2)

keyboard

CU_R~R

Data -, .WR

~ 1 StmimgfrOm tape (*l s,

Matchingwith

tape

( * 1 )

II
panel keyboard ~

I
I

1. ,Stcf!ngfrcm NC oparatws
,? ~ Stcring from @e

J& 5 ~--I EDIT

]
I ~

Matching

with tape I ,/

Stwiw from NC operatms panel keyboard


--

F ~ Stcring

from tape

f EDIT

~----Punch Oti !

~
I I I

I
r

Matching with tape Clear of al} offsets

---T-TL OFF I ~ ~ ~ Program number ~ ~. ~dditim of addr=~ data4! L Repeat of edit opeatico

SWing from NC opefatms panel keybcard

r%tK F+--:
All pert Wcgrams m tape Addition to registewd part prcgram Designated pat Wogrsm
i i P(mch oti

OFF

@@r

E--5999

J!k

-A--,
~ ~ ----

----+-+-All part wogrems

with m

:,s~t=-l---ETpRmRm s--m r
~ numbar O(*4) Ali pert wograms on tape ~. ,~ -. ,.-4,

;RESET , _ ~ -+ Prcgram number . r ,-_ ,_RES~ - ~ ~--

.V_Efl

Mcdify of address data ( * 5 )

OFF

,.y.
Add of address data ( * 5 ) Edit ~ OFF

.-

CURSO~ (Set to address data to bs modified) -. Address ~ _______ data - A1-~lER_; ~. .. .. - CURSOR (Set to address data just before addition) ~ - Address data _ ~R_T,

_..
Delete of one address
data

t -+ii i OFF ,

,, ~
I

L ~UEJ

(Set to

address data to be deleted) + ~R&

Delete of one blcck ( *5)

I ~OFF!
I

~ @~C& (Set to address data at head of bkwk to be ~ deleted) _ ~ - [<.MX

Operation

Edit Lcck

System No. Switch

~ ode

Func tion

I ;

Procedure CURSO~ -

Address

search Specified part program

1
OFF I 1

MEM EDIT

I
ALM

Data of the searched program number

address

Cleal -ems Address r m . n Cleal ,=

OddEDIT p%--~+ ~ ~0-+


i

to be cleared

LERASE ~

9999S data to

ERASE
be

-
~U~S-ORl ..

~RAS~

search Designated part program on tape OFF

MEM EDIT

Addres

searched

~F1 EDIT PROG ALM ~:-., I ?-,


I

+ -

program 9999-

number

to be searched

All part programs


I

OFF
,

Lx!@

Notes.

*1
*2

If the tape contains matched When power

setting information, time. stored from

it is also stored

and

*5

Within the limit of 32 characters,

addition of multiple address

at the same

data and the change to one address data are permitted, a parameter tape, turn the *6 When the cursor following to the address position data in the middle of a

data has been on and off. is punched

block and EOB and ERASE the cursor out at the same time.

keys are depressed, is deleted,

the data

*3 *4

Setting

Storing of a part program having a program number different from ~ogram number O on tape is performed by the same operation as for tape without Wogram number J.

5. MACHINE
5.1 SWITCHING STATION UNITS ON THE CONTROL

CONTROL
(3)

STATION
: To with automatically NC tape. control the NC

TAPE sY5tem

Fig. 5.1 shows a typical layout on the machine control station. fer to the machine tool builders

of switching For details, manual.

units re-

(4)

the block of data through MDI : To enter the DATA keyboard and control the system automatically with the data. control MEM : To automatically with the stored part program. the part program EDT : To store .ory and edit the part progra-m. the system

(5) 5. 1.1 MODE This switch system and DLE, TAPE, (1) SELECT SWITCH (6)

selects operation mode of the NC consists of 6 positions (JOG, HAN MDI, MEM, EDT) . by by

into

mem-

CYCLE

FEED HOLE 7. D= L
!-!

To feed the tool continuously JOG: Feedrate is set manual operation. FEEDRATE OVERRIDE switch.

START

(2)

To feed the tool by opera HANDLE/STEP: ting the manual pulse generatorf. Where the control is not provided with a manual pulse generator, the tool is fed by step manually operating the JOG PUSHBUTTON (S),

la

MDI
MEM EDT

@)
0

HANDLEI STEP

JOG

RAPID

187

5.1, 1 MODE SELECT SWITCH

( Centd )

CYCLE START

FEED HOLD o

MODE

SELECT

SINGLE BLOCK g

OPTIONAL BLOCK SKIP g

133~

DISpLAY

G50

POINT

MANUAL INTERRUPTION POINT RETURN Q OFF

MOI bJIQ MEM @ EOT


G

TAPE HANOLE/ STEPt JOG

OcK@&N(~RN

AuT FUNCTION LOCK

X-AXIS MANUAL ABSOLUTE EOIT LOCK OvERRIOE CANCEL @@l PROGRAM RESTART MIRROR lMAGEt Q@ OFF

AUTO MODE HAN DLE OFF SETt

E% FEEDRATE HANDLEt + MANUAL PULSE MULTIPLY RAPID TRAVERSE RATE OVERRIDE 50 25 o@


G

OFF

OFF

DI

o
0
EMERGENCY STOP RESET o

HANDLE AXISt

x 100 x 10 xl m . x 1000 x 10.000 x 100.000

100 c~

REFERNCE JOG , RAPID \ X2 Oa u REFERENCE RETuRN @ OFF

POIN1

o
0
G

OVERRIDE &JOG FEEDRATE

SPINOLE

SPEED

OVERRIDEt 90 50 @
G

120 0,6

ml

+2

CUTTING OEPTH OVERRIDE FOR G?] AND G72t POINT

POSITION STOREt

ma
z

m o % 200

Fig. 5, 1

5. 1.2 CYCLE START PUSHBUll_ON AND LAMP Depress this pushbutton to start the system in the automatic operation mode (TAPE, MDI and MEM) The CYCLE START indicating lamp lights when automatic operation starts. Depress it again to start the operation after temporary stop by operating FEED HOLD pushbutton or MODE SELECT switch.

When the FEED HOLD pushbutton is depressed during feed operation, the feedrate is de creased immediately and the motion is stopped. Feedhold is not active during threadcutting by G32, G92, or G76 or dwell by G04. Rapid thread pull-up and retracting motion at G 92 and G 76 commands cannot be interrupted. However, when the NC is provided with a THREADING FEED HOLD (option) , the tool feed can be stopped temporarily even during thread cutting by the G 92 or G76 command. If it is depressed while M-, S-, tion without move command is being the FEED HOLD lamp will light, but tions will be executed continuously. tion of the function, the lamp chine operation is stopped. goes or T-funcexecuted, these funcOn compleoff and ma-

5. 1.3 FEED HOLD PUSHBU~ON

AND LAMP

Depress this pushbutton to temporarily stop autoSTART lamp goes matic operation. The CYCLE off and the FEED HOLD lamp remains illuminated during temporary stop .

Depress the CYCLE START pushbutton to restart the operation after temporary stop by operating FEED HOLD pushbutton.

188

5,1.4

EMERGENCY

STOP

PUSHBU~ON

5.1.6

HANDLE AXIS SELECT SWITCH


to select an axis to be operof the switch, see 5.1.5,

Depress this pushbutton to emergency-stop the machine. The servo power is turned off and the machine is stopped immediately by dynamic brake. The RDY indication will disappear NC ALARM lamp lights and alarm code 330 is displayed. To restart the system after take the following procedure. (1) Turn the clockwise emergency stop,

This switch is used ated. For operation Handle Dial t .

5.1.7
This (1)

MANUAL PULSE MULTIPLY SELECT SWITCH +


switch Select sponding HANDLE is the used value to: from Table 6. 1.7.1 correthe

EMERGENCY STOP pushbutton to release the locking.

(2)

Depress the RESET replaces 330.

key . Alarm code 31O


(2)

to a single dial in the

graduation of HANDLE mode.

(3)

Turn on the servo power again by depressing POWER ON pushbutton. NC ALARM LAMP is extinguished and READY lamp lights up.

Select the move 6.2 corresponding JOG pushbutton

amount ( 1 step) from to each depression in the STEP mode.

Table of

The operation is effective in the reverse order of steps (2) and (3) . Use this switch also for turning off the system.
EMERGENCY STOP RESET

5.1.8 HANDLE DIALS FOR SIMULTANEOUS CONTROL OF UP TO TWO AXES+


When a manual pulse generator is connected each axis, the tool can be manually moved selected two axes simultaneously. (1) for along

The tool move distance per graduation of the HANDLE dial for the manual pulse generator is determined by the MANUAL PULSE MULTIPLY switch (Table 6.1) . This switch is effective on all the three axes, Set the mode select switch to HANDLE, turn the HANDLE dials for the desired in the positive or negative direction. and axes

5. I. 5 HANDLE DIAL+ (MANUAL PULSE GENERATOR) The dial used as a manual pulse generator to feed the tool manually with the MODE SELECT HANDLE operation switch set to the HANDLE. is effective for an axis. Procedure of HANDLE operation is as follows:
(1)

(2)

Set the
DLE .

MODE

SELECT

switch

to the

HAN-

(2)

Select AXIS

the axis to be operated select switch.

with

HANDLE

(3)

Set the dial by switch. Rotate

move amount per graduation of the setting MANUAL PULSE MULTIPLY (See Table 6.1. ) the dial to move the selected axis.

. Q
HANDLEt

HANDLE AXISt

MANUAL PULSE MULTIPLY x I 00 x 1(J xl @ .

1000 x 10.000

x 100000

(4)

Turning it clockwise causes the axis to move The axis moves in the in the plus direc~ion. minus direction by turning it counterclock wise.

189

1,

,s HANDLE

DIALS

FOR

SIMULTANEOUS

CONTROL

5.1 .8.1 5.1 .8.2

Handle General

Interpolation

Function

OF UP TO TWO AXES+ ( Centd ) Selection of Move Amount in the HANDLE Mode+


Metric 0.001 mmlgraduation
10

Table

5. I

>1
xl
x 0.01

Inch

When the handle interpolation mode is commanded while executing the program under memory mode, tape mode, or MD I mode, the handle can be turned to the plus direction to control the cutting speed of the GO1, G02, or G03 commands.

0.0001

in.lgraduation

mmfgraduation

0.001

in./graduation

5.1 .8.3 (1)

Operation

x x
x x

100
1000 Icooo Icclooo

Select the handle interpolation mode. The mode can be set by the setting parameter or 1/0 input. Setting #6001 D4: 1 = Enable handIe interpolation mode O = Disable handle interpolation mode
1 = Enable handle

0.1 mmtgraduation

0.01 in.igraduation

Table

5 2 Selection in the STEP

of Move

Amount

Mode
Inch

\\
xl

Metric 0.001 mmjstep -. ----0.01 mmlstep 0.1 mmlstep ..

1/0
0.0001 in.jstep 0.001 in.lstep

signal

#13066:

=-4=----x 10 x 100 0.01 in.istep 0.1 inlstep


1.0 in.lstep

interpolation mode O = Disable handle interpolation mode Depress


ItF!t blinks

x 103O

1.0 mmlstep 10.0 mmlstep

(2)

the cycle start button.


to

10000

------~ x ICOOOO

--

(3)

stop the machine before (or G02, G03) program.

100.0 mmfstep

10.0 in.lstep

executing the GO1


(4)

Z HANDLEt

X HANDLE+

Turn the handle to the plus side, to perform cutting interpolation for as long as the handle The F command is overridden in is turned, proportion to the handle rotation speed. The relation between the handle rotation speed and the override is set in parameter #6349.

mm ~\J For Z-ax,s Far Xax, S

(Example) Jihen the relation between the rotation speed of the handle and the override is 1 rotation/second = 100% , the rate becomes as follows. Parameter #6349 = 100 (pulses/second) 1 rotationlsecond or more 0.5 rotations/second
0.01 Less (5) rotations/second

MANUAL PULSE MULTIPLv x 1O(I x il)oo x 10

xl

4$)
.

x 10000 x 100 00(1

100%
50% 1%

Parameter #6009 D4 can permit setting any multiplication factor when MANUAL PULSE MULTIPLY switch is set at X1OO. Multiplication factor is set by parameter #6223.

than O.001 rotations/second

stop

When 50 is set for #6223, Xl, X1O, Example: x50, can be set.
(6)

The move stops when the nandle is stopped or when turned to the minus side. Turn off the handle interpolation mode the cutting ends. when

Notes :

1.

The move has no disconnection if the handle is turned faster than O.2 rotationlsecond, out the move is disconnected if the handle is turned slower than O.2 rotationlsecond.

190

2,

When the handle interpolation off during handle interpolation, move distance is executed by

mode is turned the remaining the F command.

5.1.10 JOG FEEDRATE SWITCH AND FEEDRATE OVERRIDE SWITCH


In the automatic operation mode (TAPE, MEM,

3.

When there are two handles (2-handle specification) , the 1st handle alone is enabled. Handle cutting. There handle interpolation is disabled during thread

4.

5,

is no need interpolation.

to

select

the

handle

axis

for

MDI) , this switch is used to adjust the feedrate by 10% from O to 200% of the programmed feedrate specified with an F function at whatever position the switch may be set. Feed during tapping by G 32, G92, and G76 follows F command. Where OVERRIDE CANCEL switch is set on, the tool will be moved at the programmed feedrate by F code regardless of switch setting. The JOG FEEDRATE switch is used to select the of Up to 32 steps jog feedrate in the JOG mode. feedrate can be specified. Jog feedrate depends For definite values, refer on the machine tool. See Table to the machine tool builders manual. 5.1.10. The JOG feedrate can be preset by parameters #6233 to 6264.
FEEDRATE

6.

The handle interpolation during automatic mode The override is normally regardless of the setting selection switch.

mode is disregarded handle offset. commanded on the feed

7.

override

8.

During
dry r<n according selection feedrate.

dry run,

the override changes by the Thus, -the override varies speed. to the setting on the feed override switch and the setting of the rapid

5.1.9 This (1)

JOG PUSHBUTTONS AND RAPID Pushbutton


pushbutton is used to feed the tool manually.

With any of pushbuttons +X, -X, +Z, or -Z with RAPID button depressed, the axis can be moved rapidly until the button is released. These pushbuttons speed set by JOG JOG mode. move the FEEDRATE tool at the switch in the

o
& JOG FEEDRATE

OVERRIDE

0
?3

(2)

(3)

Each time the pushbutton is depressed in the STEP mode, the tool is moved by the value per step set by MANUAL PULSE MULMaximum feedrate per TIPLY select switch. step is determined by parameter # 6222.

Notes : 1. JOG pushbuttons ously . work on two


JOG

axes

simultane-

RAPID

2.

Parameter #6009 D 3 can provide JOG command instead of RAPID command until reference point return for each axis is completed after the power is turned on. In the reference point return mode, usual RAPID operation is executed in both negative and positive directions.

191

5.1.10 JOG FEEDRATE SWITCH AND FEEDRATE OVERIRIDE SWITCH ( Centd ) Tab Ie 5.3 Jog Speed and Feedrate Override Feedrate
Override Jcg Feedrate . -. mm\min Parameter No. , 1 0 =6233

5.1.11RAPID TRAVERSE RATE OVERRIDE SWITCH This switch is used to adjust the traverse rate by FO, 25, 50 and 100%. 100% Rate is the rapid traverse rate set by parameter #6280 and #6281. The switch is effective both in automatic operation including G 00 command and in manual operation (RAPID m~de) . FO is set by parameter #6231.
RAPID TRAvERSE ~ATE OVERRIDE

Step

0/0

t 1
2

--1
3 4 5 6 7

. t t + +
I I I

: 60/0

3=
20%
300/o

10/0

fi6234

i __

1 2
_

?6235

g6236

---,7:

40%

+6237

50%

::+&

Parameter #6018 D2 can provide six steps of traverse rates of 1OO%, 50%, 25%, 10%, 5%, and FO.

z i~--100%

5.1.12
:*

FEEDRATE OVERRIDE CANCEL SWITCH


on the prevents FEEDRATE OVERRIDE CANCEL the function of FEED RATE OVERat 100%.
OVERRIDE CAh CEL @

+ 11
12
I

26243

25

Turning switch

+
i

110/0
120/0 130% =+= 140% 62M+...= =6245 x6246 + 40 50 ---

RIDE switch. Feedrate is fixed

t
150/0

D6247
116248 ~--

~
~

60
al -

+
17 18 -+ 19 t
20 + 21 ; I

1601. 170%
1 &lo/o

36249 J;*
~

ICX3 1~ 150

5.1.13

SPINDLE SPEED OVERRIDE SWITCH +

~ t ; ~

x6251

190/0 :~ 200%

22 33

24 $ 25 26 27 28 29 30 31

---200 =6252 -~ -- 250 ?6253 +.-. 36254 300 ;. -...___ 400 z6255 ! ~. . z 6256 500 :6257 600 26258 800 . . .. 1000 12C0 1500 2000 2500 3000 ..

With this switch, the current spindle speed can be changed to an override speed which is set at 10% intervals between 50 and 120% of the current spindle speed.
SPINDLE SPEED

OVERRIDEt

w
50

@
Is

12[1 ,,

Parameter #6018 D1 can provide override function in increments of 10% between 10% and 200%.

0%

:6259 ~6260 16261 26262 z 6263 26264

5.1.14 MANUAL

REFERENCE

POINT

RETURN

SWITCH

This switch is for bringing the tool back to the reference point manually. For its operation method, refer to 6.2.1 Return To Reference Point. Manual

Note: JOG feedrate depends on the machine tool For definite values, refer to the machine tool builders manual.

5.1.15

REFERENCE POINT

LAMPS

These lamps indicate that the tool is positioned They light when the tool on the reference point. is brought to the reference point through the manual or automatic return to reference point ( G28) , or by the reference point return check (G 27) , and goes out as the tool moves away from the reference point by a subsequent operation.

2. With the control provided with the optional block skip B function~, 8 independent blocks can be skipped with the switching of the switches corresponding to /2 through /9.

5.1.18 DRY RUN SWITCH Turning on the DRY RUN switch in the TAPE, MDI or MEM mode causes the tool to move at the speed selected by the JOG FEED RATE switch, ignoring all programmed Ffunctions. F commands can be displayed as they are programmed. This switch may be used to check the program.
Rapid traverse can be set by ( GOO) setting rate for dry run operation parameter # 6006D2.

REFERENCE

POINT

:a Q REFERENCE RETURN POINT

@
oFF

Parameter

Rapid

Traverse

at

5.1.16

SINGLE BLOCK SWITCH

#6006 O

Dz
I

Dry Run Operation


Rapid traverse rate

With this switch turned on, individual block-byblock operation is obtained. A block of data is executed each time the CYCLE START pushbut In the automatic operation ton is activated. mode, the machine stops by turping on this switch after finishing the current block.

Notes : 1. Switching the matic operation current block. becomes DRY RUN switch during autobecomes effective on the Switching it in mm/rev mode effective on the next block. is kept effec-

SINGLE BLOCK

2.

Rapid traverse rate override tive during dry run operation.

5.1,17 OPTIONAL BLOCK SKIP SWITCH


DRY

This

switch

selects a /

whether

the or

data not.

in blocks

RUN

including (1)

is disregarded

OFF

While the switch is on, all the commands in a block programmed after a / are neglected. However, block data appearing before the / remains effective. While this switch is off, blocks including a / are executed along with other blocks. This switch is ineffective on the block under execution and blocks stored in the advance When this switch is turned reading buffer. on during an automatic operation cycle, it works on the block read after the switching on has occured.

5.1.19

DISPLAY LOCKIMACHINE

LOCK SWITCH

(2)

This switch functions to stop updating the position EXTERNAL display, or to stop move command pulses to the servos . Stop the machine to operate the switch.
OFF Usual operation is made at OFF position in both manual and automatic operation. The machine and position EXTERNAL display operate according to the command by CYCLE START operation or manual operation .

OPTIONAL BLOCK SKIP

DISPLAY
OFF

LOCK

Notes :

This position is used to exclude the tool movement value from the display. Universal display is not updated, though the machine moves.

1. The two commands lent.

/ and /1 are equiva-

193

5.1.19

DISPLAY LOCKIMACHINE LOCK

LOCK

SWITCH

( Centd

MACHINE

When the command of the next block is GOO or GO1, the tool moves automatically to the coordinate specified by the program. Then the operation is performed to block of data. according

With the switch at MACHINE LOCK, axis movement including Zero Return is inhibited. The position display is updated. M-, S-, and TThis position is selectfunctions are executed. ed to preset the display or to check the tape data.
OFF

DISPLAY LOCK

/@l
e

MACHINE LOCK

When the command of the next block is G02 or G 03 (circular interpolation) , the interpolation is performed in parallel with program command. The tool automatically returns to the target coordinate when GOO or GO1 is commanded after the interpolation.
REST OF TRAVEL COMMAND ACTUAL MOVEMENT

TAPE COMMAND / TRAVEL TO TARGET

5.1.20

M-FUNCTION LOCK SWITCH FUNCTION LOCK) (AUXILIARY


When the MFUNCTION LOCK switch is on, it ignores the M, S, and T commands. To check the tape data, the operation by the switch is used in combination with MACHINE LOCK function.
M-FUNCTION LOCK

(1)

STOP (FEED HOLD)

Fig. 5.2

Tool Movement ABSOLUTE

with MANUAL

Switch On

(2)

When After

MANUAL the

ABSOLUTE operation

switch

is off

O-FF

automatic

is interrupted

(2)

The following the switch is MOO, MO1, Both its are sent

M codes set on. M30

are

executed

even

if

by manual operation, the coordinate system is shifted. Therefore the tool performs the reset of the travel command and continues OperatiOn in parallel with program command,

a.

M02,

REST OF

ACTJAL /

MOVEMENT

decoded signals and out to the machine. (Internal sent

its

BCD

codes

TRAVEL cOMMAND

TAPE COMMAND

b.

M90 to M109 BCD code

processing out.

M code)

;::&@yfl=RGOICOAMA.D

is not

(3)

Turning on the M-FUNCTION during automatic operation tive on the block after the the current block. This switch does gramming (option) not . affect

LOCK switch becomes effecnext block of

/ TEMPORARY (FEED HOLD)

CIRGJLAR STOP

1.. INTERPOLATION

MANUAL ABSOLUTZ @ oFF

(4)

S 4-digit

pro-

Fig. 5.3 5.1.21 (1) MANUAL When ABSOLUTE SWITCH switch is on.

Tool Movement ABSOLUTE

with MANUAL

Switch Off

MANUAL

ABSOLUTE

5.1.22
When automatic operation is restarted after interrupted by manual operation, the tool performs the rest of the command in the interrupted block from the end point of The tool moves in paralmanual operation. lel with the path specified by the program. When

EDIT LOCK SWITCH


EDIT LOCK cannot switch work, the is ON, If operation following is made,

operations

)! EDIT
(1) (2)

LOCKII blinks,
ERASE, Storing INSERT, of NC tape AND ALTER keys

194

5.1.23

INTERLOCK

INPUT

(INTERLOCK)

5.1.27
This

X-AXIS switch is

MIRROR for

IMAGE

SWITCH on the

+ MIRROR IMAGE

INTERLOCK INPUT is used for stopping the axis Turning movement during automatic operation. on the interlock (closed) during axis movement in automatic operation mode stops the axis with automatic operation activation lamp ( STL ) lightTurning off the interlock resumes the axis ing. motion. The interlock input does not affect the movement by manual operation.

turning

function with respect to the Z axis. When this switch is turned on, the sign of allthe Xcoor dinate command values is reversed. The mirror
image function is effective on all the Xcoordinate values including those by G50. This switch is effective ordv , while the offset function is can celled on Xcoordinate values. .x

YASiVA C LX3

B (ORIGINAL A \,------\

PROGRAMMED

POINT)

c+=--5, 1.24 G 50 POINT RETURN SWITCH + This switch is for returning the tool to the coordinate system setup point (where G50 has been Droerammed) manuallv. For its usage, refer to
~.2.~, G50 Point Return .

>

B (WHEN

S IS IN INCREMENTAL

VALUE)

\ \ \

I I

\\\
\.

MOVEMENT ON AT A

AFTFR SWITCHING MIX

1) w
(WHEN ABSOLUTE

B IS IN VALUE)

OFF

Fig. 5.4

Motion with the Switch

Turned on at Point A

5.1.28

AUTO MODE HANDLE OFFSET SWITCH+

G50
RETURN

OFF

This is a switch for enabling tool motion through the use of manual pulse generator. For the usage, refer to Paragraph, 5.2.7, Auto Mode Handle Offset.
AUTO OFF MODE SETt Q oFF

HANDLE

5, 1.25

MANUAL INTERRUPTION POINT RETURN SWITCH

This switch is for manually returning the tool to where the NC was switched over from the AUTO mode to the MANUAL mode in order to make intervention with manual control. For the usage, refer to 5.2.5, Manual Interruption Point Return .

5.1.29

CUTTING DEPTH FOR G 71 AND G 72

OVERRIDE

SWITCH+

CPRN

Q
OFF

This switch is for effective cutting depth override on the specified depth of cut command D in outside rough turning cycle (G71) and face rough turning cycle (G72) between 10 and 200% at 10% increments. However, to make this switch effective, Parameter #6023D 2 should be set to 1 in advance.

5.1.26
This from refer

PROGRAM RESTART SWITCH +


switch is for restarting the part program any desired sequence No. For the usage, to 5.2.6, Program Restart .

PRS1

OFF

195

5.1.30

POSITION STORE PUSHBU~ON

(2)

FSCE

(#12184)

. . . End

of FS memory

alteration This button switch is for directly inputting measured workpiece values. When this button is pushed, the current tool values (position or external display values) are stored temporarily in the register ,the MEASURED WORKPIECE VALUE DIRECT INPUT mode is turned on, and the LED of the OF S function key flickers. At the same time, the CRT displays the tool offset value diagram. For detailed procedure, refer to 5.2.3, Measured Workpiece Value Direct Inputt . This signal closes when the FSCH closes and the data are reflected in the NC part program, and opens ag~in when the FSCH opens. (3) FSCLRE (#12233) ... End of FS data clear

This signal closes when the FSCLR closes and the stored FS data are cleared, and opens again when the FSCLR opens.

5.1.31.3 Functions Rough FS data can be programmed in the NC part program, to allow optimization of the feed override and spindle override after actual cutting. The optimization data and position in the actual cutting program can be stored in the internal memory of the NC, and reflected in the part program by closing the FS memory alteration input.

5.1.31 FS
5.1 .31.1

AUTOMATIC General

EDITING

FUNCTION

The

effective values of the feedrate and spindle

speed during automatic operation are stored and feed back to the NC part program to create the The feedrate (F code) and optimized program. spindle speed (S code) will hereafter be referred to as FS.

5.1 .31.4 Operation 5.1.31.2 Input/Output


(1) Be

Procedure

ready

for operation. under the

The following 1/0 signals are required for the FS editing.

(2)

Search the operation program memory mode. Close FSCM.

(3)

5.1.31.2.1 (1)
FSCM Close store

Input
(#13134) . . . FS editing mode to prepare memory. to

(4)

Check that FSMD is output, and start the memory operation . Change the feedrate and spindle speed for optimization, Close FSMEM completed. Repeat when the optimization is

this signal for FS the FS and change (#13135) . . . FS

editing, the FS storage automatic feedrate

(5) (6)

(2)

FSMEM

Close this to call up speed data

signal during the operating into the

operation, or spindle

(7) (8) (9)

(5), (6) in sequence.

Hold the operation (label skip) . Close FSCH.


,. .

internal memory

memory. change (10) (11) Open Open FSCH. FSCM.

(3)

FSCH

(#13136)

. . . FS

The execution value stored by FSMEM is stored in the part program. opens.

Close this signal while holding automatic to reflect the data called up during operation, automatic operation in the NC part program.

. . . FSCE . . . The

data stored in (5), (6) is canceled.

(4)

FSCLR

(#13126)

. . . FS

data

clear

Close this signal to clear the stored FS data.

5.1,31.2.2 (1) FSMD

Output (#12183) ... During FS editing mode

This signal indicates that FSCM is closed, and it is ready for FS storage and FS memory editing. When this signal is switched from closed to open , the feeclrateand spindle speed data are canceled.

196

5.1 ,31.5

Timing

Chart

(b)

(After

editing)

FSCM (PC-NC) \N FSMD IN C-PC) / i FSMEM (PC-NC) 11 + 200ms n H Cancel Internal data

or

more

FSCH (PC-NC) A

01000; N1 G28 UO WO; N2 G50 TS1OO; N3 TO1O3; N4 G40 G97 G99 S1500 M08; N5 GOO X43.236 Z1O. M03; N6 Z1. ; N7 GO1 X39.216 Z-6.5 F.12 S1650; -F override 80%, S override 110% N8 X38.864; N9 G03 X18. Z-20,142 R19.85 F.09 -F override 60%, S override 100% N1O GO1 Z-20.5; Nll X12. Z-22.232 F,08 S1200; -F override 50%, S override 80% N12 G40 X1O, F1. ;

S1500;

(NC-PC)

Change

NC

part

program

(2)
FSCLR (PC-NC) FSCLRE (NC-PC) Clear data ,,,, /A

Edit

F and S backward

(#6008 D6 = 1)

The F and S are edited back to the block where the FSMEM closed the last time. (a) (Before editing)
01000; N1 G28 UO WO; N2 G50 TS1OO; N3 TO1O3; N4 G40 G97 G99 S1500 M08; N5 GOO X43.236 Z1O. M03; N6 Z1.; N7 GO1 X39.216 Z-6.5 F. 15;

5.1 .31.6

Example

of

FS

Editing

The following two editing pat ems are available, by switching parameter #6008 D6 . (1) (a) Edit F and S each time (Before editing)
01000; N1 G28 UO WO; N2 G50 TS1OO; N3 TO1O3: N4 G40 G97 G99 S1500 M08; N5 GOO X43.236 Z1O. M03; N6 Z1. ; N7 GO1 X39.216 Z-6.5 F.15; -F override 80%, S override 110% FSMEM closed N8 X38,864; N9 G03 X18. Z-20.142 R19.85; -F override 60%, S override 100% FSMEM closed N1O GO1 Z-20.5; Nll X12. Z-22.232; -F override 50%, S override 80% FSMEM closed N12 G40 X1 O. F1. ;

#6008 D6 = o)

-F override 80%, S override 110% FSMEM closed N8 X38.864; N9 G03 X18. Z-20.142 R19.85; -F override 60%, S override 100% FSMEM closed N1O GO1 Z-20.5; Nll X12. Z-22.232; -F override 50%, S override 80% FSMEM closed N12 G40 X1O. F1. ;

(b)

(After editing)
01000; N1 G28 UO WO; N2 G50 TS100; N3 TO1O3; N4 G40 G97 G99 S1200 M08; -S override 80% is reflected

N5 GOO X43.236 N6 Z1. ;


N7

Z1O. M03;

GO1 X39.216 Z-6.5 F.08; -F override 50% is reflected

N8 X38.864; N9 G03 X18. Z-20.142 R19.85; N1O GO1 Z-20.5; Nll X12. Z-22.232; N12 G40 X1O. F1. ;

197

5.1

31.7

Conditions

of the Specifications

to Perform

11.

FS Editing (1)

Warning occurs if editing is performed with the FSMD closed, after the FS editing is completed.

Conditions for the FS data to be stored in the internal memory 5.2 FSMD is being output is
5. 2.1

(a) (b)

OPERATION
MANUAL

PROCEDURE
TO REFERENCE

It is during automatic operation (STL closed) .

RETURN

POINr

(c)

The execution values of the feedrate and spindle speed are stored at the rise of the FSMEM. All the data stored in (3) are canceled at the fallof the FSCM. The maximum count of storage (count of the FSMEM) is 128 times. Conditions for the FS data to be reflected in the part program FSMD is being output. (Label

With this function, the tool is returned to the reference point manually. The procedure is as follows.
(1) (2) Set

(cl)

the mode
move

select switch to RAPID


the tool to a position

or JOG.
some

(e)

Manually

(2)

distance away from the reference point. When the tool is within the range A shown below, it can be brought back to the reference point in the normal way, as described below.

(a) (b)

Automatic operation is being held. skip. )

(3)

Turn on the REFERENCE switch,

POINT

RETURN

When the FSCH turns open + close under the above conditions, the FS data are inserted in each block, according to the stored data.

(4)

Keep the JOG button for the return direction depressed. The tool starts to move as in the normal manual control, but the speed is decelerated at the deceleration point, and the motion ence point. stops automatically at the refer-

Notes :
1.

When the FSMEM is closed two or more times in a single block, the newer feedrate and spindle speed become effective. The FSMEM count is not counted up. When the FSMEM is closed in the subprogram, the FS data are inserted in the subprogram itself. This needs special attention, as the subprogram may also be called from other programs. The FS editing of the multiple repetitive cycle can be performed in the outer form rough cutting cycle alone. When the FSMEM is closed during constant surface speed control, the F of the closed block is changed but not the S. The cycle start button is disabled while the FSCH is closed.

(5)

Then, the REFERENCE relevant axis lights.

POINT

lamp for the

(6) 2.

After the second reference point return, the operation will be the same as positioning. Parameter #601 O (M ZRNHS) permits the same operation as that when the power was first turned on.

3.

DECELERATION I

POINT

4.

PATIO TRA\; ERSE RATE ADp RGAc H spE~D ::6280 = 626 ]

5.

-i
6.

The F and S data are stored if the FSMEM closed during cutting. The S data are stored if the FSMEM during rapid feed.

is

---APEA A

IJl
i I ARE4 B

ZERO

PO IN

SIGN

7.

is closed

8.

Warning is given if the FSMEM is closed for No more data are stored 128 times or more. by closing the FSMEM. Closing the FSCM during automatic operation does n-etclose the F S MD-. Cycle start cannot be enabled while the FSMEh4 is closed.

9.

10,

198

Notes :

5.2.2

AUTOMATIC COORDINATE SYSTEM SEITING

1,

As long as the power is turned on, either the manual or the automatic return to reference point can be initiated, regardless of the tool position, but the tool will not return to the reference point accurately if the tool is Be sure started from a point in the area B. to bring the tool into the area A before initiating a manual or automatic return mo tion. Once the tool is returned to the reference point, the point C is stored, and if the reference return motion is initiated from a point in as an error. the area B , this is regarded Start the reference return motion from a position in the area A. once the tool is returni?d to the reference point, it can not be further moved in the same direction unless the REFERENCE POINT RETURN switch is turned off. While the reference MACHINE LOCK switch is on, the point return function is ineffective.

With this function, a new coordinate system is set up automatically upon the return of the tool to the reference point by the manual reference point return function. The coordinates of the new origin are preset eters. The coordinate function is equivalent with the following param system set up by this to the ones set up by G 50.

2.

(1)

Parameters

for

metric

system

3.

= (2)
Parameters for inch system

4.

5.

Do not return the tool to the reference point by the manual reference point return function, while the buffer is loaded with blocks read in advance of execution, because the stored motion data will be erased by the reference point return motion. (3) Axis both

Parameter #6630
#6631
X-axis

Meaning cmrdinate coordinate

Z-~is

~.

can be selected metric and inch

by parameter systems.

#6015

for

c . u % m

h
JOG f \

RAPID TRAVERSE

5,2,3 (1)
SPEED SEOUENCE

MEASURED Writing into

WORKPIECE tool

VALUE

DIRECT

INPUT+

POSITIONING

coordinate

memory

REFERENCE

POINT

Xz c2tY u
REFERENCE RETuRN a. POINT

With this function, coordinate data for the respective tools required for setting G50T work coordinate systems can be written into the TOOL COORDINATE MEMORY by The required processes simple processes. are Bring as follows. the tool slide to the START point.

Q OFF

b. Set

the current coordinate displayed values as (O, O). The current coordinate displayed values as meant here are values displayed as POSIon the CRT. To reset TION EXTERNAL these values, push the address key for the desired axes, and then, push the ORG key, while the data are being displayed on the With this keying, the coordinate CRT. values become (O, O) .

199

5.2.3

MEASURED

WORKPIECE

VALUE

DIRECT

INPUT

(Cont$d) c.

In the example shown above, the -x value is temporarily stored in the register , h. Measure
workpiece the outer diamter of and read the value the turned xm.

Push

the OFS

function key.

i.

the desired tool coordinate memory Select No. (one among offset Nos. 51 through 80) . For example, if the tool coordinate memory No. 51 is desired, key-in 5 , 1 and depress the CURSOR ~ keY. Then, proceed to key-in x , measure value (xm) and WR. -- The NC makes the calculation to obtain the tool coordinate data expressed by the following equation, and stores them into the specified tool coordinate memory X-axis. The writing of the required Xaxis data has been completed.

j.

Fig. 5.5 Tool coordinate data

The tool offset values will be displayed as shown above. However, the POSITION values in the lower part of EXTERNAL the CRT will have been changed to O for both axes, by the keying under the operation shown in b. d.
e.

1[
.

Keyed-in measured value

--- Equation A Repeat the same processes on the Z-axis by test turning the end face (surface B) of the workpiece with the tool.

Select the HANDLE/STEP


Select are a tool for which in. tool

.JOG mode. k.
coordinate data

to be

written

f. Start

the spindle, and test-turn piece circumference (surface A) tool in the MANUAL mode. the CURRENT VALUE

the work with that

SURFACE

g. Push

STORE

button

(PST input) on the machine control station first, and then, retract the tool and stop the spindle. --- When the CURRENT VALUE STORE button is pushed, the displayed POSITION values are temporarily stored EXTERNAL in the register, and at the same time, the LED for t-he OFS function key starts to INPUT mode is flicker, and the DIRECT turned on.
TOOL wHEN POSITION CURRENT m 10, 0) Fig.

RP,C-ION

POSITION

-Y

DISPLAY !NDICATES RETRACTION

5.7

[D

TEST CUTTING x nl f -1 z

b-l--+
WORK~lECE

VALUE STORE button L, Push the CURRENT again, and then, retract the tool and stop the spindle. --- The current values at the time of the button pushing are stored again in the reeister temDorarilv.

Fig. 5.6

200

m.

Measure the distance Zm between the desired work coordinate origin to the test cut surface (surface B).
Key-in Z , measured value (Zm), and WR in this sequence. - The NC performs the same calculation as before with respect to Z-axis, and stores the results in the Z-axis of the tool coordinate memory.

3.

n.

When Parameter #6020D2 is O, tool offset memory (offset Nos. 01 through 50) can be When written in the same way as above. II1, u the fOllowing cal parameter #6020D is culation equation is used only for tool offset memory (offset Nos. 01 through 50).

[S:y]

[ Current
stored

value in the

temporarily register )

-x

-(

Keyed-in value

1 --Equation B is rebefore. the CURA the for

Ztn
TOOL SLIOE < - ~;z OCCURED POSITION 91SPLAYED z Zm /- ~ Xm Xtn2 CURRENT o, SPLAy AT (O O) BY POSITION

As

can

be

seen, that

in Equation in Equation are not

B , sign A given and

versed 4. When

from

parameters

used,

RENT VALUE STORE button is pushed, data are always calculated by Equation writing into the TOOL COORDINATE (51 - 81) and the WORK COORDINATE TEM SHIFT MEMORY (00) . 5.

+Z

MEMORY SYS-

wORK

COORDINATE

i
Fig. 5.8

EROpONT t-With the above processes, one tool has been written ordinate memory. 0. all the data into the tool for co (2)

When the CURRENT VALUE STORE button is pushed, the OF S function is automatically turned on, its LED blinks, and the tool offset value is displayed.

Automatic

writing

into

tool

offset

memory

Repeat the processes e. through the tools to write their data into coordinate memory. After writing all the RESET key to cancel mode. tool the

o. the

for all tool

P.

data, push the DIRECT INPUT a.

When Parameter #6020D 2 is set to 1, tool offset values are automatically written into the tool offset memory by the following processes. The tool offset values written in this case are distance between the position of the reference tool and the tool under consideration. Bring the reference +x reference point by tool to any desired manual control.

With the above processes, Xtn and Ztn values for all the tools as shown below are stored in the tool coordinate memory. The reason for this is that the calculations have been performed. Xtn=Xm-(-x)=Xm+x Ztn=Zm-(-z)-Zm+z following

Notes : 1. The above example The method using known dimensions is based on test cutting. a gauge or a workpiece of is also convenient. cutting of contact area, key-in the

=t!z
REFERENCE TOOL REFERENCE POINT +Z

2.

When tool positions for test are on the minus coordinate measured values in negative.

Fig. 5. g b. Reset the current


POSITION displayed to (o, 0)<

coordinate values (the EXTERNAL values

201

5.2.3 MEASURED WORKPIECE VALUE DIRECT INPUT + (Centd)


c, Push the OFS function key. EXTERNAL CRT have

+x

--- The displayed POSITION values in the lower area of been changed to (O, O) .

the

k
Fig, 5.10

r7-

REFERENCE TOOL

d.

Retract tool by replaced Select be

the reference manual control conveniently. a tool in. with which

tool, and to where

bring the it can be

e.

offset

value

should

written

f.

Bring the selected tool manually to the reference point, push the CURRENT VALUE STORE button, and retract the tool. --The pushing ister. current values are temporarily at the stored time of button in the reg-

Wc \ i-J
Push the position, CURRENT and then, VALUE retract STORE button the tool. keying, in place at that Then, make the following ones given in g. above. of the

g.

Select a itool offset No, for writing among 01 through 50) . For example, to write into tool offset I1oz,!! key-in O , 2 , and CURSOR Then, x, Z , go on keying O, and WR WR as follows. . . . (for tion . . . (for tion

(one No, ~ .

El
~,

measured ~ measured

value value

(Xm) (Zm )

, ,

m m

h.

0 , and

X axis calculaand storing ) Z axis calculaand storing )

where Xmt and Zm are distances with signs from the 1st reference point to the 2nd reference point. In the example shown above, these values have minus signs. With the above processes, the distances between the reference tool and a tool having different point direction are stored in the specified tool offset memory.

--Now, the control performs the following calculation separately for X and Z axes, and stores the results to the specified tool off set memory.

5.2.3,1

Tool Setter

Function
coordinate the tactile the tactile memory sensor sensor

[S:gd]

Current

values

temporarily~

stored Keyed-in value

in register

Automatic is enabled and letting by manual

writing into the tool simply by equipping the tool nose touch operation.

-[

This function simplifiesthe preparatory changing the tool.


Writing memory This with into the work coordinate is also done automatically. system

work

when

shift

However, since no value is keyed in the above process, the current values tempo rarily stored in register only are stored as tool offset values . i. By repeating the processes i. through g.

function various

can be used to simplify operation machining methods and workplaces.

with all the tools, their tool offset values can be automatically written. After com pleting the processes, push the RESET key. The values written by the above processes are all differential distances between the reference tool and the actual tools in consideration. For tools with which tool nose directions are different from that of the reference tool, pre pare a 2nd reference point as shown below, and bring the tool to that point manually. Notes :

202

5.2.3,2

Parameters
function, automatic parameters operation.

(3)

Move

the

presetter

down.

When using the tool setter must be set in the NC for Set the distance sensor from the (1) #661[1 #6619 #6620 Setting ,.. .. . ... of each projected

contact of the tactile zero point, with sign.

The tool coordinate memory number corresponding to the currently selected number is automatically selected and displayed. Note that automatic if parameter #6020 (4) Select the tool selec~ion cannot D3 is IO. II measured. be

tool

made

parameters Position where contact point XP + turns on. (diameter value ) Position where contact point XP - turns on (diameter value) Position where contact point ZP + turns on. ZP-! with sign. Set the distance from 11 Position where contact point ZP- turns on. Set O so that this point becomes the of the tactile temporary Z 01 point sensor. mm (metric in. (inch input) input) to be If the tool coordinate memory number is not automatically selected, move the cursor to the desired tool coordinate memory number using the cursor key and page key.

#662;.

,..

Note : When parameter #6020 D3 is 1 and the tool coordinate memory number is automatically selected, manual memory number selection using the cursor key and page key is prohibited. (5) Contact the tool nose on XP+
manual operation.

or

II XP11

by

Itl!!

,: 0.001 0.0001

WORK SYSTEM

COORDINATE SHIFT WORK COORDINATE

MAFGIN . vk~NEzERO

The fesd stops and the buzzer sounds when the tool nose touches the sensor, to automatically write the value operated by the following expression into the tool coordinate IIx!! where the cursor iS Set. memory [Tool #6618 value coordinate or #66191 when the memory value ] = [Parameter - [POSITION (MACHINE) tactile sensor turned ON]

Xp +

-gill
+ zP WORK COORDINATE SETTING SYSTEM xP AMOUNT x 46618 $6620 U6619 1+ 0 PROJECTED ZERO POINT =

The value of the offset memory X1! of coordinate memory number 50 is then O. 1 This occurs only when both D3 and D6 of parameter #6020 are 1.

Note : When the sensor touches the tool nose, axis interlock is applied on the corresponding direction, to prohibit the move.

(6)

t)

(PARAMETER

86621

O)

PROGRAM POINT

ZERO

Contact manual

the tool operation.

nose

on

! ZP+l!

or

I!zp-11 by

Fig.

5.

10A

Tool

setter

As in (4) , the value operated by the following expression is automatically written into the tool coordinate memory 1! Z!J where the cursor is set,
Coordinate

5,2.3.3 Memory

Automatic

Writing

into

the

Tool

The setting amount of the work coordinate system is automatically written into the tool coordinate memcmy, by the following operation, (1) Perform POSITION (MACHINE) (2) Turn It to on manual zero point return.

[Tool #6620 value

coordinate or #66211 when the

memory value ] = [Parameter - [POSITION (MACHINE) tactile sensor turned ON]

The value of the offset memory Zif of coordinate memory number 50 is then !!O. 1! This occurs only when both D3 and D6 of parameter #6020 are 1.!

(ABSOLUTE) , POSITION becomes O. the measurement switches m O,S a lamp, mode to to the blink. ~tch. ~ n function,

(7) (8)

Perform

(4) ,

(5) , and

(6)

on

all

tools to the

used. zero

Return the inmachine point position. Turn The off the

presetter

automatically cause the

(9)

measurement of the ~ n

mode lamp

switch. stops.

blinking

203

5.2.3.4

Automatic

Writing

into

the

Work

Coordinate

(6)

Depress

the PST

switch.

System Shift Memory

The Z-axis work coordinate system shift amount can automatically be written by the following operation. This operation is to be performed after writing into the tool coordinate memory is completed. (1) Turn The on the measurement m ~ lamp blinks, n mode switch. (7) (8) When doing this immediately after writing into the tool coordinate memory, perform the following process, after Par. 4.2. 3.3 (3) to (8).
(2)

The buzzer sounds, and the value operated by the following expression is automatically written in the work coordinate system shift memory Z. [Work coordinate system shift amount t Z ] = -[value of tool coordinate memory Z selected by the cursor] - [Value of POSITION (MACHINE) when PSTr is depressed] Release the tool. Turn
The

off the measurement


~ ~ c1 lamp stops

mode .

switch.

blinking

Check that the offset screen displays the OFFSET (WORK - SHIFT) screen.
Select cutting the tool on the that can workpiece. perform end face

Performing work coordinate system setting B by the above operation sets coordinate system where the end face of the workpiece is the zero point. Shifting the program zero point from the end face of the workpiece can be performed as follows. Rewrite the value of Z in the work coordinate system shift memory, using 11 w. 11 Enter the distance from the program zero point to be shifted to the end face of the workpiece (margin) with sign, following W. The entered numeral is added to the work The sign is coordinate system shift memory. determined by #6018 D6. When #6018 D6 = O Workpiece sign) =1 Workpiece sign)

(3)

When manual cursor selection (parameter #6020 D3 = 01 ) is selected, move the cursor to the tool coordinate memory number corresponding to the selected tool. ~ ~ After setting the cursor, depress the n function key once more. The offset screen will display the OFFSET (WORK - SHIFT) screen.
Note :

The

offset screen changes

in the following cycle,

each time the ~

function key is depressed.

shift + h4argin (W with

OFFSET

(WORK

- SHIFT)
position 00

shift - Margin

(W with

I
OFFSET

Cursor

(WEAR)

The value of the work coordinate system shift Iu 1! in the same x!! is rewritten by memory !!
manner. position SHIFT) position 51 01 When #6018 D6 = O Workpiece sign) =1 Workpiece sign) shift + Margin (U with

I
OFFSET

Cursor

(TOOL Cursor

shift

Margin

(U

with

The

cursor position is as shown

above.

This function cannot be used when the tool setter writing mode is selected in the automatic cursor selection specification.
(4) (5) Chuck the workpiece of to be the machined, a little by

Cut the end face manual operation.

workpiece

WHEN

#601 O DO = 1 I

WHEN x+ $6018

#6010

DO = O

x #6018 D6 REVERSED 1: I , +U

Normally, coordinate Command system

there is no need system offset. as offset follows, is not if to the be

for

the

work

D6 REVERSED

work

coordinate

1
u +U I

, u

I+ u 11

Ut-. +U

performed,

G50

T K _U

00; T LCommand zero

-A-
#6018 D6 O 1 U MARGIN ~-~ w ~ w REvERSED

Offset amounts of Nos. 41 to 50 are used for the work coordinate system offset, but the offset can be made by Nos. 01 to 50.

R&HO DO X-axis

zero

point return

direction

1 : Negative O : Positive

5.2.3.8

Offset Screen

Display

Fig.

5.10

B Example system

of automatic shift memory

writing

into

the

work

The offset screens as shown in Figs. 5. 10C, 5. 10D and 5. 10E are displayed by adding the tool setter function,

coordinate

5.2.3.5

Coordinate

System Setting (G 50 X

.)

Parameter setting can be made to determine whether to add the work coordinate system shift when setting the coordinate system by G50.
When;#6018 D7 = O The work added, D7 = 1 The work not added.

coordinate

system

shift

is

When#6018

coordinate

system

shift

is
588-355

5.2.3.6

Position (EXTERNAL)
(EXTERNAL) manual zero POWer #6005

O Settin9
can point be set return to O after

Fig. 5.10 C 1 st screen memory display

(work

coordinate

system

shift

screen )

The POSITION the first upon :Supplying ;~et


II ] II in

the

parameter

D4 to

used

this by in

The O setting is also performed :functi,~n. commanding M53 for G51 return point setting Always command M53 alone. the program.

5.2.3.7
(1)

Work Coordinate
Command G50 TCICI XX; T T

System

Setting B

588-356

Fig.

5.10 )

D 2nd

screen

(tool

offset

shift

memory

display

Work coordinate number Work coordinate number value is this set in

system

offset

screen

L
The system following by

system

setting

the

coordinate

giving

command.

[Coordinate system setting value] = [POSITION (MACHINE) value] + [Tool coordinate memory value] + [Work coordinate system offset value] [Work coordinate system shift amount] Offset memory number .. ... .. .. ... ..

+
588-357

Fig. 5.10 E 3 rd screen display screen)

(tool

coordinate

system

memory

205

5.2.3.9 5.2.3.10
The

New Tool Setter General

Function

However, this function is effective only when parameter #6020 D3 is 1. When the tool coordinate memory is automatically selected, memory number selection using the cursor or page key is prohibited.
When the tool coordinate memory automatically selected, move the tool coordinate memory number, cursor key and page key. (5) (6) is not cursor to using the

offsets and work coordinate system shifts can also be written automatically into the memory in machines without the tactilesensor, by manual operation. function allows easy preparatory upon tool exchange.
This

operation

the

In this function, the contents of the tool coordinate memory and the work coordinate system shift differ from those of the conventional I!tool setter function with tactilesensor. The contents of the conventional tool coordinate memory are changed from the differentialdistance from the tactilesensor to the selected tool nose, to the differentialdistance from the workpiece end face to the tool nose. The work coordinate system shift amount is changed from the shift from the projected zero point to the shift from the workpiece end face. However, the theory This not changed. setter function. of the function coordinate is called system has the Inew tool

Cut the surface


To stop X-axis, Measure

of

the

workpiece. with the Zaxis.

the spindle, do nothing while releasing only the the above of the diameter setting tool of is the not

(7) (8)

workpiece, on, select the screen of

If the

K
T (9) Then

**

coordinate

memory

the } O,S )1function by manual

El
II ,

operation, diameter

! M workpiece

enter

II ~~ a

to automatically write the tool X by the following

coordinate memory 5,2,3.11 Writing into the Tool Coordinate Memory calculation.
(Tool coordinate

The amount in the tool coordinate memory can be written by the following manual operation, with or without the measuring tool for the in-machine setter. The tool coordinate
memory amount written is the differential distance from end face to the tool nose. on the this

memory

X ) =

diameter) - (Position machine

(Workpiece ! X IIvalue)
once. with the Xaxis.

10)
11)

Cut

the

end

face

of

the

workpiece

occasion, workpiece

To stop Z-axis, Then

the spindle, do nothing while releasing only the

12)

enter

EEmto memory

5.2,3.12 (1)
(2) ( 3)

Writing

Procedure zero point return.

automatically T! z f! by the

write the tool coordinate following calculation. Z ) = -

Perform manual
Mount the

(Tool coordinate memory machine ! Z!f value) ( 13) Perform the above the X and Z axes

(Position

workpiece. (4) through (12) of all the tools. on both

Set 1 in the tool coordinate memory writing mode setting (6001 D6) . This enables the The screen then automatically writing mode. ~ switches to the o~s function OFFSET a (TOOL cause the the SHIFT) B screen ~~ lamp (Fig. to blink 5.1 OF) , to .

( 14)

Set 101 in the tool coordinate memory writing mode setting (#6001 D6) . The writing mode ~,s ~nc;l;d, to end the blinking of the amp ,
0!=s

a Note : writing return The setting mode is not is performed of the tool coordinate memory effective if no zero point after the power is supplied.

(4)

Select

cutting tool.

The tool coordinate memory corresponding to the currently selected tool post number (tool post number entered in #1317) is automatically selected.

206

5,2.3,13

Writing

the Z-axis

Work Coordinate

System

(8)
a.

Shift Amount 5.2.3.14 (1) (2) (3) Writing Procedure zero point return.

Changing the Z-axis work shift amount

coordinate system

Perform manual Mount

the workpiece. coordinate system

When the program zero point needs further shifting (for example, when there is clearance from the workpiece end face), the work coordinate system shift memory of both the X and Z axes can be rewritten by MDI operation. Calculate the shift amount,
depress the

Set 1 in the workpiece shift writing mode setting


(Turn on the conversational

(#6001 D5) . measurement 2 key in compact mode, to enable the writing

K
u

or

K
W

key,

and

mode) . It automatically switches to TOO of the IIoFFSET (WORK - SHIFT) screen of the
~~ B key I B function, ,, lamp to to cause blink the function

input the numeral, to add the entered value to the currently displayed value. The sign for the addition is determined by #6018 D6. When #6018 D6 = O Workpiece sign ) #6018 D6 = 1 Workpiece
sign) The value of the is work coordinate by system shift the

shift + Margin

(W with

When

shift - Margin

(W with

~emory same when

IIx!! manner. #6018

rewritten

u
U Margin

in

When

#6018

D6 = O Workpiece sign) D6 = 1 Workpiece sign) key and

shift

+ Margin

(U

with

shift

(U

with

588 355

Fig. 5.10 F Work (4) (5) Cut the end

coordinate face of the

system the

shift

display once.

screen

b. The

wR

numeral

keys

are

recaps

Do nothing with only the Xaxis. jMeasure Then the

Z-axis,

while

releasing

normally effective. Fine adjustment of the margin can adding or subtracting with the ,!

(6) (7)

margin

of

the

workpiece.

n
w

II keYs, or entering the margin once


m

be u

made or

by

enter

agin

K
the

more > (9)

with

argin

E system shift

.:o automatically memory Z by THe tool :001 post

write the tool coordinate the following calculation. to

(#6C101 D5) (turn off the measurement 2 key in conversational mode) , to cancel the writing mode and to end the blinking of the ~ m
(lo)

Set O in the memory writing

work coordinate mode setting

offset memory corresponds number entered in #1317.

lamp.

(Work coordinate (Margin) - (Tool (Position machine

system shift memory Z ) = coordinate memory Z ) Z value)

Perform manual zero point return after changing the work coordinate system shift memory, to automatically set the work coordinate system. Note that the work coordinate setting by manual zero point return is not performed when parameter #6011 DO = 1. (When the tool coordinate memory number follows the lower order two digits of T**$$, refer to the <Instruction manual for coordinate system setting>.)

207

52.3.14

Writing

Procedure

(Centd )

The operation procedure follows .


(1) Interrupt pushing the the

for this return is as

Note: The work coordinate system shift memory value writing mode setting is invalid if a single zero point return is not performed after power
SU@Y .

automatic emergency

operation stop button.

cycle

by

(2)
Z-AXIS SHIFT WORK SYSTEM AMOUNT Z-AXIS TOOL MEMORY -i 1 I I COORDINATE COORDINATE VALUE

Turn
Retract

on the MANUAL

mode. tool motion

(3)

the tool by the manual

control.
(4) Eliminate the cause of the machining proand make the machine cess interruption, and workpiece ready for operation.

D-

1
l

(5) (6)
X-AXIS TOOL COORDINATE AMOUNT / MEMORY

Turn
Turn

the G50 POINT


on the MANUAL

RETURN
JOG

switch on.

mode.

(7)

Push one or two JOG keys that correspond to the required return motion direction among the four (+X, -X, +Z, Z) . The tool moves at a preset speed towards the G 50 point, and stops at the G 50) point.
Turn off the G50 point RETURN switch.

Fig.

5.1OG

Coordinate

system

(8)

(9) 5. 2.4 G 50 POINT RETURN

With this function, the tool can be brought back to the start point of the program (where coor dinate system was set up) , from any position along the automatic operation tool locus. This is convenient when an automatic machining cycle is interrupted due to tool breakage, etc. and, after replacing the tool, etc ., the automatic machining cycle is to be started from the begin :nin g.

Turn on the AUTO mode, RESET key on the MDI (In the TAPE mode, reset leading end. ) push the automatic

and push the & CRT panel. the tape to the

( 10)

CYCLE START key machinihg cycle.

to restart

the

Notes : 1. When the tool is at the G50 point, control is not effective unless the RETURN switch is turned off. JOG motion G50 POINT

2.

The point where a coordinate system setup process has been executed latest is regarded as the G50 point. Therefore, in the following cases, the tool will not return to the start point of the machining cycle by this function.
a.

The respective tools are set for different coordinate systems.

Fig. 5.11
OF FAULT (EMERGENCY STOP1

b. When the ORG key is pushed after the interruption of the automatic cycles.
c. When a coordinate automatically . system has been set up

208

5.2.5

MANUAL Interruption

pOINTRETLJRN+

Notes : 1 When the tool is at the interruption point, the JOG keys are ineffective, unless the MANUAL INTERRUPTION POINT RETURN switch is turned off. When the RESET key on the MDI & CRT panel is pushed or an external reset input is received after the switching from the AUTO to MANUAL Mode, the MANUAL INTERRUPTION POINT RETURN function becomes ineffective thereafter. When the tool has been manually retracted after a switching from the AUTO to MANUAL mode, then, the switch is returned to AUTO again, and thereafter, the switch is set again to MANUAL for manual tool motion, the point where the mode switch has been switched from AUTO to MANUAL last is regarded as the INTERRUPTION point.

With this function, automatic machining cycles can be interrupted and the tools can be retract ed for workpiece measurement, chip removal, etc. , and then, the tools can be brought back to the interruption point.
RETURN MOTION TO

2,

INTERRuPTION

POINT

L
3.
L, \ ~--

~
AUTO-MANUAL SWITCH

MANUAL P RETRACTION

POINT

The (1)

procedure

for

this

function

is

as follows. cycle by

5. 2.6

PROGRAM RESTART+

Interrupt the automatic machining i~ny of the following methods. Turning Pushing Turn Retract Measure perform on on the the the the the any SINGLE HOLD mode. manual control. BLOCK key

(i) (ii) (2) (3) (4)

switch

FEED

With this function, when automatic machining cycles are interrupted due to tool breakage, chip entanglement, etc. , by the EMERGENCY STOP button, the automatic machining cycles can be restarted, not from the beginning of the program, but (1) or a. from the beginning of the interrupted block.

MANUAL tool by

OPERATION

PROCEDURE cycle by

workpiece, remove chips, other required operations.

Interrupt the automatic machining one of the following two functions. Emergency Resetting stop

When Note: to MANUAL, ]may change. the operation prepared by (5)

the mode is switched from AUTO the spindle conditions, etc. For these details, refer to manual of the machine the machine builder. INTERRUPTION tool

(i) (ii)

Turn on the MANUAL RETURN switch. Turn on the MANUAL

POINT b,

When the machine has been stopped by the emergency stop function, turn on the servo power supply and reset the ALARM code to make further machine motion possible. Turn tool . on the MANUAL mode and retract the

(6) (7)

JOG

mode. c.

l?ush the relevant one or two of the JOG keys (+X, -X, +Z, -Z) . The tool moves ~owards the interruption point at the pre Set speed, and stops upon arrival at the interruption point. Turn off the MANUAL INTERRUPTION I?OINT RETURN switch. Turn the AUTO mode, START key to restart ing cycle. and push the CYCLE the automatic machin-

Replace the broken tool, remove chips, etc. to prepare the machine for further operation. When the may have tool is replaced, to be corrected. the offset values

d. (8)

Move the tool by manual to the start point of the However, with a program

control to return part program. in which G 50T

it

(9)

K H 3 K is used, the tool need not be returned to the start point, and may be left at the position where chip removal, etc. has been made.

209

5. 2.6
e.

PROGRAM RESTART + (Centd) on the AUTOMATIC on the PROGRAM mode. RESTART switch. &

(iii)

Turn Turn

f.

.g.

Push the PROG MDI panel.

function key on the CRT

Display of allthe M codes and the number of M code commands programmed between the leading end of the restart program to the block specified by Q -22 . However, if there are more than 28 M codes , those 28 M codes immediately next Q T] .. L . in to the block specified by the program are displayed. Display of the last programmed T command and the one before preceding the block ,. specified by Q _ _ _ .. Display of the last programmed up to the block specified by S command Q [~--;;
in the last

h . Where the automatic operation is under the control of a tape, set the leading end of the tape to the tape reader.
i.

(iv)

Make the following keying on the CRT panel.

& MDI

(v)

Note : M and
programmed displayed ly before one the

T commands are displayed sequence. Therefore, the is the block one programmed by specified

immediate-

Q cl c [~ ~

Turn

off

the

PROGRAM

RESTART

switch.

The NC starts the preparation from the starting end of the program to the block specifi~d by Q . Up~n ~he completion of the preparation, the CRT display changes to
~:he-PROGRAM RETURN -page function to display the program of the POS restart data.

k.

Command required M, S, and T obtained them from the displayed program restart data as follows. Turn on the MDI mode. key on the the required CRT M,

(i) (ii)

Push the PROG function & MDI panel, and input S and T commands. Push the CYCLE the M, S and T Push the POS

(iii)

START key, commands. key

and

execute

(iv)

function

on the

CRT pro-

&

MDI panel to revert the CRT to the gram restart data display . Check the conditions of the machine

again.

1. m.
Fig. 5.12

Turn

on the

AUTOMATIC

mode

again.

Display of program
(i)

restart data

(ABSOLUTE) position

: Display of current tool

Push the CYCLE START key. The tool moves to the PROGRAM RESTART position displayed in the (INCREMENT) column, by moving at JOG speed first along the X -axis, and then along the Z-axis, and then, re start the machining cycle from the block immediately following the block specified by nmmr 7-QLJLJLI .. .

Supplementary
(ii)

explanation
No. as for the block _ C is used several input the command

(INCREMENT) : Display of the distance from the current tool position to the end -= . point of the block specified by Q L L,[..

sequence Q::_.. to be input by times in the program, In the following form.

If the same

210

Notes : 1. Before letting the tool move to the PROGRAM RESTART position by motion along the X and Z axes in succession, be sure to check the tc,ol for freedom from interference with the workpiece. If there is a possibility of ference with the workpiece,

3.

While the NC is making the preparation for PROGRAM RESTART after the keying of

a tool interfirst, move the 4,

Q,~.3C, CURSOR ~ , do not push the FEED HOLD key, turn the MODE switch, or make other manipulations, If these manipulations are made, make the PROGRAM RESTART data display keying again.
When the tool offset values tool, is, are changed to

tc,ol in the MANUAL mode to a position from where it can move without interference, be fen-e bringing the tool to the PROGRAM RESTART position in the AUTOMATIC MODE.

compensate for GRAM RESTART shifted 5.

the new position

etc. , the PROneedless to say,

accordingly.

If the PROGRAM RESTART switch is on, the CYCLE START key is ineffective. In principle, do not move the machine with the MACHINE LOCK switch turned on, before and after pushing the PROGRAM RESTART switch. If the block SOR ~ is displayed, specified by Q, K K 3 K , CURnot found, alarm code 120 is

6.

7.

8. Fcr the manual tool motion,

turn on the

MAN-

UAL ABSOLUTE switch. If this switch is not turned on, the PROGRAM RESTART position will be shifted by the distance covered by the For the manual motion remanual motion. on the workpiece auired to avoid tool coflision - described above, the following proced~re as is recommended. (i) ( ii) Turn Push tool (iii) Check on the the along the SINGLE BLOCK key switch.
to move

Only those M and T commands which are output to the outside are displayed as PROGRAM RESTART data. Those M commands (M90 - M109) and T commands which are internally processed are not displayed. Although not common with lathe operation, sometimes the power supply is turned off after interrupting the automatic cycle, and is turned on again before restarting the In this case, be sure to automatic cycle. return the tool to the reference point once, before starting the PROGRAM RESTART process. In this case, be sure to start the PROGRAM RESTART process even with those programs in which work coordinate system is used. During the time after the display of the PROGRAM RESTART data till the start of the return motion to the PROGRAM RESTART position, the machine cannot be moved in the If the machine is returned to the MDI mode. reference position, alarm code 124 will be displayed. Blocks finish
Q,[~rTl~,

9,

CYCLE the

START

the

X-axis.

position. key
to move

(iv) Push the CYCLE START tool along the Y-axis. (v)
Check the RESTART tool position position.

the 10.

for

the

PROGRAM

(vi) Turn

off the SINGLE BLOCK push the CYCLE START key the machining cycle.

to

switch, and restart

? . .

If a reset process is executed after the display of the PROGRAM RESTART data by the keying of Q, u rlZ ~ , CURSOR ~ the data is cancelled. When this happens, make the PROGRAM RESTART data display keying ag ain.

11.

in complex canned cycle shapes cannot be specified CURSOR ~ .

programs by

for

12,

When the block in tool nose radius compensation is specified by Q, four digits, and key, the machine cannot be CURSOR moved in the MDI mode after the display of the PROGRAM START data, restart from the block before In this case, making tool radius compensation.

211

5,2. 7 AUTO MODE HANDLE OFFSET With this function, the handwheel for the manual pulse generator can be turned during an automatic operation cycle under the control of a tape,
LMD1 or memory, to superimpose certain feed distances to the programmed feed distances , With workpiece mounting errors , etc . this function, can be compensated. For this function, ations are as follows . the required manual oper-

5.

lne Au Lu kluu~ H4iLvuLk uh kbk,l morlon - along the respective axes can be made in effective by parameter settings .

... --.,

------

., ---------

Parameter Axis No. Setting .

X-axis

~6022 Do
(HOFSX)

1
0

Effective Ineffectivc Effective - Ineffective

-------x6022 D,
(HOFSZ)

I 1

(1)

Turn on the AUTO switch.

MODE

HANDLE

OFFSET
Z-axis

o-

(2)

Select the axis along which motion is desired by the HANDLE AXIS SELECT switch. --- If the control is provided with the SIMULTANEOUS 2 AXES CONTROL MANUAL PULSE GENERATOR , the manual motion can be made along the two axes simultaneously. Select the movement distance per graduation of the handwheel with the MANUAL PULSE MULTIPLY switch. With this switch, the move distance per graduation can be select ed among 1, 10 and 100 pulses. When the handwheel is turned, the tool mo tion along the axis selected in process (2) is superimposed on the programmed feed distance .

(3)

When parameter #6022D7 (HOFSMV) is set to 1, the motion by the AUTO MODE HANDLE OFFSET function is limited to the interpolation motion in automatic operation or temporary stop of interpolation .

(4)

. (o [a
Turning Turning CW: CCW:
HAN DLEt HANDLE x AXISt (0 y

in plus direction in minus direction

MANUAL MULTIPLY ?, I(JL x !111)0 x 10 xl @ x lU 000 Y 10{1Uoo AUTO MODE HANDLE OFF SETt t? oFF

PULSE

Fig. 5 13

Notes 1.

: During traverse, motion during the time the the AUTO tml is moving in rapid MODE HANDLE OFFSET It is effective only motion. MODE HANDLE

is ineffective. interpolation

2.

In the alarm state, the AUTO OFFSET motion is ineffective.

3.

While an interrupt input (STLK) is on, the AUTO MODE HANDLE OFFSET motion is ineffective . The move distance by the HANDLE OFFSET function the display of POSITION POSITION ABSOLUTE. AUTO MODE is superimposed EXTERNAL

4.

on and

6. OPERATION
6.1 INSPECTION BEFORE TURNING ON POWER

PROCEDURE
6.3 MANUAL OPERATION1
on the machine JOG, STEP can be oper-

Make sure that the front and rear doors of the control are firmly closed. The control employs a totally-enclosed, dustproof enclosure to shut out If the door is open, lock it by surrounding air. turning two door locks. In addition, inspect the machme manual. referring to the machine tool builders

When the MODE SELECT switch control station is set to RAPID, or HANDLE position, ated manually. Operation (1) (2) Set in RAPID MODE the machine

Mode switch to RAPID. TRAVERSE

SELECT

6.2
(1)

TURNING ON POWER
Check to see that for the control. Depress the main power is supplied (3)

Select RATE Speed

the speed OVERRIDE setting

using RAPID switch.

range:

100% - 50% -

25% - FO

(2)

the POWER ON pushbutton on the power is operators panel ~ and the control supplied and then the cooling fans will start running. Make sure that air blows out from the exhaust ports of the upper side of the control. Depress turn on machine lights . the POWER ON pushbutton again to the servo power supply. When the is ready to op~rate, READY lamp

Push JOG button to select the axis and direction of movement. The machine moves

at the specified speed while the JOG kept pressed.

button

1 Manual operation is defined as the operation in RAPID, JOG, STEP, or HANDLE. Operations in JOG (1) (2) Set MODE Mode switch to JOG.

(3)

SELECT

(4)

If READY lamp does not light, detect and eliminate the cause according to the alarm Refer to 4. 3.9 DISPLAYcode displayed. ING ALARM CODE.

Adjust the feedrate to the desired setting with JOG FEEDRATE switch (Up to 32 steps) . Push JOG button to select the axis and direcThe machine moves at the tion of movement. specified speed while the JOG button de pressed. Mode
switch amount per MULTIPLY setting range) to STEP. step using switch.

(3)

Operation in STEP

(1) (2)

Set

MODE

SELECT

Select the move MANUAL PULSE (Move Metric: amount

~.ool-o.
100.0

ol-o.l
mm/step

- 1.0-

lo.ol.o-

Inch:

0.0001-

0.001- 0.0110.0 in/step

0.1-

(3)

Depress JOG button to select the axis and direction of movement. The machine moves by the move amount per step each time the button is depressed.

213

6.3

MANUAL OPERATION1 ( Centd )


in HANDLE Mode t dial+ can permit the

Checking When error stroke

Parameter

#6006D 1, D 0

Operation

The control with HANDLE operation described below. (1) (2) (3) Set MODE the SELECT axis with

switch

to HANDLE. AXIS switch.

Select

HANDLE

Select the responding using Metric:

move amount to one scale PULSE

of the machine corof HANDLE dial MULTIPLY switch.

the control is equipped with leadscrew compensation function or the stored limit function, set this parameter to !ll .11 With the parameter #6006Dl, DO set to !11 II a return to the reference point is required before starting cycles, alarm codes ( 001 - 002 reference point return incomplete ) are displayed, if the CYCLE START key is pushed without making a reference point return immediately after turning on the Be sure to perform the manpower supply. ual operation for return to reference point.

MANUAL

0.001(mm per

0,01-

0.1

graduation)

Inch:

0.0001(inch per

0.001 - 0.01
graduation) IIXI()()()O1! is regarded as

6.5 PREPARATIONS OPERATION

FOR AUTOMATIC

Note :

MX1OOOJ! or

X1 OO.
(4) Rotate HANDLE dial

Turning the The machine Turning the The machine tion.

dial clockwise: moves in the

positive

direction.

To start to operate the machine in the automatic mode, the machine must be brought to the start point, after the application of the power supply. The panel operation required for this varies with programs as shown below. For details, refer to the operation manual of the machine tool builder. (1) When G28 RETURN) (AUTOMATIC is used REFERENCE POINT

dial counterclockwise: moves in the negative

direc-

6.4 PREPARATION FOR STORED LEADSCREW ERROR COMPENSATION AND STORED STROKE LIMITt (1)
Return to Reference Point

Where G 28 is written in the beginning of the program, move the tool manually to a point a short distance away from the reference point. If the start point is on the side of the reference point from the traverse speed reducing point, CYCLE EXAMPLE EOR NOO1 NO02 (2) When POINT ; G28 G50 UO X.. WO Z.. ; . ; TO REFERENCE the NC START : causes overtravel key is pushed. when the

With an NC equipped with the stored leadscrew error compensation or the stored either of the following stroke limit functions, two reference point return motions must be performed after switching on the power supply and before starting automatic opera tion. a. b. Manual Execute return G28 to reference UO WO ; point in the (See MDI 5.2.1) mode.

MANUAL function

RETURN is used

This procedure is to teach the reference since doing so is nec point to the control, essary because both leadscrew error com pensation and stored stroke check are performed with reference to the reference point

Where G28 is not programmed, and the coordinate set up point is the reference point, bring the tool manually to the reference point before starting the automatic cycle operation. Refer to 5.2.1, Manual Return to Reference Point. EXAMPLE EOR NOO1 ; G50 X.. . 2.. . ; :

214

(3)

When automatic and ence point functions To set up the

manual return are not used work

to refer

6.6
(1)

OPERATION IN TAPE AND MEMORY MODE


Make sure that NC ALARM lamp is not illuIf illuminated, detect and eliminate minated. the cause by the indication of alarm code. Refer to 4.3.9, AIARM CODE DISPLAY. Check and correct and then put the start point. Set the machine MODE SINGLE RAPID the stored offset values, machine in the correct

programmed

coordinate

system with workpiece as a basis without using the reference point, proceed as follows : a. Select the workpiece. Position (reference reference tool and set the test (2)

the

Z-axis surface)

at the workpiece face by manual operation. display of Z-axis. as Zaxis coordi

(3)

switches on the control to the proper positions. SELECT BLOCK TRAVERSE switch toggle switch

station

of

c,

Reset the current position Then Z-axis is determined nate point.

RATE

OVERRIDE

d.

Position the X-axis at the outer surface the workpiece by manual operation. Then the control executes cutting outer surface if necessary.

of

switch MANUAL OPTIONAL OPTIONAL DRY RUN ABSOLUTE BLOCK STOP toggle toggle SKIP (MO1) switch & JOG FEEDRATE switch switch switch

toggle toggle

e.

Turn on MACHINE LOCK and set the dimensions of the work outer surface as the current position display of the Xaxis. Then the center is determined as X-axis coordinate point. Turn off MACHINE LOCK. (4)

FEEDRATE switch

OVERRIDE

f. g.

Set the punched tape onto the tape In MEM mode, this operation is not Depress RESET key on the Then LSK will be illuminated will be rewound.

reader. required.

Move the tool axis, checking display.

to the setup point for each against the current position

(5)

control station. and the memory

When the operations proceeded correctly, amount for the tool

mentioned above are tool position offset will be zero.

(6)

Depress CYCLE START button Cycle Start to the system. When chine FEED

to

give

(7)

the Feed Hold is required for during the system operation, HOLD button.

the madepress

(8)

If the unexpected event occurs in the system, immediately depress EMERGENCY STOP pushbutton.

215

6.7 MANUAL OPERATION INTERRUPTING MATIC OPERATION


(1)

AUTO-

6.8
(1)

AUTOMATIC
Set Write tion, Refer Depress

OPERATION
SELECT

IN M131MODE
,

MODE

switch to MD I operation

Stop the automatic operation temporarily by depressing FEED HOLD pushbutton or by setting SINGLE BLOCK switch to ON position. Record the current positions of each axis on a paper using the current position dis play operation. Set MODE SELECT switch to manual opera tion mode (HANDLE, JOG or RAPID) , and the machine can be manually operated. Return the machine ed positions. manually to the record-

(2)

up to 10 blocks and execute bv to 4.3.3.1. CYCLE START

of data by MD I opera~ressine CYCLE START button,

(2)

(3)

ma~ic operation can be executed mode.

and auto in MD I

(3)

6.9 MDI OPERATION OPERATION

INTERRUPTING

AUTOMATIC

(4)

(5)

Set MODE SELECT switch to the interrupted automatic-mode (TAPE, MD I or MEM) . Depress machine CYCLE START pushbutton , and the will resume the automatic operation.

To modify the block data after interrupting oP eration in TAPE or MEM mode, the following operation should be done after interrupting the operation.

(1) Turn
(6)

on

SINGLE

BLOCK

switch,

and

the

Notes : 1. Where MODE SELECT out depressing FEED switch is changed withHOLD pushbutton. (2)

operation is interrupted after the completion of the block being executed. At the same time, the next blocks of data may be read in advance, Display the data on CRT DISPLAY ing to 4. 3.3 WRITING IN BLOCKS DISPLAYING CONTENTS BY MDI it, accord AND and check

a. When MEM) DLE, slows

the automatic-mode (TAPE, MDI or is changed to the manual-mode (HANJOG or RAPID) , the machine rapidly down and stops . the

(3)

b . When the automatic-modes are changed machine is stopped at the block end. 2.

Write the data referring to 4.3.3.1 Multiblock Writing and Operation in MDI Mode. the CYCLE Execute the data by depressing START button. Set back MODE rupted automatic Return tion. SINGLE SELECT switch to the intermode (TAPE or MEM) . BLOCK switch to OFF posi-

Where the machine is restarted by depressing CYCLE START button , the tool path shifted due to manual operation willbe changed by ON-OFF operation of MANUAL ABSOLUTE switch. Refer to 6.1.21 MANUAL ABSOLUTE In manual operation mode, when SWITCH. the CYCLE START button is depressed after writing F, M, S, T or B+ code by use of the same procedure as that of ,MDI operation, the command becomes effective and is executed as soon as written. T his procedure is used to add new data to an active buffer , How ever, MOO, MO1, M02, M30 and M90 to M99 cannot be written.

(4)

(5)

(6)

Depress CYCLE or MEM operation

START button, and can be continued,

TAPE

Notes : 1. Writing data by MDI cannot be tool radius compensation modes because 2. two-three blocks are executed in ( G41 - G44) read ahead.

Writing data by MDI cannot be performed in canned cycle modes (G70 - G76) . The ma chine may not operate properly. Excepting in tool radius compensation and canned cycle modes, MDI opeation is possible.

3.

216

6.10
(1)

PREPARATION FOR TURNING


Make sure and CYCLE that the START machine lamp is

OFF POWER

is at standby extinguished.

(2)

Check to see that NC If alarm ed on CRT. the causes of displayed Refer eliminate them. DISPLAY. Inspect the tool builders

ALARM is not indicatis displayed, detect alarm code and to 4.3.9, ALARM CODE

(3)

machine referring manual.

to the

machine

6.11 TURNING
(1) Depress turn off

OFF POWER
EMERGENCY STOP pushbutton the servo power supply. to

(2)

Depress POWER OFF pushbutton on the operators panel to turn off the control power supply . Cut trol. off the main power supply from the con-

(3)

217

6.11 TURNING

OFF POWER

(Centd )

. Check of closing of NC PREPARATION ~....... . Inspection machine of

door

q ,<, .,

SETTING OF S\+I T CHES ON MACHINE CONTROL STATION

1.
! : ;loNDGEL~EBL;;~K I tc
on

r
F
I

$-

Check

of READY

lamp

on

Q-RESET . s . . RAPID JOG STEP HANDLE


~ CYCLE

CHECK OF 7 MANUAL OPERATIOS

START

on

+-----,
. lvlanual

FEED HOLD or SINGLE BLOCK

on

RETURN

TO
CE J

REFEREii

operation or G28

f-

Leadscrew compensation ~ stored, stroke limit ON /OFF

- - .

PREPARATION -FOR AUTOL4AT- IC OPERATION

i
I

Positioning to starting position

L
;<, +-

SINGLE

BLOCK

on

INTERVENTION MDI

.
J

OF

NC

tape setting

1
STORING AND ] EDITING NC ! TAPE, PROGRAMI !NO. SEARCH i

CYCLE

START

on

+-

Check

if NC

ALARM

is indicated.

I TION OFFSET

REk

~
~

FOR POWER SUPPLY OFF

.
and
.

:p::E~TART

off

Nc alarm Off

t
POWER OFF SUPPLY
_l

. EIvIERGENCY STOP
then

on

POWER

OFF on

Fig. 6.1

Operating

Procedure

218

APPENDIX 1 LIST OF SETTING

NUMBERS

Parameter following

numbers are four groups.

classified

in

the

Parameter

numbers

I Parameter Parameter

Group (Setting by (Setting by bit) bite)

=L4v!=ELoN I
Toggle switch on mschi ne

#6005 to #6029 #6056 to


#6134

I
1

OFF

OFF

ON

I
1

ON

:a=m

#6220 to #6344
#6600 to #6643

Parameter

(Setting by word) #&301 ~

I _

Parameter (Setting by double word)


Respective value of Leadscrew

D7

D6 ~
. ___L

#8000 to #8255

Error Compensation (Setting by bite)

BUZON
1:

D7 on touch panel) . off touch : D6 buzzer buzzer. (key switch on oper-

D7

De

D5

~ Da

D3

D>

, D, 1

~ m O:

Turns ators Turns

INHEDTT 1: Turns Turns

D7 on Edit off Edit D6 Lock Lock function. function

PSTMD1

1:
.

o:
AFLT 1:

o:

With PST1 mode is designation No PST1 mode is designation : D5

PSTMD2 Function Function Lock . Lock. 1:

o:
ABST 1:

Turns Turns

on Auxiliary off Auxiliary D5

o:

With PST2 mode designation No PST2 mode is designation : D4 handle handle interpolation interpolation function. function.

HINTPM Absolute Absolute function. function. 1:

o:
DRNT
1:

Turns Turns

on Manual off Manual D4

o:

Enable Disable D3

CMCHK: 1: Run Run function. function.

o:
BDTT

Turns Turns

on Dry off Dry D3

o:
SLT

Enable Disable 3: D2

CMOS CMOS

spare spare

area area

check check

function. function.

1:

o:
DLKT 1:

Turns Turns

on off

Block Block

Delete Delete

function function.

1:

o:

Effective Ineffective

on

the third Stored Stroke Limit. on the third Stored Stroke Limit. by G38

D2 Turns Turns on Display off Display D1 Turns Turns on Machine off Machine Do Turns Turns on Single off Single Block Block function function. . Lock Lock function. function Lock Lock function. function.

The value of limit automatically changes or G39 command in part program. SLT 1: 2: D1

o:
MLKT 1:

o:
.

Effective Ineffective

on the second Stored Stroke Limit, on the second Stored Stroke Limit. by G36

o:
SBKT 1:

The value of limit automatically changes or G37 command in part program. INCHMM 1: Do inch input increment. metric input increment.

o:

o:

Selects Selects

Notes: 1. settings These switches. When each are for setting internal toggle

2.

switch

control station, tings and toggle function on /off

is provided the logical switch state.

with machine sum of these setdetermines

setting

A1

APPENDIX 1 LIST OF SEITING ,.


I D, L

NUMBERS

(Centd)
COV21 Covll 0 1 . .. 0 Cut Depth Override

06

D5

D1 ._

-l
code. code.

COV 16 I

COV 8 I ~ COV41

ISOEIA

D7 out tape out tape code code with with 1S0 EIA

0100 ~o o o

.----0,0 o *O

0 0

1 00%

1 o%

I
~

1: Punches
0: Punches D6

1
I o

20% 30% 40% 50%

TVCHK 1:

0
0

0 -...
Oit

1
00

o:

Executes TV check. Does not execute TV

01 + L..
L.

check.

u0101

-
...

l~o
Ill
4

.2

6010 70% 80%

UM09000E 1:

D5 on the edit interlock on the edit interlock in 09000!s. in 09000s.

o:

Effective Ineffective D4

--+

900/o o 1Oo% 11o% 120/0 13010

01 0 +

0 0
1

UMO18000E 1:

t
L

.-L.
- -~
1;1
0!0

Oil

--

o:

Effective Ineffective

on

the edit interlock on the edit interlock


r.l

in

08000s in 08000s.

011101
o

140%

.
~eoo3

150%
[-D, DO -L-..

.-...

D5

Dd

1600/0 170/0

1>5, D4 ODvCE ODVCD 1 Selects RS232C O 1/0 interface. interface for output port.
1

1800/0

1 +interface for input


Note: (COVP)

o~o_J11 -.
Oil is O.

0--

190% . 200%
Dz

Dl, D() IDVCE 1 Selects IDVCE 0: port.


Setting Code

RS232C

These settings are effective

when parameter *6023

Input/Output Port

Parameter requiring Rate Setting # 6026 #6028 # 6027 # 6029


I

No. Baud

UM08000 1:

D2
opera8000 to opera

I
~

RS232C No. 1 RS 232 C No.1

0:

Inhibits editing and display and punchout tions of the part program of program NO. 8999. Permits editing and display and punchout tions. D1

0,

UMSBK 1:

:{04 icEE&-DmEE
COV161(D7), COV11(D3) COV81(D6), : of cut depth for Stock Removal and Stock Removal in Facing COV41(D5)> COV21(D4), Sets the override in Turning (G71) (G72) cycles.

O:

Makes Single Block Stop effective for the programs in user macro when single block input is on. Does not permit Single Block Stop for the user macro blocks commanding operation and control. Do the next not given of block block when the skip before completion of including Skip Function

SKIPIN 1:

Executes signal is movement

(G31) or if the touch switch does not trip beyond the limit position in the direction of motion for tool set error compensation (G35).

o:

Alarm

087

is

displayed.

:6161

I
L I

TG 1 LF
1

I
!

~6181

I L

TG 1 CNT

TG 2 LF

.-J
TG 3 LF J #6164

I +6182 . A \

TG 2 CNT

I
I
I I

TG 4 LF #6199 TG 5 LF I

TG18CNT

#6165

L-----TG19CNT: used and

TG 19 CNT

I
are in1 to 19. setting.

TG 6 LF

TGICNT I No.

to

of times

operating

times

/J6167

TG 7 LF

dicated

individually Writing is not

for tools in groups permitted in this

Note:
P6166 I TG 8 LF Ez G71OFL: : tools in groups Setting Setting life control)

-.

1
z6169

TG9LF

E_-

G71 OFL

TGILF

to TG9LF

Sets retraction cutting cycle range: : Least

in

value after completion of each Stock Removal in Turning (G71) O - 65536 input increment

Individual 1 to 9 is Setting Setting:

life expectancy for set by part program. range: l O = 1 9999 (Tool

#6203 r
TG 10 LF

G 72 OFL

G720FL

: value after completion of in Stock Removal in Facing : 0 - 65536 input increment each (G72)

r-;=LF
I
I
TG12LF TG13LF

d
I

Sets retraction cutting cycle Setting Setting range : Least

TG 14LF

EEIEl
I 1
G740FL : value (6)

G 74 OFL

TG15LF

I
7

Sets retraction Z-axis (G74) . Setting Setting: range: Least

in Peck

Drilling

in

TG16LF

O - 65536 input increment

TG 17 LF

I
I I
TG1OLF Individual 10 to Setting Setting to TG19LF life :

TG 18 LF

I
I
I

b6205 r G750FL:

G 75 OFL

TG19LF

Sets (G75)

retraction . range: Least

value

(6)

n Grooving

in Xaxis

expectancy by part

for program. ( Tool

tools

in

groups

Setting Setting:

O - 65536 input increment

19 is set

O - 9999 range: 1 = 1 minute

life

control)

A3

APPENDIX 1 LIST OF SETTING ,... -


I

NUMBERS r

(Centd)
_ ._ XSL 2 M

;
~ G 76 OFL v6502

~6206

i -
G763FL Sets; cut :

J16503 1- ---J (in X-axis) (G76) , O - 65536 input increment a in Automatic

~-

ZSL 2 M

depth lhreadcutting Setting Setting range: : Least

XSL2M, ZSL2M: Sets the boundary area in minus direction Stored Stroke Limit second prohibit area axis and Zaxis, range: Least respectively. o to f99999999 output increment

of on

X-

Setting Setting: :6207


TINON

When the tape without program no. program no. is set for the tape.

is

stored,

36504

i ~ :

I [___ ,--1 .zSL3 P ZSL 3 P

26505 $6219 ~r LO, 1, or 4 of SNSW XSL3P, system No. switch ZSL3P:

Setting:

o:

SYSTEM operation. Writing parameters is

Sets the boundary area in positive Stored Stroke Limit third prohibit and Zaxis, respectively. Setting Setting: range: Least O to *99999999 output increment

direction area on

of

Xaxis

For usual pre\,ented. !!lll:

~
PARAMETER this position, the
;6507 1 XSL3M, L_ ZSL3M: ____ _-

?6506
T

IL

XSL3M :::-v_ ::___ ZSL 3 M --:_

At To write parameters. Cyc.e Start is prevented. 4 : TEST (0)

, --:

The usual operation is similar to case of SYSTEM . Self-diagnostics of the memory contents and checking of reference zero return point are omitted. Notes 1. :

Sets the boundary Stored Stroke Limit and Zaxis,

area third

in minus prohibit

direction area on

of X-axis

respectively. O to *99999999 output increment

Setting Setting:

range: Least

Setting the values other than described cannot permit the correct operation. Setting can be effective number switch provided the unit is set at 11O. 1

above

2.

only when the system on the upper part of

, . ,
x6512 x651 1

:6501

ZSL 2 P s6513

XSL2P,

ZSL2P: direction area on of X-

:6514

Sets the boundary area n positive Stored Stroke Limit secor d prohibit axis and Zaxis, respectively. Setting Setting range: : Least

=6515

O to ?99999999 output increment

s6516

T 3 XSLP

A--4

~6517

$6543 I %544

I I
-1

T 9 ZSLM ___ .- T 10 XSLP . .

-. L.... -

S6518

$6545

I
.,

L [

___ .._

T 10 ZSLP

~6546

TIOXSLM

T 10 ZSLM

r1 i6548
$3549 I
-1 1

;~ I _________ xsLp_ T 1lZSLP [ T 11XSLM 1 ___ T 11ZSLM L:: - T 12 XSLP ~=z__ T12ZSLP --; ---.__.

#6550

I
._l

~6553

T6554 ~ $6555
L ] -L~.. L ~ I T 13 ZSLP .__ ___ ._. .= ___ T 12 ZSLM ______ T 13 XSLP _-! I T 12 XSLM

L I

-d -

~6556

I , ~ !_ !.

T 13 XSLM __ ~ T 13 ZSLM

T 14 XSLP L.
T

-1

14 ZSLP

T 14 XSLM

T 14 ZSLM

,
1

8 XSLM

..~ .,

T8 ZSLM

I
L --

T9

XSLP

T 9 ZSLP
.,

T9 XSLM

A5

APPENDIX 1 LIST OF SEITING

NUMBERS

(Centd)

Sets the reference Setting Setting

distance point. range:

of

Stores

Stroke

Limit

from

O to output

i99999999 increment TOFNO1 to TOFN50: value

Least

[E??] ..-.-
IndlCateS signal is X-axis detected. coordinate

XSKIP

Part program sets tool number using offset of offset memory numbers 01 to 50 orderly. Setting range: O to (Tool life control) 50

value

when

the

skip

a8701

. .1
~. ~..
1. __ ----

TOFO 01 ___
EE02__ \ ____ __

J8702 T ~

Indicates signal is

Z-axis detected.

coordinate

value

when

the

skip

$8749 l
I

L-

---

__.

~F~4g TOF050

__-

TGPNO1 .n~ ;

TGPN 02

TOFOO1

to

TOF050:

Part program sets the order of using offset values in offset memories 01 to 50, l sequentially. Setting range : 0 to 5

I
TGPNO1 to IGPN50:

TGPN 50

( TOOI life

control)

Part program determines including tools (number Setting range: O to (Tool life control) 20

the number 01 to 50) .

of

groups

APPENDIX 2 LIST OF PARAMETER NUMBERS


Setting numbers four groups. are classified in the following Setting of S4-digit (analog output) output.

Setting #6000 #6161 #6500 #8601 to to to to

numbers #6004 #6219 #6569 #8750 Setting Setting Setting Setting

Group by by by of bit word double tool life words control

%.1>
o
1 1 1 0

I
I

Plus Minus Plus Minus

Plus Minus Minus

Ill
D5

Plus

10IN 1: Sets Sets

:7
1: o:

<mo5 J

.mD~:-~
D7 special G code I as G code*. standard G code as G code. D6 G code G code of of 01 group 01 group as GO1 when

o:

ten the

times least

the least input input increment.

increment.

SAGRCH GCDSP Uses Uses 1:

D4 if the spindle speed is off upon transition block to a cutting on the spindle match from feed block. speed match

Checks to see signal ( SAGR) a rapid traverse

RSTGO1 1: o:

o:

Provides no check signal (,sAGR). D3

Determines resetting. Determines resetting. D5

XRAD as GOO when 1: o:

Radius designation. Diameter designation. D2 Dry Run command. dry Run commana. D1 in in response response to to the the rapid rapid

POSEXT 1: O:

RPDDRN by setting by 1: Enables traverse Disables traverse

Presets position external display coordinate system. Does not preset position external setting coordinate system.

display

o:

EXTSET 1: o:

D4

ZZRNILK

Resets the value at POSITION EXTERNAL display to O. 1 Does not reset the value at POSITION EXTERNAL display to O. Dl

1: Causes

o:

an alarm ( 002) upon Cycle Start when Reference Point Return on Zaxis is not made manually after power is applied. Causes no alarm. DO

XZRNILK PONG04 1: o: 1: Sets the power is Sets the power is DI) in the in the 03 group 03 Erouw to G91 when to G90 when G code applied. G code applied. in in the the 05 group 05 group to G99 when to G98 when o:

Causes an alarm ( 001) upon Cycle Start when Reference Point Return on X-axis is not made manually after power is applied. Causes no alarm. Set II111when Stored Lead Screw Error

Note : PONG03 1: o:

Sets the G code power is applied. Sets the G code power is applied.

Compensation or Stored provided, set ZZRNILK at 1.

Stroke Limit is at 1, XZRNILK

* Where the control is provided determination code II option, changed as follows. 1:

with special G of setting is

ED TSTLK

D7

1: Does

o:
$W06

Uses Uses

special G code E. standard G code.

O:

not cause an alarm upon Cycle Start without reset operation after part program edit operation. Causes an alarm 005. D6 Effective on Cycle Start when signal l changes to O. Effective on Cycle Start when changes to 1. 11011 signal cycle cycle start start

Lq-

m
D7 , D6

STUD 1:

SD ASGN2,

SD ASGN1:

o:

A7

APPENDIX 2 LIST OF PARAMETER


HSPDM
1:

NUMBERS
D3

(Centd)

M30RWD2 M function. M function.

o:

Enable highspeed Disable high-speed

1. ..

RWDOUT
:1:

D4

o:

operates Rewinding: YASNAC tape reader second RS232C. No rewinding . D2

with M30 if the stand arcl is connected to the

0:

Provides Rewinding Activate Signal when NC program is rewound by RESET & REWIND signal. Provides no Rewinding Activate Signal when NC program is rewound by RESET & REWIND signal.

M30RWDl 1:

o:

operates Rewinding: Y.ASNAC tape reader RS232C. NO rewinding. D1 not


ciear

with M30 if is connected

the standarcl to the first

OUTPUT
1: Sets

D3
CVSAVE the least output increment increment at O. 0001 inch

o:

Sets the least output D2

at O. 001 mm.

~:
0:

Does

user

macro

command

variable #100

SC:R.SOV
1: o:

Makes the Spindle tapping. Does not make the during tapping. D]

override Spindle

100% during override 100%

#100 thru #149 by reset. Clears user macro common variables thru #140 by reset operation . D()

ZRNOFS

~:

Cancels reference

the commanded block when the second point by G 30 is commanded during Offset blocks or Tool iNose the Radius Com

SLT31O 1: O:

Establishes the prohibited area of the Stroke Limit 3 outside the boundary. Establishes the prohibited area of the Stroke Limit 3 inside the boundary. Do

Stored Stored

0:

TOO1 Position pensation. <Cancels the block .

following

commanded

SLr 210
1:

O:

Establishes the prohibited area of the Stroke Limit 2 outside the boundary. Establishes the prohibited area of the Stroke Limit 2 inside the boundary.

Stored ZMOVILK Stored D7 if move command returning without manually or auto-

1:

After turning on power,


except ~-axis by G2S is executed to reference point

o:
OF SOCLR: 1: o: D7 OFSOO X, Z by X, Z by O-9999 O-9999 ORG. ORG.

matically, alarm 001 will be caused. iloes not cause alarm in the same condition shown above. D6

Do not clear Clear OFSOO

YQ.JOVILD 1:

FSA40DCH: 1: o:

D6 FS editing. FS editing.

Edit FS backward upon Edit FS each time upon


D5

o:

After turning on power, if move command except by G28 is ~xecuted without returning X-axis to reference point manually or automatically, alarm 001 will be caused. Does not cause alarm .

PONM97 1: o:

OTALILK M97 command (calculation of intersection) selected at power-on. M96 command (circular arc) is selected power-on. is at

D5

1: Does not cause an alarm at overtravel. o: Causes an alarm at overtravel.


HPMUL 1: o: D4

FEEDCUT:
1:

D4

0:

With feed when upon tape output from the NC. Without feed when upon tape output from the NC.

Sets the value set by #6223 when MANUAL PULSE MULTIPLY switch is set at x1OO. Regards multiplication factor as x 100 when MANUAL PULSE MULTIPLY switch is set at x1OO.

A--8

ZRNRPD 1:

D3

[
I F6011
L-~~

I I

. I

.T-..
ID61D,
j .L

D4

D,

D,--] D:~
1.. .1

o:

Provides JOG command instead of RAPID command until reference point return for each axis is completed after the power is In the reference point return turned on. mode, usual RAPID operation is executed in both negative and positive directions. Provides usual RAPID TRAVERSE rate. D2 multiple multiple D1 cut margin when (multiple repetitive there is cycle) offset offset function. function.

S4SF: 1: o:

D6 Output the SF signal is given. Does not output the command is given, D5 in in system system variable variable when SF S4digit when command S4-digit

signal

FKGHOS: 1: o: Enable Disable

NSRCHG: 1: o:

G711KUW: 1:

Look-ahead is enabled #looo to #3001. Look-ahead is disabled #looo to #3001. D4 3rd stored function. 3rd stored function.

U, W are the rough no K in G71 to G73 rough cutting.

SLT3S: 1: o:

o:

U, W are not the rough cut margin when there is no K in G71 to G73 (multiple repetitive cycle) rough cutting.

Enable setting Disable setting D3

stroke stroke

limit limit

Z-axis Z-axis

barrier barrier

PSOPH: D, .:!Q TLCNT: 1: o: DJ6::-:=. D7 --- ~ DO 1: o:

Enable Disable

tool setter tool setter D2

high-speed high-speed

signal signal

function. function,

NOTGCAN: ~: o:

Control the number in all tool groups in tool life management. Does not control the number in all tool groups in tool life management. D6

Enable automatic nose R function and cancel tool coordinate system setting function. Disable automatic nose R function and tool coordinate system setting function cancellation D1 G42 cycle. G42 cycle.

TLERR: 1: o:

G71LVL: ~: o:

Alarm occurs when the life of a single tool has expired in tool life management. Alarm does not occur when the life of a single tool has expired in tool life management. D5 the first reference point return

Enable T code command and G41, commands in the multiple repetitive Disable T code command and G41, commands in the multiple repetitive DO

AZRNHS 1:

TCOMEM: 1: o:

Executes

(deceleration limit switch) and the subsequent automatic reference point returns in the same way when power is applied. o: Executes (position D4 return and point re is applied. return. high-speed at reference reference point). point return

The tool coordinate memory numbers are lower 2 digits of the T**$$ command. The tool coordinate memory numbers are higher 2 digits of the T**$$ command. ._r.
~ D, ~_ .,__ 6 IDS .._ bti

the the

.
I

#6014 .

MZRNHS 1:

Executes the first reference point the subsequent automatic reference turns in the same way when power Executes highspeed Dl~ reference DO

PCMEM:

D7 unit malfunction. ( Maintenance

Stores PC parameter)

o:

point

ZRNDRZ, Specify tion on 1: o:

ZRNDRX

SVMEM Compensa-

D6

the start direction Qf Backlash Z- , and Xaxis, respectively.

Stores Servo parameter)

unit

malfunction

(Lfaintenance

Minus direction Plus direction

ACGCMEM: 1:

D5

Stores the operation error of ACGC120.

A9

APPENDIX 2 LIST OF PARAMETER

NUMBERS ~

(Co~fd) . . .
D2, DID0

,6,15; ~r
_ . . . . .
Dl, AT SUPZ, ATSUPX

~
DO

~~
-L..

I). ,
1:

:6018 G50WST

jD7D6D5DdD3 ,. __ __

Specify whether System Setting respectively. ].: 0: Effective Ineffective

or not the is effective

Automatic on the Z-

Coordinate and X-axis,

o:

Does not add workpiece shift value at G50 coordinate system setting or resetting by ORG key. Adds workpiece shift value at G50 coordinate system setting or resetting by ORG key.

WSSGN 1:
is

Note : The Automatic Coordinate System established with the following parameters: Inch system: Metric system: #6631, #6637, #6630 #6636

o:

Reverses U and W input code for work coordinate system shift value. Does not reverse U and W input code for work coordinate system shift value.

OFSCYC 1:

.
Z 6016 D711 ,. . I
D2 D,

~
I L.

o:

-.

Displays cyclicallyby pressing offset function. Does not display cyclicallyby pressing offset function.

DPR.lNT: 1:

D7
the higher O in the

G32ALM 1: o: Activates alarm due to too short cutting time of 1 block for continuous ihreadcutting. Executes without waiting for cycle start if cutting time is too short for continuous threadcutiing.

Output the leading O also when are order digits of the variable DPRINT function.
nothing variable D2 check. check,

0:

Output of the

when the higher order digits are 0 in the DPRINT function .

MAX UW
NO SEFF: 1:

1: o:

o:

Disable interference Enable interference D1

Warning if U or w input exceeds parameter #6626 Regards U or W input to offset data as usual input.

MRVDRN: 1: o:

Enable switching to dry run during under the MM/REV mode. Disable switching to dry run during under the MM IREV mode.

move move

RPDOV 1: o: Provides six steps of rapid over~ide (FO, 25, 50, 100%) Provides four steps of rapid override (FO, 25, 50, 100%)

~=6017 EIA~#B7-BO D71DGDSDAD3D2 D7 - D() D, .


_L

~ Do
. .

SPDOV 1: Sets 200% Sets 120% spindle speed override range of 10 to (10% increments) spindle speed override range of 50 to (10% override increments) . DO axes simultaneous shift causes alarm in G151 groove width shift. axes simultaneous shift does not cause in G150, G151 groove width shift.

Specify whether or not a hole is to be made on channels 8-1, respectively, in a code correspond# (used with user macro) in the ing to symbol EIA code. 1: o: Hole N o hole EIA#B7-Bo with holes 01001001 7, 4, and 1 is

o:

G150XZ: L: o: X, Z G150, X, Z alarm

Example: The code

on channels

considered equivalent to symbol #i in the EIA code . No code for use by the unit can be set. Note : The specification of EIA#B7-BO = 00000000 assumes that symbol # is not used in the EIA code.

A--1O

m
G92FHP
1:

FOVAB
D7 D5 D4 Da Dz

D5 with with D4

1: o: D7 position of temporary stop of thread-

Effective Effective

feedrate override signal feedrate override signal

O. 1.

Specifies the cutting.

SSTPAB 1: Analog

o:

Stops at the position B where Threading-up is completed. Returns to start point A and stops after Threading-up is completed.

o:

output zero with spindle S command zero input signal SSTP O: Analog output zero with spindle S command zero input signal SSTP 1.

AU TSET:

D3

m
TOOL PATH DURING CUTTING THREAD INTERRuPT ~---- - ----

TEMPORARY

1:
A

o:

Automatically set the tool coordinate memory by external input. Does not automatically set the tool coordinate memory by external input. D2

Q.,
t

[Gw, (;76)

PSTSGN

Shown in the calculationformula of storing data during MDI of measured work point into tool offset memories 01 to 50.

FEED HOLD

SCRDRN 1: O:

D5

(;:;:::)

Enables Dry Run at threadcutting. Disables Dry Run at threadcutting.


D4

SKPFED

~s~~~~

~~~~~~ementj

1: Employs
o:

the feedrate set in parameter #6232 (G31F) for the Skip Function command (G31). Employs the F code command as the feedrate for the Skip Function command (G31) .
D3

0:

(:~:i::::) ~~~~~ement~

(=)~~~

ESPRST

1:
o:

Does not turn on RST output with ESP input ON. Turns on RST output with ESP input ON.

OESG96
G31SKP
1:

DI

D2

1:

o:

Inputs the specified value to macro system variables #5001, 5002 during G31 execution. Inputs the current value to macro system variables #5001, 5002 during G31 execution.

0:

Specifies the surface speed calculated by the X-axis coordinate value modified by tool position offset value in Constant Surface Speed Control. Specifies the surface speed calculated by the programmed Xaxis coordinate value in Con~tant Surface Speed Control.

POSG96 OFSDSP D7 1: 0:

DO

1:
o:

Displays programmed position in current position display (POSITION ABSOLUTE). Displays programmed position modified with tool position offset in current position dis play (POSITION ABsoLuTE).
D6

Surface Speed Control functions on the block including Rapid Traverse (GOO) . Surface Speed Control functions on the block including Rapid Traverse (GOO) , if programmed before the Cutting Feed block.

OFSZRO:

1:
o:

Automatically clear the tool wear offset by external input. Does not automatically clear the tool wear offset by external input.

AII

APPENDIX 2 LIST OF PARAMETER


-r
-, 7 ~

NUMBERS

(Centd) .- -

,_r __~ D~Do .

:6021

_D_7

1 D,

Ds

DA ~ Da

WX322 r --~ -1 -_ LD--!!


HOFSMV opera9000 operaD7

-3 .->. -E: 3 __Do _


mode haninterpolation. mode hanof rapid

UM09000 1:

D7

Inhibits editing and display and punchout tions of the part program of program No. to 9999. Permits editing tions. Dt5 program is already ALARM. with a new stored. and display and punchout

0:

Enables the movement of automatic dle offset during cutting feed by Enables the movement of automatic dle offset except during execution traverse. TLCC D6 Effective amount Effective amount D5 on the next changed. on the next is changed. T code

MERSIN 1: O:

Replaces the stored when part program Displays ALREADY D5

one

1:

when when

offset offset

is

0:

block

RSC)NOF 1: ():

TRDFH Sets on and off character. Keeps RS signal finished. D4 DR. recognize D3 00 when tape is punched 9 keyed in and ~Tkey with O, depressed. -, RS on (RS232C until signal) by. is % 1: reading-in

o:
CHKDR 1: O: O 1: Recognizes Does not 9999o Punches 9, 9, 9,

Executes the block next to the block specifying thread, and stops at single block oper ation or feedhold during thread cutting. Stops on completion of the block specifying thread at single block operation or feedhold during thread cutting. D4

DR.

MABIN 1:

o:

Ignores manual absolute function for incremental command by U and W. Does not ignore manual absolute function incremental command by U and W. D3

for

o:

Does not punch 00 when tape is punched with o, -, 9, 9, 9, and 9 keyed in and != key depressed. D2

ISOPO 1. L.

PO:NON 1:

o:

Does not clear program No. on power application. (Program number is stored at power supply shut off.) Clears program No. on power application. D1

0:

Does not output parity bit (8th bit)when putting 1S0 codes from NC by operating key (in the EDIT mode) . Outputs parity bit.

outOUT

ISOPI 1:

2 when outputting key (in the EDIT 1S0 tape data in

PRGNO 1:

0:

Employs the value following address O or N as the program number (specifiable in one block) . Employs the value following address O as the program number. DO

o:

Ignores parity bit ( 8th bit) 1S0 codes by operating IN mode) and when reading-in the TAPE mode. Performs parity check. D~, DO

HOFSZ, Specifies movement 1:

HOFSX

whether automatic mode is effective or ineffective. automatic automatic mode

handle

offset

M02M99 1:

o:

Considers M02, M30 and M99 as the program end when part program is stored into memory. At punchout with O-9999 depressed, add EOB in front of O number. Does not consider M02, M30 and M99 as the program end when part program is stored At punchout with O-9999 into memory. depressed, do not add EOB in front of O number.

o:

Effective ment. Ineffective ment.

handle handle

offset offset

movemove-

mode

A-12

X!E 71 DD51 D31D2D11D01


PERIAB 1: o: D7 setting Error setting Error of offset value for for Stored Incremental Leadscrew Absolute Leadscrew D6 Compensation. of offset value Compensation. Stored

Determines interface 1: o:

stop bit for RS232C the input No. 1 as two bits or one bit. stop stop bit bit as two as one bits. bit.

Determines D et ermines

SIFIBID Sets input

- SIFIBIA baud rate

D3 - Do for RS232C interface No. 1

PERST

1:

Regards % code as M30, if % is commanded before M02 or M30 in TAPE or MEM mode operaiton. Ignores M3 O in IT %(1 code TAPE D5 if commanded before M02 or

Baud Rate 50

I SIFI BID

SIFI BIC

SIFI BIB

I SIF1 BIA

o:

o 0
0 0 0 0 -.

0 0
0 1 1 1

010 1
1 o~o 0 1 Ill -} 1 0

or MEM mode

operation.

Imloooll

MCI-IMST
1:

1101
150 -200 300 600--} 1200101 2400 \ l----

o
1

o:

Lights feedhold lamp and stores M, S, and T commands when manual operation mode is selected during automatic operation. Does not light feedhold lamp and M, S, and T commands operation operation. are forced to reset when manual mode is selected during automatic

1 1

0 0 0

0 011 110

lo

ONOCHG
1: o:

D3

4800 9600

I
I

Changes No. O by pressing O, program number, and ALT keys. Does not change No. O by pressing O, program number, and ALT keys.
D2 Sets cut override depth input value override with cut depth in Stroke Removal in Turning

COVP 1:

Output for RS232 C No. 2

0:

(G71) and stock removal in facing (G72) . Sets cut depth value override with setting #6004. D1

SIF2CI

D5 control sent or code. code not. for

CLNO
1:

o:

oilby inputting t :11 and OUtplltS outputs It 11 in 1S0 code. : by inputting 110, Does not perform the conversion above.
Do speed at high in highspeed in

Determines whether output RS232C No. 2 interface is 1: o: Does not send Sends control D4 output two bits control code.

HSRWD

SIFISO Determines No. 2 as

1:
o:

Automatically starts at high speed rewinding. Does not start automatically high-speed rewinding.

stop bit for or one bit. bit bit D3 rate as two as one Do

RS232C

interface

1: Determines
o: Determines

stop stop

bits. bit.

Input

for

RS232C

No.1

SIF2BID-SIF2B1A

-- =6026
SIFICI

~~D.
D5

~D,
the input given or

~ D,

D,

Do

Sets output No. 2.

baud

for

RS232C

interface

Determines whether RS232C interface is 1: o: Does not send Sends control

control not.

code

for

control code.

code.

A13

APPENDIX 2 LIST OF PARAMETER


Output

NUMBERS
for RS232

(Centd)
C No. 2

Baud

Rate lSl F2BlDl

SlF2BlC,

SlF2Bl

BISl

F2BlA

50100
Im

010
I

. s6029 i

v . i . D, D.
D3

110 150

4
I

o~o 0 o

~ -:..+:

D2

D,

DO

Oil,

SIF2C0

D5

200

300 -+

0; O-l+
I

po
0

+--

o 1

Determines whether output control code for RS232C interface No. 2is sent or not,
1: o: Does not send Sends control D4 stop bit for or one bit. bit bit D3 as two as one Do interface. RS232C interface control code. code.

SIF2S0 9600 ]1;0

110

Determines output No. 2 as two bits 1: o: Determines Determines

Output

for RS232C

No. 1

stop stop

bits. bit.

SIF2BOD-SIF2BOA

Sets output baud


SIFICO D 5
Baud Rat[ 50 . 100 110 150

rate for RS232C

;IF2BOD

SIF2BOC

SIF2

BOB

SIF2

BOA

Determines whether output control code for current loop and RS232C interface is sent or not.

0 0 0 0
1

0
0 0 0

1
0 i o
1

1:
o:

Does

not send control code, Sends control code.


D4

SIFI. SO

200

Determines output stop bit for current loop and RS232C interface as two bits or one bit, 1:
o:

300 600

0 0

0 1 0 1 . . 0

Determines

Determines

bit as two stop bit as one

stop

bits. bit.
.

1200 2400 4800

SIFIBOD-SIFIBOA

D3 - DO

Sets output baud rate for current loop and RS23ZC interface,

9600

E;aud Rate IS IF IBOD

SIFI

BCC

SIF1

BOB:

SIFI

BOA

A14

XPSET
r

I
I

=
IF~

r:
F

XPERML ---T ZPERML 7

I
I

#6057
#6058

I
I

ZPSET

SPSET

XPERML,

ZPERML: error compensation and Z-axis. multiplication

Sets leadscrew factor for X-

XPSET

, ZPSET , SPSET :
X-, Z-axis and

Sets position error range for spindle (at indexing) .

Outputs the result of the preset compensation value multiplied by the multiplication factor the error compensation value. Setting (Setting range: O will ~
XSVER I

as

O - 255 not execute

compensation.

Setting range:
Setting: Least

O - 255
output increment

I
I #6063 I
1..-~ ,..

BSX

~..

I I
1

L
r

ZSVER

~
BS Z BSS

I
r-

SSVER

! I

1.

.1

XSVER,

ZSVER,

SSVER: and the preset

Bsx, Bsz, BSS:


Sets spindle D/A (at conversion indexing bit 1. for X-, Z-axis, and

Sets servo error limit for X-, Z-axis, spindle. Position deviation exceeding value activates an alarm 134A. 11 Setting range: O - 255 Standard setting: 16 1/16 x (D/A saturation Setting:

value)

#6062 #6063
#6064 4 5

Bit

Max No. of
Error Pulses

ZiE!zl r
Rapid threading cutting Setting Setting: pull-out range: O - 255 O. 1 lead

CUPRD

---1----12 bit 13 bit 2047 4095

width

during

thread-

6 7
8

I I
I

14 bit 15 bit

8191
16383

16 bit

32765 SIDSER E1

Max

No.

of

Error Pulses

Max Feedrate (pulse/s) Position Loop Gain (l/s)

Spindle stop check timer at spindle index start. Setting range: O - 225 Setting: l=8ms

Setting range: O - 255 Setting: Least output increment

APPENDIX 2 LIST OF PARAMETER

NUMBERS .

(Centd)

~6120

.
x6122

.
I

,.

16123

x6124

,z6113 :6125 I

UM;EIAS :

Specify the punching pattern in EIA for special characters employed in user macro; [ , ] , *, =, (, ), used in turn, beginning with #6108. Setting range: O - 255 Se~ting: Sets the punching pattern using the decimal value converted from the binary value which defines the pattern. 0 is set for each character, Note: men punching pattern willbe as listed below.

I ,_ , . , ~6127 i

~6126

IJMG1 Sets No.

10: for calling user macro of program

09001

G codes to range

09004,
:

Setting

0- 255

UMM

*_.J._i --)

,. . ..

..

-.

UMM 2

UMM3

UMM4

:6114

NBUFM

UMMI,
2

UMM2,

UMM3,

CMM4 : user macro of program

:6115

NBUFM

Sets M codes for calling No. 09001 to 09004. Setting =6134 UMT range: O - 255

UMT

:6118

NBUFM

1. 1.
=6119 NBUFM 6

0:
Note: user

Regards T-code command as macro mand calling the macro of program Regards T-code command as basic This macro selection option. is effective only

call comNo. 09000. T-code. for the

iNBIJFMl,

2, 3, 4, 5, 6:
advance read

Sets up to 6 M codes for stopping ing function (buffering) . Setting range: O - 255

/4-16

EEEIL
MDO to holding Setting , i L : G74 range: groove O to MD7 High-speed is set. range: O to

MD O-MD7 1

ti6213

IL

G71

OVR 1

M function

decode

output

G71OVR: G71/G72 Infeed range: 1! 1!! = l% reduction o to 99 override.

255

Setting Unit: G740FI .~ J

~L-# 6208

G740F1 Set the

b==
L , canned 65535 unit cycle retract amount. G74DWL: G74/G75 Setting Unit:

r---
L-. .

G 74 DWL
-.__ . . . .._..___ ,

..

Setting Unit: I 46209 L G750F1: Set the

bottom range: l

of

hole

dwell

time.

1! 11! = 1 input

O to

65535

= 1 ms

1!

~ ~

G750FI

p=q ~
MSTF

,
.

G75 range:

groove O to

canned 65535 unit

cycle

retract

amount.

MSTF: Sets the interval are transmitted are transmitted. from the time M, until the time MF, S, and T codes SF, and TF

Setting Unit:

1 = 1 input

1 i_

#6210

I
L

G74CLR
.-- ..

Setting

range:

O - 65536

msec

G74CLR: Set the G74 range: groove O to canned 65535 unit cycle clearance amount.

m
L

-1

----L._.. - -

1
HPMAX .-

J
is

Setting Unit:

HPMAX: Specifies the maximum handle feedrate, commom to the all axes. This parameter setting is in multiples
G 75CLR

111 = 1 input

which of 8.

s6211
..

ir-j L.-
G75 range: groove o to

Setting

11111 = 125 pulses/see

G75CLR: Set the canned 65535 unit

cycle clearance amount.

m
HPMUL : Setting:

E11111 = x 1 time

HPMUL

..
PULSE

J
MULTIPLY

Setting Unit:

!!11 = 1 input

Sets the value when MANUAL switch is set at x1OO.

.-

$6212

-,

...
cycle

G745FED

I -J

G745FED: Groove override. Setting Unit: canned groove approach FEED

m~
SAGRT :

S,4GRT~
the spindle

range: I!lll

O to

127 also 100% when it is O)

Specifies the delay time for checking speed reaching signal (SAGR) . Setting range: O - 65536 msec

= 100% (is

A17

APPENDIX 2 LIST OF PARAMErER .


#6225
..~ -

NUMBERS
corner AX S S arc

(Centd)
setting is ignored when:

L I .

KPX

The

NEGNR NEGNR setting AZ = 5

#6226 KPX,

KPZ

~_
KPZ: gain respectively. of command units for

<

-. I

AY

Standard Xand

Set the P-loop


Z-axis

Setting:

Standard

set:

1024

KPS :
Set the P-loop The relations fo]lows :
Max. Set Of # 6227 4096 2048 1024 512 256 #8084 4 5 6 7 8 i No. of Bit 12 13 14 15 16 I No. of Max. offset pulse 2047 4095 8191 16383 32765

gain of spindle at indexing. between KPS and BSS (#6064)

as


L..
FO

 :::
._..!!!vF~..
speed for Rapid

623 I
ROVFO Specifies Override. Setting Setting :

---Traverse

the

range: I

= 125 pulses/see

Ea

[:-:

=-

----::

[ --;=
. G98MAX :

G 98 MAX .=

G31F: Specifies Setting Setting: This setting the range: III!! = 1000 pulses/rein is effective = 1. when parameter #6019D 4 feedrate in the skip function ( G31) .

Specifies the maximum feedrate at G 98 command ( feed per minute) common to all axes. Setting Setting: range: 1 = 1000 puLses/min

(SKPFED)

3
NEGNR :

E-=G~----I \___ 31:

When a circular path is drawn in Tool Radius Compensation o,utside a corner approaching 180, the movement follows describing a very small circular This parameter is used to set the critical arc. arc value, if this arc movement is considered to affect the workpiece surface machining.

~q
JOG O-JOG

JOG 31 ----,

Specify the feedrates for the respective positions on the jog feedrate select switch. Setting range: Setting: !! l!!= (). 5 mm /rein (metric OUtpUt) Ill!! = 0.05 im/min (inch output)

Setting range: O - 65536 Setting : Least input increment

A--18

Switch Position o ? 2 .. 3 4

~ Feedrate ~ v~~~de 0 10 20 30 40

Parameter ~umber #6233 #t6234 *6235 +6236 #6237 ~ *ning o 1 2 4 6

Continuous :,;;Feerate 0 1 2 4 6

MACGR1-MACGR4 Sets spindle speed and 4 orderly. Setting When range: the setting

: upper limit for gear 1, 2, 3,

O - 6000 is

(r/rnin) speed is not clamped.

at O, the

5 6 7170
880 9i90 10 11 ! ~

50 60

#6238 #6239 #6240


#6241 #6242

8 10
12 15 20 25 I 30 40 50 60 ,: 120 150 200 250 300 400 500 600 800 1OCO i [ [ ~ ~ ~

8 10
12 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 ,: 120 150 200 250 300 400 500 600 800 1OCX3 : i

+6270
7[

GRSREV

L-.

GRSREV

: motor

100 110

#6243 I #6244 $6245 I__.. I #6246 #6247 ;=

Sets the speed command output to spindle when gear shift input (GRS) is given.

12
13

I
~

120
130_

Setting value:

--

-+..140
16 17 18 . 19 20 2122 I 170 180 190 200 0 0 i o : 26
IQ

Gear shift spindle motor speed Spindle motor max speed


(Command x 2047 - 12bit = 10 v; output

__*_

#6250 #6251 # 6252 # 6253 i # 6254 - #6255 #6256 ~ ;~8 $6259

Gear shift Spindle

spindle motor speed motor max speed = 10 V) output

(Command x 32512 Setting range: O - 6000 -

Analog

k+ +:{

23

27~

28
29

30 31

o #6260 0 7 I~6261 0 ~ #6262 0 I #6263 0 #6264

1200
1500

1200
1500

1.
E m c

~6271

I
F

GR IREV

2000 2500 3300

2000 2500 3000

GR2REV . - GR3REV ~
-1


z6266 -116267 ~---- ---------~6268 l.------- ~ ~6269 MACGFI 3 ::7 M,4CGR 4

r-

R4REV

.J

l---.

_____

_ *3..
MACGR 2

3
--A

GRIREV-GR4REV: Specify tively, the maximum speed of the spindle, respecfor gears 1, 2, 3 and 4 each selected by Set the spindle speed applicaan input signal. ble when the speed command voltage is 10 V. Setting ~
GSCREV

range:

O - 6000

(r/rein)

L.-

e
G SC REV

E : the spindle motor speed in effect operation ( GSC ) input is entered. range: O - 6000 (r/rein) when

Specifies a spindle Setting

I
I

36276

1
I

I
MICGR1 I
1 1

MICGR2

I
I

MICGR 3

MICGR4

A19

APPENDIX 2 LIST OF PARAMETER


speed 1, 2, of the spindle, re 3 and 4 each selected

NUMBERS
\

(Centd)
ACCX 1 _ ACCZ 1 I

Specify the minimum spectively for gears by an input signal.

_..
L--__ ~

$6286 I ___ L [ #,*El,]

Setting range:
SPIN(ILE MOTOR SPEED COMMANO

O - 6000 [r/rein)

ACCX1>

ACCZ1:

..

Set the time constant for Linear Accel /Decel for X- and Z-axis, respectively. Setting range: Setting: l = 125/8 x 103 p/see Z (P: least output increment) ~XREFP L. (r{tin) ~ 6271 (GRIREW
#6266 (MACGR1) L d 6276 (MICGR1) # 6277 (M ICGR21 $6272 (GR 2 REV) * 6267 [MACGR21 L # 6278 (MICGR 3) # # 6273 (GR 3REV) 6268 (MACGR 3) # 6274 (GR 4 REVI # 6269 (MACGR4) # 6279 (MICGR41

v j/J/J~q
i, ,, Ii lli ,, II ,,

I
?6304 ~

. ZREFP

#6305 E .

XREFP

, ZREFP

: for Reference Point the X and Zaxis.

Sets the Return, Setting Setting:

traverse distance respectively, on range: 1 O 32767

---.1
t6280 $6281 :1

-
RPDX RPDZ

= 1 pulse

RPDX

, RPDZ

: traverse rate for Xand Z-

#6306

I
L.

SCRXACC

J

Specify the rapid axis, respectively. Setting Setting: range: tIllI =

r-7 $6307

1
1

SC RZACC

125 pulses/see

O -

3200
SCRXACG, SCRZACC: time constant at threadcutting on

Sets accel [ decel X-, and Z-axis.

--:!28d c_:Lp
s6283 . _ .., ~ c: XBLP, ZBLP:

. . . . .
--..~

Setting: Always

131,070/time read the notes

constant for #6314,

(ins) #6315.

#6308

I . ~

SCRX AS

Sets amount

of backlash for X-, and Z-axis. -8192 - 8191 P


I

Setting range: P:

s6309

L
SCRZBAS:

SCRZBAS
,

Least output increment


When negative value value is indicated. is set, 65536 + SCRXBAS,

Note :
Setting

Sets accelldecel bias at threadcutting on X-, and Z- axis.

Setting: Always

1 = 500 pulses/s

read the notes for #6314, #6315.

[
[:4

*631O

-~ ~

Xu~6317 &;L?:? 7 XREFV2,

::..
ZREFV2:

XREFV 2

ZREFV 2

XREFV1, Specify Return, Setting Setting:

ZREFV1: the approach respectively, range: O speed 1 for Reference on the X- and Z-axes. 200 Point

Specify Return, Setting Setting:

the approach respectively, range: !!l!I O-

speed 2 for Reference on the X- and Z-axes. 200

Point

ttllt = 125 pulses/see

= 125 pdses/sec
DECELERATION POINT

[.EE r_..cuTxAcc --..1 , ~ Jr


I
f16313 CUTZACC -1 L. CUTXACC, CUTZACC:
_ii:NcE

RATIO TRAvERSE

RATE

Sets accel/decel
threadcutting

time on X-,

constant at normal and Z-axis. ms #6315. Reference #6010 CUTXBAS


. ..J I

WIDTH 1
,: ----

OECEL LS SIGN

ZERO POINT SIGN

Setting: Always

131,070/time constant
#6314,

AREAA

/ ;

AREA B

read the notes for

point

return

direction:

(ZRNDRX,

ZRNDRZ)

CUTZBAS

*L

RPDX 2 .

$6319

RPDZ2 1 r... .. ..

CUTXBAS,

CUTZBAS:
RPDX2,

Sets accelldecel bias at usual threadcutting on X, and Z-axis. Setting: 1 = 500 p/s

RPDZ2:

Set change speed for linear accel/decel of X- and Z-axis, respectively. Setting: l = 125 pulses/s , ACCX 2 - ., Z 2 r 1 I

Notes for Setting Accel/Decel Time Constant and Bias at Normal Threadcutting (#6306 - #6309, #6312 - #6315) 1. Set the same values for X- and Z-axis as a rule to ensure motion path accuracy. When accel/decel time constant or bias is set under the different conditions between threadcutting and normal threadcutting, direct changing these two types cutting may influence speed factor at selected point. Be sure to program dwell or positioning code between these two types.

-~ ,- ;6320 .. J L. ~ L.:!z

2.

A21

APPENDIX 2 LIST OF PARAM=ER


Set 2nd step constant for respectively. X i~nd Zaxis, Setting: 111!! = 125/8 linear accelldecel of

NUMBERS

(Ccmtd)

X 103 p/S2 Sets the spindle range : speed 0 for spindle indexing.

Parameter setting for linear 2nd step Note : accel/decel must be set under the following conditions:
c2nd step accel/ decel change speed .#6318/#6319 If the above the positioning = Rapid decel accel/ constant x N

Setting Setting:

32767 per second

1 = 500 pulse

J 1[

#6286 /#6287
satisfied, correctly,

conditions are not may not perform

Sets Setting

the

spindle range: : t! ltl

indexing O 32767

creep

speed.

Setting
zfi323 ! ZPERED

= 5(IO pulse

per

second

XPERED,

ZPERED:

# 6347
$6348

BSBON

X (X-AXIS)

of the end point for Leadscrew Specify the number respectively, on the X- and Error Compensation, Z-axes. Setting range: O - 255

BSBON

Y (Y-AXIS)

Setting time from ESP to SVOFF Z-AXIS in order: 1 = 8 ms (unit) O - 32767 (setting unit)

in X-AXIS

and

= 6349 L EmT;p :--:

XPERED,

ZPERED:
HINTPP: Set the handle interpolation reference pulse count.

Spec:ify the number of the start point for Leadscrew Error Compensation, respectively, on X and Zaxes.
Sett:.ng range: O - 255

Setting range:

O - 65535

m=

.,

~_.

..

--

____

XSL 1 P . T6601 L ___ .._ -; ~-ZSL1 P ____

XSLIP, Specify the compensation, a.xes. reference point respectively, for Leadscrew Error on the X and Z-

ZSLIP:

Specify the plus direction boundary value for Stored Stroke Limit 1, respectively, on the X-, and Zaxes. Setting range : 0 - 99999999
Setting: 1 = 1 pulse

Setting range:

O - 255

Sets the reference point for spindle indexing. Setting range: Setting: O - 4095

1 = 1 pulse (= 360/4096 deg. )

A22


;66061 i___ , -~ +6607 ] ZSL 1 M
--I

~_

__

XSLI M

-~j

EiEIiIl E
DFSX2 : for X-,

DFSX 2

XSLIM, Specify Stored Z-axes. Setting Setting:

ZSLIM: the minus direction boundary Stroke Limit 1, respectively, value on the

Workpiece measurement value direct parameter (2) Set the distance from the reference position to the X2 contact surface. Setting range: t!l!! -99999999 command -

input tool nose

99999999 increment

range:

O - 99999999

Unit:

= Least

1 = 1 pulse ~--- XZP 2L ~-. ~.. ~ I ZZP 2L 7 .-.=

, I m6612 . i _.. ,. P6613 [ ---.: XZP2L, Specify second Z-axes. Setting Setting:

ml
DFSZ1: and the on the X-,

DFSZ1

ZZP2L: the distance between the first reference point, respectively,

Workpiece measurement value direct parameter (3) Set the distance from the reference position to the Z1 contact surface. Setting range: -99999999 -

inp-ut tool nose

99999999

Unit:

11111 = Least command

increment
I

range:

-99999999-

99999999

1 = 1 pulse

Ez!EIcl E
DFSZ2:

DFSZ2 A

WKSHTX

ml WKSHTX: Set the X-axis range: workpiece -99999999 command shift offset.

Workpiece measurement value direct parameter (4) Set the distance from the reference position to the Z2 contact surface. Setting range: -99999999 command -

input tool nose

Setting Unit:

99999999 increment Unit:

99999999 increment

II11! = Least

11111 = Least

[m WKSHTW :

I
shift range: -99999999 command II111 = Least

WKSHTW

EE!!m
DFSXC: tool Workpiece measurement parameter (5) Set the X dimension of Setting Unit: range: the -99999999

DFSXC

Set the workpiece offset amount. Setting Unit:

amount

measurement

value

direct gauge

input workpiece.

99999999 increment

99999999 increment

11111 = Least

command

ml
DFSX1:

DFSX 1

m
DFSZC: input tool nose Setting Unit: ill!!

E.
the range: -99999999 command

DFSZC

7 J
input workpiece.

Workpiece measurement value direct parameter (1) Set the distance from the reference position to the Xl contact surface. Setting Unit: range: -99999999 command -

Workpiece measurement parameter (6) Set the Z dimension of

value

direct gauge

99999999 increment

99999999 increment

11111 = Least

= Least

A23

APPENDIX 2 UST Of PARAMETER


:z6626

NUMBERS

(Centd)

~. ,
.

__

MAXDUW

MA XDUW: Sets upper limit of U and W for offset data. The

HSDM1: Set 1. the highspeed M function decode output set

input of the value exceeding the limitwill cause


an alarm. Parameter Note: rameter setting , ~6630
, T16631 - ..J { ~ L.. ZSETI J

#6018 D3 is set is effective.

to 1 , the

paL= [._-c ... XDX..-. _

XSETI ..

HSDM2: Set 2. the high-speed M function decode output set

XSETI, Specify

ZSETI: the value for Automatic Coordinate

HSDM 3

Lu!f-1 L
HSDM3: Set 1. the high-speed M

System Setting at the time of inch input, respectively, on the X-, and Z-axes. A desired value should be set in inches for the distance between the first reference point and the reference point of the coordinate system to be established. Setting Setting: range: l . f16636
1 a6637 .4

function

decode

output

reset

-99999999= 0.0001 in.

99999999

! # 6647 -d HSDM4:

HSDM4 !.

~ ~
;T:::T---- L___

XSETM --ZSETM -.. ~

Set 2.

the

high-speed

function

decode

output

reset

XSETM Specify System

, ZSETM

EEEEcl ~
reDIVERR: Set for the instruction division error. point value code

.
segment

the value for Automatic Coordinate Setting at the time of metric input,

A desired on the X-, and Zaxes, spectively, value should be set in millimeters for the distance between the first reference point and the reference point of the coordinate system to be established. Setting Setting ~.
!

value

I range: : 1 -99999999= 0.001 mm 99999999

*8000 - A
_ r_

PEMN O

::.

\ - .7
z8255 -J1 L - PEMN 255 -. I ---

-1
XPEINT
-]

; 6642
I

PEMNO-PEMN255:
1

,w3643

ZPEINT ,

~i

Specify the respective Error Compensation. Setting range:

values

of

Leadscrew

XPEINT

, ZPEINT

: in Leadscrew on the X- and Setting: Incremental parameter 1

O - 315 (Incremental O - f128 (Absolute = Output increment is

designation) designation)

Specify the compensation inverval Errc, r Compensation, respectively, Z-axes . Setting Setting: range: l -99999999= 1 pulse

/absolute designation #6023D7 (pERIAB) .

selected

by

99999999 Axis for compensation is specified #6322, 6323, 6328, and 6329. by parameters

A,24

APPENDIX 3 STORED LEADSCREW


This function automatically compensate for leadscrew error on each axis according to the compensation data set by parameter and is effective after completion of reference point return. The compensation data are made on the distances be tween the reference point on each axis and specified points. Compensation axes: X, Z axes 256 Max. Reference point

ERROR COMPENSATION

COMPENSATION

PARAMETER OF COMPENSATION AMOUNT ON EACH POINT

5 =

No. of correction points: Compensation Compensation base point: interval:

X-AXIS

<

6000 Pulses or more

Data setting system:

Absolute /incremental (Set by Parameter #6023D7 PERIAB )

Compensation Minimum

value: unit: 1 pulse (least output increment) 3X max.

compensation

Compensation

multiplication factor:

One-time-compensation value: (Compensation multiplication) Notes:

15 pulses max.

Table 3.1

1.

Regardless of absolute/incremental the difference between neighboring sation values should be ( 15 pulses sation multiplication) and below. set value in case of is f127 pulses . Compensation is taken on this value.

setting, compenx compen


Comfx3nsation Interval

~xis
x z

Parameter s
36642 (XPEINT) ~6642 (ZPEINT) q6023 D, (PERIAB) $6334 (XPEROR) $6335 (ZPEROR) $6322 (XpERED)

Functions

2. Maximum

absolute setting multiplication

WOO OR MORE 1 = 1 Pulse

3.

No. of correction arbitrary as far points are within

points on each axis can as the total compensation 256.

be

Absolutellncremental Setting Switchable x Compenastion Reference No. z x z x z

O = incremental setting 1 = Absolute setting

Value of parameter i? of compensation on each point minus 8000 will be written.

Compensation
COMPENSATION QEFERENCE ~OINT 6000 PULSES A ! fimrr; INTERVAL

Max Point

$6323
(ZPERED) $6328 (XPERST) $6329 (ZPERST)

,U:E:
1 [)
/

Compensation Min Point

0 to *7 (lncremental setting) 0 to +127 (Absol ute setting) 1 = 1 pulse - ! oto3

(10
()

-1+1-1.1. ()

z.2-

SET AMOUNT INCREMENTAL SET AMOUNT COMPENSATION PARAMETERS

Compensation Value on Each Point

x 18000 q8255 z x . z i6069 (ZPERML) *6068

1 1)
I

i)

+1 i

(1

-1 !

II

4
4

111

Xuw 8009 = w(m) 8(X)18(1(Y2 8003 nou4KIWI W!+ X(107

Compensation Multiplication Factor

A25

APPENDIX 4 LIST OF STANDARD


Table 4-1 shows the listof diagnostic numbers and signal names of standard input/output signals and monitor signals.

lNPUT/OUTPUT

SIGNALS

Notes: 1. Monitor signals are used to check nal condition of the control. The functions - #1157 of signals #1000 the inter-

2.
Diagnostic Number MOOO-k1096 PI lCK1-fH 157 Display I Input signals from machine I Output signals to machine Output signals to machine interface (PC)

#1096,

#1100

Refer D7

to machine D6 D5 D4

tool D3

builders D2 D1

manual. DO

*---

Input signals from machine interface

(PC)

00001111 T-Contact opened Contact closed

Fig. 4.1 Status Display of Input/Output

Signals

A2!6

Table

4 1 List of Standard

Input/Output

Signals

Input Signals
D7 #1300 EDT EDIT D6 MEtd MEMORY

15-L+I%+I-+--+ MDI

TAPE

HANDLEJ STEP

MANUAL JOG

MANUAL RAPID

-#1301 MP 1 ROV 2 Rovl~~Fv8 FEEDRATE : FV4 FV2 i Fvl ~ RAPID SPEED OVERRIDE OVERRIDEJMANUAL JOG SPEED

#1302 HZ
MANUAL

+Z, x+x
AXIS

HX
SELECT

;1

MP 4

MP2

PG AXIS

MANUAL TRAVERSE

DIRECTION SELECT

MANUAL PG MULTIPLY SELECT

M303

~ INHEDT INHIBIT EDIT

AFL M. S, T LOCK

ABS MANUAL ABS.

DRN - DRY RUN

BDT BLOCK DELETE

DLK DISPLAY LOCK

MLK MACHINE LOCK

SBK SINGLE BLOCK

--- .-.
#1304 ZRN RETURN TO REFERENCE CDZ THREAD CUT UP ~ ~RWD~ ERROR DETECT HIGH-SPEED REWIND PST SRN ---- POSITION SET UP POINT SET RETURN *SP FEED HOLD ST CYCLE START ~

H30L:R*..@_l..RwD
E~AL INPUT ERROR lNTERRUPT REWIND

I Op
END OF PROGRAM

RS..;E.EXTERNAL RESET FIN

RD
MACHINE READY

-T


I HINTP HANDLE I NT E RPOLAri ON MODE *DCZ DEC~lNpUT REFERENCE I
-1-

.
I *LZ FOR

I I *-LX ..L . OVERTRAVEL INPUT


..

ti1306

SAGR
.

*DCX

+LZ

L___

G +LX .

~~E~ AGREEMENT

pOINT

?1307

1.. sCOMMAND CONSTANT

GRS

GSC SPINDLE SPEED CONSTANT

SSTP SCOMMAND O

SINV sCOMMAND INVERT

GR4

._

GR3 ~

GR2

GRI

SPINDLE GEAR RANGE SELECT

A27

Table
Input Signals

4-1

List of Standard

Input/Output

Signals

(Cent d)

D7 21308 EOUT NC PROGRAM PUNCH OUT

D6 EVER NC PROGRAM VERIFY

D5 EIN 4C ROGRAM INPUT

Dd

D3 T

D2 SAT

D, SMN

DO EXTC TIME COUNT i

DRSZ DRSX .. . DISPLAY RESET

sCOMMAND AUTO

%MMAND MANUAL

, 309 [DT 9 -BET> BDT7

= BDT 6 AD~lTtONAL

._.
~ BDT5 L. . _~ BLOCK DELETE

.
BDT4 BDT 3 BDT 2 ~

$1310

rwN16 ;

.wi7..

.
WN 4

.
WN 2 SEARCH

WN1 r=

~ SPB SPA I

EXTERNAL

WORK

NUMBER

SPINDLE OVERRIDE

Ovc
TOOL WEAR-OUT ADJUST INPUT CUTTING INTERRUPT POINT RETURN AUTO MODE HANDLE OFFSET X AXIS MIRROR IMAGE PROGRAM RESTART OVERRIDE CANCEL

--#1312 I SETREO COORDI NATE SYSTEM SETTING REQUEST INPUT #1313 FSCLR

I FS DATA CLEAR

-
COV16 i

.-
COV8 I COV 4

Cov 2 Cov 1 I

G 711G 72 CUTT~NG OVERRIDE

FSCH FS MEMORY ALT E RATION

FSMEM FS MEMORY

--

FSCM FS EDITING MODE

1 c

x1316 SID 8

SID7

--1

I SID6 . .

I ,

SID 5

~ .-.=4

L:-XS7J SET -

SID~ ._

SPINDLE

INDEX POSITION

r
#13,7 ~
Tpfj

..

.
~ TP 2 1. TP 1 . .

SID12 . ..~..

,
I SID 11 . SID1O SID9 I -!

. ___

TP4

TOOL NO. SET FOR STORED STROKE LIMIT

Input Signals
D7 :1318 D6 i_~T& TOOL SKIP
D3 D2 D, Do

SIDXI
TOOL RESET

~ SIDXING SPINDLE INDEX ~~/E!ON MENTAL


DESIGNATION

SPINDLE INDEX RESTART

SIGNAL FOR TOOL LIFE CONTROL

TPS~=~ TOOL NO SPINDLE INDEXING CHANGE FOR S.S. LIMIT

~1319

ROV 4

SPE SPINDLE OVERRIDE

SPD

TLA 21

TLA 18 CHANGE

TLA 14

TLA12

TLAII

RAPID OVERRIDE

TOOL NO. (TOOL LIFE CONTROL)

IWO L--

-.
:1323 ~E)~D~ EXTERNAL

RI 4(SDI 3) RI 3(SDI 2) ~Rl 2(SDI 1) -. Rl~:SDl O) INPUT OF S-COMMAND (S 4 DIGIT) NO. 1

6) ~ RI 6(SDI 5~S~

~1324

FDI~(SDL__

(SDI ~ 13) EXTERNAL

(SDI 12) ~

(SDI 11)

(SDI 10) ~9) (S 4 DIGIT) NO. 2

.~ -

INPUT FOR S-COMMAND

=1325

~KLIczETx4

!3

2
NO. 1

Z;l:- J
.

INPUT FOR USERS MARCRO

Table

4-1

List of Standard

Input/Output

Signals

(Centd)

Input

Signals

-T#1326 ~ :; ~u:= ~ u% -;: ,

-::1 --~ -;:O:J--H9

D, ..

~-

;;8 .

__~

IN-PUT FOR USERS MACRO NO. 2

M 327 ED 7 ED6

. ..
/
L

. ___
ED 4 ED3

__
I
d.

ED5

ED2

EDI

~ 1

ED()

EXTERNAL

DATA INPUT NO. 1

-
#1328 i L ED15 ED14 . ~ ED13 . r ED12 _ ~EDii No. 2 EDIO~ ED9 . ED8 i EXT~A~T~lNPUT

$1329

EDCL

EDS2 . ..3...

EDS 1 ~ EDS O . -7:: --CONTROL

EDSD -~.

EDSC

EDSB

lEDSA ,___

SIGNAL FOR- EXTERNAL

DATA tiPUT

Output Signals D3 ::2-., I MFUNCTION :; M18 BCD OUTPUT M14 ~M12 Mll 1 Dp D, DO

D, #1200 M 28

D6 M 24

$1201

M30R M 30 DECODE OUTPUT

Mo2R~ M 02 DECODE OUTPUT

1~
I

..

M38

T-

M34

M 32

M 31
~

M 01 DECODE OUTPUT

M 00 DECODE OUTPUT

#1202

TF T-FUNCTION SAMPLING OUTPUT

SF S-FUNCTION SAMPLING OUTPUT

MF M-FUNCTION SAMPLING OUTPUT

SINVA S4 DIGIT OUT INVERT STATUS

IER INPUT ERROR OUTPUT

ESPS

~T RESET OUTPUT

J!!2Lc
ALARM OUTPUT

EMERGENCY STOP OUTPUT

#1203

EDTS EDIT OPERATING STATUS

AUTO AUTO MODE STATUS

MAN MANUAL MODE STATUS

THC THREAD CUTTING STATUS

RWDS REWIND STATUS

OP FEEDING

DEN POSITIONING END

#1204

S28

S24

s 22

S21 S-FUNCTION

S 18 BCD OUTPUT

S14

S12

Sll

#1205 ~ 28 .__Z-E.

I TX
T- FUNCTION

T18 ~ TIL ~ T12 ~ TII,I


BCD OUTPUT

-
#1208 ~Z 2 ZP~ Z= Z AXIS Z AXIS X AXIS NO. 2 REFERENCE POSITION

- ZPX X AXIS

7=T ~ CONSTANT SURFACE SPEED CONTROL

SpL FEED HOLD LAMP

STL CYCLE START LAMP

REFERENCE POSITION

#1216

R iXo7 ~ .

(SDD6)

RC6 (SDD 5) I R 05 (SDD4) -T OUTPUT

Ro4 (SDD 3)

Ro3___ (SDD2~R02 (S 4 DIGIT) NO. 1

(SDDI) [ Rco (SDDo) J

EXTERNAL

FOR S-COMMAND

A31

Table

4-1

List of Standard

Input/Output

Signals

(Centd)

Output Signals

M217

D5 D13 D4 D3 D2 D, DO 7 - (SDD 12) Ro12 (SD*II (SDDIO) RO 1O(SDD9) ~ 9(sDD8) (SDD15 (SDD 14) @DD 13) . i_ . . EXTERNAL OUTPUT FOR S-6 MMAND (S 4 DIGIT) NO. 2

D7

:.
tF1218
I

FSCE FSMn
L -. -

ASF S4 ANALOG OUT

END OF
FS MEMORY ALTERATION

UNDER
EDITING MODE

FS

41219

~-

EREN~ ESEND .. EXTERNAL EXTERNAL DATA DATA SEARCH INPUT COMPLECOMPLETION TION

.
~SETEND L. END OF I

TLCH TOOL

I -

SIDXO SPINDLE

7 TPSA s. 5.

SIDXA SPINDLE

COORDI NATE
SYSTEM

s ETT I N G OUTPUT

CHANGE COMMAND (TOOL LiFE CONTROL)

INDEX EXECUTING

LIMIT AREA CHANGE END

INDEX
END

a1220 Uo 7 _!?-c*E-ruL~:>oL..-Lo?L OUTPUT FOR USERS MACRO ..!O NO. 1 _ .Eo _

,dlzzl


Uo 15
~=

..
~ UO12

.
!

~
Uoll
--J.

,
U08 .
_!

,..

Uo 14

UO13

Uolo

IJO 9
__ _

OUTPUT

FOR USERS MACRO

~rl

~1222
~ __


._

.
2-

I
. A

END OF F S DATA CLEAR

t1224

MD7

MD6

,,

MD5

MD4
M

MD3
FUNCTIONS

MD2

MD1

MDO

HIGH-SPEED

Output Signsls

D7 #1260

D6

D5

D4 Sswo :

D3

D~

DI

Do

SSW3

i I SSW2

Sswl

SKIP SKIP INPUT

SYSTEM

NUMBER

SWITCH

#1281

0,

OFFPB

ONPB

OLD

SVAM

ESP

OHT
1

POWER OFF PB.

POWER ON PB.

OVERLOAD

SERVO
ALARM

EMER GENCY STOP

OVERHEAT

#1282

1HP7

1HP6

1HP5

1HP4

1HP3

1HP2 MONITOR

lHPI

lHPO

ND. 1 MANUAL

PULSE GENERATOR

#1283

I !

,
I SET3 SET2 SETTING SET1 #6219 MONITOR SETO

#1284

SVMX =~N (= NRD)

SVMX

#1265

00
CONSTANT 1

010

41286

0!010]0 CONSTANT

o~o O

00

1 1

#1287

Pcs PHASE PG

PBS C PHASE FOR B

PAS PHASE A

1~

MONITOR

SPINDLE-AXIS

A33

Table Output Signals

4-1

List of Standard

Input/Output

Signals

(Centd)

A;
X-AXIS TGON PHASE PG MONITOR C

i P;
PHASE FOR B

~ :X
PHASE A X-AXIS

:*3 I-e-?k
ALX MONITOR FOR SERVO UNIT OF X-AXIS

1 TGONZ
I

Pcz PHASE C

I
,

PBZ PHASE FOR B

PAZ
I

* ALZ A MONITOR

*OLZ

FUZ

SRDZ

Z-AXIS
TGON PG

PHASE

FOR SERVO UNIT OF Z-AXIS

MONITOR

Z-AXIS

~12w b2Y2

SCOMN 1 SCOM22I scow


SPINDLE

i SCOM18 ! SCOM141 scMEg


MONITOR

COMMAND

#1291

SCOM48

SCOM44

1 SCOM42

SCOM41

SCOM38

SCOM34

SCOM32

SCOM31

spl NDLE

COMMAND

MONITOR

#1292 . SPINDLE MONITOR FOR OUTPUT

123picb

1042 1 041 038 1 03; i 032 I 031 1


SPINDLE MONITOR FOR OUTPUT

#1294

ALM28

ALM24

ALM22
MONITOR

ALM21
FOR

ALM18
ALARM

ALM14
CODE

T ALM12

ALM1l

W295

~]v~~

, ~ ALM38
MONITOR

ALM34 FOR

ALM32 ALARM

ALM31 CODE

A:34

APPENDIX 5 LIST OF ALARM CODES


Code 000 Causes Code
012 OVERFLOW

Causes
(128CH)

BUFFER

CAPACITY

OVERFLOW

IN

A BLOCK

(128 CHARACTERS).

001

ZR UNREADY POINT

(X) RETURN NOT CO MPLETEDX.

013

PROG

ERROR

(NO ADDRESS)

REFERENCE

ADDRESS PLUS NO DATA AND NEXT ADDRESS COMMAND. OR NO AD DRESS PLUS DATA.

002

ZR UNREADY REFERENCE POINT

(Z) RETURN NOT CO MPLETEDZ.

014

PROG -,

ERROR SND .

( -,

) USED

SIGN

NOT CORRECTLY

003

015

PROG

ERROR

(U NUSABIECH) IN

UNUSABLE CHARACTER PROGRAMMED IN SIG NFICANT DATA AREA

004

016

005

RESET

UNREADY

(AFTER

EDITING)

017 INPUT TERS).

PROG DATA

ERROR

(8 DIGITS) (MORE THAN 8CHARAC-

CYCLE START WITHOUT BUTTON AFTER EDITING.

DEPRESSING

RESET

OVERFLOW

006

018

007

019

008

020

PRO GE RROR UNUSABLE IN OPTIONS

(G) NOT INCLUDED

GCODEOR GCODE PROGRAMMED.

009

021

PROG

ERROR

(G)

GCODESIN l, ANDK GROUPS PROGRAMMED SIMULTANEOUSLY IN A BLOCK

010

TH

ERROR

022

TAPE

HORIZONTAL

PARITY

ERROR

011

TV

ERROR

023

TAPE

VERTICAL

PARITY

ERROR.

APPENDIX 5 LIST OF ALARM CODES


Code 024 PROG ERROR Causes (G, G41-44) DURING NOSE Code

(Centd)
Causes

036

PROG

ERROR

IP-G1O) WHEN

UNUSABLE GCODE COMMANDED RADIUS COMPENSATION,

TOO LA RGEP (N UMBER DESIGNATION) OFFSET IS PROGRAM-INPUT.

025

037

PROG

ERROR

G1OI VJORK COORDINATE SYSTEM

TOO LARGE R WHEN IS PROGRAM-INPUT.

026

PROG

ERROR

(G41-44)

038

RISE ERROR START.

IN NOSE RADIUS

COMPENSATION

027

PROG

ERROR

(G41-44)

039

ERROR DURING NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION CANCELLATION. (ERROR IN CIRCULAR NTERPOLATION MODE;.

-.
028 040 PROG ERROR M98, G65/66)

P NOT PROGRAMMED IN G65/66 BLOCK. POR QNOT PROGRAMMED IN M98 BLOCK. -. 029 041 NO PROG PROGRAM NO. (SEQUENCE NO ) NOT FOUND WHEN PROGRAM IS CALLED BY M98, M99, G65, G66, G, M, ANDT.

030

PROG

ERROR

~F!Ej

042 COMMAND

?ROG

ERROR

),198, G65/66 NEST)

NO

F OR E COMMAND IN FEED E COMMANDED IN G98 MODE.

SUBPROGRAM FIVE-NESTED.

(M98)OR

LflAC RO CALL

(G65/66)

031 PROG ERROR (R=O) 043 ?ROG ERROR k1911 IN M91 BLOCK

CIRCLE WITH RADIUS LA R ARC COMMAND

O COMMANDED

IN CIRCU -

P NOT SPECIFIED

032 044 TOOL DATA ERROR iR AN DC) IN THE THE OFFSET THE NOSE R AMOUNT IS WRITIEN NUMBER CO MM AND5D BY:.:: OF COMMAND T ** ;.::.; 033 045

034

PROG

ERROR

;G02/03;

046

MACRO

ERROR

NOSE

R)

CIRCULAR

ARC

R DESIGNATION

ERROR

DURING TOOL NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION, VARIABLES LIKE #5041 AN D#5042WHl CH CANNOT BE READ IN ADVANCE.

035
TOO

PROG

ERROR

(T OF S)

047

PROG IN TERFERE

ERROR

IG41-LL) ERROR

LARGE NO. OF T OFS CODE FOR TOOL RADIUS COMPENSATION AND TOOL LENGTH COMPENSATION.

NC E CHECK

Code 048 PROG ERROR

Causes (G41-44) BY iNTER-

Code 060 PROG ERROR

Causes (G34) EXCEEDING DURING -

INTERSECTION PO IN TN OT OBTAINED SECTION COMPUTATION.

LEAD lNCREASE/DECREASE VALUE MAXIMUM PROGRAMMABLE VALUE VARIABLE LEA D THREAD CUTTING, MI NUSVALU EOF LEAD COMMANDED. 061 PROG ERROR (Gil/G12

049

PROG

ERROR

(G41-44) REVERSE COMMANDED IN I

IN THREAD) IN THREAD

REVERSE OR ALMOST M97 MODE.

ROUND IN G, BEVELING CUTTING BLOCK.

COMMANDED

050 PROG ERROR (Gil/12) COMMANDED FOR BEVEVALUES OF 1, K, RTOO 1, K, R NOT CORRECTLY LING AND ROUNDING. LARGE.

062

PROG

ERROR

(G32/G33} IN G98 MODE. COMMAND B

THREAD CUTTING COMMANDED MU LTI-START THREAD CUTTING OUT OF SPECIFIED RANGE.

051

PROG ERROR TAPERING COMMAND AND ROUNDING.

iGlll12) 1 IN BLOCKS FOR BEVELING

063

PROG

ERROR

(G92/G78/G2l)

RAP ID THREAD PULL-UP VALUE IN X-AXIS DIRECTION IN THREAD CUTTING WITH BEVELING SMALLER THAN BEVELING VALUE SET BY PARAMETER. I 064 PROG ERROP (G92/G781G21) IN Z-AXIS WITH BEVELING

052

PROG

ERROR

(GO1) NOT CORRECT DURING LINEAR IN TERPOLAT!ON

ANGLE PROGRAMMING ANGLE PROGRAMMING BY GO1.

RARID THREAD PULL-UP VALUE DIRECTION IN THREAD CUTTING VA LUESET BY PARAMETER.

053

PROG

ERROR

(G50T/G92T)

065

VALUES OF TOOL COORDINATE MEMORY OUT OF THE RANGE BETWEEN 51 T0801N WORK Coordinate SYSTEM SETTING BY G7JOT

054

G51 POS-EXT

ERROR VALUE)

066

CA NNOT

CO NT IN UOUS THREAD OF

COMMAND VALUE (EXTERNAL TO RETURN AT G51 EXECUTION TIME IS WRONG.

TOO SHORT TIME FOR 1 BLOCK CO NT IN UOUS THREAD Cutting. \ 067

055

?ROG

ERROR

(M, S,T) IN WHICH M, S,

M, S, TCOMMANDS IN THE BLOCK T CODE CANNOT BE COMMANDED.

056

PROG

ERROR

(AXIS)

--L- I 06f3 !

068

PROG ERROR IS FOUND

(G151 DATA) IN THE G151 COMMAND DATA

AXIS COMMAND IN G20, G21 BLOCKS. AXIS-NOT CORRECTLY COMMANDED IN G04, G36-G38. 1 057 070

ERROR

PROG ERROR MEMORY OPERATION NOT GIVEN.

(M02/M3O/M99) COMPLETION COMMAND

+
058
MIRROR IMAGE

071

G151 ERROR G151 COMMAND ERROR

G28 IS COMMANDED MIRROR DURING

IMAGE

MODE I

059

ZR UNREADY COMPLETED ON THE AXIS WHICH HAS G29 COMMANDER REFERENCE POINT RETURN NOT CO MPLETEDON THE AXIS WHICH HASG30 COMMAND.

072

PROG ERROR

(G50TIG50XZ)

G28 NOT

G50TOR G50XZ IS COMMANDED WHEN THE COORDINATE SYSTEM IS SE TBY THE TCODE. G68 IS COMMANDED BY MIRROR IMAGE GRADE UP SPECIFICATIONS (46019D1 = 1).

APPENDIX 5 LIST OF ALARM CODES


Code 073
Causes

{Centd)
Causes

Code 085 EXTERNAL

CM PERROR

MULTIPLICATION FACTOR SET BY PARAMETER EXCEEDING 11 FOR EXTERNAL TOO LCOMPENSA TION.

074

086

EXTERNALCMP ERR OR IN PUT TURN TOOL COMPENSATION.

ERROR ED ON DURING EXTERNAL

075

087

PROG

ERROR

(G31~G35)

TOUCH SWITCH NOTON WHEN MOTION REACHES END POINT BY SKIP OR TOOL SET ERROR COMPENSATION COMMANDS

076

088

077

RS232C

ERROR

(OVER-RUN)

089 BEEN READ IN TRANSMITTED

PROG

ERROR

(G90/G92/G94) IN

10 CHARACTERS MORE HAVE AFTER STOP CODE HAS BEEN THROUGH RS232C INTERFACE

UNUSABLE ADDRESSES SPECIFIED G90, G92, AND G94 BLOCKS.

078

090 P,Q

PROG

ERROR

{G70.76/G72.78) IN G70,71,72,73 BLOCKS

NOT COMMANDED

079

091

PROG

ERROR

(G70-76/G72-78)
NO. NO SPECIFIED INCLUDING BY P,Q IN G70 IN

BLOCK OF SE OUENCE G70 NOT FOUND PROG

BLOCK

.
080 TOO LSETCMP ERROR G98 092 PROG ERROR (G70-76/G72-78) NO. OF BLOCKS INCLUDING FINISHED SHAPE PROGRAM SPECIFIED BY ~,0 IN G70, G71, G72 AND G73, OVER 46.

TCODE COMMANDED BEFORE G35 BLOCK. COMMANDED IN OR BEFORE G35 BLOCK.

081

TOO LSETCMP

ERROR

093 FOR TOOL SET

PROG

ERROR

(G70-76/G72-78)

ERROR ERROR

OF PARAMETER COMPENSATION

SETTING (X)

UNABLE G-AND M-CODE IN FINISHED SHAPE PROGRAM SPECIFIED BY P,Q IN G70, G71, G72, AND G73.

082

TOOL

SET CMP

ERROR

094 FOR TOOL SET

PROG

ERROR

IG70-76/G72-78)

ERROR ERROR

OF PARAMETER COMPENSATION

SETTING (Z).

BEVELING AND ROUNDING CO MM AN DS AS LAST MOVE COMMAND FOR FINISHED SHAPE PROGRAM SPECIFIED BY P,O IN G70, G71, G72, AND G73. 095

083

TOOL

WEAR

CMP

ERROR

PROG

ERROR

!G70-76/G72-78)

COMPENSATION AT TOOL WEAR TOOL

NO. EXCEPTO1 COMPENSATION CMP ERROR

TO 19 DESIGNATE

FAULTS IN FINISHED SHAPE PROGRAM SPECIFIED BY P, Q IN G71, G72 G29 COMMANDED IN FINISHING SHAPE PROGRAM SPECIFIED BY P ANDQ IN G70, G71, G72, AND G73. 096 PROG ERROR (G70-761G72-78)

084

WEAR

TOOL WEAR COMPENSATION GIVE N SIMULTANEOUSLY

INPUTS

WOM,

WOP

D (CUTTING FREQUENCY I SPECIFIED BY G73ZER0 OR 1280R MORE, 1, K I ROUGH CUT TIN GjSPECl FIED BY G73 BOTH ZFRO D, K OF G76 EXCEEDING PROGRAMMABLE RANGE.

Code 097 PROG ERROR

Causes (G70-761G72-78)

Code 109 MACRO ERROR

Causes (# NO. NOT LEFT) DESIGNATED AS

FOUR OR MORE PROCESSING INTERRUPTIONS BY FINISHED SHAPE PROGRAM IN STOCK REMOVAL CYCLE BY G71 RI, OR G72 RI.

PRO HIBITED VA RI ABLE SUBSTITUTION.

098

PROG

ERROR

(G70-76/G72-78) Q NONREGISTERED
r

110

MACRO

ERROR

( [

1 5 LIMIT)

DATA SPECIFIED INTERNAL KEEP

BY G70P, MEMORY.

MULTIPLE LAYERS EXCEED DING THE

OF PARENTHESES UPPER LIMITS(5).

099

PROG

ERROR

(G70-761G72-78) G76 NO-

111

MACRO

ERROR

(MOVE

G66-M99) COMMAND OF

UNUSABLE ADDRESSES SPECIFIED IN G70T0 BLOCKS. ADDRESS REQUIRED IN THE BLOCK SPECIFIED.

MOVE COMMAND MACRO CALLED

IN M99 FINISHING BY G66.

100

CAL

ERROR

(FIXED

POINT) POINT DATA EXCEEDING

112

MACRO

ERROR OF MACRO CALL EXCEEDING

MAGNITUDE OF FIXED UPPER LIMIT.

MULTIPLE LEVELS THE UPPER LIMIT4.

101

CA LERROR

(FLOATING) POINT DATA RANGE.

113

EXPONENT EXCEEDING

OF FLOATING ALLOWABLE

102

CAL

ERROR

(DIVISION) ZERO OR OVERFLOW

114 DO

MACRO

ERROR

(DO-FORMAT) TO EN D.

~;~~{LATION

DIVISOR

NOT CORRESPONDING

103

CAL

ERROR

(SQUARE

ROOT) .-

115

MACRO FORMAT

ERROR IN

( [

UN MATCH)

ROOT VALUE

IS A NEGATIVE

ERROR

<EQUATION>

104

PROG

ERROR

(DOUBLE

ADR) INA

116

MACRO

ERROR

(DO END

NO. )

CHARACTER WHICH CANNOT BE REPEATED BLOCK COMMAND IN REPETITION.

ml ND OmOUTOFRANGEl~m<3

105

MACRO

ERROR

(CONSTANT) THE LIMIT

117

CONSTANT

EXCEEDING

106

MACRO

ERROR FOR CA NC ELLING G67

118

MACRO

ERROR

(GO TO N)

TOO MANY

CODES

In GO

TO

nO<

n9999

APPROPRIATE

SEQUENCE

NO. NOT FOUND.

107

MACRO

ERROR

(FORMAT)

119

AS AFTER

READ

SUB PRO G/MACRO OF

ERROR

IN

THE

FORMAT

EXCEPT

FOR

EQUATION.

ADDRESS SEARCHED DURING EXECUTION SUBPROGRAM OR MACRO PROGRAM.

108

MACRO UNDEFINED

ERROR VARIABLE

(U ND EFIN

#NO.)

120

PRTN

ERROR

(NOT

FOUND) NOT FOUND IN PART

NO. DESIGNATED.

SEQUENCE PROGRAM.

NO. SEARCHED

APPENDIX 5 LIST OF ALARM CODES


Code 121 PRTN ERROR Causes (G50/G92) DURING PROGRAM RESTART, Code

(Centd)
Causes

G31 COMMANDED

122

134

NO PROG NOT FOUND EXTERNAL

(EXTI BY

PROGRAM NO, SPECIFIED NO. SEARCH.

123

135

EXT

DATA BY EXTERNAL DATA

ERR OR IN DA TA GIVEN INPUT

124

PRTN

ERROR

[MD I MOVE) PROGRAM

136

AXIS OPERATED BY MD I AFTER RESTART PREPARATION.

125

137

126

138

127

139

128

140

PROG

ERROR

(Gill/Gll2)

ERROR BLOCK.

IN

ADDRESS

WORD

COMMANDING

OF

Gill

129

141

PROG

ERROR

(Gill/Gl12) A, B BY Gll

ANGLE FOR ANGLE PROGRAMMING OUT OF RANGE -360G A, B s360.

130 DATA

EXT

DATA IN A GROUP DATA.

142

PROG

ERROR

(G1111G112)

ERROR

lST BEVELING PORTION OUTSIDE RECTANGLE CO MPOSEDBY START AND END POINTS OR BETWEEN 45 STRAIGHT LINES OF START TO END POINTS AND END TO START POINTS. 243 ERROR FROG ERROR IN Gill :G1ll; G112) BLOCK

131

COMMAND

132

1u

PROG M, ST

ERROR

(Glll~Gl12) IN Gill, G112 BLOCK

COMMAND

A-40

Code 145 PROG ERROR

Causes (Gill/Gl12)

Code 157 PROG ERROR

Causes (G122/Gl23)

ERROR IN CO MM AN DIN G ADDRESS G112 BLOCK. 146 PROG ERROR (Gill/Gl12)

WORD

FOR

THE

TOOL

EXCHANGE

REQUEST

OUTPUT

IS ON.

158

PROG

ERROR

(G122/G123)

ERROR IN COMMANDING FOR ME DBYG112 BLOCK.


147

PROGRAMMED

SHAPE

THERE ARE TOOL NOS. THAT ARE MORE THAN 31 WITH REGISTERED TOO LS. WJ,THIN TOOL GROUP NOS. INSTRUCTED BY . . . ..OF WORK PIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM SETTING (G 50 T:::::; 90). 159 PROG ERROR (G1221G123;

MORE THAN 6 TYPES OF COMPENSATION MEMORY NOS. ARE REGISTERED WITH 148 170 MEM ERROR (OFS)

ONE TOOL.

TOOL 149 171

COMPENSATION

TOTAL

CHECK

ERROR

150

PROG ERROR (G122/Gl23) G 122 AND G 123 CO MM AN D BLOCKS ARE NOT INDEPENDENT COMMANDS. THE SAME TOOL IS REGISTERED WITH MORE THAN TWO GROLJPS. THE SAME OFFSET MEMORY NO. IS USED WITH MORE THAN TWO TOOLS. ADDRESSES OTHER P, AND TARE lNSTRUCTE DTOTHErOLL INFORMATION REGISTRATION PROGRAM.

172

MEM

ERROR

(SET)

SETTING
L

AR EA TOTAL

CHECK

ERROR,

151

PROG ERROR (G122/G123) NO DESIGNATION OF GROUP NO. P IS GIVE N,OR VALUE OTHER THAN 1 ~PS191SGl VEN. NO DESIGNATION OF LAS THE LIFE PER TOOL IS GIVE N,OR A VALUE OTHER THAN 1SLS99991S GIVEN.

173 A

MEM

ERROR

(PRM)

PARAMETER

AREA

TOTAL

CHECK

ERROR.

152

PROG ERROR [G122/G123) A VALUE OTHER THAN l< TOOL NO. S501S INSTRUCTED AS THE TOOL NO. A VALUE OTHER THAN 1 S COMPENSATION MEMORY NO. <501S IN ST RUCTED AS THE COMPENSATION MEMORY NO. VALUES OTHER OOR MORE THAN 20 ARE INSTRUCTED AS:::; (GROUP NO. ) COMMANDS OF T L;[u90T0T[:cj95 AND T[I[:99 COMMANDS.

174

ME ME RR OR (KEEP)

KEEP

ME MO RY TOTAL

CHECK

ERROR.

175 MEM ERROR (M ACR)

153

PROG

ERROR

(G122/G123) SAME GROUP

THE TOOL INFORMATION OF THE NO. IS REGISTERED TWICE.

MACRO

TOTAL

CHECK

ERROR

154

PROG

ERROR

(G122/G123)

176

MORE THAN 16 TYPES OF TOOL NO. + COMPENSATION MEMORY NO. ARE ATTEMPTED TO BE REGISTERED WI TH ONE GROUP NO.

155 PROG ERROR (G122/G123) TOOLS OF THE DESIGNATED GROUP NO. ARE NOT REGISTERED, T:::::: 92, T:::::: 93, T[::[::94 AND T;::[::95 ARE INSTRUCTED, BUT THE CORRESPONDING COMPENSATION MEMORY NOS. ARE NOT REGISTERED. 156 PROG ERROR fG122/G123) THE CO MMAND FOR TOO L- LIFE MANAGEMENT IS ISSUSED WITH EQUIPMENT THAT DID NOT HAVE THE ADDED FUNCTIONS OF T4DIGIT DESIGNATION AND OFFSET MEMORY ADDITION,

177

178

TOOL

NO. SET ERROR

TOOL NO. INPUT SIGNALS #1317 (D4T0 (D4TOD6) ARE MORE THAN 51.

D7) #1342

A41

APPENDIX 5 LIST OF ALARM CODES


Code 179 PANEL OVER TEMP TEMPERATURE TOO HIGH. Causes Code 191

(Centd)
Causes

HDLCSOFT

CO MM AND

ERROR

INSIDE

NC SIDE RECEIVED 5ATA TRANSMISSION PROTOCOL NC.

OTHER THAN BETWEEN AC GC AND

180

SEQ ERROR

192

HDLC8530 SEND

ERROR HARDWARE

SEQUENCE 181

ERROR(1)

TRANSMISSION ERROR.

NC SEND-SIDE

193

HDLC8530

ERROR NC RECEIVE-SIDE HARDWARE

TRANSMISSION ERROR,

182

194 SAME FROM

HDLC

NAK

ERROR

110 TIMES)

DATA IS SENT 10 TIMES IN TRANSMISSION NC TO ACGC WITHOUT SUCCESS

183

195

HDLC

CMOS

FILE

ERROR REQUEST FROM ACGC

CMOS FILE READ OR WRITE TO NC IS NOT EXECUTED,

.
184 196 HDLC 1/0 DATA ERROR READING FROM ACGCTO NC

SYSTEM VARIABLE IS NOT EXECUTED.

.
185 197 HDLCNC REQUEST ERROR

OPERATION REQUEST NC IS WRONG.

COMMAND

FROM

ACGCTO

186

198

HDLC DATA MORE

OPERATION

ERROR

TRANSFER FROM ACGCTO NC IS DELAYED THAN 1 MINUTE DURING AC GC OPERATION.

187

199

AM GCCOMMUN

ICATION

SYSTEM

ERROR

COMMUNICATION .,,IU L

ERROR

BETWEEN

AM GC AND

188

200

ACGC2

COMMUNICATION ERROR

SYSTEM

ERROR

COMMUNICATION AND NC.

BETWEEN

AC GC120

I 89

201

OT (x)

OVER TRAVEL

X.

190

HDLC

SYSTEM

SO=T

ERROR ERROR

202

OT (Z)

TRANSMISSION

SYS7EM

SO FTWARE

OVER TRAVEL

Z.

Code 203

Causes

I Code 215

Causes

204

216

205

217

206

218

207

I
I

219

208

220

S-0T2

(INSIDE) L.IMIT SECOND AREA

STORE DSTROKE (INSIDE 209 INHIBIT). (X)

221

S-0T2 STORED (OUTSIDE

I
210

STROKE INHIBIT)

LIMIT X.

SECOND

AREA

I
S-OT1 (X) STORE DSTROKE LIMIT FIR ST AR EAX.

222

S-0 T2(Z) STORED (OUTSIDE STROKE INHIBIT) (INSIDE) LIMIT THIRD AREA LIMIT Z. SECOND AREA

211

I
LIMIT FIR ST AREAZ

223

S-0T3 STORED (OUTSIDE

STROKE INHIBIT). (X)

212

S-OT1 (Z) STORED STROKE

224

S-0T3

STORE DSTROKE (OUTSIDE INHIBIT) (Z)

LIMIT X.

THIRD

AREA

213

225

S-0T3

STORE DSTROKE (OUTSIDE 214 226 INHIBIT)

1.IMIT Z.

THIRD

AREA

APPENDIX 5 LIST OF ALARM CODES


Code 227 Causes Code 239

(Confd)
Causes

-.
228 240

229

2LI

ZR ERR OR-POS

:X;

REFERENCE 230 242

POINT

RETURN

POSITION

ERROR

X.

ZR ERR OR-POS

!2)

REFERENCE

POINT

RETURN

POSITION

ERROR

231

ZR ERROR-AREA REFERENCE POINT

(X) RETURN AREA ERROR X.

243

232

ZR ERROR-AREA REFERENCE POINT

(Z) RETURN AREA ERRORZ.

244

233

245

.
234 246

235

247

236

248

-
231 249

238

270

Code 271 P-SET P SET ERROR ERROR X. (X)

Causes

Code -. 283

Causes

272 P-SET

P-SET ERROR

ERROR Z

(Z) I

284

273 T

285

274

286

275 287

276

288

277 289

+ 278 310 SERVO SE RVO OFF POWER NOT SUPPLIED

279

311

280 MATCH

MACH RDY

UNREADY OFF.

312

281

313

282

314

APPENDIX 5 LIST OF ALARM CODES


Code 315 Causes Code 327

(C@d)
Causes

UN FIN IS HE DPROGGEN MEMORY PROGRAM ERASED. GENERATION SPECIFIED IS NOT PERFORMED BY 0,,9,9,9,9 MUST

BE

316

328

UNSUITABLE

MM21

MEMORY BOARD WHEN PROGRAM AREA GENERATION IS MADE DOES NOT MATCH CUR RENT MEMORY BOARD. 317

THE

329

PC CPU

ERROR

PC AN DCPU ERROR, (SET #6014 D7TO0 FOR RELEASE)

318

330

EMERGENCY EMERGENCY STOP.

STOP

319

331 FUSE

FUSE BLOWN

(X) X.

320

NC UNREADY NC UNREADY PSET UNREADY

332
FUSE

FUSE(Z) BLOWN Z

321 333

322

CMOS VACANT AREA ERROR DA TA OTHER THAN O ARE WRITTEN IN THE C-MOSMEMOR YAREAOTHER THAN THE PARAMETER, OFFSET, KEEP MEMORY, COMMON VA RI ABLE, OR PROGRAM. AC GC2 SYNC ERROR

334

323

335

SYNC HRONOUS ERROR SIDE CPU. (S ET#6014D5

OF AC GC120 CPU ANDNC TOO FOR RELEASE)

324

AM GC SYNC

ERROR

336

SYNCHRONOUS ERROR SIDE CPU. (S ET4601~D5

OF AM GC CPU AND TOO FOR RELEASE)

NC

325

SE RVO CPU ERROR

337

SYNCHRONOUS DATA CPU.

(SET

ERROR OF SERVO #6014 D6TO0 FOR

CPU AND RELEASE)

326

AC GC120/AMGC

SERVO

OFF

REQ

338

THE REWASASE THE ACGC 1200R

RVO-OFF AIMGC.

REQUEST

FROM

Code

Causes

Code 351 OL (X) OVERLOAD (1) X.

Causes

339

340

352

OL (Z) OVERLOAD.

341 SERVO

SERVO ERROR

ERROR X.

(X)

353

342 SERVO

SERVO ERROR

ERROR Z

(Z)

354

343

355

344

356

345

35?

OL (OTHER) OVERLOAD (2)

346

358

347

359

348

360

349

361

PG ERROR PG ERROR X.

(X)

350

362

PG ERROR PGERRORZ.

(Z)

A47

APPENDIX 5 LIST OF ALARM CODES


Code 363 Causes Code 375

(Centd)
Causes

.
364 376

365

377

366

PG ERROR PG ERRORS,

(S)

378

367

379

368

380

369

381 AXIS

AX IS ERR OR(l ERROR(1)

370

382 AXIS

AXIS ERROR

ERROR (2)

(2J

371

FG ERROR(l) FGERROR1.

383
AXIS

AXIS ERROR

ERROR (3).

(3)

372

FG UNREADY FG UNREADY.

384

373

385

374

386

Code 387

Causes

Code 399

Causes

I I
388 400 SEQ ERROR SEQUENCE ERROR (2)

389

401

390 SERVO

SERVO PACK

PACK

ALARM

(S)

ALARMS.

I
I

402

391 SERVO

SERVO PACK

PACK

ALARM

(X)

403

AL ARMX.

I
(Z) T Z 405

392 SERVO

SERVO PACK

PACK ALARM

ALARM

393

394

395

407

396

408

397

409

398

810

APPENDIX 5 LIST OF ALARM CODES


Code 811 Causes Code

(Centd)
Causes

823

.
812 824

813

825

814

826

815

827

816

828

817 829

.818

-
830 CPU CPU ERROR ERROR (1). - 831

819

820 ROM ERROR ROM CHECK ERROR 821 833

832

.
822 834

.-

A50

Code

Causes

Code 847

Causes

835

836

848

837

849

838

910

TAPE-MEM

ERROR ERROR

ME MO RY VERIFYING

(OFF-LINE).

839

920
TAPE

TAPE

ERROR ERROR (OFF-LINE)

READING-IN

840

CPU ERROR CPU ERROR (2).

ALARM

095 G 71 command cutfor finished shape

841

X-coordinates diffemt between ting start point and last block program. Z-coordinates different cutting start point and shape program. Z-coordinate for cutting

between G 72 command last block for finished

842

start

point

by

G71

com-

843

mand different from Z-coordinate for block of the finished shape program. G71 . . . R1 is excepted. ) X-coordinate for cutting start point by

the first (Command

G7Z

com-

844

mand different from Xcoordinate for block of the finished shape program. ) G72 . . . R1 is excepted. X-coordinate G71 . . . R1. point. for

the first (Command

finished shape program by Command exceeding cutting start

845

846

A51

APPENDIX 5 LIST OF ALARM CODES


Command specifying as follows, formed.

(Centd)

values for addresses B , X(U) , Z(W) second straight line are determined and programmed shape cannot be

Z-coordinate for finished shape exceeding G72 . . . R 1 command point .

program by cutting start

Command value for B 360.OCO, 0, 180.000, 270.000, 90.000, 180.CX)O 360.000 .*... 90.000

Address X (U) commanded fying second straight line. . -__ I Address Z (W) commanded fYln9 second straight line. for _

sp+w-

___

for speci-

270.000

Command values for addresses C and D for beveling too large for the programmed shape. Opera tion cannot be made according to the command .
END aoINT

-.

ALA:RM

140
\

1 L ::;; one or no specifying address second of addresses straight line. B, w Command values for address P and Q specifying radius for rounding too large for the program med shape. Operation cannot be made according to the command.

. Commanding X(U) , Z(W)

. Commanding two addresses of addresses B, X(U) , Z (W) specifying second straight line. In addition to this, one or no address commanded among addresses A, 1, K , specifying first straight line. Address C specifying first beveling and address P specifying first rounding commanded.

---1/ > /

-1 ! &START
POINT

Address D specifying dress Q specifying

second beveling and adsecond rounding commanded. X and Z specifying Q and D specifying secsecond No intersecting second straight

. Commanding addresses ond straight line and beveling and rounding. ALARM 143

point line.

for

first

straighi

line

and

Command values for addresses A, 1, K specifying first straight line are determined as follows, and programmed shape cannot be formed. First straight the same line. line and

?-ART T \

second

straight line on

Command Value for A --380.000, C, 180.000, --270.003, 90.000, 180.000, 360.000 90.COO,

Address I commanded ifying first straight line. Address K commanded for spec~--ifying first straight line. for spec-

270.CKJO

A.-52

ALARM . X(U) . X(U) R not

145 or and Z(W) Z (W) not commanded. commanded. Or 0 commanded for R.

No intersecting straight line.

point

between

circular

arc

and

both

commanded.

. I and K not commanded. Ito!l commanded for I and . P and Q and C both D both commanded. commanded.

K.

m
K R .----

CENTER OF CIRCULAR ARC

I START POINT

No intersecting end point.

point

between

circular

arc

and

ALARM Beveling

146 for command C cannot be made.

Beveling

for

command

D cannot

be

made.

CENTER OF CIRCULAR ARC

&&

sTART

A53

APPENDIX
Table 6.1
Address

6 LIST OF DATA
Address Characters
B: O: Basic Optional

Meaning

Angle designation

for G 01 and G 111, included angle for G 76


k

Spindle shift angle 01 multiple thread, angle designation

for multiple cornering

User macro character

Depth of cut and number of cutting cycles for G 71 to G 76

Specifications

for precise feed and precise lead for cutting

Specifications

for normal feed and normal lead for cutting

Preparatcny function

(G-function)

User macro character

0 canned cycle parameter, beveling value (radius value)

X-component

of arc center,

B, O

User macro character

0 canned cycle parameter, beveling value

Z-component

of arc center,

B, O

Incremental

value of variable lead thread

Number of subprogram repetition,

G 13 to G 16 angle and coordinate

Miscellaneous

function

(M-function)

Sequence

number

Program number

Dwell,

canned cycle starting sequence

number, program number, user macro number

Subprogram starting sequence

number, canned cycle ending sequence

number

Radius of arc, rounding value, tool radius value

Spindle function

(S-function),

maximum spindle revolution

Tool funct[on ~-function),

tool coordinate

memory number

X-axis

incremental

command value,

dwell,

canned cycle parameter

User macro character

Z-axis

incremental

command value,

canned cycle parameter

X-axis coordinate

value

User macro character

Z-axis

coordinate

value

A54

Table 6.2

Function Characters

EIA Code

ISO Code

Function

Remarks

Blank

NuL

Error in significant

data area in EIA Disregarded

in ISO

BS

BS

Disregarded

Tab - CR -~

TH

Disregarded .

LFINL

End of Block (EOB) ..

CR =+ E

Disregarded

a==-2-4-5 bitS ( 2-4-7 bits 1 ) - +

Control out (comment start) Control in (comment end)

=--EIA: Special code I

~ Disregarded,

User macro operator

Minus sign, User macro operata

=5r*-~

atoz -L=P=characters
o
I

-------=

-:*;::nt--
DEL Disregarded (Including All Mark) Decimal point # * Sharp (Variable designation) ~ Asterisk (Multiplication operatcx)

Del

I
Parameter starting *

I ~

Equal mark .j Left bracket EIA: Right bracket d Special code

vA~..

1 T J-J

---

-1

-(.

L. --?

L-

l sermacrOop:=-[<,
User macro operator J User macro operator

I -i
I

?
Notes : 1. Characters

other than the above cause error in significant data area. Control Out and Control In is ignored as insignificant recognized. data

2. Information between

3. Tapa code (EIA of ISO) is automatically

A55

APPENDIX
Table 6.3 Tape Code

6 LIST OF DATA (Centd)

Notes : 1. For the hole pettern of EIA code of the characters with an asterisk, the pattern How-

* * *

shown In the table w stand~d. by parameters. 2. EIA code of character

ever, other patterns may be specified

d can be desig-

nated by the parameter ~6017.

* * * *

A!j6

Table

6.4

Tape

Format

Metric Output No. I Address Metric Input Inch Input Metric

Inch Output

_~ ~

B: 0:

Basic Option

Input

Inch Input

Program No.

04

04 ,-

Sequence

No.

N4

N4

G-Function

G3

G3

Coordinate a:

Wcfd (a+ 53)


(a+ 44)

X, Z, 1, K, U, W, R

a+53

a+34

B . .. . . .

Feed/rein

F 50

F 32

F 50

F 42

F 32 6 Feed/rev and Thread Lead E 34

F 24

F 42

F 24 . . E 26

E 26

E 44

S2
7

S2 -~I

B o

S-Function

S4
T(2 8 +1)

S4 ---~ T(2+I)

B +2)

T-Function T(2 +2) T(2

M-Function

M3

M3

10

Dwell

u (P) 53

u (P)
P4

53

11

Program No. Designation

P4

12

Sequence

No.

Designation

(P) 4

Q (P) 4

B, O

13

No. of Repetitions Angle Designation Line Angle Designation Thread for Straight for Multiple

L8

L8

14

A (B) 33

A (B) 33

0
o

?5

B3

B3

Notes : I Inch/Metric output is set by setting parameter S6007 Da, input is set by setting (F6001 Do). or feed/rev can be switched by G 98, G 99

2 Inch/Metric

3 F codes for feed/rein

APPENDIX
Table 6.5

6 LIST OF DATA (Centd)


List of Program Commands Metric Output Inch Output . Inch Input
1-9999

Address

Metric Input
Program No. O

Metric Input
1-9999

Inch Input

Sequence

No.

1-9999

19999

G function

0-199

0-199

.
Coordinate X, Z, 1, K, Addresst U, W, R .

+ 99999.999

mm.

? 3937.0078in.

-99999

.999 mm.

9999.9999

in

Feedlmin

t 24000

mmlmln

0.01 944.88in.lmin ,

160960

mm/min

0.01 2400

OOin./min

F Feed/rev and Thread Lead E

0.01 500.00

mmlrev

0.0001 19.6850

inhev

0.01 1270.00 mmlrev

0.0001

50.000C

In./rev

0.0001 500.0000 mmlrev

o.ooom419.685030 in.lrev

0.00031270. OCCIO mmlrev

0.00001050000300 in. /rev

S2 S-function S4

o-99

o-99

0-9999

0-9999

T3 T-function T4

0-999

0 999

0-9999

0-9999

M-function

0-999 0.001-99999.899 Sec

0-999 0.001 99999.999 sec

Dwell U, P

Program No. Designation

1-9999

1- 999!3

Sequence

No. Designation

1-9999 .L

1-9999

No

of Repetitions for Straight Line

1-99999999

1-99999999

Angle Designation

O-? 360.COO0

O- i360.COO

Angle Designation

for Multiple Thread

0-360

0360

*For angle designation

of Included angle for G 76, see

.28.26.2

Automatic

Threading

Cycle

(G 76).

Table
I

6.6

Data Setting Range


Input output (screw)

Metric output (screw) Metric input Inch irmut ~ 0.0001 or 0,001 in.

Item

Least input increment Tool offset __i. Tcol radius Minimum stepfhandle feed Program designation Parameter & settina

I ~..

0.001 or O.Cllmm -- -2388:6?_mrn_ O * 99.999 0.001 mm 0.001 mm mm

~0-*i30,2601in. ---

. in.

w O-~ 99.999 mm OL9.9999 in.

O*9.9999 0.0001 in 0.0001 in.

0.001

mm

0.0001 in. 0.0001 in. 0.0001 in.

Stwed stroke limit area designation unit

:.

0.001 mm ---+.

0.001 mm

Rapid traverse Manual jog FO 2nd reference value Backlash

rate Upper limit value 24 mlmin 2400 inches/min

point coordinate

O ~99999.999 O255

mm

compensation

value

pulses (Note 1)

k-I

G9999.9999

in.

O255pulses

Notes:

1. l-pulse 2. X-axis

= least input increment designated with diameter (except for pulse display)

APPENDIX
Table Special GC odeI Special GCodeIl

6 LIST OF DATA (Centd)


B: 6.7 List of G Codes O: Basic Optional

G Code

Group Positioning (rapid traverse feed)

Function

Section B B, O B, o

f
G02 G03 G04 GCEl G 10 . ..1..:. Gll G 12 G 20 G21 G 22 --. --,~G 23 G 27 G 28 --G1---f-FB-I I ~ ; ~

_
G 02 + G 03 G04 G06~GW5 GtO Gil G 12 G 20 G21 G 22 G 23 G27 G28 Gw .-.-.. . ~ ~ --+ +.:% G 10 Gll G12 G 70 I G 02 G03 G@l

Linear interpolation,

angle programming for Iinear interpolation

-~
~

01 Circular interpolation CW, (radius R designation) Circular interpolation CCW, Dwell *

~
ERROR DETECT Tool offset value setup ~ Beveling

OFF positioning

--; .. . .(radius R designation) Cofnering CW

B, O B B

o 0 0

01 ~Roun~g Inch input s~ification 05 I Metric input specification

0 0

G71 G 22 01 G 23 G 27 G 28 * .

Radius programming for circular interpolation

0 0 B

Radius programming for circular interpolation CCW Reference point return check

t
Automatic return to reference point i----~ Return from refefence point ~ Retunrn to 2nd reference point B ---B o 0 continuous threadcuting, multi-start threadcutitng B, O 0

~ G30 G31

-+------G31

G31

Skip function 4 -Threadcutting j 01 ~

-G:--* + :: G 37 G38 G39 - ~ 1 G 37 G38 G 39 ::-i

; t

::

Variable

lead threadcutting

* :: ~ 07
==

Tool set error compensation Stcred stroke limit 2nd area ON

0 0 0 0 0 0
L

G 37 - G% 08 G 39

Stofed stioke limit 2nd area OFF -- Stored stroke limit 3rd area ON ~ Stored stroke limit 3rd aea OFF cancel No. 1 No. 2 No. 3

t
Tool radius compensation
!

G41 -&G 42 G43 G44

G41 G 42

G41 1 G42 I

Tool radius compensation 06

0 0

Tool radius compsmsation Tool radius compensation

-:;

[::-
Tool radius compensation No. 4
4 5.

0 0

Notes : 1. G codes in groups from 01 through 11 are modal. When the control
the G codes is energized marked with with

G codes m section B are bas(c Standard G codes can be converted to special G codes I by parameters. (basic feature)
be the be selected standard as optional G codes and funcspecial

are

the

power

switch

or reset, selected.

automatically

For G 00/G 01, G 98/G selected 2.

99, and G 90/G

91, either one is

as init ial state by setting parameters. They should not be

6.

Special
tion. G code

G code 11can
selected, [1 cannot

When

G codes of* group are non-modal. commanded

used.

tcgether with the other G codes in one block


G codes can be commanded mixedly in a

7.

The initial states of G codes of 05, 07, 08 group when the control is powered correspond to their respective setting data.

3.

The block.

modal

B:
Table 6.7 List of G Codes (Centd) O:

Basic Optional

G Code

I
I

Special I

Special GCcde II

GCcde

Group

~ Coordinate system setup

Function

Section

G 50

G 92

G 92

* +i

Maximum spindle revolution setup, work coordinate

system setup

G65

G65

* G65
09

Return of current display value to origin

-o +- o 0 o o .- .. -~ - - - o . . o o Multiple repetitive cycles o

~ User macro simple call User macro modal call ~User macro modal call cancel }---~ Mirror image by programming ON Mirror image by programming OFF -Finishing cycle Stock removal in turning Stock removal in facing I

*-G 70 G71 G72 G 73 G74 G 75 G76 G90 G92 G-b I I ~ I I -L~ ~ ~ ~ -E79 G 70 G71 G 72 G 73 G 74 -G 75 G76 G 77 G 78

r:-:
G 72 G 73 G 74 G 75 G 76 G 77 G 78 G 20 G21 G24 ~ ---

10

-+k..

L 1

Pattern repeating Pack drilling in Z-axis

Automabc o~---

threadcuttlng

cycle

+--B B B ~ o

Turning cycle A 01 I Threading cycle ~ Facing cycle B [ Constant surface speed control 02 ~ Constant surface speed control cancel ~ had 04 Feed per revolution (mmlrev) Absolute command 03 par minute (mmlmin) ~

B B B o o

~
G122 G123 G ~ ~ G122 G123 G i ~ G122

Incremental

command

Tool registration start

11
G123 G 111

Tool life control l~JregisatiOn nd Taper multiple bevelinglrounding f Arc multiple bevelinglrounding

111 ~

111

o o 10 0

a=il~

%+%Notes :

13

Cancel

groove

width compensation

.roovewdthcompensa~on

1. G

codes in groups from 01 through 11 are modal. When with the power switch or reset, r are automatically selected.

4. 5.

G codes in section B are basic. Standard G codes can be converted to special G codes I by parameters. (basic feature) as optional func-

the control is energized

the G codes marked with For G 00/G selected 2.

01, G 98/G 99, and G 90/G

91, either one is

6.

Special G code II can be selected tion. When selected, G code u cannot be used.

as init ial state by setting parameters. They should not be ~,

the standard G codes and special

G codes of* group are non-modal. commanded

together with the other G codes in one block. mixedly in a

The initial states of G codes of 05, 07, 08 group when the control is powered correspond to their respective setting data.

3.

The modal G codes can be commanded block.

A61

YASNAC LX3
CNC SYSTEM FOR TURNING APPLICATIONS
TOKYO OFFICE Ohtemachl Bldg. 1-6-1 Ohternachl Ch!yoda-ku Tokvo, 100 Japan Phone (03) 3284-9111, -9145 Telex YASKAWA J33530 Fax (03) 3284-9034 SEOUL OFFICE Seoul Center Bldg, 91-1 So Kong-Dong, Chung-ku, Seoul, Korea
Phone (02) 776-7844 Fax (02) 753-2639 TAIPEI OFFICE Union Commercial Bldg. 14F 137, Nanklng East Road, Sec 2, Ta!pel Phone (02) 507-7065, -7732 Fax (02) 506-3837 YASKAWA ELECTRIC AMERICA, INC. : SUBSIDIARY Chicago-Technical Center 3160 MacArthur Blvd Northbrook, Ill[nols 60062-1917 U SA Phone (708) 291-0411 Fax (708) 291-1028 Los Angeles Off]ce 7341 Lincoln Way, Garden Grove, California 92641 U S A Phone (714) 894-5911 Telex (230) 678396 YASKAWAUS TSTN Fax (714) 894-3258 New Je~sey Office 30 Two B~ldg& Road Falrfleld New Jersey 07006 u S A Phone (201) 575-5940 Fax (201) 575-5947 YASKAWA ELECTRIC EUROPE GmbH : SUBSIDIARY Monscnauerstrasse 1 W 4000 Dusseldorf 11, Germany Phone (0211) 950030 Telex (41) 8588673 YASD D Fax [0211) 507737 YASKAWA ELECTRIC (SINGAPORE) PTE. LTD. Taiwan

...

CPF Bldg 79 Robinson Road No i3-05 Singapore 0106 phone 2217530 Telex 187) 24890 YASKAWA RS Fax (65) 224-5854

Y
YASUAWA

YASKAWA

ELECTRIC

CORPORATION

TOE-C843-9.20D @
Printed in Japan January 199386.5 586-176

lTA @

Você também pode gostar